Nastran Pastran


Patran 2018
Interface To MSC Nastran

Preference Guide
Volume 1: Structural Analysis
Corporate Europe, Middle East, Africa
MSC Software Corporation MSC Software GmbH
4675 MacArthur Court, Suite 900 Am Moosfeld 13
Newport Beach, CA 92660 81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (714) 540-8900 Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Toll Free Number: 1 855 672 7638 Email: europe@mscsoftware.com
Email: americas.contact@mscsoftware.com
Japan Asia-Pacific
MSC Software Japan Ltd. MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F 100 Beach Road
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku #16-05 Shaw Tower
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Singapore 189702
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200 Email: APAC.Contact@mscsoftware.com
Email: MSCJ.Market@mscsoftware.com
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Support
http://www.mscsoftware.com/Contents/Services/Technical-Support/Contact-Technical-Support.aspx
Disclaimer
This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the
terms of such license.
MSC Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended
to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC Software Corporation assumes no liability or
responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright 2018 MSC Software Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC Software Corporation is prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC Software suppliers.
Additional terms and conditions and/or notices may apply for certain third party software. Such additional third party software terms
and conditions and/or notices may be set forth in documentation and/or at http://www.mscsoftware.com/thirdpartysoftware (or successor
website designated by MSC from time to time).
The MSC Software Logo, MSC, MSC Nastran, Marc, Patran, Dytran, and Laminate Modeler are trademarks or registered trademarks
of MSC Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is a
trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of Livermore Software
Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ACIS is a
registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc. ABAQUS, and CATIA are registered trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA. FLEXlm
and FlexNet Publisher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Flexera Software. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe
Systems, Inc. PTC and Pro/ENGINEER are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries. Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of Siemens
Product Lifecycle Management, Inc. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective owners.
P3:V2018:Z:INT-NA:Z:DC-USR-PDF
Main Index
Documentation Feedback
At MSC Software, we strive to produce the highest quality documentation and welcome your feedback. If you have
comments or suggestions about our documentation, please write to us at documentation-feedback@mscsoftware.com.
Please include the following information with your feedback:
 Document name
 Release/Version number
 Chapter/Section name
 Topic title (for Online Help)
 Brief description of the content (for example, incomplete/incorrect information, grammatical errors, information
that requires clarification or more details and so on.)
 Your suggestions for correcting/improving documentation
You may also provide your feedback about MSC Software documentation by taking a short 5-minute survey at: http://msc-
documentation.questionpro.com.
Note: The above mentioned e-mail address is only for providing documentation specific feedback. If you have
any technical problems, issues, or queries, please contact the Technical Support team at:
http://www.mscsoftware.com/support/technical-support-programs-and-offerings.
Main Index
Main Index
Contents
Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide
Contents
1 Overview
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MSC Nastran Product Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Building A Model
Introduction to Building a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Currently Supported MSC Nastran Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400/600). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC Nastran Preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Coordinate Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Finite Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Multi-point Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Material Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Materials Application Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Material Input Properties Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Material Constitutive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Element Properties Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
0D Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3DBeam Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cross Section Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cross Section Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cross Section End Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Main Index
vi Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide
Stiffened Cylinder Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Loads and Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Loads & Boundary Conditions Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Object Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Defining Contact Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Rotor Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Rotor Dynamics Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Spin Profile Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Spin History Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Unbalance Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Unbalance Properties Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
3 Running an Analysis
Review of the Analysis Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Analysis Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Translation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
External Superelement Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Numbering Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Select File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Solution Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Direct Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Solution Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Linear Static. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Nonlinear Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Normal Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Buckling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Complex Eigenvalue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Transient Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Nonlinear Transient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Implicit Nonlinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
DDAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Explicit Nonlinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
ADAMS Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Select Superelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Subcases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Deleting Subcases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Editing Subcases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Main Index
Contents vii
Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Linear Static Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Arc-Length Method Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Transient Response Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Frequency Response Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Solvers/Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
DDAM Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Output Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Basic Output Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Advanced Output Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Edit Output Requests Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Default Output Request Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
................................................................................ 467
SOL 600 Output Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
DDAM Output Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Select Explicit MPCs... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Non-Structural Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Select NSM Properties.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Subcase Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Select Steps for New Subcases (Step Creation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Define Fatigue Load Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Restart Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Toptomize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Interactive Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Analysis Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Select Modal Results .DBALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Loading Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Create a Field Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Output Selection Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Define Frequencies Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Main Index
viii Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide
4 Read Results
Accessing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Results File Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Translation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Supported 3dplot Results Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Supported HDF5 Result Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
5 Read Input File

Review of Read Input File Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Read Input File Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Entity Selection Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Define Offsets Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Selection of Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Summary Data Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Reject Card Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Grids and SPOINTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Elements and Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
MPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Load Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Fatigue Related Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Conflict Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
6 Delete
Review of Delete Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Deleting an MSC Nastran Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
7 Files
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Main Index
Contents ix
8 Errors/Warnings
Errors/Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
A Preference Configuration and Implementation

Software Components in Patran MSC Nastran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Patran MSC Nastran Preference Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Configuring the Patran MSC Nastran Execute File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
625
Main Index
x Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide
Main Index
Chapter 1: Overview
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User’s GuidePatran Interface to MSC Nastran
Preference Guide
1 Overview

Purpose 2

MSC Nastran Product Information 3
Main Index
2 Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide
Purpose
Purpose
Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC Software Corporation. The core of
the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several optional products are available including;
advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled solvers, and interfaces to third party solvers.
The amount of information that needs to be conveyed in the MSC Nastran Input file for an analysis is
extensive for even a modest size model. The amount of information and the complexity of most models
makes it virtually impossible to generate the MSC Nastran Input file with a text editor alone. Patran provides
a graphical user interface, an extensive line of model building tools that you can use to construct and view
your model.
The Patran MSC Nastran interface provides a communication link between Patran and MSC Nastran. It also
provides for the customization of certain features in Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the
Patran system.
MSC Nastran is a powerful tool to provide solutions for static and dynamic structural, acoustics, and heat
transfer analysis. Structural analysis may be linear or nonlinear and dynamic systems may be solved using
either modal based methods or direct transient implicit or explicit formulations.
The MSC Nastran Preference guide is divided into three volumes loosely based upon the type of physics and
the MSC Nastran solution sequences.
This manual is focused on classic structural solution sequences and explicit dynamics (SOL 700). The second
volume is focused on heat transfer (SOL 101, SOL 153 and SOL 159), and the third volume is focused on
implicit nonlinear analysis (SOL 400). Note that SOL 400 can be used for linear structural, analysis, heat
transfer and thermal-mechanically couple analysis as well. Please refer to the correct MSC Nastran preference
volume.
When invoking Patran you control the interface and the Solution Sequence by choosing the preference. The
choice of preferences include:
 MSC Nastran Structure
 MSC Nastran Thermal
 MSC Nastran Aeroelasticity
 MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400)
 MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
Selecting MSC Nastran as the analysis code preference in Patran, activates the customization process. These
customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated for the Patran MSC Nastran interface.
Specifically, the Patran forms in these main areas are modified:
 Materials
 Element Properties
 Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing
 Loads and Boundary Conditions
 Analysis Forms
More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and Implementation (App. A).
Main Index
Chapter 1: Overview 3
MSC Nastran Product Information

MSC Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It is developed,
supported, and maintained by MSC Software Corporation, 4675 MacArthur Ct, Newport Beach, CA.
92660, (714) 540-8900. See the MSC Nastran Reference Manual, for a general description of MSC Nastran’s
capabilities.
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 2: Building A Model
Preference Guide
2 Building A Model

Introduction to Building a Model 6
 Currently Supported MSC Nastran Input Options 8

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC Nastran Preference 19

Coordinate Frames 23
 Finite Elements 23

Material Library 61

Element Properties 97
 3DBeam Modeling 200

Loads and Boundary Conditions 210

Load Cases 242
 Defining Contact Regions 242
 Rotor Dynamics 246
Main Index
Introduction to Building a Model

There are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several cases, the forms used to create
the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and analysis type. Other parts of the model
are created using standard forms.
The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the analysis code
(e.g., MSC Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural).
The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is especially useful if the model is
to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as possible will be converted if the
analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun. The analysis option defines what will be
presented to the user in several areas during the subsequent modeling steps.
Main Index
Chapter 2: Building A Model 7
These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point constraints, the applicable loads
and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Type may also affect the allowable
selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis Form (Ch. 2) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Table 2-1
Entry Description
Analysis Code To use the Patran MSC Nastran Application Preference, this should be set
to MSC Nastran.
Analysis Type The currently supported Analysis Type for Patran MSC Nastran are
Structural, Thermal, Implicit Nonlinear, Explicit Nonlinear, and
Aeroelasticity.
Input File Suffix Indicates the file suffix used in creating file names for MSC Nastran input
files.
Output File Suffix Indicates the file suffix used in creating file names for MSC Nastran output
files.
Main Index
Currently Supported MSC Nastran Input Options

The following tables summarize all the various MSC Nastran commands supported by the Patran MSC
Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more information in this manual on how
the commands are supported
Table 2-2 Supported File Management Commands

Entry Description
ASSIGN An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user
specified MSC Nastran results suffix) to the MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 file
to be created during the analysis.
Table 2-3 Supported Executive Control Commands

Entry Pages
ECHO Solution Parameters, 276
SOL Solution Types, 269
TIME Solution Parameters, 276
Table 2-4 Supported Case Control Commands

Entry Pages
ACCELERATION Frequency Response, 303, Transient Response, 306
ACFPMRESULTS Advanced Output Requests, 451
ACPOWER Advanced Output Requests, 451
ADACT Analysis Definition, 21, Subcase Parameters, 382
ADAPT Element and p-Formulation Properties, 20,
3D - Solid - Homogeneous - P-Formulation, 191
DATAREC Analysis Definition, 21
DISPLACEMENT Advanced Output Requests, 451
ELSDCON Advanced Output Requests, 451
ESE Advanced Output Requests, 451
FATIGUE Advanced Output Requests, 451
FORCE Advanced Output Requests, 451
FREQUENCY Frequency Response, 303
GPSTRESS Advanced Output Requests, 451
INTENSITY Advanced Output Requests, 451
MAXLINES Solution Parameters, 276
Main Index
Table 2-4 Supported Case Control Commands

Entry Pages
MPCFORCES Advanced Output Requests, 451
OLOAD Advanced Output Requests, 451
SPCFORCES Advanced Output Requests, 451
STRAIN Advanced Output Requests, 451
Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

Entry Pages
ADAPT 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - P-Formulation, 191
BEGIN AFPM 2D - Shell - Field Point Mesh, 161
BEGIN BULK SUPER Select Superelements, 376
CACINF3 2D - 2D Solid - Acoustic Infinite, 182
CACINF4 2D - 2D Solid - Acoustic Infinite, 182
CBARAO 1D Element Properties, 110
CBAR 1D Element Properties, 110
CBEAM 1D - Beam - Lumped Section (CBEAM/PBCOMP), 120, 1D - Beam - Tapered Section
(CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 121
CBEND 1D - Beam - Curved with General Section (CBEND), 117, 1D - Beam - Curved with Pipe
Section (CBEND), 118
CDAMP1 0D - Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D), 107
CDAMP2 Entity Selection Form, 587, Elements and Element Properties, 596
CELAS1 0D - Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D), 107
CELAS2 Entity Selection Form, 587, Elements and Element Properties, 596
CGAP 1D - Gap - Adaptive / Non Adaptive (CGAP), 131
CHEXA 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 189
CIFQUAD 2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Interface, 172
CIFQDX 2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Interface, 181
CIFHEX 3D - Solid - Interface, 196
CIFPENT 3D - Solid - Interface, 196
CMASS1 1D - Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 133, 0D - Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 105
CMASS2 Entity Selection Form, 587, Elements and Element Properties, 596
CONM1 0D - Coupled Point Mass (CONM1), 105
CONM2 0D - Lumped Point Mass (CONM2), 106
Main Index

Entry Pages
CONROD 1D - Rod - General Section - CONROD, 128
CPENTA 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 189
CQUAD4 2D Element Properties, 141,
CQUAD8 2D Element Properties, 141,
CQUADR 2D - Shell - Homogeneous - Revised Formulation, 143, 2D - Shell - Thin - Laminate -
Revised Formulation, 150, 2D - Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - Revised Formulation,
154, 2D - Bending Panel - Revised Formulation, 163, 2D - Membrane - Revised
Formulation, 184
CROD 1D - Rod - General Section (CROD) - Standard Formulation, 127
CSHEAR 2D - Shear Panel, 187
CTETRA 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 189
CTRIAX6 2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Standard Formulation, 176
CTUBE 1D - Rod - Pipe Section (CTUBE), 129
CVISC 1D - Damper - Viscous (CVISC), 131
DCONST Objectives & Constraints, 510
DOPTPRM Optimize, 506, Toptomize, 507
DPHASE Object Tables, 220
DRESP1/2 Objectives & Constraints, 510
DTI, SETREE Select Superelements, 376
DTI,UNITS Fatigue Parameters Subform, 337
DYNRED Dynamic Reduction Parameters, 289
EIGB Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction, 294, Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 286
EIGC Complex Eigenvalue Extraction, 300
EIGR Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 286
EIGRL Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 286
EXTSEOUT External Superelement Specifications, 266
FEFACE Element Creation, 19
FEEDGE Element Creation, 19
FORCE Force, 222
FREQ1 Frequency Response, 303
FTGDEF Output Request Form Options, 455
FTGEVNT Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
FTGLOAD Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
Main Index

Entry Pages
FTGPARM Fatigue Parameters Subform, 337
FTGSEQ Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
GMBC Displacement / Velocty / Acceleration, 220
GRAV Inertial Load, 226
MOMENT Force, 222
MAT1 Linear Elastic, 77
MATFTG Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN), Spot Weld (Top and Bottom Sheet), Seam Weld
(Stiff and Flexible), 71,
Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN), Spot Weld (Top and Bottom Sheet), Seam Weld
(Stiff and Flexible), 91
MCOHE Cohesive, 93
MPC Explicit MPCs, 33
NLPARM Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 383
OUTPUT Analysis Definition, 21, Advanced Output Requests, 451
PACINF 2D - 2D Solid - Acoustic Infinite, 182
PARAM,AUTOSPC Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,INREL Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,ALTRED Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,COUPMASS Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,K6ROT Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,WTMASS Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,GRDPNT Solution Parameters, 276
PARAM,LGDISP Nonlinear Static, 279, Nonlinear Transient, 309
PARAM,G Complex Eigenvalue, 297, Frequency Response, 303, Transient Response, 306,
Nonlinear Transient, 309
PARAM,W3 Transient Response, 306, Nonlinear Transient, 309
PARAM,W4 Transient Response, 306, Nonlinear Transient, 309
PARAM, POST Results Output Format, 373
PBAR 1D - Beam - General Section (CBAR) - Standard Formulation, 110
Main Index

Entry Pages
PBCOMP 1D - Beam - Lumped Section (CBEAM/PBCOMP), 120
PBEAM 1D - Beam - Tapered Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 121
PBEAM71 Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
PBEAMD Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
PBELTD Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
PBEND 1D - Beam - Curved with General Section (CBEND), 117, 1D - Beam - Curved with Pipe
Section (CBEND), 118
PCOHE 2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Interface, 172
PCOMP 2D - Shell - Thin - Laminate Plate- Standard Formulation, 148, 2D - Shell - Thin -
Laminate - Revised Formulation, 150
PDAMP 0D - Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D), 107
PELAS 0D - Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D), 107
PELAS1 Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
PFTG 2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 141
PGAP 1D - Gap - Adaptive / Non Adaptive (CGAP), 131
PLOAD1 Distributed Load, 228
PLOAD2 Pressure, 222
PLOAD4 Pressure, 222
PLOADX1 Pressure, 222
PLOTEL 1D - PLOTEL, 134
PLPLANE 2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Standard Formulation, 166
PLSOLID 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Hyperelastic, 193
PMASS 1D - Scalar Mass (CMASS1), 133
POINT Element Creation, 19, 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - P-Formulation, 191
PROD 1D - Rod - General Section (CROD) - Standard Formulation, 127
PSHEAR 2D - Shear Panel, 187
PSHELL 2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 141, 2D - Shell -
Homogeneous - Revised Formulation, 143, 2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - P-
Formulation, 145, 2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - Linear Discrete Kirchhoff, 147,
2D - Shell - Thin - Laminate Plate- Standard Formulation, 148, 2D - Shell - Thin -
Laminate - Revised Formulation, 150, 2D - Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - Standard
Formulation, 152, 2D - Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - Revised Formulation, 154, 2D
- Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - P-Formulation, 156
PSHELL1 Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
Main Index

Entry Pages
PSHELLD Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
PSOLID 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 189
PSPRMA Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing, 448
PTUBE 1D - Rod - Pipe Section (CTUBE), 129
PBEAM 1D - Beam - Tapered Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 121
PVAL Element and p-Formulation Properties, 20, 3D - Solid - Homogeneous - P-Formulation,
191
PVISC 1D - Damper - Viscous (CVISC), 131
RANDPS Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
RBAR RBAR MPCs, 36
RBE1 RBE1 MPCs, 39
RBE2 RBE2 MPCs, 41
RBE3 RBE3 MPCs, 43
RFORCE Inertial Load, 226
RROD RROD MPCs, 46
RSPLINE RSPLINE MPCs, 47
RTRPLT RTRPLT MPCs, 49
SESET Select Superelements, 376, Translation Parameters, 263
SET1 Output Request Form Options, 455
SET4 Output Request Form Options, 455
SETREE Select Superelements, 376
SPC1 Displacement / Velocty / Acceleration, 220
SPCD Displacement / Velocty / Acceleration, 220
TABLFTG Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
TABLEM1 Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
plus various material models
TABRND1 Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
TEMP Temperature, 224
TEMPF Temperature, 224
TEMPRB Temperature, 224
TEMPP1 Temperature, 224
TIC Initial Displacement, 227, Initial Velocity, 227
TIM2PSD Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
Main Index

Entry Pages
TSTEP Transient Response, 306
TSTEPNL Nonlinear Transient, 309, Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, 387
UDNAME Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490
VCCT Crack (VCCT), 238
Main Index
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400/600)

The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 400/600 analyses.
3D Contact Region
BCBODY Defines a flexible rigid contact body in 2D or 3D.

BCBOX* Defines a 3D contact region.
BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies.
BCMATL* Defines a 3D contact region by element material.
BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact.
BCPARA Defines contact parameters.
BCPROP* Defines a 3d contact region by element properties.
BCTABLE Defines a contact table.
BSURF Defines a contact body or surface by element IDs.
GMNURB 3D contact region made up of NURBS.
BCTABL1 Defines a Contact Table (New Form).
BCONECT Defines the Touching and Touched Contact Bodies.
BCONPRG Geometric Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies.
BCONPRP Physical Contact Parameters of Touching Bodies.
BCBODY1 Flexible or Rigid Contact Body in 2D and 3D (New Form).
BCBDPRP Contact Body Parameters.
BCRIGID Defines a Rigid Contact Body.
BCRGSRF Rigid Contact Body Surface List.
BCPATCH Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of Quadrilateral Patches.
BCNURB2 Defines a 2D Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS.
BCNURBS Defines a Rigid Contact Body Made up of NURBS.
BCTRIM Defines the Geometry of Trimming Curves.
BCONTACT Initiates and controls 3D contact in SOLs 101, 400, and 700. It can refer
to BCTABL1, BCONECT or BCTABLE Bulk Data entry.
Initial Conditions
IPSTRAIN* Defines initial plastic strain values.
Main Index
ISTRESS* Defines initial stress values.

MARCIN Insert a text string in MSC.Marc.
MARCOUT Selects data recovery output.
Materials
MATEP Elasto-plastic material properties.

MATF Specifies material failure model.
MATG* Gasket material properties.
MATHE Hyperelastic material properties.
MATHP Hyperelastic material properties.
MATHED Damage model properties for hyperelastic materials.
MATORT Elastic 3D orthotropic material properties.
MATTEP Thermoelastic-Plastic material properties.
MATTG* Temperature variation of interlaminar materials.
MATTHE Thermo hyperelastic material.
MATTORT* Thermoelastic orthotropic material
MATTVE* Thermo-visco-elastic material properties
MATVE* Viscoelastic material properties
MATVP Viscoplastic or creep material properties
Note: * Not supported in initial release of Patran (2004). Solution Control
NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping.

NLDAMP Defines damping constants.
NLSTRAT Strategy Parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.
PARAMARC Parallel domain decomposition.
RESTART Restart data.
Element Properties
NTHICK Defines nodal thickness values for beams, plates, and/or shells.
Main Index
MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)

The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 700 analyses.
Materials
MATD001 Isotropic Elastic material for beam, shell and solid.

MATD003 Isotropic and kinematic hardening plasticity.
MATD005 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam.
MATD006 Isotropic viscoelastic material.
MATD007 Isotropic material to model nearly incompressible continuum rubber.
MATD012 Isotropic plasticity for 3D solids.
MATD014 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam with failure.
MATD015 Isotropic Johnson/Cook strain and temperature sensitive plasticity.
MATD019 Isotropic strain rate dependent material.
MATD020 Isotropic rigid material.
MATD022 Orthotropic material with optional brittle failure for composites.
MATD024 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with stress x strain curve and strain rate
dependency.
MATD026 Anisotropic honeycomb and foam material.
MATD027 Isotropic material to model rubber using two variables.
MATD028 Isotropic elasto-plastic material for beam and shell.
MATD030 Isotropic superelastic material.
MATD031 Isotropic material to model rubber using the Frazer-Nash formulation.
MATD032 Orthotropic laminated glass material.
MATD057 Isotropic material to model highly compressible low density foams.
MATD058 *MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FABRIC
MATD062 Isotropic material to model viscous foams.
MATD063 Isotropic material to model crushable foams.
MATD064 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with a power law hardening.
MATD067 *MAT_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD068 *MAT_NONLINEAR_PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD069 *MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD070 *MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD071 *MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD073 *MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS_FOAM
Main Index
MATD074 *MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD076 *MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC
MATD083 *MAT_FU_CHANG_FOAM
MATD087 *MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER
MATD093 *MAT_ELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD094 *MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD095 *MAT_INELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD097 *MAT_GENERAL_JOINT_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD100 Isotropic spotweld material.
MATD103 Anisotropic viscoplastic material.
MATD119 *MAT_GENERAL_NONLINEAR_6DOF_DISCRETE_BEAM
MATD121 *MAT_GURSON_RCDC
MATD126 *MAT_MODIFIED_HONEYCOMB
MATD20M *MAT_RIGID
MATDB01 *MAT_SEATBELT
MATDS01 *MAT_SPRING_ELASTIC
MATDS02 *MAT_DAMPER_VISCOUS
MATDS03 *MAT_SPRING_ELASTOPLASTIC
MATDS04 *MAT_SPRING_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC
MATDS05 *MAT_DAMPER_NONLINEAR_VISCOUS
MATDS06 *MAT_SPRING_GENERAL_NONLINEAR
MATDS07 *MAT_SPRING_MAXWELL
MATDS08 *MAT_SPRING_INELASTIC
MATDS13 *MAT_SPRING_TRILINEAR_DEGRADING
MATDS14 *MAT_SPRING_SQUAT_SHEARWALL
MATDS15 *MAT_SPRING_MUSCLE
Loads and Boundary Conditions
TIC3 Defines initial rotational field.

WALL Defines planar rigid wall.
Main Index
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC Nastran Preference
Elements and Properties
CDAMP1D Scalar damper connection for SOL 700

CELAS1D Scalar spring connection for SOL 700.
Solution Controls
Form Parameters
Execution Control DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE, DYMINSTEP,
Parameters DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS, DYTSTEPDT2MS
General Parameters DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ,
DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK,
DYSHNIP
Contact Parameters DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT,
DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT,
DYCONIGNORE, DYCONSKIPTWG
Binary Output DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH,
Database File DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG,
Parameters DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ,
DYN3THDT
DAMPGBL Dynamic relaxation control.
Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC Nastran

Preference
In Version 68 of MSC. Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid elements. The Patran MSC
Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some fundamental differences in
approach to model building and results import for p-element analyses; this section will serve as a guide to
these.
MSC .Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analysis in two areas. Shell and
beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linear dynamic solution sequences.
Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities.
Element Creation
MSC Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid CTETRA, CPENTA, and CHEXA
elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA, and QUAD elements; beams BAR elements.
Patran and MSC Nastran allow TET4, TET10, TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15, WEDGE52,
Main Index
HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9,
TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for 2D-solids and
membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and
QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive analysis for beams. The
preferred approach, when beginning a new model, is to use the higher-order elements--HEX64, WEDGE52,
TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The support for lower-order elements is provided
primarily to support existing models. The higher-order cubic elements allow more accurate definition of the
geometry and more accurate postprocessing of results from the MSC Nastran analysis.The translator
generates the appropriate MSC Nastran FEEDGE and POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-
elements. Models with HEX64 and WEDGE52 elements are easily created with the Patran Iso Mesher;
models with TET16 elements can be created with the Tet Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13
elements can be created using the Iso Mesher or the Paver.
For p-elements, Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic edge consists of two
vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not necessarily C1 continuous. If the
original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce kinks which cause false stress concentrations.
Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results especially for thin curved shells.
In Version 7 of Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge are adjusted so that the edges
of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3Nas translator. After the Pat3Nas
translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the Patran database has changed. The user is
informed with a warning message. The user can turn the adjustment of midside nodes ON and OFF with
the environment variable PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midside nodes are adjusted to make the adjacent
elements C1 continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a cubic edge are not adjusted.
Patran generates the input for MSC Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE Bulk Data entries with POINTs are
written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge in MSC Nastran.
The points generated by Patran must not be moved. Therefore, a parameter entry PARAM, PEDGEP, 1 is
written by Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that incoming POINTs are not moved in MSC Nastran. The default
is PEDGEP= 0, MSC Nastran will move the two POINTs to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge. The C1 continuous
cubic edges improve the accuracy of p-element results.
In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested to determine the quality of
shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very good when exact geometry was
used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results within single precision accuracy.
Element and p-Formulation Properties

Both element and p-formulation properties are defined using the Element Properties application by choosing
Action: Create, Dimension: 1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel/2D Solid/Membrane/ or
Solid, and p-Formulation on the main form. Most of the properties are optional and have defaults; the
material property name is required.
Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders. These properties
specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three spatial directions. Although
these are integer values, in Patran, each property is defined using the Patran vector definition. At first, this
may seem peculiar, but it gives the user access to many useful tools in the Patran system for defining and
manipulating these properties. Typically, a user would define these properties with a syntax like <3 4 2> to
prescribe polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions. Patran will convert these values to
Main Index
floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the Patran MSC Nastran Preference will interpret them. This vector syntax is
convenient primarily because it allows these properties to be defined using the Fields application. In a case
where the material properties are constant over the model, but it is desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-
orders, vector fields can be defined and specified in a single property definition. The Patran MSC Nastran
Preference will provide additional help for this modeling function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when
results are imported, vector, spatial fields will optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each
element for each adaptive cycle. To repeat a single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify the element
properties by selecting the appropriate field.
A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the vicinity of stress
singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g., sharp corners),
boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point forces). Sometimes it is easier to
tell the adaptive analysis to “ignore” these singular regions than it is to change the model. This can be done
by setting the Maximum P-orders property for elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1> or <2 2 2>.
These elements are sometimes called “sacrificial” elements.

It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and constraints cause the stress field in the body to
become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must be taken in finite element creation and loads application
to ensure that these artificial high-stress regions don’t dominate the analysis.
Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or distributed displacements. There
are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements. The Element Uniform and
Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement constraints to be applied to the faces of solid
elements. If the elements are p-elements, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are produced. If
applied to non-p-elements, the appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced.
Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam elements. Distributed loads can
be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure loads can be applied to the faces of p-
shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either the nodes or the elements.
Analysis Definition
Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in Version 68 of MSC .Nastran; both solution
types are supported by the Patran MSC Nastran Preference. Only a few parameters on the Analysis forms may
need to be changed for p-element analyses. If running a version of MSC. Nastran prior to Version 68.2 (i.e.,
Version 68, or 68.1), the OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation Parameters form must be set to Alter
File in order to process the results in Patran. The Solution Parameters forms for the linear static and normal
modes analyses contain a Max p-Adaptive Cycles option, which is defaulted to 3. The Subcase Parameters
form under Subcase Create has options to limit the participation of this subcase in the adaptive error analysis.
Finally, the Advanced Output Requests form under Subcase Create has an option to define whether results
are to be produced for all adaptive cycles or only every nth adaptive cycle.
Results Import and Postprocessing

Two different approaches are provided for postprocessing results from MSC Nastran p-element analyses.
Both approaches rely on MSC Nastran creating results for a “VU mesh” where each p-element is
Main Index
automatically subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard approach with the default MSC
Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements) for beams, the
results will automatically be mapped onto the Patran nodes and elements during import. This mapping will
occur for all 10, Patran solid element topologies mentioned above. The most accurate mapping and
postprocessing takes place when results are mapped to the higher-order Patran elements.
When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more elements beyond 3, the 3 x 3 x 3
VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The Patran MSC Nastran
Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In this case, a user can specify a higher-order
VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MSC Nastran OUTRCV entry and then import both model data and results
entities into a new, empty Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh and results are imported directly, rather
than mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. The OUTRCV entry is currently supported
only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translation Parameters form.
It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g., fringe plots) may be
discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU grids generated by MSC
Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are coincident nodes and a result
associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an Equivalence operation to remove these
coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent postprocessing operations will likely be incorrect.
For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycle in the analysis. The result types
in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output Request form. By default, the
Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means that output quantities specific to p-
elements will be written only for the last cycle. If postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is desired,
the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option should be set equal to one.
One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence of selected
quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting capability under the Results application.
Potential Pitfalls
There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing correct p-element models for MSC
Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in the Patran higher order-elements. These nodes
are used in p-element analysis only for defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are not
associated with these nodes. Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign loads or
boundary conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertently is if a nodal force is applied to the
face of a Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point force at every node (including the midside nodes)
on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load should instead be applied as
an element uniform or element variable pressure.
Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models

Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, p-element analysis is relatively straightforward. The first step
is to read the NASTRAN input file into Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model may
contain any combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa elements. The second step is to use the
Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid properties from Standard Formulation to
P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation solids has many options specific to p-element
analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This property modification step is the only change that must
be made before submitting the model for analysis.
Main Index
Coordinate Frames
Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls, 22, it is appropriate to modify the types of loads and boundary
conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models, displacement constraints are applied
using MSC Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In p-element analyses, element-oriented displacement
constraints are more appropriate. Existing displacement LBCs can be modified using the
Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC type is
nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element Uniform or Element Variable displacement constraints are more
appropriate. The application region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of element faces.
As described above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible, it is beneficial to
redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face. If this is not possible, an alternative is to limit
the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be done by defining a new
element property for these elements and defining the Maximum P-orders vector appropriately. Element
pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined in the original model need not be changed for the
p-element analysis.
Coordinate Frames
Coordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data entry, depending
on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID assigned in Patran. The
RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate frame construction method used in
Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields are derived from the coordinate frame definition
in Patran.
Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or loads and boundary conditions
can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 447)
in the Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2.
To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or not, set the environment
variable “WRITE_ALL_COORDS” to ON.
Finite Elements
The Finite Elements Application in Patran allows the definition of basic finite element construction. Created
under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point constraints, and Superelement.
Main Index
Finite Elements
For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and Mesh Forms (p. 22) in the
Reference Manual - Part III.
Nodes
Nodes in Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MSC Nastran. Nodes can be created either
directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node has associated Reference (CP)
and Analysis (CD) coordinate global frames. The ID is taken directly from the assigned node ID. The X1,
X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate frame. If no reference frame is assigned, the
system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the GRID entry are left blank.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Table 2-6
Entry Description
Coordinate Frame The analysis frame (CD of the GRID) is the coordinate system in which the
displacements, degrees of freedom, constraints, and solution vector are
defined.
The coordinate system in which the node location is defined (CP of the
GRID) can be either the reference coordinate frame, the analysis coordinate
frame, or a global reference (blank), depending on the value of the forward
translation parameter “Node Coordinates.”
Elements
The Finite Elements Application in Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for standard finite
elements. The type of MSC Nastran element to be created is not determined until the element properties are
assigned (for example, shell or 2D solid). See the Element Properties Form, 98 for details concerning the MSC
Main Index
Finite Elements
Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the Element object, or indirectly using
Main Index
Finite Elements
the Mesh object
Table 2-7
Entry Description
Finite Elements Form This type of form is used to create a 1D, 2D, or 3D element mesh.
Node Beginning IDs for nodes to be created.
Element Beginning IDs for elements to be created.
Elem Shape Elem Shape is used to specify the shape of the elements created by meshing.
For example, the shape for a 2D element can be either triangular or
quadralateral.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Table 2-7
Entry Description
Mesher Mesher is used to specify how the element mesh is to be created; for
example, IsoMesh, Paver. The type of geometry (for example, simple
(green) or complex (magenta) surface) may determine the choice of the
mesher.
Surface List List of surface IDs of surfaces to be meshed. For example Surface 1, 2, 3, or
Surface 1:3.
Value The value of Global Edge Length specifies the approximate size of the
elements created when meshing.
Select Existing Prop... The button Select Existing Prop... is used to select an existing element
property (for example, 2D Shell) that will be assigned to the elements
created by meshing.
Create New Property The button Create New Property is used to create an element property that
will be assigned to the elements that will be created by meshing. During
creating the element property no application region can be specified; it is
specified automatically using all the elements created by meshing.
Prop Name & Prop Type This “ghosted” area will become dark when an element property is selected.
Multi-point Constraints
Multi-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Application. These are special
element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The forms for creating MPCs
Main Index
Finite Elements
are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements form. The full functionality of the MPC
forms are defined in Create Action (FEM Entities).
Table 2-8
Entry Description
MPC ID Used to specify the ID to associate to the MPC when it is created.
Main Index
Finite Elements
MPC Types
To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option menu. The MPC types that
appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the Analysis Code and Analysis Type
preferences. The following table describes the MPC types which are supported for MSC Nastran.
MPC Type Analysis Type Description

Explicit Structural Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of freedom and
one or more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent term
consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an independent
term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree of freedom. An
unlimited number of independent terms can be specified, while only
one dependent term can be specified. The constant term is not
allowed in MSC Nastran.
RSSCON Surf- Structural Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a
Vol linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear 3D
solid element to connect the plate element to the solid element. One
dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term
consists of a single node.
Rigid (Fixed) Structural and Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or more
Explicit dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of freedom are
Nonlinear rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of dependent
terms can be specified, while only one independent term can be
specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no constant
term for this MPC type.
RBAR Structural and Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two
Explicit nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms can be
Nonlinear specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom.
The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be the same as
the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any combination
of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be specified as
independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of
freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RBE1 Structural Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to an
arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent terms
can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of
freedom. Any number of independent terms can be specified as long
as the total number of degrees of freedom specified in all of the
independent terms adds up to six. Since at least one degree of freedom
must be specified for each term there is no way the user can create
more that six independent terms. There is no constant term for this
MPC type.
Main Index
Finite Elements

RBE2 Structuraland Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an
Explicit arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only specify one
Nonlinear dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to
this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of
freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified,
which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this
MPC type.
RBE3 Structuraland Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference
Explicit node as the weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An
Nonlinear arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term
consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first
dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other
dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which
are added to the m-set. An arbitrary number of independent terms can
also be specified. Each independent term consists of a constant
coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of freedom.
There is no constant term for this MPC type.
RROD Structural Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between two
nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is specified,
which consists of a node and a single translational degree of freedom.
One independent term is specified, which consists of a single node.
RSPLINE Structural Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the displacements
of a set of independent nodes to define the displacements at a set of
dependent nodes using elastic beam equations. An arbitrary number
of dependent terms can be specified. Each dependent term consists of
a node, a list of degrees of freedom, and a sequence number. An
arbitrary number of independent nodes (minimum of two) can be
specified. Each independent term consists of a node and a sequence
number. The sequence number is used to order the dependent and
independent terms with respect to each other. The only restriction is
that the first and the last terms in the sequence must be independent
terms. A constant term, called D/L Ratio, must also be specified.
RTRPLT Structural Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate
between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent
terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of
degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent terms
must be the same as the nodes specified in the three independent
terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of the three nodes
can be specified as independent as long as the total number of
independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant
term for this MPC type.
Main Index
Finite Elements

Cyclic Structural Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of the
Symmetry model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen, such as “SOL
114,” then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are created. If a
solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic symmetric is chosen,
such as “SOL 101,” MPC and SPC entries are created. Be careful, for
this option automatically alters the analysis coordinate references of
the nodes involved. This could erroneously change the meaning of
previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as element
properties.
Sliding Surface Structural Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe
sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the NASTRAN
input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option automatically
redefines the analysis coordinate references of all affected nodes. This
could erroneously alter the meaning of previously applied load and
boundary conditions, as well as element properties.
RBAR1 Structural This is an alternate (simplified) form for RBAR. Creates an RBAR1
element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes, with six degrees
of freedom at each end. Each dependent term consists of a node and
a list of degrees of freedom, while the independent term consists only
of a node (with all six degrees of freedom implied). The constant term
is the thermal expansion coefficient, ALPHA.
RTRPLT1 Structural Alternative format to define a rigid triangular plate element
connecting three grid points. Creates an RTRPLT1 element, which
defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Each dependent
term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the
independent term consists only of the node (with all six degrees of
freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal expansion
coefficient, ALPHA.
RJOINT Structural Creates an RJOINT element, which defines a rigid joint element
connecting two coinciding grid points. Each dependent term consists
of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the independent term
consists only of a node (with all six degrees of freedom implied).
Degrees of Freedom
Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox containing the valid degrees of
freedom is displayed on the form.
Main Index
Finite Elements
The following degrees of freedom are supported by the Patran MSC Nastran MPCs for the various analysis
types:
Degree of freedom Analysis Type

UX Structural
UY Structural
UZ Structural
RX Structural
RY Structural
RZ Structural
Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for an
MPC actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only to
solid structural elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom.
However, Patran will allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this node
when defining an MPC.
Explicit MPCs
This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements form
and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran MPC Bulk Data entry.
The difference in explicit MPC equations between Patran and MSC Nastran will result in the A1 field of the
MSC Nastran entry being set to -1.0.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Main Index
Finite Elements
Table 2-9
Entry Description
Dependent Terms (1) Holds the dependent term information. This term will define the fields for
G1 and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one node and DOF combination may
be defined for any given explicit MPC. The A1 field on the MPC entry is
automatically set to -1.0.
Independent Terms (No Holds the independent term information. These terms define the Gi, Ci,
Max) and Ai fields on the MPC entry, where i is greater than one. As many
coefficient, node, and DOF combinations as desired may be defined.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Rigid (Fixed)
and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry.
The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456.
Table 2-10
Entry Description
Dependent Nodes (No Max) Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi fields
on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as dependent
terms.
Independent Nodes (1) Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field
on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.
RBAR MPCs
and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RBAR Bulk Data entry and
Main Index
Finite Elements
defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the Dependent Terms and the Independent
Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The total number of referenced nodes, however, must be 2.
Main Index
Finite Elements
If either or both of these lists references 2 nodes, then there must be an overlap in the list of referenced nodes.
Table 2-11
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Holds the dependent term information. Either one or two nodes may be
(Min=1,Max=2) defined as having dependent terms. The Nodes define the GA and GB
fields on the RBAR entry. The DOFs define the CMA and CMB fields.
Independent Terms Holds the independent term information. Either one or two nodes may be
(Min=1,Max=2) defined as having independent terms.The Nodes define the GA and GB
fields on the RBAR entry.The DOFs define the CNA and CNB fields.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RBE1 MPCs
Main Index
Finite Elements
and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RBE1 Bulk Data entry.
Table 2-12
Entry Description
Dependent Terms (No Max) Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields
on the RBE1 entry. An unlimited number of nodes and DOFs may be
defined here.
Independent Terms Holds the independent term information. Defines the GNi and CNi fields
(Min=1,Max=6) on the RBE1 entry. The total number of Node/DOF pairs defined must
equal 6, and be capable of representing any general rigid body motion.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RBE2 MPCs
Main Index
Finite Elements
and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry.
Table 2-13
Entry Description
Dependent Terms (1) Holds the dependent term information. This term defines the GMi and
CM fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as desired may be selected as
dependent terms.
Independent Terms (1) Holds the independent term information. This term defines the GN field
on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may be selected.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RBE3 MPCs
and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MSC Nastran RBE3 Bulk Data entry
Main Index
Finite Elements
Main Index
Finite Elements
Table 2-14
Entry Description
Dependent Terms (No Max) Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GMi and CMi fields
on the RBE3 entry. The first dependent term will be treated as the reference
node, REFGRID and REFC. The rest of the dependent terms become the
GMi and CMi components.
Independent Terms (No Holds the independent term information. Defines the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi
Max) fields on the RBE3 entry.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RROD MPCs
and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RROD Bulk Data entry.
Table 2-15
Entry Description
Dependent Terms (1) Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GB and CMB on the
RROD entry. Only one translational DOF may be referenced for this entry.
Independent Terms (1) Holds the independent term information. Defines the GA field on the
RROD entry. The CMA field is left blank.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RSPLINE MPCs
and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RSPLINE Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Finite Elements
The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This MPC type is typically used to tie together
two dissimilar meshes.
Table 2-16
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Holds the dependent term information.
(Min=1,Max=97)
Independent Terms Holds the independent term information. Terms with the highest and
(Min=2,Max=98) lowest sequence numbers must be independent.
Sequence Determines what sequence the independent and dependent terms will be
written to the RSPLINE entry.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RTRPLT MPCs
Main Index
Finite Elements
and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RTRPLT Bulk Data entry.
Table 2-17
Entry Description
Dependent Terms Holds the dependent term information. Defines the GA, GB, GC, CMA,
(Min=1,Max=3) CMB, and CMC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
Independent Terms Holds the independent term information. The total number of nodes
(Min=2,Max=3) referenced in both the dependent terms and the independent terms must
equal three. There must be exactly six independent degrees of freedom, and
they must be capable of describing rigid body motion. Defines the GA, GB,
GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Cyclic Symmetry MPCs

The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYAX, and CYSYM
entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters, 276, or into SPC and MPC entries if the
Main Index
Finite Elements
requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric.
Table 2-18
Entry Description
Cyclic Symmetry If the type selected is Cyclic Symmetry, the type of symmetry will always be
rotational.
NOTE: MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate

references on all the nodes belonging to the Dependent and Independent
Regions. Be careful that this does not erroneously change the meaning of
previously applied loads and boundary conditions, or element properties.
Cylindrical Coord. Frame Any node lying on the Z axis will be automatically written to the CYAX
entry.
Dependent Region Side 2 of the CYJOIN entries.
Independent Region Side 1 of the CYJOIN entries.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Sliding Surface MPCs

The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MPCs in the NASTRAN input
Main Index
Finite Elements
file.
Table 2-19
Entry Description
Sliding Surface If a Sliding Surface type is used, note that this MPC option will
automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate references on all the nodes
belonging to the Dependent and Independent Regions. Be careful that this
does not erroneously change the meaning of previously applied loads and
boundary conditions, or element properties.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RBAR1 MPCs
and RBAR1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RBAR1 Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RTRPLT1 MPCs
and RTRPLT1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RTRPLT1 Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Finite Elements
RJOINT MPCs
and RJOINT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MSC Nastran RJOINT Bulk Data entry.
Superelements
In superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These smaller pieces
of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structures by reducing their stiffness matrix, mass
matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the boundary nodes and then combined to solve for the
whole structure. The first step in creating a superelement is to create a Patran group (using Group/Create)
Main Index
Finite Elements
that contains the elements in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite Elements application
Main Index
Finite Elements
on the Create/ Superelement form.
Main Index
Finite Elements
Table 2-20
Entry Description
Superelement List List of existing superelements.
Element Definition Group The group containing all the elements that define a superelement. Note
that the group must contain elements not just nodes. If a group does not
contain elements, it will not show up in the Element Definition Group
listbox.
Select Boundary Nodes... Brings up an optional subordinate form that allows a user to select
boundary nodes of the superelement. By default, the common nodes
between the elements in the group and the rest of the model are selected as
the boundary nodes.
Main Index
Material Library
Select Boundary Nodes
Table 2-21
Entry Description
Select Boundary Nodes Allows for manual selection of boundary nodes.
Add Add selected nodes to the Selected Boundary Nodes box.
Remove Remove selected nodes from the Selected Boundary Nodes box.
Material Library
The Materials form appears when the Material toggle, located on the Patran application selections, is chosen.
The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material form appears, and ultimately,
which Nastran material will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of all the material property
definitions supported by the Nastran Preference.
Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up are translated.
References to externally defined materials result in special comments in the input Nastran file, e.g., materials
that property values that are not defined in Patran.
The forward translator performs material type conversions when needed. This applies to both constant
material properties and temperature-dependent material properties. For example, a three-dimensional
Main Index
Material Library
orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA elements is converted into a three-dimensional anisotropic
material.
Main Index
Material Library
Materials Application Form

This form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials form is used to provide
Main Index
Material Library
options to create the various Nastran materials.
Main Index
Material Library
Table 2-22
Entry Description
Object This toggle defines the basic material directionality and can be set to
Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic, 3D
Anisotropic, Fluid, Cohesive, or Composite. For Explicit Nonlinear
additional materials can be defined.
Existing Materials Lists the existing materials with the specified directionality.
Material Name Defines the material name. A unique material ID will be assigned during
translation.
Description Describes the material that is being created.
Input Properties... Generates a form that is used to define the material properties. See Material
Input Properties Form, 65
Change Material Status... Generates a form that is used to indicate the active portions of the material
model. By default, all portions of a created material model are active.
Material Input Properties Form

The Input Properties form is the form where all constitutive material models are defined for each material
created. Multiple constitutive models can be created for each material created by pressing the Apply button
on the main Materials form with the proper widgets set on this form. Multiple constitutive models of the
Main Index
Material Library
same type are not allowed. The list of existing constitutive models are shown in the bottom list box. A list of
valid constitutive models is given in the table below.
Main Index
Material Library
Table 2-23
Entry Description
Constitutive Model Set the Constitutive Model here. Press the Apply button on the main
Materials application form to create a constitutive model for the given
material. Multiple constitutive models can be created for the same material.
Property Name and Value Enter the property values in the databoxes. If a value can be temperature,
model, strain rate, or strain dependent, a separate listbox will appear to
select a field. These fields must be created in the Fields application as
Material type fields.
Current Constitutive Models This is a list of current constitutive models. Use the Change Material Status
button to turn them on/off from translation into the Nastran input deck.
Material Constitutive Models

The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.
Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Isotropic  Linear Elastic
 Nonlinear Elastic
 Hyperelastic  Nearly  Test Data  Mooney Rivlin Order:
Incompressible
1
3
 Coefficients  Mooney Rivlin Order:
 Ogden
1
 Foam
 Arruda-Boyce 2
 Gent 3
Main Index
Material Library

 User Sub.  Foam_Invariants 0
(UELASTOME  Foam_Principals
R)
 Foam_Invariants
(Dev. Split)
 Foam_Principals
(Dev. Split)
 Rubber_Invariant
Based
 Rubber_Principal
Stretch
 Elastoplastic  Stress/Strain  von Mises  Isotropic
Curve  Tresca  Kinematic
 Mohr-Coulomb  Combined
 Drucker-Prager
 Parabolic Mohr-  Isotropic  Piecewise
Colomb  Kinematic Linear
 Buyukozturk  Combined  Cowper-
Concrete Symonds
 Oak Ridge
National Labs
 2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
 Reversed
Plasticity ORNL
 Fully Alpha
Reset ORNL
 Generalized
Plasticity
 None  Power Law
 Power Rate Law
 Johnson-Cook
 Kumar
Main Index
Material Library

 Hardening  von Mises  Isotropic
Slope  Tresca  Kinematic
 Drucker-Prager
 Perfectly Plastic  Parabolic Mohr-  None  Piecewise
Colomb Linear
 Buyukozturk  Cowper-
Concrete Symonds
 Oak Ridge
National Labs
 2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
 Reversed
Plasticity ORNL
 Fully Alpha
Reset ORNL
 Generalized
Plasticity
 Rigid Plastic  None  Power Law
 Power Rate Law
 Johnson-Cook
 Kumar
Piecewise- Piecewise
Linear Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
 Failure  n/a
 Hill
 Hoffman
 Tsai-Wu
 Maximum Strain
Main Index
Material Library

 Failure1/2/3  Maximum  No Progressive
Stress  Standard
 Maximum  Gradual Selective
Strain
 Immediate Selective
 Hoffman
 Hill
 Tsai-Wu
 Hashin
 Puck
 Hashin-Tape
 Hashin-Fabric
 User Sub.
UFAIL
 Creep  Tabular Input
 Creep Law 111
 Creep Law 112
 Creep Law 121
 Creep Law 122
 Creep Law 211
 Creep Law 212
 Creep Law 221
 Creep Law 222
 Creep Law 300
 User Sub.(CRPLAW)
 MATVP
 Hypoelastic  Isotropic  Gradient Only
 User Defined  Gradient and Rotation
 Gradient and Stretch Ratio
 All Input
 All Input (mid increment)
 All Input (end increment)
Main Index
Material Library

 User  User Defined  Gradient Only
Defined  Isotropic  Gradient and Rotation
 Gradient and Stretch Ratio
 All Input
 All Input (mid increment)
 All Input (end increment)
 Viscoelastic  No Function
 Williams-Landel-Ferry
 Power Series Expansion
 Stress-Life  Derived  Ferrous (99)  Range  Constant
(SN) and  Standard  Aluminium  Amplitude Mean
Strain Life Parameters (100)  Constant
(eN), Spot  None
 Bastenaire  Titanium (300) R-Ratio
Weld (Top
and Bottom Parameters  Other (0)  Constant
Sheet),  Tabular Life
 None
Seam Weld  MMPDS  None
(Stiff and
Flexible)
2D Orthotropic  Linear Elastic
 Failure  Stress  n/a
 Strain  Hill
 Hoffman
 Tsai-Wu
 Maximum Strain
 Failure1/2/3  See Isotropic Entry
Main Index
Material Library

 Elastoplastic  Stress/Strain  von Mises  Isotropic  Piecewise
Curve  Tresca  Kinematic Linear
 Mohr-Coulomb  Combined  Cowper-

Symonds
 Drucker-Prager
 Oak Ridge
National Labs
 2-1/4 Cr-Mo
ORNL
 Reversed
Plasticity ORNL
 Fully Alpha
Reset ORNL
 Generalized
Plasticity
 Hardening  von Mises  Isotropic
Slope  Tresca  Kinematic
 Drucker-Prager
 Perfectly Plastic  von Mises  None  Piecewise
 Oak Ridge Linear
National Labs  Cowper-
 2-1/4 Cr-Mo Symonds
ORNL
 Reversed
Plasticity ORNL
 Fully Alpha
Reset ORNL
 Generalized
Plasticity
 Creep  MATVP
 Viscoelastic  See Isotropic Entry
3D Orthotropic  Linear Elastic
 Elastoplastic  See 2D Orthotropic Entry
 Failure1/2/3  See 2D Orthotropic Entry
 Creep  See 2D Orthotropic Entry
Main Index
Material Library

 Viscoelastic  See Isotropic Entry
2D Anisotropic  Linear Elastic
 Failure  See Isotropic Entry
 Failure1/2/3  See Isotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported
3D Anisotropic  Linear Elastic
 Failure1/2/3  See 2D Orthotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported
 Creep  See Isotropic Entry
Fluid  Linear Elastic
Cohesive  Bilinear  Secant  No  Automatic  Keep
 Yes  User Defined
 Exponential  Secant  No  Automatic  Keep
 Yes  User Defined
 Linear-  Secant  Yes  Automatic  Keep
Exponential  User Defined
 User Sub.  Secant  No  None  Keep
(UCOHESI  Yes
VE)
Composite  Laminate
 Rule of Mixtures
 HAL Cont. Fiber
 HAL Disc. Fiber
 HAL Cont. Ribbon
 HAL Disc. Ribbon
 HAL Particulate
 Short Fiber 1D
 Short Fiber 2D
Main Index
Material Library
Additional materials for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) are listed in the following table.

Isotropic  Linear Elastic  Linear Elastic  Solid
(MAT1)  Fluid
 Elastoplastic  Plastic  Bilinear
Kinematic(MAT
3)
 Iso.Elastic
Plastic(MAT12)
 Rate Dependent
(MAT19)
 Piecewise Linear  Biliear  Cowper Symonds
(MAT24)  Linearized  General
 Table
 Rate Sensitive  Powerlaw
(MAT64)
 Resultant (MAT28)
 Shape Memory (MAT30)
 With Failure (MAT13)
 Power Law (MAT18)
 Ramberg-Osgood (MAT80)
 Hydro (MAT10)  Linearized
 Viscoelastic  Viscoelastic (MAT6)
 Rigid  Material Type 20  No Constraints
 Global Directions
 Local Directions
 MATRIG (Rigid  Geometry  No Constraints
Body Properties)  Defined  Global Directions
 Local Directions
 Johnson Cook  Material Type 15  No iteractions  Minimum Pressure
 Accurate  No Tension, Min. Stress
 No Tension, Min. Pressure
 Rubber  Frazer Nash  Coefficient  Respect
(MAT31)  Least Square Fit  Ignore
Main Index
Material Library

 Blatz-Ko (MAT7)
 General Viscoelastic (MAT76)
 Cellular Rubber (MAT87)
 Mooney Rivlin  Coeff.
(MAT27)  Least Square
 Arruda-Boyce
(MAT127)
 Hyperelastic  Coefficients
(MAT77)  Least Square Fit 1/2/3
 Simplified  Tension-  True Strain  Simple
Compresion Load  Engineering Average
 Compression Load Strain Rate  12 Point
 Tension- Average
Compression
Identical
 Foam  Soil and Foam  Active (MAT14)  Allow Crushing
(MAT5/14)  Inactive (MAT 5)  Reversible
 Low Density  Bulk Viscosity  No Tension
Urethane Inactive  Maintain Tension
(MAT57)  Bulk Viscosity
 Fu Chang Foam Active
(MAT83)
 Low Density  Bulk Viscosity  No Tension  With
Urethane Inactive  Maintain Relaxatio
(MAT57)  Bulk Viscosity Tension n curve
Active  No
Relaxatio
n Curve
 Viscous Foam (MAT62)
 Crushable (MAT63)
 Elastoviscoplatic  With Damage  Strain Damage  Bilinear  Cowper
(MAT81)  Orthotropic  Linearized Symonds
 RCDC  Table  General
Main Index
Material Library

 Discrete Beam  Nonlinear Elastic Discrete Beam (MAT67)
 Nonlinear Plastic Discrete Beam (MAT68)
 Side Impact Dummy (SID) Damper Discrete Beam (MAT69)
 Hydraulic Gas Damper Discrete Beam (MAT70)
 Cabel Discrete Beam (MAT71)
 Elastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT74)
 Elastic 6 DOF Spring Discrete Beam (MAT93)
 Inelastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT94)
 Inelastic 6 DOF Srping Discrete Beam (MAT95)
 General Joint Discrete Beam (MAT97)
 Spring Damper  Nonlinear 6  Follow Loading Curve
DOF Discrete  Follow Unloading Curve
Beam (MAT119)
 Follow Unloading Stiffness
 General
Nonlinear 1  Follow Quadratic Unloading
DOF Discrete
Beam (MAT121)
 Elastic Spring (MATDS01)
 Viscous Damper (MATDS02)
 Elastic Spring (MATDS03)
 Nonlinear Elastic Spring (MATDS04)
 Nonlinear Viscous Damper (MATDS05)
 General Nonlinear Spring (MATDS06)
 Spring Maxwell (MATDS07)
 Inelastic Spring (MATDS08)
 Tri-linear Degrading (MATDS13)
 Squat Shear Wall (MATDS14)
 Muscle (MATDS15)
 Seat Belt  Seat Belt (MATB01)
 Spotweld  MATDSW1  DF
 MATDSW2  DFRES
 DFRESNF
 DFRESNFP
 MATDSW3  DFSTR
Main Index
Material Library

 MATDSW4  DFRATE
 MATDSW5  DFNS
 DFSIF
 DFSTRUC
2D Orthotropic  Glass  Laminated Glass  Glass
(Laminated) (MAT32)  Polymer
 Composite  Enh. Composite  Tsai-Wu Theory
Damage  Chang-Chang Theory
 Linear Elastic  Linear Elastic (MAT2)
 Composites  Composites and  Zero  0.0
and Fabrics Fabrics (MAT58)  One  1.0
 Two  -1.0
 Three
3D Orthotropic  Honeycomb  Composite  Bulk Viscosity Inactive
Honeycomb  Bulk Viscosity Active
(MAT26)
 Composite  Composite Damage (MAT22)
 Composite  Faceted
Failure (MAT59)  Ellipsoidal
 Modified  Modified  Bulk Viscosity  LCA .LT. 0  Zero
Honeycomb Honeycomb Inactive  LCA .GT. 0  One
(MAT126)  Bulk Viscosity  Two
Active
2D Anisotropic  Viscoplastic  Viscoplastic  Shell  From Curve
(MAT103)  Manual Entry
3D Anisotropic  Viscoplastic  Viscoplastic  Brick  From Curve
(MAT103)  Manual Entry
Linear Elastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for linear elastic properties. The translator produces MAT1
entries for isotropic materials, MAT8 entries for 2D orthotropic materials, MAT3 entries using axisymmetric
solid elements or MAT9 entries using 3D solid elements (CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) for 3D orthotropic
Main Index
Material Library
materials, MAT2 entries for 2D plane stress - 2D anisotropic materials, and MAT9 entries for 3D anisotropic
materials. For temperature dependencies, the corresponding MATTi entries are written referencing
TABLEMi entries. Temperature dependency is defined using material fields defined under the Fields
application. SOL 600 jobs using 3D Orthotropic material the MATORT entry is written
SOL 400 jobs using 3D Orthotropic MATORT materials are shown for selection when setting up the UDS
Map (See User Defined Services, 334). If UDS Map exists for a 3D Orthotropic MATORT material, the
MATUDS entry is written to activate user subroutine orient in conjunction with MATORT.
.
Isotropic Description
Elastic Modulus Elastic modulus, E, (Young’s modulus). Can be temperature
dependent.
Poisson Ratio Poisson’s ratio (NU). Can be temperature dependent. Should be
between -1.0 and 0.5.
Shear Modulus Shear modulus (G). Can be temperature dependent.
Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient Thermal coefficient of expansion (A). Can be temperature
dependent.
Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature
dependent.
Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).
2D/3D Orthotropic Description

Elastic Modulus ii Modulus of elasticity in 1-, 2-, and 3-directions. Can be
temperature dependent.
Poisson Ratio ij Poisson’s ratio for uniaxial loading in the three different directions.
Can be temperature dependent.
Shear Modulus ij In-plane and transverse shear moduli in ij planes. Can be
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ii Thermal coefficients of expansion in the three directions. Can be
dependent.
Main Index
Material Library
2D/3D Anisotropic Description

Stiffness ij Elements of the 6x6 symmetric material property matrix in the
material coordinate system. Can be temperature dependent.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient ij Thermal coefficients of expansion. Can be temperature dependent.
dependent.
Nonlinear Elastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for nonlinear elastic properties. Use this form to define the
nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the MATS1 entry. A stress-strain table defined using the Fields
application can be selected on this form. Based on this information the translator will produce MATS1 of
type NLELAST and TABLES1 entries. This is used primarily for SOL 106 and 129. This option is not
supported by SOL 600. Use an elastoplastic constitutive model instead.
Isotropic Description
Stress/Strain Curve Defines the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve. You must select a
field from the listbox. It can be strain and/or temperature
dependent. Tabular definition of the stress-strain curve via the Fields
application using a material field of strain should follow the
specifications as outlined by Nastran. The first point of the material
field should be the origin and the second point must be at the initial
yield point. This material curve is elastic, meaning that in both
loading and unloading the material behavior follows the stress-strain
curve as defined. It is not recommended that both nonlinear elastic
and elastoplastic constitutive models be active or defined for the
same material. For work hardening, use the Elastoplastic constitutive
model. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.
Hyperelastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for hyperelastic properties. Use this form to define the data
describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP and TABLES1 entries or on
the MATHE entry for SOL 600.
If you select Test Data as the Data Type, the Input Options form reverts to the form used for non-SOL 600
solutions and data is placed on a MATHP entry (Mooney-Rivlin strain energy model). To use test data for
Main Index
Material Library
MATHE/SOL 600 runs, use the Experimental Data Fitting features under the Tools menu to determine the
coefficients and enter them manually.
Test Data - Mooney Rivlin Description
Tension/Compression TAB1 All data provided must reference a strain dependent
Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 field defining the test data. Please refer to the Nastran
Quick Reference Guide for descriptions of each of
Simple Shear Data TAB3 these tabular inputs.
Pure Shear Data TAB4
Pure Volume Compression TABD
If Coefficients is selected as the Data Type, use the form to describe the strain energy potential. The Mooney
Rivlin model can be written out as a MATHP or MATHE entry for SOL 600. Make sure you use the one
that is consistent with the solution to be run. Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce, and Gent models are used for
SOL 600 MATHE entries only.
Mooney Rivlin (MATHP) Description
Distortional Deformation Coefficients, Aij Material constants related to distortional deformation.
The Order of the Polynomical determines the number
of coefficients required as input.
Volumetric Deformation Coefficients, Di Material constants related to volumetric deformation.
The Order of the Polynomial determines the number
of coefficients required as input.
Density RHO Defines the mass density which is an optional
property.
Volumetric Thermal Expansion Coefficient AV Coefficient of volumetric thermal expansion.
Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal
expansion coefficient.
Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.
Mooney Rivlin (MATHE) Description

Strain Energy Function Strain energy densities as a function of the strain
C10, C01, C11, C20, C30 invariants in the material. May vary with temperature
via a defined material field. This option consolidates
several of the hyperelastic material models, including
Neo-Hookean (C10 only), Mooney-Rivlin (C10 &
C01), and Full Third Order Invariant (all
coefficients).
Density RHO Defines the mass density
Main Index
Material Library
Mooney Rivlin (MATHE) Description

Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field.
Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.
Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.
Ogden Description
Density RHO Defines the material mass density.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal
Expansion expansion. This property is optional. May vary with
temperature via a defined material field
Modulus k μ k in the Ogden equation. The number of moduli
required as input is dependent on the Order of the
Polynomial.
Exponent k αk in the Ogden equation. The number of
exponents required as input is dependent on the Order
of the Polynomial.
Foam Description
Density RHO Defines the material mass density.
Modulus n u n in the Foam equation. The number of moduli
required as input is dependent on the Order of the
Polynomial.
Main Index
Material Library
Foam Description
Deviatoric Exponent n αn in the Foam equation. The number of
of the Polynomial.
Volumetric Exponent n βn in the Foam equation. The number of
of the Polynomial.
Arruda- Boyce Description

NKT Chain density times Boltzmann constant times
temperature. May vary with temperature via a defined
material field.
Chain Length Average chemical chain cross length. May vary with
Density RHO This defines the material mass density.
Gent Description
Tensile Modulus Defines standard tension modulus (E). May vary with
*
I 1* Maximum 1st Invariant Defines I1 = I1 – 3 . May vary with
Density RHO This defines the material mass density.
Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion.
Expansion
If you select User Sub. (UELASTOMER) as the Data Type, use the form to describe the User Strain Energy
Function (Model = GHEMi) (SOL 400 only) and data is placed on a MATHE entry. GHEM1, GHEM2,
GHEM3, GHEM4, GHEM5 and GHEM6 models are used for SOL 400 MATHE entries only. This
Main Index
Material Library
material is shown for selection when setting up the UDS Map (See User Defined Services, 334). If UDS Map
exists, the MATUDS entry is written to activate user subroutine uelastomer in conjunction with MATHE.
Foam-Invariants (GHEM1) / Foam-Principals (GHEM2) Description

/ Foam-Invariants (Dev. Split) (GHEM3) / Foam-
Principals (Dev. Split) (GHEM4) / Rubber-Invariant
Based (GHEM5) / Rubber-Principal Stretch (GHEM6)
Density RHO Defines the mass density
Thermal Expansion Coeff Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion.
Reference Temp. TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal expansion
coefficient.
Structural Damp. Coeff. GE Defines the structural damping coefficient.
Elastoplastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for elastoplastic properties. Use this form to define the data
describing plastic behavior of a material. The stress-strain curve data is input via a material property field of
strain and placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. The data input should be the true equivalent stress vs.
equivalent total strain. Other options are placed on the MATEP entry and are valid only for SOL 400 & 600.
Note that the existence of both an elastoplastic and nonlinear elastic constitutive models in the same material
is not recommended.
Stress/Strain Curve Description
Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion:
von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, & Drucker-

Prager supported on MATS1 entry. All others are for
SOL 600 and placed on the MATEP entry. SOL 400
only supports von Mises.
Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic,
Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic
and are placed on the MATS1 entry or MATEP entry
depending on solution sequence and yield function
selected. Hardening rules Power Law, Rate Power Law,
Johnson-Cook, Kumar are available when no Yield
Function is specified. This is used for SOL 600 only
on MATEP entry.
Strain Rate Method Selects an option for strain-rate dependent yield stress
used in SOL 600. Cowper-Symonds requires input of
Denominator C and Inverse Exponent P.
Main Index
Material Library
Stress/Strain Curve Description

Stress/Strain Curve This data must reference a strain dependent field. It
can also be temperature and strain rate dependent.
LIMIT1 in MATS1 determined from supplied tabular
field of stress-strain curve. Data is placed on
TABLES1 entry.
Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager
yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2.
Yield Point Initial yield stress.
Stress at Yield
Beta Parameter beta for parabolic Mohr-Coulomb or
Buyukozturk concrete models. Placed on the MATEP
entry.
10th Cycle Yield Stress Equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress for Oak
Ridge National Labs models (ORNL). Placed on the
MATEP entry.
Denominator C Constants for the Cowper-Symonds strain rate
method.
Inverse Exponent P
Coefficient A / B / C / Bi Coefficient and exponent data for Power Law, Rate
Power Law, Johnson-Cook, and Kumar hardening
Exponent M / N rules.
initial Strain Rate Additional data input for the Johnson-Cook
hardening rule.
Room Temperature
Melt Temperature
Hardening Slope Description

Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion:
von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, & Drucker-

Prager supported on MATS1 entry.
Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic,
Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic
and are placed on the MATS1 entry.
Strain Rate Method No strain rate methods are available for the Hardening
Slope data.
Main Index
Material Library
Hardening Slope Description

Hardening Slope Work hardening slope (H) - slope of stress versus
plastic strain. Defined in units of stress. For an elastic-
perfectly plastic case, use the Perfectly Plastic data
input option.
Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager
yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2.
Perfectly Plastic Description

Yield Function See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. All options
are identical except there must be a yield function
selected.
Hardening Rule None are available since no hardening is possible for
a perfectly plastic material.
Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are available.
All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above.
Rigid Plastic Description

Yield Function No yield functions are available as the material is
defined as rigid and then plastic, so no yield is
possible.
Hardening Rule See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. Valid options
are the Power Law, Power Rate Law, Johnson-Cook,
Kumar, and Piecewise Linear.
Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are available
only if the Piecewise Linear hardening rule is selected.
Stress/Strain Curve Necessary only when not using one of the power law
hardening rules (Piecewise-Linear). This data must
reference a strain dependent field. It can also be
temperature and strain rate dependent. LIMIT1 in
MATS1 determined from supplied tabular field of
stress-strain curve. Data is placed on TABLES1 entry.
All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above. Rigid Plastic is only used in SOL
600 and only for isotropic materials.
Main Index
Material Library
See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about the necessary data for MATS1 and
MATEP entries.
Failure
The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models. Note that this failure model is
for non-SOL 400/600/700 solutions. See Failure 1/2/3 for SOL 400/600/700.
No Composite Failure Theory Description
Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear used
Compression Stress Limit to compute margins of safety in certain elements.
They have no effect on the computational procedures.
Shear Stress Limit
Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotropic materials appear in the
ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8 entry.
Composite Failure Theory: Description
Hill, Hoffman, Tsai-Wu, Maximum

Failure Limits For 2D orthotropic on the MAT8 entry, the limits can
be defined as stress or strain allowables. This is not
applicable to isotropic and anisotropic materials.
Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear are
Compression Stress Limit the same as those defined for non-composite failure.
Shear Stress Limit

Bonding Shear Stress Limit Allowable shear stress of the bonding material. SB
field on the PCOMP entry.
Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotropic materials appear in the
ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8 entry
unless composites are being used in which case the data is written to the PCOMP entry as necessary.
Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3

The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models used in SOL 400 and 600.
Solution sequences other than SOL 400/600/700 should use the Failure constitutive model above instead.
Up to three failure constitutive models can be defined for any one material. Failure 1 must exist in order for
Failure 2 and 3 to be recognized and translated into the proper MATF and MATTF entries. Temperature
dependent properties as defined by material fields are translated onto the MATTF entry. Note also that only
Failure 1 allows for definition of progressive failure. Failure models 2 and 3 take on whatever progressive
failure is defined in Failure 1. Different failure criterion may exist between all three in the same material
definition.
Main Index
Material Library
The table below outlines the allowable properties. All values are real, 0.0, or left blank with no defaults unless
otherwise indicated. Which properties are available is dependent on the Failure Criterion selected. The
following Failure Criteria are available:
• Maximum Stress
• Maximum Strain
• Hill
• Hoffman
• Tsai-Wu
• Hashin
• Puck
• Hashin-Tape
• Hashin-Fabric
• User Sub. UFAIL
If you select User Sub. UFAIL as the Failure Criteria, the form with the Progressive Failure Option and no
properties displays. Use the form to specify the Progressive Failure Option. The data is placed on a MATF
entry. For SOL 400 jobs, this material is shown for selection when setting up the UDS Map (See User Defined
Services, 334). If UDS Map exists, the MATUDS entry is written to activate user subroutine ufail (if
Progressive Failure Option is set to None) / uprogfail (if Progressive Failure Option is set to Progressive Failure
/ Gradual / Immediate) in conjunction with MATF.
Property Description
Progressive Failure Options Progressive failure options are None, standard
Progressive Failure, Gradual or Immediate selective
progressive failure for SOL 600. SOL 400 does not
support progressive failure models and will ignore this
setting if set to anything other than None. Only
failure indices are computed when no progressive
failure is specified. Anisotropic materials do not
support progressive failure.
Tension Stress Limit X / Y /Z Tension, compression, and shear stress or strain limits
Tension Strain Limit X / Y / Z used in the Maximum Stress or Strain, Hill, Hoffman,
and Tsai-Wu failure criteria.
Compression Stress Limit X / Y / Z
Compression Strain Limit X / Y / Z
Shear Stress Limit XY / YZ / ZX

Shear Strain Limit XY / YZ / ZX
Shear Stress Bond (SB) Allowable shear stress of bonding material between
layers for composites only. This is used in SOL 600
only and is ignored for SOL 400.
Main Index
Material Library
Failure Index Failure index used for Hill, Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu
criteria.
Interactive Strength XY / YZ / ZX Interactive strength constants for specified plane used
in the Tsai-Wu criterion.
Max Fiber / Matrix Tension Definable stress limits for Hashin, Puck, Hashin-
Max Fiber / Matrix Compression Tape, and Hashin-Fiber criteria.
Max Tape Fiber Tension

Max Tape Fiber Compression
Max 1st Fiber Tension / Compression

Max 2nd Cross Fiber Tension / Compression
Max Thickness Tension

Max Thickness Compression
Layer Shear Strength Shear stress limits for Hashing, Puck, Hashin-Tape,
Transverse Shear Strength YZ / ZX and Hashin-Fiber criteria.
Slope P12C / P12T / P23C / P23T of Fracture Slopes of the failure envelope used in Puck failure
Envelope criterion.
Deactivate Tension X / Y/ Z If any value other than blank or 0.0 is entered for
Deactivate Compress X / Y / Z progressive failure options Gradual and Immediate,
Deactivate Shear XY / YZ / ZX failed elements are deactivated (placed ICi fields in
MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick Reference
Deactivate Elements Guide for information.
Deactivate Fiber / Matrix Tension

Deactivate Fiber /Matrix Compression
Deactivate Matrix Tension
Deactivate Matrix Compression
Residual Stiffness Factor Reduction fractions or factors. Values can be between
Matrix Compression Factor 0.0 and 1.0. Used only for Gradual or Immediate
Shear Stiffness Factor progressive failure modes (placed on Ai fields in
E33 Fiber Failure Factor MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick Reference
Shear Fiber Failure Factor Guide for more information.
Creep
The Input Properties form displays the following for creep models.
Tabular Input Description
Data defined by the use of this form to define the primary stiffness, primary damping, and secondary
damping for a creep model with tabular input appears on the CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only
isotropic materials use this data input method.
Main Index
Material Library
Creep Law ijk Description

Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available appears on the
CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only isotropic materials use this creep definition.
User Sub.(CRPLAW)
Use this form to define the creep law using user subroutine crplaw for SOL 400 runs. This data is written to
the MATVP entry in primary format. For SOL 400 jobs, this material is shown for selection when setting up
the UDS Map (See User Defined Services, 334). If UDS Map exists, the MATUDS entry is written to activate
user subroutine crplaw in conjunction with MAT1.
MATPV Description
Use this form to define either the coefficients and exponents for creep model or provide tabular field data
to define Temperature vs. Creep Strain, Creep Strain Rate vs. Stress, Strain Rate vs. Creep Strain, or Time
vs. Creep Strain in SOL 600 runs. This data is written to the MATVP entry. If tabular data is provided, this
data is written to TABLEM1 entries. It is not recommended to mix the exponents and coefficients and
tabular data. Use one or the other.
Hypoelastic
The Input Properties form displays the following to define user-defined generic material properties for
hypoelastic material models in SOL 400 only. The data is placed on MATUSR entry. This material is shown
for selection when setting up the UDS Map (See User Defined Services, 334). If UDS Map exists, the MATUDS
entry is written to activate user subroutine hypela2 in conjunction with MATUSR.
Coordinate System (IPREF) Coordinate System (IPREF) options are Isotropic and User Defined
Kinematic Flag (IKINEM) Kinematic Flag (IKINEM) options are Gradient Only, Gradient and
Rotation, Gradient and Stretch Ratio, All Input, All Input (mid increment)
and All Input (end increment)
Thermal Expansion Coeff Thermal coefficient of expansion (A1). Can be temperature dependent. Not
show if coordinate system is User Defined.
(A1) show if coordinate system is Isotropic.
Structural Damping Coeff Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature dependent.
Main Index
Material Library
Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear used to compute margins
Compression Stress Limit of safety in certain elements. They have no effect on the computational
procedures.
Shear Stress Limit
User Defined
The Input Properties form displays the following to define user-defined generic material properties for user
defined material models in SOL 400 only. The data is placed on MATUSR entry. This material is shown for
selection when setting up the UDS Map (See User Defined Services, 334). If UDS Map exists, the MATUDS
entry is written to activate user subroutine umat in conjunction with MATUSR.
Coordinate System (IPREF) Coordinate System (IPREF) options are Isotropic and User Defined
Kinematic Flag (IKINEM) Kinematic Flag (IKINEM) options are Gradient Only, Gradient and
Rotation, Gradient and Stretch Ratio, All Input, All Input (mid increment)
and All Input (end increment)
show if coordinate system is User Defined.
Structural Damping Coeff Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature dependent.
Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear used to compute margins
Compression Stress Limit of safety in certain elements. They have no effect on the computational
procedures.
Shear Stress Limit
Viscoelastic
The Input Properties form displays the following for viscoelastic models. This material model is only used in
SOL 600 runs and all data is placed on the MATVE, MATTVE entries. Linear elastic or hyperelastic
constitutive models for isotropic or anisotropic materials must exist in addition to the viscoelastic model.
Main Index
Material Library
Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN),

Spot Weld (Top and Bottom Sheet), Seam Weld (Stiff and Flexible)
These constitutive models are used for defining fatigue material properties in order to run an MSC Nastran
Embedded Fatigue analyses using statics (SOL 101), normal modes (SOL 103), modal transient response
(SOL 112), and modal or direct frequency response (SOLs 111 or 108). All parameters defined here are
placed on the MATFTG bulk data entry.
With the Stress-Life (SN) constitutive model you can:
 Derive S-N curves by specifying the type of metal, the ultimate tensile strength (UTS), and Young’s
Modulus (defined in the Linear constitutive model) (SOL 101/103/112 only)
 Enter standard parameters to define an S-N curve (All SOLutions)
 Enter Bastenaire parameters to define an S-N curve (SOLs 101/103/112 only)
 Tabularly define multiple S-N curves by the selection of a pre-defined field. See Fields Create (Material
Property, Tabular Input) (Ch. 6) in the Patran Reference Manual). One or more tabular S-N curves can
be defined that were derived from either constant mean stress or constant R-Ratio (minimum
stress/maximum stress). The fields must be of type Life(N) as the independent variable. Also Haigh
curves can be defined using the same mechanism where each curve is derived at a constant life value.
Although the field in this case must also be of type Life(N), the y-values are defined as mean stress vs.
x-values of stress amplitude. The Value 1, 2, 3, etc. fields are used to input the constant mean,
constant R-ratio, or constant life value at which the selected field (curve) was created. For SOLs 108
and 111, only a single tabular curve can be defined at a zero mean stress.
 Enter MMPDS parameters to define S-N curve (SOLs 108 and 111 only)
With the Strain-Life (eN) constitutive model you can:
 Derive strain-life (ε-N) and cyclic stress-strain (ε−σ) curves by specifying the type of metal, the
ultimate tensile strength (UTS), and Young’s Modulus (defined in the Linear constitutive model).
(SOLs 101/103/112 only).
 Enter standard parameters to define an the strain-life and cyclic stress-strain curves (All SOLutions)
With the Spot Weld Top and Bottom Sheet constitutive models (SOLs 101/103/112 only) you can:
 Define Standard S-N curves for fatigue analysis of spot welds by specifying the type of metal (steel or
aluminum), the ultimate tensile strength (UTS), and Young’s Modulus (defined in the Linear
constitutive model).
 Manually enter standard parameters to define an S-N curve for the top and bottom sheets manually
 Please note the following: Three (3) S-N curves are allowed for fatigue analysis of spot welds. One to
define the spot weld nugget (center), and one each for the top and bottom sheet. If all locations use
the same S-N curve, only the Stress-Life constitutive model needs to be defined. If the nugget and
top/bottom sheet S-N curves differ, then it is necessary to define both the nugget as a standard
Stress-Life constitutive model and the sheet(s) as a Spot Weld Top/Bottom Sheet constitutive
model(s). If the top sheet is defined but not the bottom, or vice-versa, both take on the defined
definition. If top and/or bottom are defined, but not a standard Stress-Life constitutive model for
the nugget, then the nugget takes on the properties of the top sheet (or bottom if top is not defined).
With the Seam Weld Stiff and Flexible constitutive models (SOLs 101/103/112 only) you can:
Main Index
Material Library
 Define Standard S-N curves for fatigue analysis of seam welds by specifying the type of metal (steel
or aluminum), the ultimate tensile strength (UTS), and Young’s Modulus (defined in the Linear
constitutive model).
 Manually enter standard parameters to define an S-N curve for the stiff and flexible curves manually
 Please note the following: Two (2) S-N curves are allowed for fatigue analysis of seam welds. One to
define the stiff (bending ratio=0) and one for the flexible (bending ratio=1) properties. The analysis
interprets between the two based on the actual bending ratio. If both are the same, only the Stress-
Life constitutive model needs to be defined. If one is defined but not the other, then the undefined
properties are taken from the standard Stress-Life constitutive model. If the stiff definition is defined
but not the other, or vice-versa, but no standard Stress-Life constitutive model is defined, then the
same properties are used for both.
For all these methods of input, a conversion factor can be supplied. This conversion factor operates only on
the stress parameters of the defined curves and is used to allow input of the parameters on these constitutive
models in stress units other than the consistent model units. For example, if the consistent model units are
in PSI (for stresses), then a factor off 145.0377 could be entered that would allow the stress parameters to
then be entered in MPa. (Note that this only applies to parameters on these constitutive models and not for,
say, the linear constitutive model where E is defined.)
In order to run a successful MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis, at least one of the above constitutive
model must be defined for the elements of interest. An output request for fatigue life must be made (see Output
Requests, 449). An S-N (standard, spot or seam weld) or ε-N analysis must be turned on when setting up the
analysis (see Solution Parameters, 276 for Linear Static, Normal Modes, or Transient Response). And a cyclic
loading sequence must be defined (see Subcase Select, 486) above the subcase level. Optionally, various fatigue
parameters can be defined as element properties such as surface finish (see Element Properties, 97) for shell and
solid elements only.
For more detail on how to set up and perform an MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis using Patran,
please see the MSC Nastran Fatigue Analysis User’s Guidefor time domain SOLutions 101/103/112. See the MSC
Nastran Embedded Vibration Fatigue User’s Guide for frequency domain solutions SOLs 108 and 111. For details
on the MATFTG entry, please see the MATFTG (p. 2212) in the .
Please note the following limitation:
 MMPDS is only available for frequency domain SOLutions 108 and 111 and will fail if used with
time domain solutions.
 MMPDS values A1-A4 must be entered in KSI units. Proper conversion is done internally to MSC
Nastran. The Conversion Factor (CNVRT) has no affect on these values and only affects Yield Stress
(YS) and Ultimate Tensile Stress (UTS) values on the same input form.
 Frequency domain SOLutions 108 and 111 do not use the Material (CODE) option. This should be
set to None. The CODE and any non-applicable properties will be ignored if set to anything else.
Only those properties shown under the None option for Material (CODE) are applicable for
frequency domain SOLutions.
 Time domain SOLutions 101/103/112 use S-N and ε-N curves defined with Standard Parameters as
stress or strain Range only. Frequency domain SOLs 108/111 can define the S-N or e-N curves
using Standard Parameters as Range or Amplitude.
Main Index
Material Library
Cohesive
The Input Properties form displays the following for viscoelastic models. This material model is only used in
SOL 400 runs and all data is placed on the MCOHE entry. This material is used with interface elements only
(PCOHE/CIFQUAD/CIFQDX/CIFHEX/CIFPENT).
There are three standard models available, which are discussed below.
The strain measures of the interface elements are the relative displacements between the top and the bottom
edges (2D) or faces (3D). In 2D, there are two strain components: one normal and one shear. In 3D, there
are three components: one normal and two shear. The relative displacements are combined in an equivalent
value and the constitutive behavior of the interface elements is defined in terms of an equivalent traction as
a function of the equivalent relative displacement. The area below the traction-displacement curve is called
the cohesive energy (which is also called the critical energy release rate). The names of the three standard
cohesive material models refer to the shape of the traction-displacement curve. They have in common that
the initial response is elastic or reversible and upon reaching a critical opening displacement, the response is
irreversible, which is manifested by a reducing traction and increasing damage in the interface elements
(delamination). The models have thefollowing characteristics:
Exponential model: entirely defined by an exponential function; the necessary material properties are the
cohesive energy (Gc) and the critical opening displacement (vc).
Linear model: both the reversible and the irreversible part of the traction-displacement curve are linear; the
necessary material properties are the cohesive energy (Gc), the critical opening displacement (vc) and the
maximum opening displacement (vm), beyond which the traction is reduced to zero.
Linear-exponential model: the reversible part of the traction-displacement curve is linear, where the
irreversible part is described by an exponential function; the necessary material properties are the cohesive
energy (Gc), the critical opening displacement (vc) and the exponential decay factor (q).
Since the exponential model has only two basic parameters, it does not offer the possibility to shift the critical
opening displacement without changing the maximum traction (assuming that the cohesive energy remains
constant). The other models do offer this possibility, where the irreversible behavior of the linear-exponential
model is based on a continuously differentiable curve.
Sometimes cohesive materials are defined by the cohesive energy and the maximum traction (tc), instead of
the critical or maximum opening displacement. See the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Manual for the
relationships to convert such data. Note that for the linear model one still has to select the critical opening
displacement
Note that for the linear model one still hs to select the critical opening displacment and for the linear-
exponential model the decay factor. They can be used to influence the reversible response.
Main Index
Material Library
Models Description
Bilinear Constitutive Models for Cohesive Material.
Exponential The "User Sub.(UCOHESIVE)" model is applicable

for MSC Nastran (SOL400) Preference. If selected, the
Linear-Exponential MATUDS entry for MTYPE - MCOHE and UNAME
- ucohes is written. The data is placed on MCOHE
User Sub. (UCOHESIVE) entry with MODEL set to -1. This material is shown
for selection when setting up the UDS Map (See User
Defined Services, 334). If UDS Map exists, the MATUDS
entry is written to activate user subroutine ucohes in
conjunction with MCOHE.
Stiffness Matrix Description

Secant Only Secant is currently valid for MSC Nastran.
Tangent The contribution to the global system matrix can be

based on either a modified tangent or secant matrix.
The former will usually result faster convergence, but
may cause a non-positive definite matrix if the
irreversible part of the traction-displacement curve is
reached.
Viscous Energy Dissipation Description

No or Yes Since upon the onset of delamination the FE analysis
may become instable, one can activate some viscous
damping. The idea of this damping model is that an
extra viscous traction is added to the regular traction.
This viscous traction is a function of the rate of the
equivalent displacement, a reference value of the rate of
the equivalent displacement, the maximum traction
and the viscous energy factor:
Reference Rate Description

None If Viscous Energy Dissipation is "No", then this value
is "None".
Auto
The reference value can be entered by the user, but can
User Defined also be calculated by the program as the largest relative
displacement rate in any interface element as long as the
response is reversible.
Main Index
Material Library
Fully Damages Elements Description

Keep This is currently not applicable for MSC Nastran.
If an interface element is fully damaged, so if all the
integration points have reached the maximum damage,
one can deactivate this element. In a contact analysis,
this implies that the outer boundary of a contact body
is newly determined. The user can decide to either leave
deactivated interface elements on the post file or to
exclude them from the post file.
Input Parameters Description

Cohesive Energy This can also refer a Temperature/Strain/Strain-Rate
field.
Critical Opening Displacement Enter a opening displacmenet values
Maximum Opening Displacement Used for "Bilinear" model only
Shear-Normal Stress Ratio The ratio of the maximum stress in shear and the
maximum stress in tension
Compression Stiffening Factor Stiffening factor in compression
Viscous Energy Dissipation Factor for viscous energy dissipation. This is activated
only if, Viscous Energy Dissipation option is set to
"Yes".
Reference Rate Reference rate of relative displacement. This is used if
Viscous Energy Dissipation option is set to "Yes" and
Reference Rate option is set to "User Defined"
Exponential Decay Factor Used for Linear-Exponential model only
Thermal Conductance This can also refer a Temperature/Strain/Strain-Rate
field. Used for thermal/coupled analysis only.
Composite
The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic properties of materials. All the
composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a homogeneous elastic material in
MSC Nastran.
When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this material is then referenced in a
“Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, a PCOMP entry is created. However, if this
material is referenced by a different type of element property region, for example, “Revised or Standard
Homogeneous Plate,” then the equivalent homogeneous material properties are used instead of the laminate
Main Index
Material Library
lay-up data. Only materials created through the Laminated Composite option should be referenced by a
“Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region. Refer to Composite Materials Construction
(p. 108) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Laminated
This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form,
Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to define the laminate
lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is referenced in a “Revised or Standard Laminate
Plate” element property region, then an MSC Nastran PCOMP entry containing the lay-up data is written.
If the resulting material is referenced by any other type of element property region, the equivalent
homogeneous properties of the material are used
The difference between the "Total" option and the "Total - %thicknesses" option is that the former requires
that the user give actual thickness values of each ply and the latter requires each ply thickness to be given as
Main Index
Element Properties
a percentage of the total layup thickness. This is the prefered method when applying the composite material
to solid (CHEXA) elements or 2D solid element (axisymmetric, plane strain).
Element Properties
The Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the Patran main form,
is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating element properties. The selections made on
the Element Properties menu will determine which element property form appears, and ultimately, which
MSC Nastran element will be created.
Main Index
Element Properties
The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and details of all the element
property definitions supported by the Patran MSC Nastran Preference.
Element Properties Form

This form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There are four option menus on
this form. Each will determine which MSC Nastran element type will be created and which property forms
will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this section. For a full description of this
form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 63) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Main Index
Element Properties
Main Index
Element Properties
Table 2-24
Entry Description
Object Use this option menu to define the element’s dimension. The options are:
0D (point elements)
1D (bar elements)
2D (tri and quad elements)
3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements)

Type This option menu depends on the selection made in the Dimension option
menu. Use this menu to define the general type of element, such as:
Mass versus Grounded Spring
Shell versus 2D_Solid

Expand Property Select This button is used to quickly edit an element property; for example change
the shell thickness.
Options These option menus may or may not be present, and their contents depend
heavily on the selections made in Dimension and Type. See Table 2-25 for
more help.
Input Properties... This is used to specify element properties; for example shell thickness, or
material orientation.
Select Application Region... This is used to specify the region (area) of geometry or elements that are to
be included in the property definition.
The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Structural.
Main Index
Element Properties
Table 2-25 Structural Element Property Options

Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
0D  Mass  Coupled page 105
 Grounded page 105
 Lumped page 106
 Grounded Spring
page 107
 Grounded Damper
page 107
 Grounded Bush  Grounded page 108
Main Index
Element Properties

1D  Beam  General Section  Standard page 110
 P-Formulation page 115
 Linear/Cubic Closed Section page 116
 Linear-Shear page 116
 Curved w/General Section page 117
 Curved w/Pipe Section page 118
 Lumped Section page 120
 Tapered Section  Standard page 121
 P-element page 123
 General Section  Standard page 124
 Linear/Cubic Closed Section page 126
 Linear/Cubic Open Section page 126
 Linear-Shear page 127
 Rod  General Section  Standard page 127
 CONROD page 128
 Pipe Section page 129
 Spring page 130
 Damper  Scalar page 130
 Viscous page 131
 Gap  Adaptive page 131
 Non-Adaptive page 131
1D Mass page 133
PLOTEL page 134
Bush  Scalar page 134
 2D Linear/Non
Linear page 136
Spot Weld Connector page 138
Fastener Connector page 138
Main Index
Element Properties

2D  Shell  Thin  Homogeneous  Standard page 141
 Revised page 143
 Linear Discrete
Kirchhoff page 147
 Laminate  Standard page 148
 Equivalent Section  Standard page 152
 Thick  Standard page 158
 Reduced Integration page 160
 Field Point Mesh page 161
 Bending Panel  Standard page 161
 2D-Solid  Plane Strain  Standard page 166
 Reduced page 167
 Hyperelastic page 170
 Laminated Composite page 171
 Incompressible page 171
 Interface page 172
 Plane Stress  Standard page 173
Main Index
Element Properties

2D  2D-Solid  Axisymmetric  Standard page 176
 Twist page 177
 Laminated Composite page 179
 PLPLANE page 180
 Acoustic Infinite page 182
 Membrane  Standard page 183
 Shear Panel
3D  Solid  Homogeneous  Standard page 189
 Solid Shell page 193
 Laminate page 195
 Gasket
 Body Pair  Geometric page 197
 Physical page 199
Main Index
Element Properties
0D Element Properties
0D - Coupled Point Mass (CONM1)
This describes the Input Properties available from the Element Properties form when the following options
are chosen.
Action Dimension Type Option(s) Topologies
Create 0D Mass Coupled Point/1
Modify
Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric point
of the structural model. This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that were
not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these
properties.
Prop Name Description

Mass Orientation Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. The value is a
CID/CG reference to an existing coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with
the X-Y-Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a non rectangular
coordinate system is specified, the system will be evaluated into a local
rectangular system, which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This
property is the CID field on the CONM1 entry. This property is optional.
Mass Component i,j Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on the CONM1
entry. These properties can either be real values or references to existing field
definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at least one must
be defined.
0D - Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1)

are chosen.
Create 0D Mass Grounded Point/1
Modify
Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of the
structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node is defined to be grounded.
Main Index
Element Properties

Mass Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied. This is
the M field on the PMASS entry. This property can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Dof at Node 1 Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to. This property
can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1
field on the CMASS1 entry. This property is required.
0D - Lumped Point Mass (CONM2)

are chosen.
Create 0D Mass Lumped Point/1
Modify
Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a geometric point of the
structural model.

Mass Defines the translational mass value to be used. This is the M field on the
CONM2 entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is required.
Mass Orientation Defines the orientation of the 1-2-3 axes of the mass matrix. This is a reference
CID/GG to an existing coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be aligned with the X-Y-
Z axes of the specified coordinate system. If a nonrectangular coordinate
system is specified, the system will be evaluated into a local rectangular system,
which is then used to orient the mass matrix. This is the CID field on the
CONM2 entry. If the Value Type is set to Vector then the components of the
vector define the center of gravity of the mass in the basic coordinate system
and the field for CID is translated as -1. This property is optional.
Mass Offset Defines an offset from the specified node to where the lumped mass actually
is to exist in the structural mode. This vector is defined in the Mass
Orientation coordinate system. Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the
CONM2 entry. This property is optional.
Inertia i,j Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped mass. These
properties are the Iij fields on the CONM2 record. These values can be either
real values or references to existing field definitions. These values are optional.
Main Index
Element Properties
0D - Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D)

are chosen.
Create 0D Grounded Spring Point/1
Modify
Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS property. This defines a
scalar spring element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other node is defined
to be grounded.

Spring Constant Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the
PELAS entry. This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property is required.
Damping Coefficient Defines what damping is to be included. This is the GE field on the PELAS
entry. This property can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property is optional.
Stress Coefficient Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the stresses within
the spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can either be
a real value, or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Dof at Node 1 Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be
set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the
C1 field on the CELAS1 entry. This property is required.
User Def CS Number Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit
Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional.
0D - Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D)

are chosen.
Create 0D Grounded Damper Point/1
Modify
Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP property. This
defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other
node is defined to be grounded.
Main Index
Element Properties

Damping Coefficient Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This property is the B field
on the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing
field definition. This property is optional.
Dof at Node 1 Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This property
can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and defines the setting for the C1 field
on the CDAMP1 entry. This property is required.
User Def CS Number Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit
Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional.
0D - Grounded Bush (CBUSH/PBUSH)

This describes the Input Properties available from the Element Properties form and the following options are
chosen.
Create 1D Bush Grounded Bar/2
Modify
This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view all
of these properties. This creates CBUSH/PBUSH entries.
Bush Orientation System CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The
element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system
principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate
system, the grid point specified locates the system. If CID = 0, the
basic coordinate system is used.
Spring Constant i Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom.
Stiff. Freq Depend i This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and
can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition
for defining stiffness vs. frequency.
Stiff. Force/Disp i Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of
freedom of the spring-damper system.
Damping Coefficient i Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of
Damp. Freq Depend i freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency
Structural Damping Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient
Struc. Damp Freq Depend (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an
existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.
Main Index
Element Properties

Stress Recovery Translation Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed by
Stress Recovery Rotation multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element
forces.
Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by
Strain Recovery Rotation multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element
strains.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Beam - General Section (CBAR) - Standard Formulation
are chosen.
Action Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Topologies
Create 1D Beam General Section Standard Bar 2
Modify Formulation
Use this form to create CBAR elements with a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO entry will be generated
if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam element in the structural model. If used in
a SOL 400 run, a PBARN1 entry may also be written with the LC option written to the BEHi field.
Note: .Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this property
set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an asterisk (*) in
the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags for all elements in
the property set.
Most of the beam properties that appear on all beam/bar input property forms are listed here. Only those
applicable to the element type being created will appear on the input properties form.
Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library
Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions

(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If
Dimensions is choosen, the MSC Nastran’s built-in section library
(Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, (for the standard Beam
Library) or PBRSECT/PBMSECT (for an Arbitrary section) will be
used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard
bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the
beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the
Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later.
Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in
the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from
the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines
the value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR/PBEAM entry.
This property is required.
Main Index
Element Properties

Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any
cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY
plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines
the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR/CBEAM
entry. This property is required.
Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:
Vector – Specified using a vector
Node Id – Specified using an existing node in the beam XY plane
When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran
global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0
1 0 Coord 5>).
Reference Coordinates Specifies the MSC Nastran coordinate system in which the
bar/beam orientation vector will be written to the CBAR/CBEAM
entry:
Analysis - Displacement Coordinate System at GA
Coord 0 - Basic Coordinate System
If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the first position of the

OFFT value on the CBAR/CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a
B will be written.
Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect

how the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written
to the CBAR/CBEAM entry.
Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the
Offset @ Node 2 beam cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These
properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,
W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBAR/CBEAM
entry.
These properties are optional.
Vector – Specified using a vector
This is the only method available. The Reference Coordinate

System controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.
Main Index
Element Properties

Reference Coordinates Specifies the MSC Nastran coordinate system in which the offset
vectors will be written to the CBAR/CBEAM entry and how the
vector input will be interpreted in Patran:
Analysis - Displacement Coordinate Systems at GA and GB
Element - Element Coordinate System
If Analysis is specified, a G will be written to the second or third

position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the
vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some
other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>).
If Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third
position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the
vector will be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.
Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate
Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ,
or any combination. These properties are used to remove
connections between the node and selected degrees of freedom at
the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create
a pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released.
Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR/CBEAM
record. These properties are optional.
Note that if pinned DOF releases are defined within a property set,
but the end nodes of the beams are connected to beams of a
different property set, then no pinned DOFs will be written for
those beams (PA or PB will be left blank). To override this and
force the pin flags to be written per the property set, use an "*" after
the specification for the DOFs. (This may be problematic if the
property sets defined different pin DOFs.) For example, if rotation
about the 2nd DOF is to be freed, specify "RY*." These values
must be typed into the data box. Although there is a pull down
menu next to the data box showing the valid selections, you will
have to type the values in if more than one DOF or the "*" is to be
specified. Specifying the "*" by itself does nothing.
Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field
on the PBAR/PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or
a reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Inertia i,j Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section.
These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR/PBEAM entry.
These values can be either real values or references to existing field
definitions. These values are optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the
PBAR/PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on
Shear Stiff, Z the PBAR/PBEAM entry. These values can be either real value or
references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1
Shear Relief Z and S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties
are optional.
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR/PBEAM entry. This
value can be either a real value or reference to an existing field
NSM Inertia @ Node 1 Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length
NSM Inertia @ Node 2 about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the
element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the
PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references
to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of NSM @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the
Z of NSM @ Node 1 location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in
Y of NSM @ Node 2 the beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A),
Z of NSM @ Node 2
M2(A), M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These
values can be either real values or references to existing field
definitions. These properties are optional.
Y of Point C Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates
Z of Point C of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as
Y of Point D defined in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1,
Z of Point D
Y of Point E C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These
Z of Point E values can be either real values or references to existing field
Y of Point F definitions. These properties are optional.
Z of Point F
Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the
Z of NA @ Node 1 location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam
Y of NA @ Node 2 cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A),
Z of NA @ Node 2
N1(B), and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be
either real values or references to existing field definitions. These
properties are optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

[Contact Beam Radius] This allows the equivalent radius for beam-to-beam contact to be
different for each beam cross section. The MSC Nastran entry
BCBMRAD is written to the .bdf file. The BCBMRAD entry format
is different for SOL 400 and SOL 600. You must turn on beam-to-
beam contact under the Analysis application (contact parameters /
contact detection) for this parameter to be written.
Section Integration Used only for Sol 400. Value is written to the SECT field of the
PBARN1/PBEMN1 entry.
Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values
Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if
not specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate
based on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive
model and/or if the elements are contained in a contact body. If
appropriate, the PBARN1/PBEMN1 entry is written for this
property set. Large Strain forces the PBARN1/PBEMN1 entry to be
written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written,
regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage
of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on
the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See
Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 407.
Create Sections Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user
I C L ..., Beam Library to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type
and inputing dimensions.
Weld Nugget Diameter These optional properties are used for defining spot weld
Top/Bot Sheet Thickness parameters (weld diameter and connecting sheet thicknesses) in an
MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analyses of spot welds for time
domain solutions using statics (SOL 101), normal modes (SOL
103), or modal transient response (SOL 112). All parameters
defined here are placed on the PFTG bulk data entry. For the sheet
thickness, enter two values separated by spaces. If only one is
provided both top and bottom thickness retain the same value for
both. If not defined, the thicknesses are determined from the
connecting sheet properties. If the diameter is left blank, a diameter
is determined through a look up table based on the minimum
thickness of the connecting sheets.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - P-Formulation

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam General Section P-Formulation Bar 2/3/4
Modify
Use this form to create CBEAM elements with a PBEAM or PBEAML property along with the P-formulation
entries ADAPT and PVAL. This form defines a simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive,
p-element analysis.
Note: .Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this property
set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an asterisk (*) in
the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags for all elements in
the property set.
Please see the description of properties listed in 1D - Beam - General Section (CBAR) - Standard Formulation, 110 for
the generic properties needed for any beam/bar definition. Additional properties for P-formulation are listed
here.
Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within
elements. Each contains a list of three integers referring to the
Maximum P-orders directions defined by the P--order Coordinate System (default
elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The
adaptive analysis process will limit the polynomial orders to the
values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on
the PVAL entry.
P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the
CID field on the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in
the error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive
cycle to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is
complete. By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL
field on the ADAPT entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate
in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate
in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is
the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
1D - Beam - General Section (CBAR) - Linear/Cubic Closed Section

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam General Section Linear/Cubic Bar 2
Modify Closed Section
Use this form to create CBAR elements with a PBAR or PBARL property and associated PBARN1 to define
nonlinear, large displacement, large strain behavior for use in SOL 400. A PBARN1 entry is written with LCC
option written to the BEHi field. A CBARAO entry will be generated if any Station Distances are specified.
This defines a simple beam element in the structural model.
the generic properties needed for any beam/bar definition. Properties specific to defining this beam behavior
are listed here.
PBARN1/PBEMN1 entry. Asmeared cross section or a numerically
integrated cross section can be defined.
1D - Beam - General Section (CBAR) - Linear-Shear

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam General Section Linear-Shear Bar 2
Modify
Use this form to create CBAR elements with a PBAR or PBARL property and associated PBARN1 to define
nonlinear, large displacement, large strain behavior for use in SOL 400. A PBARN1 entry is written with LS
option written to the BEHi field. A CBARAO entry will be generated if any Station Distances are specified.
This defines a simple beam element in the structural model.
Main Index
Element Properties
are listed here.
1D - Beam - Curved with General Section (CBEND)

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam Curved w/General Section Bar 2
Modify
Use this form to create CBEND elements with a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam element
of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define the radius of the bend and the
orientation of that curvature.This element always uses the method of defining the center of curvature point
(GEOM=1). An alternate property of the Curved Pipe element also exists.
Properties specific to defining this beam behavior are listed here.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the
database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using
the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting of the
MID field on the PBEND entry. This property is required.
Center of Curvature Vector Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. It is done by either
specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a
node. The CBEND element in MSC Nastran has several ways to define
the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. This
defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry.
Radial Bar Offset Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam cross
Axial Bar Offset section. These properties define the settings of the RC and ZC fields on
the PBEND entry. These values can either be real values or references to
existing field definitions. This property is optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property is the A field
on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These
Inertia 2,2 properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values can
either be real values or references to existing field definitions. These values
are optional.
Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the
PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to an
existing field definition. This property is optional.
Shear Stiff, R Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2
Shear Stiff, Z fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or
Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either
real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Radial NA Offset Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end nodes.
Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the center of
curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN field on the
PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
R of Point C These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z
Z of Point C coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as
R of Point D defined in the local element coordinate system. These properties are the
Z of Point D
R of Point E C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the PBEND entry. These
Z of Point E values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.
R of Point F These properties are optional.
Z of Point F
1D - Beam - Curved with Pipe Section (CBEND)

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam Curved W/Pipe Section Bar 2
Use this form to create CBEND elements with a PBEND property. This defines a curved pipe or elbow
element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as part of the element definition because,
for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.
Main Index
Element Properties
Properties specific to defining this beam behavior are listed here.

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. Defines the MID field on the
PBEND entry. This property is required.
Center of Curvature Vector Defines the center of curvature of the pipe bend. This can be done
either by specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by
referencing a node. The CBEND element in MSC Nastran has
several ways to define the radius of the pipe bend and the orientation
of that curvature. Defines the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0
fields on the CBEND entry. This element in Patran always uses the
method of defining the center of curvature point (GEOM=1). This
value is required.
Radial Bar Offset Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipe
Axial Bar Offset cross section. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry.
These values can either be real values or references to existing field
Mean Pipe Radius Indicates the distance from the centroid of the pipe cross section to
mid-wall location. This is the r field on the PBEND entry. This value
can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
Pipe Thickness Indicates the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the t field on the
PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is required.
Internal Pipe Pressure Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P field
on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a
the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length
of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value
can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
This property is optional.
Stress Intensification Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This is
a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the PBEND
entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General, ASME, and
Welding Council.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Beam - Lumped Section (CBEAM/PBCOMP)

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam Lumped Section Bar 2
Use this form to create CBEAM elements with a PBCOMP property. This defines a beam element of constant
cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.The orientation vector can be defined as either a
vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane.
are listed here.
using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the
MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.
Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on
the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can
be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
property is optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on
Shear Stiff, Z the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Y of NSM Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the
Z of NSM location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the
beam cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1
and M2 fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Symmetry Option Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the lumped
areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string parameter.
The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y Symmetry, Z
Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting of the
SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Ys of Lumped Areas Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined
Zs of Lumped Areas in the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the
Yi and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real
values. These properties are optional.
Area Factors Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped
area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If
the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all
be scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values for
the Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real
values. These properties are optional.
1D - Beam - Tapered Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam Tapered Section Standard Bar 2
Modify Formulation
Use this form to create CBEAM elements with a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a beam element
with varying cross sections. The difference between defining a tapered section and a constant section is the
ability to define station locations along the beam and various values at those stations as a real list. Real lists
are entered by separating values in the databoxes by spaces or commas. There should be the same number of
values in each data box corresponding to the number of stations. If less values are entered than the number
of stations, the missing values will take on the last value entered. A general section beam can also be used to
define a tapered section beam. See 1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 124.
Main Index
Element Properties
are listed here.
Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section
properties will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of
the beam length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1.
These values define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM
record. These values are real values. These properties are optional.
Enter them as a list each value being separated by a space.
Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property defines
the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be
either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition or
entered as a list. This property is required.
Inertias i,j Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section.
These defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM
entry. These values are real values entered as a list. These properties
are optional.
Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the
J fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each
station location. This property is optional.
Ys of C Points Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the
Zs of C Points shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1,
Ys of D points D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of
Zs of D Points
Ys of E Points real values, one for each station location. These properties are
Zs of E Points optional.
Ys of F Points
Zs of F Points
Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material
of the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the
beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This is a
list of real values, one for each station location. This property is
optional.
Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2
Shear Stiff, Z fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or
references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.
Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and
Shear Relief Z S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values
or references to existing field definitions. These properties are
optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These
Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry.
These values can be either real values or references to existing field
Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the
Z of NA @ Node 1 location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam
Y of NA @ Node 2 cross section coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B),
Z of NA @ Node 2
and N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real
optional.
1D - Beam - Tapered Section (CBEAM) - P-Formulation

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam Tapered Section P- Formulation Bar 2
Modify
Use this form to create CBEAM elements with a PBEAM or PBEAML property along with the P-formulation
entries ADAPT and PVAL. This defines a beam element with varying cross sections. The difference between
defining a tapered section and a constant section is the ability to define station locations along the beam and
various values at those stations as a real list. Real lists are entered by separating values in the databoxes by
spaces or commas. There should be the same number of values in each data box corresponding to the number
of stations. If less values are entered than the number of stations, the missing values will take on the last value
entered.
the generic properties needed for any beam/bar definition.
Additional properties for P-formulation are listed described in 1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - P-
Formulation, 115.
Property values that can accept real lists for definig the taper of the beam are described in 1D - Beam - Tapered
Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 121.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Modify (CBEAM) Formulation
Use this form to create CBEAM elements with a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a beam element
with varying cross sections. This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due
to torsion. The capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the “Tapered
Section” formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently. If SOL 400 is used
and non-linear formulations set, a PBEMN1 entry is written with BEAM option written to the BEHi field
and LC written to the INTi field.
the generic properties needed for any beam/bar definition. Also see 1D - Beam - Tapered Section (CBEAM) -
Standard Formulation, 121 for a description of defining tapered beam properties. Properties specific to defining
this beam behavior are listed here.
Warping Option This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping
SPOINTs of unmatched ends within the application region (see
continuity rules above). The choices available include
“A free B free”, “A fixed B fixed”, “A free B fixed”, “A fixed B free”,
or “None”. The choice of “None” is used to disable warping
altogether for the current element property set, in which case no
SPOINTs will be generated or constrained. Only unmatched ends
within the application region will be eligible for constraining, and
whether or not a constraint is applied will depend on the option
selected, and whether the unmatched end is “End A” or “End B” of
its beam element. If no selection is made for this element property,
“A free B free” is selected by default.
Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MSC Nastran SPOINTs to contain the warping degrees of
freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the Patran database, and there is no way to recover any
results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck translation, and provide the means to
communicate to MSC Nastran the continuity and constraint properties of the warping degrees of freedom
in the model. These attributes of continuity and constraint are implied in the Patran database through the
composition of the element properties application region and the set of options selected. These continuity
and constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This connection of these
attributes to the composition of the application region is new since Patran 2001r3, and represents a change
in behavior from previous versions of Patran. The general rules of implied continuity are as follows.
Main Index
Element Properties
1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous if a GRID ID at an end
of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends of the other beam element. If a
third beam element in the same application region also contains the same GRID ID, it is assumed
that none of the beam elements is continuous at this location. This condition is known as a “multiple
junction”. Similarly, if none of the other beam elements in the application region contain a matching
GRID ID, the corresponding end of the beam element is taken to be not continuous. This condition
is known as an “unmatched end”.
2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must have the matching
GRID ID located at “End A” of one of the beam elements and at “End B” of the other. “End A” and
“End B” positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs specified in the element connectivity
array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of the element coordinate system points from “End A”
to “End B”. If warping is not enabled, this restiction does not apply. If warping is enabled, any
violation of this requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the finite element
model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly oriented beam
elements and initiate the translation again.
3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an application region will
be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions, which will be generated at the time of
analysis deck translation and will appear on the CBEAM entries for the appropriate end of both of the
beam elements that are continuous at each location. If any end release codes have been prescribed for
the application region, they will not be applied at locations of beam element continuity. This is new
for Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of Patran, end release codes would be applied to all elements
of the application region, regardless of continuity.
4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are not
continuous. This applies to both “multiple junctions” and “unmatched ends”.
5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in the application
region, whether “multiple junction” or “unmatched end”, with the applied end release codes
dependent on what has been prescribed for “End A” and “End B” for the application region. If no
end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, none are generated.
6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions), constraints applied
to the SPOINTs are specified by the “warping option” specified in the element properties form. For
example, if “A free B fixed” has been selected and the unmatched end is “End A” of its beam element,
it will not be constrained. If it is “End B” of its element, it will be constrained. The warping SPOINT
for a beam element end involved in a multiple junction will not be constrained under any
circumstances. If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element involved in a multiple
junction, he will have to do so by splitting the application region in such a way that the beam element
end becomes an “unmatched end” within its new application region.
7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the warping coefficient at
either end of the beam element. When the user selects the “Beam Library” option, values for the
warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus warping is implicitly enabled. If the user
wishes to disable warping while using the Beam Library option, he must choose “None” as his
“Warping Option” on the “Input Properties ...” form.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - Linear/Cubic Closed Section

are chosen.
Create 1D Beam General Section Linear/Cubic Bar 2
Modify (CBEAM) Closed Section
Use this form to create CBEAM elements with a PBEAM or PBEAML property and associated PBEMN1 to
define nonlinear, large displacement, large strain behavior for use in SOL 400. A PBEMN1 entry is written
with BEAM option written to the BEHi field and LCC written to the INTi field.
Please see the description of properties listed in 1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 124 for
are listed here.
1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - Linear/Cubic Open Section

are chosen.
Modify Formulation
with BEAM option written to the BEHi field and LCO written to the INTi field
are listed here.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Beam - General Section (CBEAM) - Linear-Shear

are chosen.
Modify Formulation
with BEAM option written to the BEHi field and LS written to the INTi field
are listed here.
1D - Rod - General Section (CROD) - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 1D Rod General Section Standard Bar 2
Modify Formulation
Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tension-compression-torsion
element of the structural model.
the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field
on the PROD entry. This property is required.
Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on the
PROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
Main Index
Element Properties

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the PROD
entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
Torsional Stress Coefficient Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This is the C field
on the PROD entry. This property can be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
beam. This is the NSM field on the PROD entry. This value can be either
a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Contact Beam Radius Defines the radius of the beam for beam to beam contact in SOL 600/400.
1D - Rod - General Section - CONROD

This describes the Input Properties available from theElement Properties form when the following options
are chosen.
Create 1D Rod General Section CONROD Bar 2
Modify
Use this form to create a CONROD element. This defines a tension-compression-torsion element of the
structural model.
the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID field
on the CONROD entry. This property is required.
Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property is the A field
on the CONROD entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference
to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This property is the J field on
the CONROD entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to
an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Torsional Stress Coefficient Defines the coefficient to determine the torsional stress. This property is
the C field on the CONROD entry and can either be a real value or a
beam and is the NSM field on the CONROD entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This
1D - Rod - Pipe Section (CTUBE)

are chosen.
Create 1D Rod Pipe Section Bar 2
Modify
Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a tension-compression-torsion
element with a thin-walled tube cross section.
database is displayed when data is entered. This property defines the
setting of the MID field on the PTUBE entry. Either select from the list
using the mouse, or type in the name. This property is required.
Outer Diameter @ Node 1 Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the
Outer Diameter @ Node 2 OD and OD2 fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real
values or references to existing field definitions. The outer diameter at
Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at Node 2 Property is
optional.
Pipe Thickness Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE
entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field
beam and is the NSM field on the PTUBE entry. This value can be either
a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Spring (CELAS1)
are chosen.
Create 1D Spring Bar/2
Modify
Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS property. This defines a
scalar spring of the structural model.
Spring Constant Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This property is the K
field on the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an
Damping Coefficient Defines what damping is to be included. This property is the GE field on
the PELAS entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing
Stress Coefficient Defines the relationship between the spring deflection and the stresses
within the spring. This property is the S field on the PELAS entry and can
Dof at Node 1 Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to at each
Dof at Node 2 node. The degree of freedom can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ.
These properties define the settings of the C1 and C2 fields on the
CELAS1 entry. These properties are required.
User Defined Coordinate Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit
System Number Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional.
1D - Damper - Scalar (CDAMP1)

are chosen.
Create 1D Damper Scalar Bar/2
Modify
Main Index
Element Properties
Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP property. This
defines a scalar damper element of the structural model.
Damping Coefficient Defines the force per unit velocity value to be used. This is the B field on
the PDAMP entry and can either be a real value or a reference to an existing
Dof at Node 1 Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each
Dof at Node 2 node. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These define the
settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CDAMP1 entry. These properties
are required.
User Defined Coordinate Number of a User Defined Coordinate system, used only for Explicit
System Number Nonlinear (SOL 700). This property is optional.
1D - Damper - Viscous (CVISC)

are chosen.
Create 1D Damper Viscous Bar 2
Modify
Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a viscous damper element of
the structural model.
Extensional Viscous This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real
Coefficient value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Rotational Viscous This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry. This property can either be a real
Coefficient value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
1D - Gap - Adaptive / Non Adaptive (CGAP)

are chosen.
Create 1D Gap Adaptive Bar 2
Modify
Nonadaptive
Main Index
Element Properties
Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap or frictional element of the
structural model for non-linear analysis.
Gap Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system for this element that can be
defined in one of three ways. If the two end nodes of the gap are not
coincident, then the Gap Orientation can reference a vector or a node ID.
This local x-axis would then run between the two end nodes and the
orientation information would define the local xy plane. However, if the
two end nodes are coincident, then the Gap Orientation refers to an
existing coordinate system definition and will be used as the local element
coordinate system. This Gap Orientation defines the settings of the X1,
X2, X3, G0, and CID fields on the CGAP entry. This property is required.
Initial Opening Defines the initial opening of the gap element. The nodal coordinates are
only used to define the closure direction. This property is the U0 field on
the PGAP entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing
Preload Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this
can be used for initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting
this value to the initial opening stiffness will improve the solution
convergence. This is the F0 field on the PGAP entry and can either be a
optional.
Closed Stiffness Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed.
Open Stiffness The closed stiffness should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the
surrounding elements. The open stiffness should be approximately 10
orders of magnitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields on the
PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field
definitions. The closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness
Sliding Stiffness Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element is
closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be either
a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is
optional.
Static Friction Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field on
the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a spatially
varying real scalar field. Not applicable for Nonadaptive model.
Kinematic Friction Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2 field
on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a
spatially varying real scalar field. Not applicable for Nonadaptive model.
Max Penetration Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the TMAX
field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or
a spatially varying real scalar field.
Main Index
Element Properties

Max Adjust Ratio Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is the
MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real
scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field. Not applicable for Nonadaptive
model.
Penet. Lower Bound Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the TRMIN
field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or
a spatially varying real scalar field. Not applicable for Nonadaptive model.
Friction Coeff. y Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this element
in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2 fields on the
Friction Coeff. Z PGAP entry and can be either real values or references to existing field
1D - Scalar Mass (CMASS1)

are chosen.
Create 1D 1D Mass Bar/2
Modify
Use this form to create CMASS1 elements and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of the
structural model.

Mass Defines the translation mass or rotational inertia value to be applied.
This property is the M field on the PMASS entry and can either be a
required.
Dof at Node 1 Defines which degree of freedom this value will be attached to at each
Dof at Node 2 node. These can be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the
settings of the C1 and C2 field on the CMASS1 entry. These properties
are required.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - PLOTEL
are chosen.
Create 1D PLOTEL Bar/2
Modify
Use this form to create PLOTEL elements. No actual properties are needed to define this property set. These
elements are written to the MSC Nastran input deck for MSC Nastran plotting purposes only and are not
structural in nature and not used by the actual analysis.
1D - Bush (CBUSH)
are chosen.
Create 1D Bush Scalar Bar/2
Modify
CBUSH/PBUSH/PBUSHT element property sets are created with this option for defining a scalar bush joint,
which is a generalized spring-damper structural element. If frequency dependent or nonlinear force deflection
Main Index
Element Properties
properties are supplied, the PBUSHT entry will be written. Otherwise it will not be written. This is a list of
Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Bush Orientation Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If CID is
blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins the elements
grid points (GA, GB Element Properties/Application Region). The X-
Y plane is determined by specifying the Bush Orientation. If a vector
input is given, these components define an orientation vector v from
the first grid point (GA) of the element in the displacement coordinate
system at that point (GA). If the Bush Orientation references a grid
point ID (Value), this orientation point forms an orientation vector
which extends from the first element grid point to the orientation
point.
If a CID ≥ 0 is specified for Bush Orientation System, the element

X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal axes.
If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the first
elemental grid point (GA) is used to locate the system. If CID = 0, the
elemental coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate System.
If no orientation is specified in any form, the element x-axis is along

the line which connects the element’s grid points. The material
property inputs for this condition must be limited to simple axial and
torsional stiffness and damping (k1,k4,B1,B4).
Offset Location Offset Location (0.0 ≤ s ≤ 1.0) specifies the spring-damper location
along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting the fraction of the
distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the spring-damper.
Offset Orientation System Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the spring-damper offset
when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB.
Offset Orientation Vector Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative to the
offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system is -1 or blank,
the offset orientation vector is ignored.
Spring Constant i Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom.
Stiffness Frequency Depend i These are the Ki fields of the PBUSH entry. This property is defined
in terms of force per unit displacement and is defined as a real value A
reference to an existing field definition for defining stiffness vs.
frequency writes the TKIDi fields in the PBUSHT entry.
Stiffness Force/Displacement i Defines the nonlinear force vs deflection curves for each degree of
freedom of the spring-damper system. These are the TKNIDi fields of
the PBUSHT entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

Damping Coefficient i Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of
Damping Frequency Depend i freedom. These are the Bi fields of the PBUSH entry. A reference to an
existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency writes the
TBIDi fields in the PBUSHT entry.
Structural Damping Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GEi
Structural Damping Frequency fields of the PBUSH entry). A reference to an existing field definition
Depend i for defining damping vs. frequency writes the TKGEIDi fields to the
PBUSHT entry.
Stress Recovery Translation Stress and Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are
Stress Recovery Rotation computed by multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered
Strain Recovery Translation element forces. The element strains are computed by multiplying the
Strain Recovery Rotation
strain coefficients with the recovered element strains. This defines the
SA, ST, EA & ET fields on the PBUSH entry.
Force-Deflection Curve Rule Force deflection curve rule - writes FDC field of PBUSHT. See the
MSC Nastran Quick Start manual for details.
Fuse Behavior Fuse behavior. Writes the FUSE field of PBUSHT
Fuse Direction Fuse direction. Writes the DIR field of PBUSHT.
Fuse Failure Mode Failure mode. Writes the OPTION field of PBUSHT.
Lower Failure Bound Lower and Upper failure bound. Writes the LOWER and UPPER fields
Upper Failure Bound of the PBUSHT entry.
FRATE-K Drop Scale Factor Fuse stiffness retention factor. Writes the FSRS field of the PBUSHT
entry.
Grid A Rotation Large rotation flag. Writes the LRGR field of the PBUSHT entry.
1D- Bush (CBUSH2D/PBUSH2D)

This describes the Input Properties available from the Element Properties form and the following options are
chosen.
Create 1D Bush 2D Linear/Non Linear Bar/2
Modify
This creates CBUSH2D/PBUSH2D entries. Following is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu
scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.
Main Index
Element Properties

Bush Orientation String pull down indicating the plane must be supplied as the
XY, YZ, or ZX plane of the given coordinate system.
Orientation System Coordinate in which Orientation plane is defined. Select
data box to allowed graphical selection of coordinate.
Stiffness K11 Nominal stiffness in T1 rectangular direction. Required!
Stiffness K22 Nominal stiffness in T2 rectangular direction. Required!
[Damping B11] Nominal damping in T1 rectangular direction. Default =
0.0
[Damping B22] Nominal damping in T2 rectangular direction. Default = 0.0
[Force M11] Nominal acceleration-dependent force in T1 rectangular
direction. Default = 0.0
[Force M22] Nominal acceleration-dependent force in T2 rectangular
direction. Default = 0.0
[Inner Journal Diameter BDIA] Inner journal diameter. Real > 0.0
[Damper Length BLEN] Damper length. Required if inner journal diameter given!
Real > 0.0
[Damper Radial Clearance BCLR] Damper radial clearance. Required if inner journal diameter
given! Real > 0.0
[Solution Option SOLN] Pulldown String - Solution Option: Long or Short (Default
= Long)
[Lubricant viscosity VISCO] Lubricant viscosity. Required if inner journal diameter given!
Real > 0.0
[Lubricant Vapor Pressure PVAPCO] Lubricant vapor pressure. Required if inner journal diameter
given! Real.
[Number of Lubricant Ports NPORT] Integer pull down: Number of lubricant ports. 1 or 2
[Boundary Pressure for Port 1] Boundary pressure for port 1. Required if NPORT = 1. Real
>= 0.0
[Angular Positions for Port 1] Angular position for port 1. (0.0<=Real<=360.0). Required
if NPORT = 1.
[Frequency Dependent] Specifies if element is frequency dependent or not for USD
support. String - Yes/No. No = default.
Main Index
Element Properties
1D - Spot Weld Connector (CWELD)

are chosen.
Create 1D Spot Weld Connector Connector
Modify
If you supply "General" for the "Connection Type" of a "Spot Weld Connector" element property, then field
9 (TYPE) for the PWELD bulk data entry in the BDF file will be blank instead of "SPOT". When this field
is set to "SPOT", Nastran does extra verifications to avoid excessive stiff of soft connections.
Note that spot weld (CWELD/PWELD ) properties are created automatically (or pre-existing properties
selected) when creating Spotwelds through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no application region
is required (or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying spotweld
properties because the existence of the spotweld itself is the application region for the property set. Property
values may be modified in this form, but the property set will remain associated with the connector elements
they were originally created with. If you wish to modify the property set a connector is associated with, do
this in the Finite Element application using the Modify / Connector action.
For MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analyses of spot welds for time domains solutions using statics (SOL
101), normal modes (SOL 103), or modal transient response (SOL 112), the spot weld diameter is placed
on the PFTG bulk data entry. The top and bottom sheet thicknesses are determined from the connecting
sheet properties automatically by Nastran.
In order to run a successful MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis, an S-N or ε-N constitutive model (or
both) must be defined for the elements of interest (see Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN), Spot Weld (Top and Bottom
Sheet), Seam Weld (Stiff and Flexible), 91). An output request for fatigue life must be made (see Output Requests,
449). A spot weld fatigue analysis must be turned on when setting up the analysis (see Solution Parameters, 276
for Linear Static, Normal Modes, or Transient Response). And a cyclic loading sequence must be defined (see
Subcase Select, 486) above the subcase level.
1D - Fastener Connector (CFAST)

are chosen.
Create 1D Fastener Connector Connector
Modify
Note that fastener properties (CFAST/PFAST) are created automatically (or pre-existing properties selected)
when creating Fasteners through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no application region is required
(or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying fastener properties because
the existence of the fastener itself is the application region for the property set. Property values may be
Main Index
Element Properties
modified in this form, but the property set will remain associated with the connector elements they were
originally created with. If you wish to modify the property set a connector is associated with, do this in the
Finite Element application using the Modify / Connector action.
Once a connector is created, its properties can be modified in this, the Element Properties application or by
modifying the connector in the Finite Elements application. Aconnector can be created and a new property
set and values specified, in which case the new property set will be created. Modifying a connetor in the Finite
Elements application will allow you to select/change to an existing property set or change the values of the
property set, in which case overwrite permission is requested.
Fastener Stiffness Formulas

Specifying a formula will automatically calculate the connector stiffness based on the connector properties,
its material, and the sheet thicknesses and materials, thus minimizing the need for manual calculation. The
formula value can be any of the following:
None
Douglas
Huth Hi-Lok in CFRP
Huth Hi-Lok in metal
Huth solid rivet
None requires that you manually supply the stiffness. Specifying any other value will ignore any stiffness
values input manually and will overwrite them.
Stiffness coefficients for the CFAST element are calculated in different steps. Generally, either Douglas or
three derivatives of Huth formulas are used. Regardless of the selected formula, the axial stiffness is always
calculated the same way:
2
E f 1--4- πd
k = -----------------
L
The stiffness is inserted into the KT1 parameter of the PFAST entry. The length of the fastener will be
determined by summation of the thickness of the two connected shell elements.
The Douglas formula is*:
1
k = ---
c
A 1 1
c = --------- + B  ------------ + ------------
dE f t1 E1 t2 E2
Main Index
Element Properties
where
A B
For Aluminium Rivet 5.0 0.8
For Steel Bolt 1.67 0.86
The formula according to Huth is*:

1
k = ---
c
t1 + t2 a b 1 1 1 1
c =  --------------- ---  ----------- + -------------- + ------------- + -----------------
 2d  n  t 1 E 1 nt 2 E 2 2E f t 1 2nE f t 2
wher n = 1 or 2 for single or double shear, respectively, and
a b
Hi-Lok in CFRP 0.6667 4.2
Hi-Lok in metal 0.6667 3.0
Solid Rivet 0.4 2.2
In the case of composites, the Douglas and Huth formulas have to be used twice. First, the overall
(engineering) Young’s modulus has to be calculated for both directions (E11 and E22), which then has to be
applied to the formulas. In this case, the shear stillness of the fastener is direction dependent. For composites
or anisotrophic material, the material tensors of the two connected shell elements have to be transformed into
the coordinate system of the CFAST element before the Douglas or Huth formula is applied. The resulting
stiffness is applied to the KT2 and KT3 parameters on the PFAST entry.
* The following symbols are used in the formulas:
Symbol Meaning
Ef Young’s modulus of fastener
d Diameter of fastener
L Length of fastener, evaluated from the FE model
E1 Young’s modulus of first property connected to the fastener
t1 Thickness of first property connected to the fastener
E2 Young’s modulus of second property connected to the fastener
t2 Thickness of second property connected to the fastener
Main Index
Element Properties
Note: The calculated stiffness will be applied in the fastener connector element coordinate system based
on the specification or non-specification of a defined coordinate system. If no coordinate system is
supplied, the elemental system used is defined by the MCID = -1 method described in the MSC Nastran
Quick Reference Guide for the PFAST entry. The stiffnesses are determined with this setting and MCID =
-1 is written to the PFAST entry. MFLAG is ignored in this case. If a coordinte system is specified then the
fasterer coordinate system is determined with the MCID >= 0 method described in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide for the PFAST entry. The stiffnesses are determined and MCID is written to the PFAST
entry with the specified coordinate ID. MFLAG = 0 (relative) is used in this case to calculate the
stiffnesses. Caution: Once a formula is used to create stiffness
properties, the formula and material used remain associated to the property but the stiffnesses
are calculated on translation and not stored in the Stiffness Values slot. Any values in the
Stiffness Values databox are ignored when a formula is specified. 2D Element
Properties
2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation
are chosen:
Action Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Topologies
Create 2D Shell Thin Homogenous Standard Tri 3/6
Modify Formulation Quad 4/8
Use this form to create CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 elements with a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select one from the list
using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the
MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This
property is required.
Material Orientation Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the
element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a
coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a
vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant
angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry.
This scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a
reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Thickness Defines the thickness, which will be uniform over each element. This
value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8
and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This
Nonstructural Mass Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This is
defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM
field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4/8 entry
and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the bottom and
top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1 and
Fiber Dist. 2 Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references
to existing field definitions. This property is optional.
implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the
existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written,
regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of
NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load
Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase
Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 407.
Main Index
Element Properties

Surface Finish These optional properties are used for defining fatigue properties in an
Reduction Factor Kf MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analyses in time domain solutions using
Scale Factor statics (SOL 101), normal modes (SOL 103), or modal transient response
Offset
Roughness Factor (SOL 112). All parameters defined here are placed on the PFTG bulk data
Treatment Factor entry.
Shape Factor
In order to run a successful MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis, an
Weld Location
Weld Type S-N or ε-N constitutive model (or both) must be defined for the elements
of interest (see Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN), Spot Weld (Top and Bottom
Sheet), Seam Weld (Stiff and Flexible), 91). An output request for fatigue life
must be made (see Output Requests, 449). An S-N or ε-N analysis must be
turned on when setting up the analysis (see Solution Parameters, 276 for
Linear Static, Normal Modes, or Transient Response). And a cyclic
loading sequence must be defined (see Subcase Select, 486) above the
subcase level.
For more detail on how to set up and perform an MSC Nastran
Embedded Fatigue analysis using Patran, please see the MSC Nastran Fatigue
Analysis User’s Guidefor time domain SOLutions 101/103/112. For details
on the PFTG entry, please see the PFTG (p. 2713) in the .
Weld Type These optional properties are used for defining seam weld type and
Weld Location element location on the weld in an MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue
analyses of seam welds for time domain solutions using statics (SOL 101),
normal modes (SOL 103), or modal transient response (SOL 112). All
parameters defined here are placed on the FTGDEF bulk data entry. See
the above entry also. For details on the FTGDEF entry, please see the
FTGDEF (p. 1966) in the .
2D - Shell - Homogeneous - Revised Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Homogenous Revised Tri 3
Modify Formulation Quad 4
Use this form to create CTRIAR or CQUADR elements with a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on
the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.
Main Index
Element Properties

the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry.
Thickness Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This
property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUADR or
CTRIAR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can be either
a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is
required.
Nonstructural Mass Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the
element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can
Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers. These properties are the Z1 and Z2 fields on
Fiber Dist. 2 the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or references to existing
field definitions. These properties are optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the
existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written,
regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of
NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load
Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase
Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 407.
Surface Finish See 2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation, 141
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Weld Type
Weld Location
2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - P-Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Homogenous P- Formulation Tri 3/6/7/9/13
Modify Quad 4/8/12/16
Use this form to create CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 elements with a PSHELL property along with the P-
formulation entries ADAPT and PVAL. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank
in order to achieve the requested behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC. Nastran
Version 69 or later.
Main Index
Element Properties

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings
of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry.
element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a
coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is
the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected
x-axis of the basic system.This defines the setting of the THETA or
MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is
optional.
Thickness Defines a uniform thickness, which will cover each element. This
property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or
CTRIA3 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and can be either
a real value or a reference to existing field definition. This property is
required.
Nonstructural Mass Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of
the element and this is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value
can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or
CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing
bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1
Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or
Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
Maximum P-orders by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders
apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit
the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders.
These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID
field on the PVAL entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in the
error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle
to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By
default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in
the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the
EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
2D - Shell - Thin - Homogeneous - Linear Discrete Kirchhoff

are chosen
Create 2D Shell Thin Linear Discrete Tri 3
Modify Kirchhoff Quad 4
Use this form to create CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 elements with a PSHELL/PSHLN1 property. The appropriate
fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior. This property set is
meant to be used with SOL 400 exclusively. The DCT option is written to the DCTN entry in the BEHi field
and the LDK option to the INTi field to define this element formulation.
Main Index
Element Properties

Bending Material database is displayed when data is entered. Either select one from the list
Shear Material using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the
MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. At least the
first property is required.
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3/CQUAD4 entry.
This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
CTRIA3/CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3/CQUAD4
entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
2D - Shell - Thin - Laminate Plate- Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Laminate Standard Tri 3/6
Main Index
Element Properties
Use this form to create CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 elements with a PCOMP or PCOMPG
property. A PCOMPG will be written if global plies have been defined in the associated composite material.

using the mouse or type the name in. The specified material must be a
laminate material. The data in this material definition defines the settings
of the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry. This property
is required.
coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define
a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant
angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This property
defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a
constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This
element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is
defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and can be either a
optional.
PlateOffset Defines the offset of the element‘s reference plane from the plane defined
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or a
Laminate Options Laminate option placed on the LAM field of the PCOMP/PCOMPG
entry. No option implies all plies must be specified and all stiffness terms
developed. MEM - all plies are specified but only membrane terms are
computed. BEND - all plies specified but only bending terms computed.
SMEAR - all plies specified, stacking sequence ignored and TS/T and
12I/T**3 terms set to zero. SMCORE - all plies specified with the last ply
specifying core properties and the previous plies specifying face sheet
properties. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.
Bonding Shear Writes the SB field of the PCOMP entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

Reference Temperature TREF is written to PCOMP from the value defined on the first MAT8
Damping Coefficient entry defined in the composite, or in other words, from the material of
the first ply in the layup. The value of GE is written to PCOMP as the
sum of all GE values on all plies, scaled based on the percentage thickness
of each ply. To get values for TREF and GE from the PCOMP entry, the
2D/Shell/Thin/Laminate/Standard and Revised formulations need to
have property words used to define these values. If the values are not
defined then the values are retrieved from the MAT8 material card.
specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on
the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the
entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be
written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the
usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting
on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See
2D - Shell - Thin - Laminate - Revised Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Laminate Revised Tri 3
Modify Formulation Quad 4
Use this form to create CQUADR or CTRIAR elements with a PCOMP or PCOMPG property. A PCOMPG
will be written if global plies have been defined in the associated composite material.
Main Index
Element Properties

using the mouse or type in the name. The specified material must be a
laminate material in Patran. The data in this material definition defines
the settings of the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP entry.
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry.
This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an
existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
element. This is the NSM field on the PCOMP entry. This property is
defined in mass per unit area, of the element. This value can be either a
optional.
PlateOffset Defines the offset of the element‘s reference plane from the plane defined
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIAR, or
CQUADR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
Laminate Options Laminate option placed on the LAM field of the PCOMP/PCOMPG
entry. No option implies all plies must be specified and all stiffness terms
developed. MEM - all plies are specified but only membrane terms are
computed. BEND - all plies specified but only bending terms computed.
SMEAR - all plies specified, stacking sequence ignored and TS/T and
12I/T**3 terms set to zero. SMCORE - all plies specified with the last ply
specifying core properties and the previous plies specifying face sheet
properties. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.
Bonding Shear Writes the SB field of the PCOMP entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

Reference Temperature TREF is written to PCOMP from the value defined on the first MAT8
Damping Coefficient entry defined in the composite, or in other words, from the material of
the first ply in the layup. The value of GE is written to PCOMP as the
sum of all GE values on all plies, scaled based on the percentage thickness
of each ply. To get values for TREF and GE from the PCOMP entry, the
2D/Shell/Thin/Laminate/Standard and Revised formulations need to
have property words used to define these values. If the values are not
defined then the values are retrieved from the MAT8 material card.
2D - Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Equivalent Standard Tri 3/6
Modify Section Formulation Quad 4/8
Use this form to create CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 elements with a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Main Index
Element Properties

Membrane Material Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear,
Bending Material and coupling behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the
Shear Material database is displayed when data is entered. These properties define the
Coupling Material
settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL
entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These
vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting
of the THETA field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8
entry. This scalar value can be either a constant value or a reference to an
Thickness Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This property defines the
setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry.
This value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on the
PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an
Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane thickness.
This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property
is optional.
element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This
property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a
optional.
Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined by
the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value
or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1 and
Fiber Distance 2 Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or
Main Index
Element Properties

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic,
Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear
(SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and determines
if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of an
elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are
contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2 entry is written
for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2 entry to be written,
regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In
addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS,
LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment
Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for
Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 407.
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Weld Type
Weld Location
2D - Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - Revised Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Equivalent Revised Tri 3
Modify Section Formulation Quad 4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on
the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.
Main Index
Element Properties

settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL
coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a
defines the setting of the THETA field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR entry.
This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing
coordinate system. This property is optional.
Thickness Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element. This
property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR
or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can
be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This
Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field
on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to
This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real
value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be
Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and
bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1 and
Fiber Distance 2 Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real values or
Main Index
Element Properties

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values Automatic,
Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for implicit nonlinear
(SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not specified and
determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on the existence of
an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the elements are
contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2 entry is written
for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2 entry to be written,
regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be written, regardless. In
addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the usage of NLMOPTS,
LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on the Load Increment
Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for
Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 407.
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Weld Type
Weld Location
2D - Shell - Thin - Equivalent Section - P-Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Thin Equivalent P- Formulation Tri 3/6/7/9/13
Modify Section Quad 4/8/12/16
Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property along with the P-
in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran
Main Index
Element Properties
.
Coupling Material
settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the PSHELL
Angle element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a
coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate system is the
material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis
of basic system.This property is optional.
property defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3
or CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can
be either a real value or a references to an existing field definition. This
Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field
This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real
value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 or
CTRIA3 entry and can be either real value or reference to an existing field
Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real value or
Main Index
Element Properties

Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each
Maximum P-orders contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the P-
order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply to
the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the
polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These are
the Polyi fields in the PVAL entry.
Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error
analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.
P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to
cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the
error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in the
error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field on the
ADAPT entry.
2D - Shell - Thick - Standard Formulation

are chosen
Create 2D Shell Thick Standard Quad 4
Modify Formulation
Use this form to create CQUAD4 elements with a PSHELL/PSHLN1 property. The appropriate fields on the
PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior. This property set is meant to be
used with SOL 400 exclusively. The DCT option is written to the PSHNL1 entry in the BEHi field and the
L option to the INTi field to define this element formulation.
Main Index
Element Properties

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 entry. This scalar
value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a reference to
an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4
entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4 entry
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Weld Type
Weld Location
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - Shell - Thick - Reduced Integration

are chosen
Create 2D Shell Thick Reduced Integration Quad 4/8
Modify
Use this form to create CQUAD4 or CQUAD8 elements with a PSHELL/PSHLN1 property. The appropriate
fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior. This property set is
meant to be used with SOL 400 exclusively. The DCT option is written to the PSHNL1 entry in the BEHi
field and the LRIH or QRI option to the INTi field to define this element formulation.

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4/8 entry. This
scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a
This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8
entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
Main Index
Element Properties

by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4/8 entry
2D - Shell - Field Point Mesh

are chosen.
Create 2D Shell Field Point Mesh Tri 3
Modify Quad 4
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CQUAD4 elements for creating acoustic field point mesh for an exterior
acoustics analysis. No property cards are created. The material referenced should be the same as that defined
for the 3D solid elements and exterior acoustic infinite elements used to define the surrounding fluid
environment of the structure, although no actual materials is written. In order to recover results on these
meshes, you must set the output request ACFPFRESULT.
Each acoustic field point mesh defined is written to a seperate section of the bulk data using the BEGIN
AFPM=id.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. See the discussion above.
2D - Bending Panel - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Bending Panel Standard Formulation Tri 3/6
Modify Quad 4/8
Main Index
Element Properties
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the
coordinate system which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a
vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle
offset from the default element coordinate system. This property defines the
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4,
or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a
Thickness Defines the uniform thickness for each element. This defines the T1, T2,
T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the
T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a
reference to an existing field definition. This property is required.
Nonstructural Mass Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This
property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM field
bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties define the Z1 and
Fiber Dist. 2 Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values can be either real values or
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - Bending Panel - Revised Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Bending Panel Revised Formulation Tri 3
Modify Quad 4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR i and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on the
PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines
the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR
entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to
an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.
Thickness Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element.
This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR
entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either
a real value or a reference to an existing field definitions. This property
is required.
Nonstructural Mass Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of
the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the
element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can
either be real values or a reference to and existing field definition. This
Main Index
Element Properties

bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1
Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real
values or references to existing field definitions. This property is
optional.
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
2D - Bending Panel - P-Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Bending Panel P- Formulation Tri 3/6/7/9/13
Modify Quad 4/8/9/12/16
Use this form to create CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 elements with a PSHELL property along with the P-

Material Orientation Angle Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the
Material Coordinate System element. There are two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a
the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the
projected x-axis of basic system.This property defines the setting of the
THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This
Main Index
Element Properties

Thickness Defines the uniform thickness, which will be used for each element.
This defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3
entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry and this value can be
Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real
optional.
Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
Maximum P-orders by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders
coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID
analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.
ADAPT entry.
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Standard Tri 3/6
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property. The
appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested plane strain
behavior for non SOL 400 runs. For SOL 400 runs a PLPLANE and PSHLN2 entry are written instead
based on the setting of the Nonlinear Formulation.

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting
of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the
PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This
Plane of Deformation Leave blank for default or select an option. Writes to the CID field of the
PLPLANE entry. Select coordinate frame from which to specify plane of
deformation. For SOL 400 plane strain/axisymmetric runs, outputs are
in this CID system and elements must lie in XY plane of this CID frame.
Output Locations Location of stress and strain output. the options are “GAUS” (default) or
“GRID.” this defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN2
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN2
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Reduced Integration

are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear analysis:
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Reduced Quad 4/8
Modify Integration
Use this form to create CQUAD4 or CQUAD8 elements and a PLPLANE property. Fo SOL 400 a PSHLN2
is also written with the PLSTRN option for the BEHi field and LRIH or QRI option for the INTi field to
define reduced integration formulation.

of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required.
Main Index
Element Properties

2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Revised Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Revised Tri 3/6
Use this form to create CTRIAR or CQUADR element with a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the setting of
the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL
entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is
required.
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - P-Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain P- Formulation Tri 3/6/7/9/13
Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property along with the P-
Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:
using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the setting
of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. The
MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain
behavior.
Material Orientation Angle Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the
the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-
axis of basic system. This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID
field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.
element. This is defined in mass per unit area of the element. This is the
NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or
a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Starting P-order Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements. Each
Maximum P-order contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined by the
P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders apply
to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit the
polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders. These
are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle to
cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.
default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT
entry.
Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in the
error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL
field on the ADAPT entry.
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Hyperelastic Formulation

Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Hyperelastic Tri 3/6
Use this form to create CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element with a PLPLANE
property.

of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required
should have a hyperelastic constitutive model associated with the selected
material..
Plane of Deformation Identification number of a coordinate system defining the plane of
deformation. This defines the CID field on the PLPLANE entry. Select
coordinate frame from which to specify plane of deformation. For SOL
400 plane strain/axisymmetric runs, outputs are in this CID system and
elements must lie in XY plane of this CID frame.
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - Plane Strain - Laminated Composite

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Laminated Quad 4/8
Modify Composite
Use this form to create CQUAD4 or CQUAD8 elements and a PLCOMP property.
The DIRECT field of PLCOMP cards is negative for the "Total" option where ply thicknesses are the actual
thicknesses and positive for the "Total - %thicknesses" option where ply thicknesses are defined as percentages
of the total ply stack thickness.

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the
PLCOMP entry to be used. This property is required. The material
selected must be a composite material.
Thickness Direction 2D Defines element edge used as base ply orientation. See discussion above.
Positive or negative value placed on the DIRECT field of the PLCOMP
entry.
Out-of-Plane Thickness Value is placed on the THICKOP field of the PLCOMP entry.
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Incompressible

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Incompressible Tri 3
Modify
Use this form to create incompressible axisymmetric CTRIA3 elements and a PLPLANE/PSHLN2 property
(SOL 400 only). If not SOL 400 or no nonlinear behavior is detected, the PSHLN2 is likely not to be written.
Only Tri 3 elements are valid for this formulation. This put IPS in the BEHi field of the PSHLN2 to indicate
the axisymmetric incompressible formulation.
Main Index
Element Properties

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the MID on
the PLPLANE/PSHLN2 entry to be used. This property is required.
Output Locations Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This
property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the STR field on the
PLPLANE entry. This property is optional.
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Strain - Interface

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Interface Quad 4/8
Modify
Use this form to create planar interface CIFQUAD elements and a PCOHE property (SOL 400 only). This
input data creates interface elements that are generally zero-thickness elements that bond two meshes together
and are used in the Cohesive Zone Modeling Technique (CZMT) to simulate delamination or crack growth.

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the PCOHE
entry to be used. This property is required. The material selected should
be a cohesive material.
Interface Integration Scheme Leave blank for default or select an option. Writes to the INT field of the
PCOHE entry.
property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the OUTPUT field on
the PCOHE entry. This property is optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Stiffnes Matrix Scheme Writes selected scheme to the SECANT field of the PCOHE entry.
Thickness Required for plane stress only and is written on the PCOHE entry in the
T field. This the only difference between plane strain versus plane stress
interface elements.
2D - 2D Solid - Plane Stress - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Stress Standard Tri 6
This element is meant for use with SOL 400 only (MSC Nastran 2010 or greater). Use this form to create a
CTRIA6 (CTRIA3 not supported), CQUAD4/8 element and a PLPLANE plus PSHLN2 entries are based on
the setting of the Nonlinear Formulation. The PSTRS option is written in the BEHi field of the PSHLN2
entry to indicate this formulation type.

using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID
field on the PLPLANE for SOL 400 runs. This property is required.
setting of the TH field on the element entry. This scalar value can be
either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system.
Thickness Required for plane stress and is written on the PSHLN2 entry in the T
field.
Main Index
Element Properties

2D - 2D Solid - Plane Stress- Reduced Integration

Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Stress Reduced Quad 4/8
Modify Integration
Use this form to create CQUAD4 or CQUAD8 elements and a PLPLANE property. Fo SOL 400 a PSHLN2
is also written with the PSTRS option for the BEHi field and LRIH or QRI option for the INTi field to define
reduced integration formulation.

Thickness Required for plane stress and is written on the PSHLN2 entry in the T
field.
Main Index
Element Properties

2D - 2D Solid - Plane Stress - Interface

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Stress Interface Quad 4/8
Modify
Use this form to create planar interface CIFQUAD elements and a PCOHE property (SOL 400 only). This
input data creates interface elements that are generally zero-thickness elements that bond two meshes together
and are used in the Cohesive Zone Modeling Technique (CZMT) to simulate delamination or crack growth.

PCOHE entry.
Thickness Required for plane stress only and is written on the PCOHE entry in the
T field. This is the only difference between a plane stress versus a plane
strain interface element.
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Standard Tri 3/6
Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element for non SOL 400 runs. This defines an
isoparametric and axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes for non SOL 400
runs. For SOL 400 runs, CQUADX and/or CTRIAX entries and a PLPLANE and PSHLN2 entry are written
instead based on the setting of the Nonlinear Formulation.

setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This scalar value can be
either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system.
using the mouse or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID
field on the CTRIAX6 for non-SOL 400 runs or the PLPLANE for SOL
400 runs. This property is required.
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Reduced Integration

Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Reduced Quad 4/8
Modify Integration
Use this form to create CQUADX elements and a PLPLANE property. Fo SOL 400 a PSHLN2 is also written
with the AXSOLID option for the BEHi field and LRIH or QRI option for the INTi field to define reduced
integration formulation.

2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Twist

Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Twist Quad 4/8
Modify
Use this form to create CQUADX elements and a PLPLANE property. Fo SOL 400 a PSHLN2 is also written
with the AXSOLID option for the BEHi field and LT or QT option for the INTi field to define this type of
formulation.
Main Index
Element Properties

2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Hyperelastic Formulation

Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Hyperelastic Quad 4/8
Modify Formulation
Use this form to create CQUADX or CTRIAX elements and a PLPLANE property.

of the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This property is required and
should have a hyperelastic constitutive model associated with the selected
material.
Main Index
Element Properties

Output Locations Leave blank for default or select an option. Writes to the CID field of the
setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX/CQUADX entries. This scalar
value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing
2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Laminated Composite

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Laminated Quad 4/8
Modify Composite
Use this form to create axisymmetric CQUADX elements and a PLCOMP composite property. The DIRECT
field of the PLCOMP card is negative for the "Total" option where ply thicknesses are the actual thicknesses
and positive for the "Total - %thicknesses" option where ply thicknesses are defined as percentages of the total
ply stack thickness when creating the composite material in the Material application.

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the
PLCOMP entry to be used. This property is required. The material
selected must be a composite material.
Thickness Direction 2D Defines element edge used as base ply orientation. See discussion above.
Positive or negative value placed on the DIRECT field of the PLCOMP
entry.
Out-of-Plane Thickness Not used for axisymmetric elements. Value is placed on the THICKOP
field of the PLCOMP entry.
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - PLPLANE

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric PLPLANE Tri 3/6
Modify Quad 4/8
Use this form to create standard axisymmetric solid elements for non SOL 400 runs with CTRIAX or
CQUADX with PLPLANE property or PLPLANE/PSHLN2 for SOL 400 runs. This defines an
isoparametric and axisymmetric cross section ring element with or without midside nodes. If not SOL 400
or no nonlinear behavior is detected, the PSHLN2 is likely not to be written. This put AXSOLID in the BEHi
field of the PSHLN2 to indicate the axisymmetric formulation for SOL 400.

Material Name For SOL600 solutions use the PLPLANE option and any material type.
For non-SOL600 runs, use the Hypereleastic option with Mooney-
Rivlin materials.
setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX/CQUADX entries. This scalar
value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing
2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Incompressible

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Incompressible Tri 3
Modify
Main Index
Element Properties
Use this form to create incompressible axisymmetric CTRIAX elements and a PLPLANE/PSHLN2 property
(SOL 400 only). If not SOL 400 or no nonlinear behavior is detected, the PSHLN2 is likely not to be written.
Only Tri 3 elements are valid for this formulation. This put IAX in the BEHi field of the PSHLN2 to indicate
the axisymmetric incompressible formulation.

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the MID on
the PLPLANE/PSHLN2 entry to be used. This property is required.
property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the STR field on the
PLPLANE entry. This property is optional.
2D - 2D Solid - Axisymmetric - Interface

are chosen.
Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Interface Quad 4/8
Modify
Use this form to create CIFQDX elements and a PCOHE property (SOL 400 only). This input data creates
interface elements that are generally zero-thickness elements that bond two meshes together and are used in
the Cohesive Zone Modeling Technique (CZMT) to simulate delamination or crack growth.

PCOHE entry.
Main Index
Element Properties

2D - 2D Solid - Acoustic Infinite

These elements are used in exterior acoustic analysis (frequency response) and placed on the outside of the
solid mesh representing the fluid (coincident with the outside surface). The must share the same nodes as the
solid mesh. They simulate the fluid proprties reaching to infinity beyond the boundary of the solid mesh
representing the fluid. The surfaces that these elements connect to must be convex. However it is not
necessary that the surface be smooth. They also take on the same fluid proprties as the solid fluid mesh.
Create 2D 2D Solid Acoustic Infinite Tri 3, Quad 4
Modify
Use this form to create a CACINF3, CACINF4 elements and a PACINF property. The appropriate fields on
the PACINF entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. This material is generally the same
material used to define the solid fluid mesh in an exterior acoustics
analysis (MAT10). The same material should also be referenced when
using acoustic field point meshes.
Radial Interpolation Order Interger value that defines the radial interpolation order, which must be
defined and greater than zero.
Pole of Infinite Elements The pole of the acoustic infinite elements. This must be coorinate
location defined in the global Patran coordinate system. A node ID can
also be selected graphically.
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - Membrane - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Membrane Standard Formulation Tri 3/6
Modify Quad 4/8
Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL/PSHLN1
property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the
requested behavior.

of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1)reference a
coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element. (2) define
defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be
a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This
Thickness Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This
value can either be a real value or reference an existing field definition.
This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the
PSHELL entry. This property is required.
property is defined in mass per unit area of the element and is the NSM
Main Index
Element Properties

Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
2D - Membrane - Revised Formulation

are chosen.
Create 2D Membrane Revised Formulation Tri 3
Modify Quad 4
Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields on
Main Index
Element Properties

MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry.
This scalar value can either be a constant value or a reference to an
Thickness Defines the uniform thickness that will be used for each element. This
value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
definition. This property defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the
CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry.
property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element and is
the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value
or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
2D - Membrane - P-Formulation
are chosen.
Create 2D Membrane P- Formulation Tri 3/6/7/9/13
Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property along with the P-
formulation entries ADAPT and PVAL.. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank
in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC Nastran
Main Index
Element Properties
:
of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.
the material x-axis or (2) define a constant angle offset from the
projected x-axis of basic system. This property defines the setting of the
THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This
Starting P-orders Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders
coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID
ADAPT entry.
the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the
Main Index
Element Properties
2D - Shear Panel
are chosen.
Create 2D Shear Panel Quad/4
Modify
Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR/PSHEARN property. This defines a shear panel
element of the structural model.

MID field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required.
defines the T field on the PSHEAR entry. This property is required. This
value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field
definition.
element. This is defined in mass per unit area of the element. This is the
NSM field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be either a real value or
a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.
Extensional Stiffness 12 Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 1-2 and
3-4 sides. This is the F1 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be
Extensional Stiffness 14 Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional stiffness along the 2-3 and
1-4 sides. This is the F2 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be
Main Index
Element Properties

elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHEARN
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHEARN
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Main Index
Element Properties
3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation
are chosen.
Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Standard Tet 4/10
Modify Formulation Wed 6/15
Hex 8/20
Use this form to create CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA elements with a PSOLID/PSLDN1 property for
Standard Formulations. A PSLDN1 entry is written for use in SOL 400 only. See the nonlinear formulation
property description below.

of the MID field on the PSOLID entry or references a PCOMP entry in
the case of a composite material. This property is required.
Material Orientation Defines both the orientation of referenced nonisotropic materials and
solid element results. This can be set to Global, Elemental, or to a specific
coordinate frame reference and defines the CORDM field on the
PSOLID entry. The default is Global. Nonlinear stresses and strains are
output in the Elemental system regardless of the setting.
Integration Network Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the
IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three.
Integration Scheme Defines the integration scheme to be used. This property is the ISOP
field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or Full. This
property can be set to either Gauss or Grid and is the STRESS field on the
PSOLID entry. This property is optional.
Main Index
Element Properties

Nonlinear Forumulations This optional property word can take on any of the three values
(SOL 400) Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for
elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1
entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1
Reduction Factor Kf
Scale Factor
Offset
Roughness Factor
Treatment Factor
Shape Factor
Weld Nugget Diameter These optional properties are used for defining spot weld parameters
Top/Bot Sheet Thickness (weld diameter and connecting sheet thicknesses) in an MSC Nastran
Embedded Fatigue analyses of spot welds for statics, normal modes and
modal transient response. All parameters defined here are placed on the
PFTG bulk data entry. See the above entry also. For the sheet thickness,
enter two values separated by spaces. If only one is provided both top and
bottom thickness retain the same value for both. If not defined, the
thicknesses are determined from the connecting sheet properties. If the
diameter is left blank, a diameter is determined through a look up table
based on the minimum thickness of the connecting sheets. To use a solid
HEX element as a spot weld, the top face must be connect to the top
sheet and the bottom face must be connected to the bottom sheet using
RBE3 elements.
3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Reduced Integration

are chosen.
Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Reduced Tet 10
Modify Integration Hex 8/20
Use this form to create CHEXA, or CTETRA elements with a PSOLID/PSLDN1 property for Reduced
Integration. This element is typically only used with SOL 400 and nonlinear analysis. If defined for other
Main Index
Element Properties
solution sequences, a standard formulation will be written instead. Tet 4 elements are not valid. The SOLID
option is written to the BEHi field and LRIH or QRI options are written to the INTi field of the of the
PSLDN1 entry to indicate reduced integration.

of the MID field on the PSOLID entry. This property is required.
3D - Solid - Homogeneous - P-Formulation

are chosen:
Create 3D Solid Homogeneous P-Formulation Tet 4/10/16
Modify Wed 6/15/24/52
Hex 8/20/32/64
Use this form to create CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA elements with a PSOLID property along with the P-
formulation entries ADAPT and PVAL.
Main Index
Element Properties

Material Orientation Defines orientation for the referenced material. This property can be set
to Global, Elemental or to a user-defined coordinate system and defines
the CORDM field on the PSOLID entry. The default is Global. This
Starting P-orders Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.
Minumum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined
Maximum P-orders by the P-order Coord. System (default elemental). Starting P-orders
P-order Coordinate System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this
default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT
entry.
the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 0.0. This is the
the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the
Integration Scheme Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This can
be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the STRESS field on the
Main Index
Element Properties
3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Hyperelastic

Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Hyperelastic Tet 4/10
Modify Formulation Wed 6/15
Hex 8/20
Use this form to create CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA elements with a PLSOLID property to define a fully
nonlinear hyperelastic solid. This is meant to work with SOL 106 and not SOL 400. For SOL 400, use
standard elements with hyperelastic material properties.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. The material must have a hyperelastic
constitutive model defined so the PLSOLID can reference a MATHP
entry. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when
data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the
name. This property defines the setting of the MID field on the
PLSOLID entry. This property is required.
Output Locations Location of stress and strain output. the options are GAUS (default) or
GRID. this defines the STR field on the PLSOLID entry.
Nonlinear Formulation This parameter is ignored. Use this property set with SOL 106 only.
3D - Solid Shell - Homogeneous - Standard Formulation

are chosen.
Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Solid Shell Hex 8
Modify
Use this form to create CHEXA elements with a PSOLID/PSLDN1 property for Solid-Shell Formulations.
A Solid Shell definition is identical to a Standard Formulation in that it also creates the elements plus a
PSOLID property, but is meant for use in SOL 400 only and creates the additional PSLDN1 entry (the
nonlinear formulation property does not need to be defined and is not included on the Input Properties
form). The SLCOMP value is written to the BEHi field of the PSLDN1 option to indicate a solid continuum
composite element type and the ASTN option written to the integration code field if assumed strain is
requested. Only Hex 8 elements are valid for this element property.
Main Index
Element Properties

Integration Scheme Defines the integration scheme to be used. This property is the ISOP
field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or Full. This
SCOMP IntegrationScheme Defines the Integration Scheme requested for the solid continuum
composite elements.
3D - Solid - Homogeneous - Incompressible

are chosen.
Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Incompressible Tet 4
Modify
Use this form to create CTETRA elements with a PSOLID/PSLDN1 property for incompressible elements.
This element is typically only used with SOL 400 and nonlinear analysis. If defined for other solution
sequences, a standard formulation will be written instead. Tet 4 elements are the only valid elements. The
ISOL option is written to the BEHi field and L option is written to the INTi field of the of the PSLDN1
entry to indicate incompressible.
Main Index
Element Properties

3D - Solid - Laminate
are chosen.
Create 3D Solid Laminate Hex 8/20
Modify
Use this form to create CHEXA elements and a PCOMP (SOL 600 and non SOL 400) or PCOMPLS
(SOL400) property. Note that only Assumed Strain is allowed for HEX8 elements only when ply stack
direction is in Z-element diretion and the ply thicknesses have been defined as percent thicknesses. Any other
combination will revert the integration scheme to the Nastran default for linear or quadratic elements. For
SOL 600, the MSTACK option is also written.
Main Index
Element Properties

using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the PCOMP
or PCOMPLS entry to be used. This property is required. The material
selected should be a composite.
angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This scalar value
can either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate
system. This property is optional.
Laminate Option Defines available laminate options MEM, BEND, SMEAR, SMCORE
(see MSC Nastran QRG for definitions written to PCOMP only (non
SOL 400).
Thickness Direction 3D Defines element face used as base ply orientation. For [Thickness
Direction 3D]
"Nastran Elem X" -- this corresponds to 1-4-8-5
"Nastran Elem Y" -- this corresponds to 2-1-5-6
"Nastran Elem Z" -- this corresponds to 1-2-3-4

SCOMP Integration Scheme SOL 400 - Writes the SLCOMP option to the PCOMPLS entry for
defining assumed strain.
3D - Solid - Interface
are chosen.
Create 3D Solid Interface Wed 6/15
Modify Hex 8/20
Use this form to create CIFHEX or CIFPENT elements and a PCOHE property (SOL 400 only). This input
data creates interface elements that are generally zero-thickness elements that bond two meshes together and
are used in the Cohesive Zone Modeling Technique (CZMT) to simulate delamination or crack growth.
Main Index
Element Properties

PCOHE entry.
3D - Body Pair- Geometric

are chosen..
Action Dimension Type Option(s)
Create 3D Body Pair Geometric
Modify
Use this form to create the geometric properties of contact body pair.
Parameters

Distance Tolerance (ERROR) Distance below which a node is considered touching a body. If left blank,
calculation is automatic.
Bias Factor (BIAS) Contact tolerance bias factor. Overrides any value set elsewhere.
Interference Closure Interference closure amount, normal to the contact surface. For values >
(CINTERF) 0.0, overlap between bodies. For values <0.0, gap between bodies.
Slide Off Distance (SLIDE) Delayed slide off distance. Not used unless Delayed Slide Off is
activated. A node sliding on a segment will slide off only if it passes a
node or edge at a sharp corner over a distance larger than this distance.
The default is related to the dimensions of the contacted segment by a
20% increase of its isoparametric domain.
Hard-Soft Ratio (HARDS) Hard-soft ratio. Only used if double-sided contact with automatic
constraint optimization.
Main Index
Element Properties

Glued Contact (IGLUE) Flag to activate glued contact. Otherwise it is assumed touching contact.
To fully deactivate contact, the user should remove the Body Pair from
the Load Case.
Retain Gaps/Overlaps Existing initial gaps or overlaps between nodes and the contacted body
(IGLUE) are not removed.
Retain Moment (IGLUE) Insures full moment carrying glue when shells contact.
Allow Separation (JGLUE) Allows separation of a node if ON based on whether a Separation
Threshold has been set or Breaking Glue parameters are set.
Stress free InitCont Coordinates of nodes in contact are adjusted to cause an initial stress free
(ICOORD) condition.
Delayed Slide Off (ICOORD) Extends the tangential error tolerance at sharp corners of deformable
bodies to delay sliding off a contacted segment.
Contact Detection Contact searching order for deformable contact bodies. (Node to
(ISEARCH) Segment only.) Double sided searches from Slave to Master starting
from the lowest body ID, then reverses the order. Single Sided is from
Slave to Master. Automatic, the program decides based on smallest
element edge at outer boundaries (or thickness in case of shell elements).
Penetration Dist (AUGDIST) Penetration distance beyond which an augmentation will be applied for
segment-to-segment contact.
Normal Penalty Fact Augmented Lagrange penalty factor used by segment-to-segment
(PENALT) contact algorithm. The default is derived from default contact
characteristic distances.
Tan Penalty Factor Augmented Lagrange penalty factor for sticking part of friction used by
(TPENALT) the segment-to-segment contact algorithm. The default is the Normal
Penalty Factor divided by 1000.
Slip Distance (STKSLP) Maximum allowable slip distance for sticking, beyond which there is no
sticking and only sliding exists. Used by segment-to-segment contact
algorithm only.
Stick/Slip (TAUGMNT) Flag for augmentation for the slicking part of friction in a segment-to-
segment contact analysis.
Note: If individual property name is left empty then the new contact property created will have it’s
name ‘pairname_p’ for physical property and ‘pairname_g’ for geometrical property.
Main Index
Element Properties
Options
Rigid/Shell Contact Options - Detects the top and/or bottom of shell elements with or without
Slave (COPTS) consideration of the thickness for slave body. For rigid elements, any
value except Exclude will be treated as inclusion of rigid surfaces in the
contact algorithm.
Rigid/Shell Contact Options - Detects the top and/or bottom of shell elements with or without
Master (COPTM) consideration of the thickness for master body. For rigid elements, any
value except Exclude will be treated as inclusion of rigid surfaces in the
contact algorithm.
Edge Contact Options - Slave Detects beams/bars and/or free and hard shell edges for slave body.
(COPTS)
Edge Contact Options - Detects beams/bars and/or free and hard shell edges for master body.
Master (COPTM)
3D - Body Pair- Physical

are chosen..
Action Dimension Type Option(s)
Create 3D Body Pair Physical
Modify
Use this form to create the physical properties of contact body pair.

Separation Threshold Separation force, stress, or fraction above which a node separates from a
(FNTOL) body. The value is dependent on whether the separation flag on the
BCPARA entry, IBSEP, is set to absolute /relative forces/stresses.
Segment to segment contact always uses relative stress. This is set on the
Contact Control Parameters form.
Friction Coefficient (FRIC) Friction coefficient. Can reference a temperature dependent non-spatial
field.
Fric Stress Limit (FRLIM) Friction stress limit. Used only with Coulomb friction bilinear model.
Breaking Glue (BKGL) Activate breaking glue for node to segment contact. Not supported for
segment to segment contact. Must define maximum normal and
tangential stress and corresponding exponents. Default = No
Max Normal Stress (BGSN) Maximum normal stress for breaking glue. Not supported when using
segment to segment contact. Default = 0.0
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling

Max Tan Stress (BGST) Maximum tangential stress for breaking glue. Not supported when using
segment to segment contact. Default = 0.0
Breaking Glue - 1 Exp (BGM) First exponent for breaking glue. Not supported when using segment to
segment contact. Default = 2.0
Breaking Glue - 2 Exp (BGN) Second exponent for breaking glue. Not supported when using segment
to segment contact. Default = 2.0
3DBeam Modeling
Modeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shell, plate, or solid
structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that may be complex
functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary to define the orientation of this cross
section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset from the two finite element nodes defining
the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly defined. Fortunately, Patran provides a number of tools to
simplify these aspects of modeling.
Cross Section Definition

The cross section properties are defined on the element property forms shown on pages 1D - Beam - General
Section (CBAR) - Standard Formulation, 110 and 1D - Beam - Tapered Section (CBEAM) - Standard Formulation, 121. The
properties can be entered directly into the data boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional Constant, etc. or by
pushing the large I-beam icon on these forms to access the Beam Library form. The Beam Library forms are
a much more convenient way of defining properties for standard cross sections and are shown below.
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Create Action
The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the particular cross section desired (e.g.
I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components of the beam section must be entered.
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Table 2-26
Entry Description
Existing Sections List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the
section names of interest using the filter mechanism.
New Section Name Beam section name to be created.
Beam section library icon palette. Select the icon representing the desired
section.
These forward and backward arrows provide access to additional beam

section icons.
Calculate Display Calculates the beam properties based on the current dimensions and
displays an image of the scaled section along with the properties.
Current beam section as selected from the section library icon palette. The
required dimensions are shown.
H,W1,W2,I,I1,I2 Enter the dimensions of the beam section here, referring to the beam
section icon.
Write to Report File Writes the current beam properties to a report file.
Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other options available with the
beam library are documented in the Patran Reference Manual, see Tools>Beam Library (p. 462) in the Patran
Reference Manual. Once one or more beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the section
data box on the element properties form.
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Supplied Functions
I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness (t2),lower
flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and web thickness (t)--
allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition.
Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal
flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).
Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange thickness
(t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).
Solid-Rod - Solid section, one dimension -- radius (R).
Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),
top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2).
Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2).
Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top and
bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).
Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W).
Box-Unsymmetrical - Closed section, six dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width
(W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side flange thickness (t3),
left side flange thickness (t4).
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of hat
flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t).
H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of vertical
flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one vertical flange
(W1/2).
Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t), horizontal
flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2).
Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange between as
measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one side (W),
thickness (t1).
Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),
horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the common
edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior diagonal angle).
Cross Section Orientation

The Bar Orientation data box on the Input Properties form is used to define how the y-axis of the beam cross
section is oriented in space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This tells MSC ⁄Nastran that the cross section
y-axis lies in the plane defined by the beam’s x-axis (the line connecting the two node points) and this vector.
The Value Type pop up menu may be changed to Node ID. In this case the y-axis lies in the plane defined
by the x-axis and the selected node. When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is
selected the following select box appears on the screen.
These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are discussed in more detail in the Select
Menu (p. 31) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Table 2-27
Entry Description
These three tools define the orientation vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a
selected coordinate system. This is a convenient way to specify the orientation when
it is aligned with one of the three axes of a rectangular coordinate system. When the
system is not rectangular (e.g. cylindrical) these tools may not provide the desired
definition because the defined vector does not change direction at different points in
space--these tools just provide an alternate way to define a global vector.
This tool may be used to define a general vector with respect to an alternate
coordinate system. When this icon is picked, the select menu changes to the one on
the right.
These tools provide different ways to define vectors. In addition, the user is requested
to select a coordinate system in which this vector is defined.
The simplest list processor syntax that appears in the databox for a vector in an
alternate coordinate system is <x_component, y_component, z_component> coord
cord_id (e.g. <1, 0, 0> coord 3). In many cases it is easy to simply type a definition in
this form into the Bar Orientation databox.
After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correctness in Patran. The first option
is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show Action, the Definition of X Y Plane property,
and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors defining the orientation will be shown on the model. A second
option can be used when the Beam Library has been used to define the beam cross section. There is an option
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 349) in the Patran Reference Manual called Beam
Display. The menu allows different display options for displaying an outline of the defined cross section on
the model in the correct location and orientation.
Users should be aware of one difference between the Patran and MSC Nastran definitions for cross section
orientation. In Patran the orientation is completely independent of the analysis coordinate system at the beam
nodes. In MSC Nastran, the orientation vector is assumed to be defined in the same system as the analysis
system at the first node of the beam. In Patran it is perfectly permissible to define the orientation in a different
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
coordinate system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN input file is generated, the necessary
transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 will be performed.
Table 2-28
Entry Description
These three tools define the orientation vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis
of a selected coordinate system. This is a convenient way to specify the
orientation when it is aligned with one of the three axes of a rectangular
coordinate system. When the system is not rectangular (e.g. cylindrical)
these tools may not provide the desired definition because the defined
vector does not change direction at different points in space--these tools just
provide an alternate way to define a global vector.
This tool may be used to define a general vector with respect to an alternate
coordinate system. When this icon is picked, the select menu changes to the
one on the right.
These tools provide different ways to define vectors. In addition, the user is
requested to select a coordinate system in which this vector is defined.
The simplest list processor syntax that appears in the databox for a vector
in an alternate coordinate system is <x_component, y_component,
z_component> coord cord_id (e.g. <1, 0, 0> coord 3). In many cases it is
easy to simply type a definition in this form into the Bar Orientation
databox.
Main Index
3DBeam Modeling
Cross Section End Offsets

Two data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally define an offset
from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or from node 2 to the cross section
centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for defining these vectors. One
difference between the orientation definition and the offset definitions, however, is that for the offset the
magnitude of the vector is important. Because of this, the select menu tools are usually not very convenient.
Typically, offsets are defined by typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>) into the appropriate
data box.
Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these options are very similar to those for
orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be displayed as vectors on the
model. This option is not especially useful because the vector plot shows only the direction of the offset, not
the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more useful to view the Beam Display menu on the Display
form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 349) in the Patran Reference Manual to select the display option
with offsets. The viewport will then show the beam displayed in both the offset and non-offset positions.
Stiffened Cylinder Example

Figure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffeners. The cross section was
defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input Properties form. The Z cross
section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section dimensions input, a section name input, and
the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties form, the Use Beam Section toggle is set to ON. The
defined section name is selected in the [Section Name] data box. The string <-1.0 0. 0.> coord 1 is typed into
the Bar Orientation data box to align the cross section orientation with the radial direction of the global,
Main Index
cylindrical system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 typed into the
Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end offsets to be radially inward.
R
Z1
X
Z
Figure 2-1 Stiffened Cylinder

The Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, located on the Patran
main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are several option menus. The
selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will determine which load and boundary
conditions form appears, and ultimately, which MSC Nastran loads and boundary conditions will be created.
The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and details of all the
loads and boundary conditions supported by the Patran MSC Nastran Analysts Preference.
Main Index
Loads & Boundary Conditions Form

This form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Boundary Conditions form
is used to provide options to create the various MSC Nastran loads and boundary conditions. For a definition
of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary Conditions Application (p. 5) in the Patran Reference Manual. Options
for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary Conditions form. For
more information see Defining Contact Regions, 242.
Main Index
Main Index
Table 2-29
Entry Description
Object These three tools define the orientation vector as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis
of a selected coordinate system. This is a convenient way to specify the
orientation when it is aligned with one of the three axes of a rectangular
coordinate system. When the system is not rectangular (e.g. cylindrical)
these tools may not provide the desired definition because the defined
vector does not change direction at different points in space--these tools just
provide an alternate way to define a global vector.
Type Defines what type of region is to be loaded. The available options depend
on the selected Object. The general selections can be Nodal, Element
Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal is applied explicitly to nodes.
Element Uniform defines a constant value to be applied over an entire
element, element face, or element edge. Element Variable defines a value
that varies across an entire element, element face, or element edge.
Current Load Case Current Load Case type is set on the Load Case menu. When the Load
Cases toggle located on the main menu is chosen, the Load Cases menu will
appear. Under Load Case Type, select either Static or Time Dependent,
then enter the name of the case, and click on the Apply button.
Input Data Generates either a Static, 214 or Time Dependent, 217 Input Data form,
depending on the current Load Case Type.
The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.
Object Type
 Nodal
 Displacement / Velocty /
 Element Uniform
Acceleration
 Element Variable
 Force  Nodal
 Element Uniform
 Pressure
 Nodal
 Temperature  Element Uniform
 Inertial Load  Element Uniform
 Initial Displacement  Nodal
 Initial Velocity  Nodal
Main Index
Object Type
 Element Uniform
 Distributed Load
 Element Uniform
 CID Distributed Load
 Total Load  Element Uniform
 Contact  Element Uniform
 Crack (VCCT)  Nodal
 Initial Plastic Strain  Element Uniform
 Initial Stress  Element Uniform
 Initial Temperature  Nodal
 Planar Rigid Wall *  Nodal
 Init. Rotation Field *  Nodal
* For SOL 700 only.
Static
This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary
Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load
Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 211. The information on the Input Data
Main Index
form will vary depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information found on this
form.
Main Index
Main Index
Table 2-30
Entry Description
Load/BC Set Scale Factor Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form. The
default value is 1.0. Primarily used when field definitions are used to define
the load values.
Input Data Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables, 220 for detailed
information.
Spatial Fields When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be
referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If
the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is
selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the
Input Data entry.
FEM Dependent Data This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field
creation and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only
when focus is set in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.
Analysis Coordinate Frame Defines the coordinate frame used to interpret the degree-of-freedom data
defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads. This
can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.
Time Dependent
This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary Condition
form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load
Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 211 and Load Cases, 242. The information
Main Index
on the Input Data form will vary, depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard
Main Index
information found on this form.
Main Index
Table 2-31
Entry Description
Load/BC Set Scale Factor Defines a general scaling factor for all values defined on this form.The
default value is 1.0. Primarily used when field definitions are used to define
the load values.
Spatial Dependence Input Data in this section will vary. See Object Tables, 220 for detailed
information.
Spatial Fields When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be
referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the
input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial field is selected
by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be entered in the Input
Data entry.
Time Dependent Fields When specifying time dependent values in the Input Data entries, time-
dependent fields can be referenced. All defined time-dependent fields
currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input
Data entry and a time-dependent field is selected by clicking in this list, a
reference to that field will be entered in the Input Data entry.
FEM Dependent Data... This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field
Analysis Coordinate Frame Defines the coordinate frame to be used to interpret the degree-of-freedom
data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal type loads.
This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame definition.
Object Tables
These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are defined. The data
fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cases, the data fields also depend on
the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables outline and define the various input data that
pertains to a specific selected object:
Displacement / Velocty / Acceleration

Object Type Analysis Type Option
Displacement Nodal Structural Standard
Velocity
Acceleration
Creates MSC Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data for Displacement entries. All non blank entries will cause
an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created to define
the non zero enforced displacement or rotation. Phase angle specifications will create DPHASE entries for all
corresponding non blank translational or rotational data in frequency response analysis. Displacement,
Main Index
Velocity and Acceleration LBCs used in frequency response / dynamic analysis also define the RLOAD1
entries with DISP, VELOC, and ACCEL keywords, respectively. For frequency response analysis, the LBCs
must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial frequency field such that a TABLEDi
entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as Time/Frequency dependent to do this. Values given via
this option are total enforced values. For relative enforced values used in SOL 400, see the description for the
Relative Displacement option below.
Input Data Description

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the total enforced translational values. These are in model length
units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the total enforced rotational values. These are in radians.
Translational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response
(Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) analysis for the translational values. These are in degrees.
Rotational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response
(Rth1,Rth2,Rth3) analysis for the rotational values. These are in degrees.
Object Type Analysis Type Dimension

Displacement Element Uniform Structural 3D
Element Variable
Applies a zero or nonzero total displacement boundary condition to the face of solid elements. The primary
use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; but it may also be used for standard solid
elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are created. If applied
to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and SPCD entries are created. In frequency response
analysis, the phase angles are written as DPHASE entries. See comments above for nodal displacements.

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These values are in
model-length units.
Translation Phases Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response
(Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) analysis for the translational displacement values. These are in degrees.
Object Type Analysis Type Option

Displacement Nodal Structural Relative Displacement
Applies a zero or nonzero relative displacement boundary condition as opposed to a total magnitude. This is
used in SOL 400 only with multiple steps and not applicable to other solution sequences. This LBC will be
ignored if present in a referenced load case for solution sequences other than SOL 400. The appropriate SPC1
Main Index
and SPCR entries are created. For example, if a DOF is specified on a SPCR with 0.0 for step 2, the relative
displacement of this DOF for step 2 with respective to step 1 is 0.0. The total displacement of step 2 is 0.2
if the solution of step 1 for this DOF is 0.2.

Relative Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the relative enforced translational displacement values in
vector form, each value separated by a comma between the brackets
<>. If no enforced translation is to be specified, the particular
component should be left blank.
Relative Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the relative enforced rotational displacement values in
vector form, each value separated by a comma between the brackets
<>. If no enforced rotation is to be specified, the particular
component should be left blank.
Force
Object Type Analysis Type
Force Nodal Structural
Creates MSC Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries. Creates the DPHASE entries in frequency
response analysis when specifying phase angles for out-of-phase loading. RLOAD1 entries are created for
dynamic analysis and reference the appropriate FORCE entries. For frequency response analysis, the force
LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial frequency field such that a
TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as Time/Frequency dependent to do this.

Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom. This
defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry.
Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freedom. This
defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry.
Force Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response
(Fth1,Fth2,Fth3) analysis for the corresponding force components. These are in degrees.
Moment Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response
(Mth1,Mth2,Mth3) analysis for the corresponding moment components. These are in degrees.
Pressure
Pressure Element Uniform Structural 2D
Creates MSC Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.
Main Index

Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These
values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field
across that face.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These values are all equal
for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3
values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as
zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length
(i.e. independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads
(FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated at the
middle of the application region.

Pressure Element Uniform Structural 3D
Creates MSC Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This
defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated once at the center of the applied region.

Pressure Element Variable Structural 2D
Creates MSC Nastran, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, or FORCE Bulk Data entries.
Main Index

Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a
scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through
P4 values.
Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar field is
referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through P3
values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined as
zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit length
(e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal loads
(FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated
independently at each node.

Pressure Element Variable Structural 3D
Creates MSC Nastran PLOAD4 Bulk Data entries.

Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it
will be evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.
Temperature
Temperature Nodal Structural
Creates MSC Nastran TEMP Bulk Data entries.

Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.

Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D
Main Index
Writes the TEMPP1 entry. For 2D Target Elements, T1/T2 or TBAR/TPRIME are written to the TEMPP1
entry but not both. For Equivalent Section shell properties or shell properties that have Z1/Z2 defined,
T1/T2 is written and TBAR/TPRIME left blank on the TEMPP1 entry. Nastran determines the correct
TPRIME. For all other shell properties TBAR/TPRIME are written and T1/T2 left blank. TBAR/TPRIME
are computed by Patran from T1/T2 using the thickness property value. This is for Element Variable
Temperature LBCs. For Element Uniform Temperature LBC, only TBAR is written or necessary. All others
fields are left blank.
Creates MSC Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The
temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b,
T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0.

Temperature Element Uniform Structural 2D
Creates MSC Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The temperature
value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness is defined to
be 0.0.

Temperature Element Variable Structural 1D
Creates MSC Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field reference
will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA and TB
fields.
Axis-1 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field reference will
be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields.
Axis-2 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field reference will
be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.
Main Index

Temperature Element Variable Structural 2D
Creates MSC Nastran TEMPP1 Bulk Data entries.

Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top and
bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the
TEMPP1 entry.
Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The top
and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on
the TEMPP1 entry.

Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D, 2D, 3D
Element Variable
This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are created for the
constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the case when a spatial field is
referenced. Writes the TEMPP1 entry. For 2D Target Elements, T1/T2 or TBAR/TPRIME are written to
the TEMPP1 entry but not both. For Equivalent Section shell properties or shell properties that have Z1/Z2
defined, T1/T2 is written and TBAR/TPRIME left blank on the TEMPP1 entry. Nastran determines the
correct TPRIME. For all other shell properties TBAR/TPRIME are written and T1/T2 left blank.
TBAR/TPRIME are computed by Patran from T1/T2 using the thickness property value. This is for Element
Variable Temperature LBCs. For Element Uniform Temperature LBC, only TBAR is written or necessary.
All others fields are left blank.

Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.
Inertial Load
Inertial Load Element Uniform Structural
Creates MSC Nastran GRAV and RFORCE Bulk Data entries.
Main Index

Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry.
Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.
Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.
The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The
origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity and
rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In generating the GRAV and RFORCE
entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each Patran load set.
Initial Displacement
Initial Displacement Nodal Structural
Creates a set of MSC Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.
A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A
unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Initial Velocity
Initial Velocity Nodal Structural
Creates a set of MSC Nastran TIC Bulk Data entries.

Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.
A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A
unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.
Main Index
Distributed Load
Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 1D
Element Variable
Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MSC Nastran PLOAD1 entries.
The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis and the Bar Orientation
element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Load can be created. If the
Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated manually if necessary.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a linear load
variation.

Edge Distributed Load Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
(f1,f2,f3)
Edge Distributed Moment Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.
(m1,m2,m3)

Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 2D
Element Variable
Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The coordinate system for the
load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along the edge. Positive x is
determined by the element corner node connectivity. See Patran Element Library (p. 489) in the Reference
Manual - Part III. For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The
positive x directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction is
normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y direction is
normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and always points into the
element. The MSC Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nodes lying on the edge.
Main Index

Edge Distributed Load For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and THETA
(f1,f2,f3) fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D elements, the
input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and converted into
equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries).
Edge Distributed Moment For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment per unit
(m1,m2,m3) length and converted into equivalent nodal moments (MOMENT
entries).
CID Distributed Load

This load is a generalized distributed load whereby directionality is specified by the user in the form a vector
where each component of this vector represents the distributed load magnitude for the associated direction.
The vector may be constant or a field. This load type is identical to the "Total Load" except the vector
components are used as is (i.e., not divided by the area or length of the application region) and that element
variable is implemented so that the load can vary across an element.

CID Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 1D/2D/3D
Element Variable

Load/BC Set Scale Factor Scale factor by which all components of the distributed forces are
multiplied.
Distributed Force (Surface and Defines the applied translational distributed force vector with respect to
Edge) (F1,F2,F3) the specified analysis coordinate frame. In general this provides the
magnitudes (for each component) of the uniform load per unit length
for 1D or edges of 2D elements or the per unit area on 2D or 3D
surfaces.
Spatial Fields When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can
be referenced. All defined spatial fields currently in the database are
listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input Data entry and a spatial
field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be
entered in the Input Data entry.
FEM Dependent Data This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field
Analysis Coordinate Frame Coordinate Frame in which the three translational distributed forces are
defined.
Main Index
Contact
Contact Element Uniform Structural
This form is used to define certain data for the MSC Nastran contact entries. Other data entries for contact
are defined under the Analysis Application when setting up a job for nonlinear static or nonlinear transient
dynamic analysis. A contact table is also supported; by default, all contact bodies initially have the potential
to interact with all other contact bodies and themselves. This default behavior can be modified under the
Contact Table form, located on the Solution Parameters subform in the Analysis Application when creating
a Load Step.
Note that contact bodies (BCBODY entry) are written to the MSC Nastran input deck in alphanumeric
order, deformable bodies first followed by rigid bodies. The only way to control the order in which bodies
are written to the input deck is to name them alphanumerically in the order you wish them to be written..
Preview Rigid Body Motion

After defining the Input Properties you can use the Preview Rigid Body Motion to check the movement of
the rigid bodies in place. This is an effective tool for verifying the directions for LBCs.
Slideline (SOL 400 and SOL 600)

Input Description
Penetration Type If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not allowed
to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Symmetric, in addition,
nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments of the Slave
Region.
Static Friction Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces.
Coefficient (MU1)
Stiffness in Stick FSTIF is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value is
(FSTIF) usually adequate.
Penalty Stiffness Scaling SFAC is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value is
Factor (SFAC) usually adequate.
Slideline Width (W1) Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the area
for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry.
Vector Pointing from A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from the
Master to Slave Surface Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used to define the coordinate
system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each region.
Main Index
Deformable Body (SOL 400, SOL 600, and SOL 700 )

.
Description
Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two
Coefficient (MU) bodies with different friction coefficients, the average value is used.
Define (type of contact) Select 1) Analytic Contact, 2) Contact Area, 3) Exclusion Region, or 4) Glue
Deactivation. The Contact Area and Exclusion Region are defined using MSC
Nastran entry BCHANGE in the .bdf file, with NODE for Contact Area, and
EXCLUDE for Exclusion Region. The Glue Deactivation is defined using MSC
Nastran entry UNGLUE.
Boundary Type Select either 1) Analytic, or 2) Discrete. By default, a deformable contact body
boundary is defined by the free faces of its elements; this is used by the Discrete
option. However, instead of using the free faces of the elements (Discrete), it is
possible to use spline surfaces (2D) to represent the outer faces (element faces)
of the contact bodies; this is used by the Analytic option. The Analytic option
can improve the accuracy of deformable-deformable contact analysis.
Auto Detect Select this to cause the automatic detection of any discontinuity.
Discontinuities
Feature Angle If the angle between the normals of two touching (adjacent) segments of contact
bodies is greater than the Feature Angle, there is a discontinuity there, and the
discontinuity (at edge) is preserved.
Select Discontinuities... See Select Deactivation Region, 233
Edge Contact... See Edge Contact Subform, 232
Select Contact Area... See Select Contact Area, 232
Select Exclusion See Select Exclusion Region, 232
Region...
Select Deactivation See Select Deactivation Region, 233
Region...
Main Index
Select Discontinuities Subform

.
Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define any discontinuities.
Detect Discontinuities Click on this button to determine if there are any discontinuities for the
entities that define the Application Region.
Define Discontinuities Select entities to define the discontinuities.
Edge Contact Subform

.
Description
Include Outside (Solid When detecting contact of solid elements (for example, CHEXA elements) use
Element) this to include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to the
BCBODY entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D) of the
MSC Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is COPTB
(flag that indicates how body surfaces may contact).
Check Layers (Shell For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses the
Element) layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only,
Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the
appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore
Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd
data block.
Include Edges (Edges) Use this to specify how body surfaces may contact. There are three options,
Beam/Bar, Free and Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCBODY
entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D) of the MSC
Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is COPTB (flag
that indicates how body surfaces may contact).
Select Contact Area

.
Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the contact area.
Define Contact Area Select entities to define the contact area.
Select Exclusion Region

.
Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the exclusion region.
Define Exclusion Select entities to define the exclusion region.
Region
Main Index
Select Deactivation Region

.
Description
Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the glue deactivation region.
Define Deactivated Select entities to define the entities that are to be un-glued.
Entities
Rigid Body (SOL 600 and SOL 700 only)

The input data form differs for 1D and 2D rigid bodies. One dimensional rigid surfaces are defined as beam
elements, or as curves (which may optionally be meshed with beam elements prior to translation) and used
in 2D problems. Two dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements, or as surfaces
(which may optionally be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements prior to translation) and are used in 3D
problems. The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if meshed or as NURB surfaces if not meshed.
Input Description
Flip Contact Side Upon defining each rigid body, Patran displays normal vectors or tic marks. These
should point inward to the rigid body. In other words, the side opposite the side
with the vectors is the side of contact. Generally, the vector points away from the
body in which it wants to contact. If it does not point inward, then use the modify
option to turn this toggle ON. The direction of the inward normal will be
reversed.
Symmetry Plane This specifies that the surface or body is a symmetry plane. It is OFF by default.
Null Initial Motion This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type of Motion Control. If
it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and angular velocity/rotation are set to zero
in the CONTACT option regardless of their settings here (for increment zero).
Motion Motion of rigid bodies can be controlled in a number of different ways: velocity,
Control position (displacement), or forces/moments.
Velocity For velocity controlled rigid bodies, define the X and Y velocity components for
(vector) 2D problems or X, Y, and Z for 3D problems.
Angular For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates, give its angular
Velocity (rad/time) velocity in radians per time (seconds usually) about the center of rotation (global
Z axis for 2D problems) or axis of rotation (for 3D problems).
Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two bodies
Coefficient (MU) with different friction coefficients the average value is used.
Rotation This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the rigid body. If left
Reference Point blank the rotation reference point will default to the origin.
Axis of For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3D problem, aside from the rotation reference point, if
Rotation you wish to define rotation you must also specify the axis in the form of a vector.
Main Index
Input Description
First Control Node This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the
force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the force, but the
application node must also be specified here. If both force and moment are
specified, they must use different control nodes even if they are coincident. If only
1 control node is specified the rigid body will not be allowed to rotate.
Second Control Node This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the moment
is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the moment, but the application
node must also be specified here. It also acts as the rotation reference point. If both
force and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes even if they
are coincident.
Note: While importing the Nastran Input File, Patran adds a suffix to the names of contact bodies
with unique IDs like:
nName-DEFORM.1, name-DEFORM.2, name-RIGID.3
name* - indicates the name of the contact body being imported.
Main Index
Body Pair
This option defines the parameters for the LBC called Contact -- Body Pair, that consists of two contact
bodies as a pair. The Input Data form contains two tabs: Geometric Contact Parameters and Physical Contact
Parameters.
Main Index
Icon Title Description

Geometric Contact Input form for defining geometric parameters and contact options of the
Parameters body pair. For details of the parameters, see: 3D - Body Pair- Geometric, 197
The contact options on this form are divided into two columns one for
Body1/Slave and the other for Body2/Master. Select appropriate contact
options from the given Rigid/Shell Elements and Edge contact options.
Physical Contact Input form for defining physical parameters of contact body pair. For
Parameters details of the parameters, see: 3D - Body Pair- Physical, 199
For physical contact parameters of Thermal Analysis, see: Body Pair (p. 97)
in the Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Thermal.
For display purposes and graphical identification of master/slave relationship, an arrow is drawn from
the slave body toward the master body for each created body pair or when LBC markers are
redrawn/displayed, similar to that shown here:
Slave Body Master Body
Main Index
Planar Rigid Wall (SOL 700 only)

Planar Rigid Wall Nodal Explicit Nonlinear
Two different planar rigid wall options exist:

1. Kinematic rigid wall without friction
2. Penalty method based rigid wall with friction
These are seen as options at the top of the Input Data form. The user must select which wall will be used.
Both wall’s position and orientation are defined by selecting a coordinate system which has its origin on the
plane and the local z axis as the outward normal from the contact surface. This defines a WALL Bulk Data
entry. There are only parameters associated with the penalty based planar rigid wall.

Static Friction Coefficient Static coefficient of friction.
Kinetic Friction Coefficient Kinetic coefficient of friction.
Exponential Decay Coefficient Exponential decay coefficient EXP.
Initial Rotation Field (SOL 700 only)

Init. Rotation Field Nodal Explicit Nonlinear
Defines a velocity field of grid points consisting of a rotation and a traslation specification.
Creates a TIC3 Bulk Data entry.

Trans Veloc(v1,v2,v3) Defines the initial translational velocity values. These are in model
length units per unit time.
Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the initial rotational velocity values. These are in degrees per
unit time.
Rotation Center Defines a point at the center of rotation.
Total Load
Defines a pressure on 1D, 2D, or 3D elements, element faces, surfaces, or curves; or a force on element edges
by entering the total desired load. Patran will distribute the load among affected nodes/elements. Total Load
Main Index
will automatically calculate individual Pressure Loads, or Forces as applicable. Alternatively, you can define a
variable load using fields.
Total Load Element Uniform Structural 1D/2D/ 3D
Total Load = Scale Factor * SQRT (X^2 + Y^2 +Z^2)

When the model is exported to a Nastran input file, Total Load will create one or more entries for PLOAD1
(1D application region), PLOAD4 (2D or 3D application region), or FORCE (element edge application
region) in the Bulk Data.
For Total Load applied to element edges, Forcepernode = (Load/Total Length) * (element length/2).
Input Description
Current Load Case The current load case. You can select it from the list of existing load cases.
Existing Sets Displays existing load sets.
New Set Name Type here the name of new total load set.
Target Element Type Select the target element type: 1D, 2D, or 3D from the drop down option
box.
Input Data... Brings up the Input Data form, where you can define Load/BC Set Scale
Factor and the loads according to element types.
Select Application Region Brings up the Select Application Region form, where you can specify
application region for FEM or Geometric Entities. Total load can also be
defined for region or element property.
Crack (VCCT)
This input data creates the VCCT keyword option. Multiple VCCT options are generated for each crack
defined. This is valid for MSC Nastran 2010 or higher. VCCT is the Virtual Crack Closure Technique used
for evaluating the energy release rates in crack growth analysis.
Input Data Type Analysis Description

Crack (VCCT) Nodal Structural 2D/3D Defines a crack tip (2D) or a crack front (3D) and
its corresponding parameters for crack growth
analysis.
Definition of a crack has special input data. For crack in 2D solid and shell elements, the crack tip is defined
by a single node, thus you simply select a single node as the Appication Region. If you select more than one
node, all nodes will be referenced in the VCCT definition but will not be valid and MSC Nastran is likely to
exit with an error or ignore all but the first or last node. For cracks in 3D elements, a crack front needs to be
define, which is simply a list of nodes defining the crack front. The supported elements are lower- and higher-
Main Index
order 2-D solids and 3-D shells, lower- and higher-order 3-D hexahedral solids, and lower order 3-D
tetrahedral solids. For 3-D solids, it is important that a regular mesh around the crack front is used.
Multiple cracks can be defined and results are obtained for each crack separately. Each crack consists of a crack
tip node in 2-D for shells and a list of nodes along the crack front for 3-D solids. Shell elements can be used
for defining a 2-D style line crack and also be connected to the face of another shell or 3-D solid to form a
3-D style surface crack. These different cases are automatically identified.
For crack propagation, there are two modes of growth: fatigue and direct. For fatigue style, the user specifies
a load sequence time period. During the load sequence, the largest energy release rate and the corresponding
estimated crack growth direction is recorded. At the end of the load sequence, the crack is grown using the
specified method. For direct growth, the crack grows as soon as the calculated energy release rate is larger than
the user-specified Gc. Note that Gc can be made a function of the accumulated crack growth length to model
a crack growth resistance behavior.
Crack opening or propagation may be modeled using two techniques. In the first method, the body in which
the crack is located is remeshed based upon adaptive global remeshing criteria. This option is currently not
available in MSC Nastran. In the second method, the uncracked area is represented by elements with double
nodes and ties, RBE2 or RROD or by elements that are glued together via contact definitions.
The Input Data form is specific to the parameters needed for defining crack growth and are listed in this table.
The field name of the values/parameters written to the VCCT option as documented in the MSC Nastran
Quick Reference Guide is indicated in parenthesis.
Main Index
Main Index
Crack (VCCT) Input Data

Bulk Data
Property (field) Description
Crack Propagation Type: (ITYPE) Can be set to No Crack or Direct.
No Crack - means no crack propagation is initially

performed.
Direct - cracks grow when the energy release rate is

larger than the user specified crack growth resistance
(fracture toughness).
Crack Growth: (IGROW) This is the method of growing the crack.
Released Glued will release MPC definitions (tying)

and works with glued contact, RBE2/RROD, and
tying type 100. This requires that the crack growth
direction be known and is somewhat dictated by the
mesh.
Growth Increment: (INCM) With fixed size the crack growth increment is directly
given.
Direction Method: (METHOD) This is used for specifying the method for calculating
the crack growth direction.
Hoop Stress - The individual energy release modes are

used for calculating the crack growth direction. This
method is also called maximum principal stress
criterion. See Marc Volume A, chapter 5, section on
Fracture Mechanics for details on how this is
calculated.
Crack Growth Increment (CGI) This sets the fixed crack growth increment. It specifies
Size: the length the crack advances during growth. When
re-meshing based growth is specified the given crack
growth increment is directly used when extending the
crack.
For the option of releasing tied interface the crack is

grown one element edge at the time, and as many
edges as needed to reach the specified growth
increment are released.
Main Index
Load Cases
Bulk Data
Property (field) Description
Crack Growth (GC, GC-II, & GC- This sets the crack growth resistance (often denoted
Resistance III) fracture toughness) for the current crack. This value is
Resistance Mode II used together with the total energy release rate growth
Resistance Mode III criterion and provides the default for the separate
modes: Mode I, Mode II, Mode III
For each of the crack modes one can specify a separate

crack growth resistance. The default is to use the value
specified above.
These values can be a function of accumulated crack

growth (a displacement based non-spatial field), time,
or temperature.
Accum C.G/Time/Temp TABCGI, TABGC, It shows list of non-spatial time or temperature
Function TABGC-II and dependent fields to select for Crack Growth increment
TABGCIII size and resistance. This will write TABLEM1 if
selected.
Load Cases
Load cases in Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load environment for the model. Load
cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within MSC Nastran is similar. The individual
load sets are translated into MSC Nastran load sets, and the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE
commands in the Case Control Section.
For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, see Load Cases Application (Ch. 5)
in the Patran Reference Manual.
Defining Contact Regions

The MSC Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in MSC.Nastran
Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D structural regions or rigid
bodies.
This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in Patran. After selecting the
Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that may come into contact.
Main Index
Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form.
Main Index
Table 2-32
Entry Description
Geometry Filter One or more curves, surface edges, or solid edges are defined for the Master
and Slave application regions. The application region can only contain
geometric entities. To model contact between FEM entities without
associated geometry, curves must first be created from the nodes using the
tools available in the Geometry application.
Active Region Toggles the select box between Master and Slave regions. The Master and
Slave application regions can be defined in either order.
Select Curves Select the curve or edge.
Add Adds the entities in the Select Curves databox to either the Master Region
or Slave Region depending on the setting of the Active Region option
menu.
Main Index
Contact
The second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. This is done by pushing the Input
Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following subordinate form.
Table 2-33
Entry Description
Penetration Types If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not
allowed to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Two Sided, in
addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments
of the Slave Region. This is the PTYPE field on the BCONP entry.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Table 2-33
Entry Description
Friction Coefficient (MU1) Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces. This is the MU1
field on the BFRIC entry.
Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF) FSTIF on the BFRIC entry and SFAC on the BCONP entry are penalty
parameters in the contact formulation. The default values are usually
adequate.
Slideline Width (W1) Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the
area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry.
A Vector Pointing from A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from
Master to Slave Surface the Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used to define the
coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each
region.
Rotor Dynamics
The MSC Nastran Preference supports steady state and transient rotor dynamics, introduced in
MSC.Nastran 2004. This capability allows you to model structures with rotating parts, allowing for
gyroscopic effects to be included.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Rotor Dynamics are modelled using Rotor and Unbalance entities, created within the Rotor Dynamics...
selection under the Tools menu:
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Rotor Dynamics Form

The Rotor Dynamics form is accessed from the Rotor Dynamics... selection under the Tools menu. This form
is used to create, modify, delete, or show Rotors, which define spin properties, including the axis of rotation,
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
spin direction, damping factor, and speed.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Table 2-34
Entry Description
Action Create
Modify
Delete
Show
Analysis Steady State
Transient
Object Rotor
Unbalance (Transient only)

Rotor Node List A set of co-linear nodes that make up the rotor line model (spin axis). These
are the grids in the MSC Nastran ROTORG Bulk Data entry.
Spin Direction Node 1 & Two nodes defining the spin direction. These are the GRIDA and GRIDB
Spin Direction Node 2 fields in the MSC Nastran RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk Data entries. These
nodes must be included in the “Rotor Node List” above.
Damping Rotor structural damping factor (default 0.0). This is the GR field of the
MSC Nastran RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk Data entries.
Spin Profile... Spin Profile (Steady State)
Spin History (Transient)
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Spin Profile Form

For Steady State analyses, the Spin Profile form is used to define the relative spin rates.
Table 2-35
Entry Description
Speeed Unit The unit for the speed entries. RPM for revolutions per minute, or
Cycles/Time for frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT field of the
MSC Nastran RSPINR Bulk Data entry, and are translated to either ‘RPM’
or ‘FREQ’.
Speed Values List of relative spin rates. Entries must be in ascending or descending order.
At least one entry required (no default). These values make up the SPEEDi
fields of the MSC Nastran RSPINR Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Spin History Form

For Transient analyses, the Spin History form is used to define the spin rates.
Table 2-36
Entry Description
Speed Unit The unit for the speed entries. RPM for revolutions per minute, or
Cycles/Time for frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT field of the
MSC Nastran RSPINT Bulk Data entry, and are translated to either ‘RPM’
or ‘FREQ’.
Speed Amplitude A constant multiplier to be applied to the Time Dependent Field.
Time Dependent Field A time dependent field that defines the spin rate as a function of time. This
field, with the Speed Amplitude applied to it, will be translated into an
MSC Nastran TABLED1 Bulk Data entry that is referenced by the
RSPINT entry.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Unbalance Form
The Rotor Dynamics Unbalance form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Unbalances, which define
unbalance loads for transient analyses in terms of cylindrical system with the rotor axis as the Z axis.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Table 2-37
Entry Description
Action Create
Modify
Delete
Show
Existing Transient Rotors The unbalance is applied to a node, which must be included in a transient
rotor. When a transient rotor is selected, the “Node” listbox is populated
with nodes from that rotor’s axis. The unbalance node may then be selected
from that list, assuring that it belongs to an existing transient rotor.
Node This node defines the GRID field of the MSC Nastran UNBALNC Bulk
Data entry.
Unbalance Properties... Displays the Unbalance Properties form to define the remaining parameters
for the MSC Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Unbalance Properties Form

The Unbalance Properties Form is used to define the remaining parameters for the Unbalance.
Main Index
Rotor Dynamics
Table 2-38
Entry Description
Mass Define the MASS, ROFFSET, and ZOFFSET fields of the MSC Nastran
UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.
Radial Offest & Z Offset For each of these values, either a constant real value may be specified, or a
time dependent field my be selected from the list below. Time dependent
fields are translated to TABLED1 entries, and referenced by integer ID
values in the appropriate UNBALNC fields.
Defaults are 1.0 for Radial Offset and 0.0 for Z Offset. There is no default
for Mass.
Theta Angular position, in degrees, of the mass in the unbalance coordinate
system (default 0.0). This defines the THETA field of the MSC Nastran
Time On & Time Off The start and termination times for applying the unbalance load. The
default start time is 0.0, while the default termination time is 999999.0.
These values define the Ton and Toff fields of the MSC Nastran
Correction Correction flag to specify whether 1) the mass will be used to modify the
total mass in the transient response calculations, 2) the effect of the rotor
spin rate change will be included in the transient response calculation, or 3)
both.
Possible values are None, Mass, Speed, or Both (default None).
This value defines the CFLAG field of the MSC Nastran UNBALNC Bulk
Data entry.
Orientation Vector Defines the coordinate system orientation relative to the ACID of the
unbalance node (no default).
This vector defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields of the MSC Nastran
Main Index
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis
Preference Guide
3 Running an Analysis

Review of the Analysis Form 258

Translation Parameters 263
 Solution Types 269

Direct Text Input 274

Solution Parameters 276
 Select Superelements 376

Subcases 379

Subcase Parameters 382
 Output Requests 449
 Select Superelements 376

Select Explicit MPCs... 478
 Non-Structural Mass Properties 479
 Select NSM Properties... 484

Subcase Select 486
 Restart Parameters 501

Optimize 506

Toptomize 507
 Interactive Analysis 518
Main Index
Review of the Analysis Form

The Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran mainform, is chosen. To run an
analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on the Analysis form. Other forms
brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation parameters, solution type, solution parameters,
output requests, and the load cases. These forms are described on the following pages. For further
information see The Analysis Form (p. 6) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Main Index
Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 259
Analysis Form
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis run,
select Analyze as the Action.
Main Index
Table 3-1
Entry Description
Action Actions can be set to: Analyze or
Optimize or Toptomize
Access Results
Read Input File
Delete
Monitor (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed).
Abort (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed).
Code & Type Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in
the Preferences>Analysis (p. 388) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Available Jobs List of already existing jobs. If one of these jobs is selected, the name
will appear in the Job Name list box and all parameters for this job will be
retrieved from the database. An existing job can be submitted again by
simply selecting it and pushing Apply. It is often convenient to select an
existing job, modify a few parameters and push Apply to submit the new
job.
Job Name Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name for all
resulting MSC Nastran files and message files.
Job Description (Title), This text is used to generate the TITLE entry in the MSC Nastran
SUBTITLE, & LABEL executive control section.
Translation Parameters... Displays the Translation Parameters form to specify parameters not directly
related to the solution. These are primarily used by the Application
Preferences during the forward translation.
Solution Type... Displays the Solution Types form to select the desired type of analysis to
run.
Direct Text Input... Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows you to directly enter data for
the BULK DATA, Case Control, Executive Control and File Management
sections of the NASTRAN input file.
Select Superelements Opens the Select Superelements form which allows you to select the
superelements active for the specified job.
Subcases... Displays the Subcases form to select a list of load cases to be included in
this analysis run. The list of selected load cases is order dependent.
Subcase Select... Displays the Subcase Select form to select a sequence of subcases
associated with an analysis job.
Analysis Manager... Gives access to the Analysis Manager for submitting,
monitoring, aborting and generally managing a Nastran job. This
button will not appear if the Analysis Manager is not installed or
licensed.
Main Index
The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action.
Object Method
Entire Model Full Run
Check Run
Analysis Deck
Model Only
Load SimXpert
Selected Group Full Run
Check Run
Analysis Deck
Model Only
Load SimXpert
Existing Deck Full Run
Load SimXpert
Restart Full Run
Check Run
Analysis Deck
Interactive Full Run
The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four choices: Entire Model, Current
Group, Existing Deck, and Restart.
 Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed.
 Selected Group is for specifying the group that contains the model that is to be analyzed. Select the
button Select Group..., under Existing Groups select the desired group, then select Cancel. The
name of the selected group will appear in the Analysis form under Group:. For more information see
The Group Menu (p. 225) in the Patran Reference Manual.
 Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to MSC Nastran. The
jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the suffix “.bdf” to form the input
filename. This file must reside in the current directory.
You may also use Existing Deck to directly edit the MSC Nastran Bulk Data file.
Main Index
 Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only supported for the
Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) solution types. The Restart
Parameters, 501 form allows you to specify where to resume the analysis.
 Interactive analysis utilizes the Patran Preference for MSC Nastran capability for performing visual
interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a modal analysis
solution using MSC Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response analysis is then performed
using Patran Analysis: Analyze / Interactive / Full Run. The chain that is followed is 1) using Select
Nastran. MASTER... select a .DBALL file, 2) using Create Loading... specify the loading (for
example, Acoustic, Force), 3) using Output Requests... specify the desired output, and 4) using View
Results... view the results.
The Method indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The methods are listed below:
 Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file is
submitted to MSC Nastran for complete analysis.
 Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file is
submitted to MSC Nastran for a check run only.
 Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus all load case, analysis
type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file, ready for MSC Nastran
should be generated.
 Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains only the model data
including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material property, and loads and
boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point.
 Load SimXpert will launch SimXpert and automatically transfer the finite element model. The
environment variable MSC_SX_HOME must be set to a valid local installation directory of
SimXpert for this capability to be available.
Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal

To submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MSC Nastran it is necessary only to click the Apply
button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will be made automatically. Other
solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more lower-level forms. Several different
analysis examples are considered below.
To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase Select form.
Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with appropriate defaults can be
selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more parameters for a subcase is desired (e.g., to change
an output request), the Subcases... form must be accessed. Then it is simple to select a subcase and bring up
the appropriate form (e.g., Output Requests) to make changes.
For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form and make
the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be accessed from the Solution Type
form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just as for the linear static case, subcases are
automatically created for each defined load case. These can be selected on the Subcase Select form or modified
on the Subcases form.
Main Index
Translation Parameters
In the Patran MSC Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a Patran load case with some additional
parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This association is further strengthened since the
default subcases are created for each load case and have the same name as their associated load case. In the
rest of this document, the terms load case and subcase will generally be used interchangeably. When a specific
form is referenced, Load case and Subcase will be capitalized.
Translation parameters define output file formats, numerical tolerances, processing options, numbering
offsets, and external include files.
Main Index
Tolerances  Division - prevents divide by zero errors.

 Numerical - determines if two real values are equal.
 Writing determines if a value is approximately zero when generating a Bulk
Data entry field.
Bulk Data Format  Sorted Bulk Data - Sorts Bulk Data entries alphabetically.
 "Card Format - Determines whether real numbers are written to a standard (8
character) NASTRAN field or to a double (16 character) NASTRAN field. If
Either is set, the precision necessary will determine whether an 8 or 16
character field is used. The following preference can be included in the
settings.pcl file to set the default: pref_env_set_string("NastranCardFormat",
value), where value is either "Small," "Large," or "Either."
See The settings.pcl File (p. 53) in the Patran Installation and Operations Guide
for more details.
 Write Stored Precision - When ON it writes all data as double precision if the
data double precision information.
 Precision Control Options - Specifies where to round off a grid point
coordinate, material, property, or other entity value before its written out to
the bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will
be written out as 1.34. This option has been implemented for entities: Grids,
Coordinate Frames, MPCs, LBCs, Materials and Properties.
Node Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates.
Coordinate Frame Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates.
This can be set to reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should not
affect the analysis. It only changes the method used in the grid creation. This
determines which coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the GRID
entry.
MSC Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC Nastran. The version specified here is used for
two purposes: to create the full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to
determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only whole numbers and
letters; for example, 66a, 67 and 68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version
number can be overridden by setting the environment variable
“NASTRAN_VERSION”.
Number of Tasks Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis. It is
assumed that the environment is configured for distributed parallel processing.
Write Properties on Element Specifies that properties will be written to the element entries for all elements
Entries where it is allowed in MSC Nastran.
Write Continuation Markers This option is OFF by default. This option can be turned ON to write
continuation markers for Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
Write Global Ply IDs When ON, attempts to keep the Global Ply IDs consistent between MSC
Nastran and Patran.
Convert CBARs to CBEAMs Converts all CBARs to CBEAMS
Write PARTSuperelement This is ON by default and if ON and superelements are selected (see Select
Superelements, 376 then BEGIN BULK SUPER = id sections are written in to the
input file for each selected superelement. If OFF and superelements are
selected, then SESET entries are written instead to define the superelements.
Geometry Check Checks the element shapes to make sure they are valid. You can set different
warning levels from None to Fatal depending on how crucial the element
shapes are to your model.
Use Iterative Solver Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The analysis manger does not
support this option and must be disabled when using this option.
Ext. Superelement Spec... Subform used for defining superelement specifications.
Numbering Options... Subform used to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned
during translation.
Bulk Data Include File... Prompts you for the filename of the include file.
Main Index
External Superelement Specifications

With this form you can define the options for the External Superelements Bulk Data entry. Please see the
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about External Superelements.
Table 3-2
Entry Description
Method The available methods are:
NONE – No EXTSEOUT entry created.
DMIGPCH – Requires an EXTID
MATRIXDB
DMIGDB
DMIGOP2
ASM Bulk & EXT Bulk ASM BULK and EXT BULK require the EXTID method.
Main Index
Numbering Options
This form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parameters form. It allows the
user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during translation. For example, if the user
types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element properties in the resulting
NASTRAN input file will begin at 101.
Main Index
Table 3-3
Entry Description
Begin Contin. Marker: The Begin. Contin. Marker box allows the user to specify the continuation
of the mnemonic format used on multiple line, Bulk Data entries.
IDs Encoded in Names: IDs Encoded in Names allows the user to activate recognition of IDs
encoded into the name of any named entity, such as a material.
Number Only will recognize and use an ID if, and only if, the name of the
entity is an actual number like “105.” This option is ON by default.
Beginning Number will recognize an ID if the number begins the name,

such as “52_shell_property.” This option is OFF by default.
Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it trails the name, such as

“shell_property_52.” This option is OFF by default.
Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it directly follows the first

occurrence of the specified syntax. For example, with this option activated
and the specified syntax set to “.”, the ID assigned to a material given the
name “Steel_1027.32” would be 32.
Note that both the Patran Neutral file reader and the Patran MSC Nastran input file reader preserve the IDs
of named entities with a “.” syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record of ID 12 will be assigned the name
“PSHELL.12.” This last option allows great continuity between input model data and output model data.
This option is ON by default and the default Syntax Marker is “.”.
Main Index
Solution Types
Select File
Solution Types
The Solution Type form defines the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. Your choice for the Solution
Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Parameters, 276, Subcase Parameters, 382, and
Output Requests, 449. See Table 3-54.
To set the Solution Type:
Click on the Analysis Application button.
Main Index
Solution Types
On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type... and select the Solution Type from the list of
available Solution Types.
Main Index
Solution Types
Solution Type Description

 Linear Static Selects Solution Sequence (SOL) 101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on the
selected Solution Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in
SOLs 1 and 101.
 Nonlinear Static Selects Solution Sequence 66 or 106, depending on the version of MSC
Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL 66, and Version 67 and above
yields SOL 106. You may select one or more subcases.
 Normal Modes Selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48 depending on the Solution
Parameters. You may select only one subcase.
 Buckling Selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution
Parameters. Only one subcase may be selected that defines the static
preload. The buckling subcase is automatically generated. The output
requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The
default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and
constraint forces.
 Complex Eigenvalue Selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or 29 depending on the selected
Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase.
 Frequency Response Selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the
selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for
Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For Solution Sequences 108 or 111,
multiple subcases may be selected.
 Transient Response Selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected
Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution
Sequences 27 or 31. For Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases
may be selected.
 Nonlinear Transient Selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129, depending on the MSC Nastran
Version. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields
SOL 129. You may select only one subcase.
 Implicit Nonlinear Selects Solution Sequence 400 or 600 (depending on “SOL400RUN*
toggle).
 DDAM Solution Selects Solution Sequence 187, Dynamic Design Analysis Method
(DDAM).
Main Index
Solution Types
Solution Type Description

 Explicit Nonlinear Selects Solution Sequence 700.
Select ASET/QSET...
 Select existing Degree of Freedom Lists for use in making an ASET or a

QSET in the input file.
 The ASET toggle creates a user selected unreferenced SPOINTS in the
ASET of input file.
 The QSET toggle creates a user selected number of unreferenced
SPOINTS in the QSET of the input file.
Solution Parameters... Brings up a solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows you to
specify parameters which apply to the complete solution.
Main Index
Solution Types
Solution
Database Cyclic Parameter
Solution Type Run Symmetry Formulation MSC Nastran Version Settings
Linear Static Off Off -- -- 1
Off On -- -- 47
On Off -- -- 101
On On -- -- 114
Nonlinear Static -- -- -- 66 or Below 66
-- -- -- 67 or Above 106
Normal Modes Off Off -- -- 3
Off On -- -- 48
On Off -- -- 103
On On -- -- 115
Buckling Off Off -- -- 5
On On -- -- 77
On Off -- -- 105
Complex Off -- Direct -- 28
Eigenvalue
Off -- Modal -- 29
On -- Direct -- 107
On -- Modal -- 110
Frequency Off -- Direct -- 26
Response
Off -- Modal -- 30
On Off Direct -- 108
On -- Modal -- 111
On On Direct -- 118
Transient Off -- Direct -- 27
Response
Off -- Modal -- 31
On -- Direct -- 109
On -- Modal -- 112
Nonlinear -- -- -- 66 or Below 99
Transient
-- -- -- 67 or Above 129
Main Index
Direct Text Input
Solution
Database Cyclic Parameter
Solution Type Run Symmetry Formulation MSC Nastran Version Settings
Implicit 400
Nonlinear
600
DDAM 2004 187
Solution
Explicit 2005 700
Nonlinear
Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and
BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates these entries for any
unsupported entries in the input file. If the data is entered by the user the Write to Input Deck toggle default
is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default for the Input Deck toggle is OFF. These entries
may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they should be written to any input files subsequently created by
the interface, the appropriate Write to Input Deck toggle should be set to ON.
Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input file before the first subcase. The Direct Text
Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text within a subcase definition.
MSC Nastran Input File Import
When an MSC Nastran input deck is imported, data in the MSC Nastran input deck that is not recognized
by Patran, including comments are placed in the reject file. These rejected cards are also placed into the Direct
Text Input (DTI) text boxes. If you turn ON the ability to write DTI into the various portions of the MSC
Nastran input deck, the rejected cards will be placed back into the input deck when it is written out again.
Note that decks with large amounts of rejected cards and comments may place an unacceptable amount of
Main Index
Direct Text Input
data in these text boxes. If this is the case, you can limit the amount of data by setting the environment
variable:
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-4
Entry Description
Bulk Data Section Switches to determine which data section the MSC Nastran input would be
sent.
OK Saves the current setting and data for the four sections and closes the form.
Clear Clears the current form.
Reset Resets the form back to the data values it had at the last OK.
Cancel Resets all four forms back to its previous value and closes the form.
Solution Parameters
Linear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal Modes,
Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. Use this form
to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry. Note that access to this form is only available when the Nastran
version is less than 2005. Dynamic reduction parameters are not necessary for later versions of Nastran.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Database Run Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or
a Rigid Format (SOL 1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is selected.
Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or 47).
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC Nastran will constrain
model singularities.
Inertia Relief Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-
1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic
Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation
must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to
the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT
entry will specify all 6 degrees of freedom.
Alternate Reduction Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired.
The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is
also selected
SOL 600 Run Indicates a SOL 600 run.
Contact Parameters Same as the contact parameters available for the Implicit Nonlinear solution type.
Only used with linear contact capability. See Contact Parameters Subform, 315.
Shell Normal Indicates that MSC Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface
based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Tolerance Angle
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC Nastran. This controls the
setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or
Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to
-1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC Nastran print
file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This
parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the
K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities
and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MSC Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the
setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this
run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME
Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the
setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is
the GRDPNT parameter.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Default Initial Temperature Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry
TEMP(INITIAL)
Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the subcase entry
TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry.
Rigid Element Type: The Rigid element type optionmenu presents three different types of rigid elements,
corresponding to the three possible values for the Nastran RIGID= case control. They
are:
 LINEAR: Selects linear rigid elements, which are the rigid elements that have
been available in MSC Nastran since its inception.
 LAGR: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange multiplier
method.
 LGELIM: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange
elimination method.
See the Nastran quick reference guide for more details.
Fatigue Parameters Parameters on this form are used to run an MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis.
See Fatigue Parameters Subform, 337.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use
with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 373.
The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will be used.
Database Run Cyclic Symmetry SOL
On Off 101
On On 114
Off Off 1
Off On 47
Nonlinear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form,
when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MSC Nastran version specified is Version 66 or lower, then Solution
Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MSC Nastran version specified is version 67 or higher,
then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed except as described below. For more information about
Main Index
Solution Parameters
specification of the MSC Nastran version number, see the Translation Parameters, 263 form.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-5
Entry Description
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MSC Nastran will
automatically constrain model singularities.
Large Displacements Indicates that displacements, which can cause a difference in the
formulation of the stiffness matrix, may be encountered. Therefore, the
stiffness matrix may need to be periodically recomputed based on the
displaced shape.
Follower Forces Indicates, as the part deflects, that the applied forces will remain aligned
with the deformed part rather than maintaining their global orientation.
This can only be selected if Large Displacements is also selected.
Solution Sequence The default solution sequence for Nonlinear Static is 106, but can be
changed to any one of the following if desired: 400, 600, 700. Only features
of 106 are used in any case. For specific features particular to 600 or 700,
please use the Implicit Nonlinear type or set the Analysis Type to Explicit
Nonlinear, respectively.
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC Nastran. This
controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can
be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will
be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC
Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case
Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted,
Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This
defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress
the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for geometric
nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MSC Nastran print file that will be generated. This
defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be
used by this run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the
setting of the TIME Executive Control statement.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This
defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight
Generator. This is the GRDPNT parameter.
Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats
you want to use with your solution type. For more details, please see
Results Output Format, 373.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the altered
LGDISP parameter setting for each.
Large Displacements Follower Forces LGDISP

Off On -1
On On 1
On Off 2
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Normal Modes
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when Normal
Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48 input file, depending on the Database
Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-6
Entry Description
See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 286. Not shown unless Cyclic Symmetry is on.
If the version is Version Š 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then
these controls are selectable on the Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 389
form.
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL type
for each. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115) is to be used, or a Rigid
Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.

On Off 103
On On 115
Off Off 3
Off On 48
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution Parameters, that were not shown
on the previous page.
Table 3-7
Parameter Name Description
Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115
or 48).
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC Nastran will
constrain model singularities.
SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis.
Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or
RESVEC=NO to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due
Computation to applied loads. The default is to calculate residual vectors.
Shell Normal Indicates that MSC Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted
Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a
Tolerance Angle PARAM, SNORM entry.
controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be
set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be
set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-7
Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements.
This defines the K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to
suppress the grid point singularities and is intended primarily for
geometric nonlinear analysis.
Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MSC Nastran print file that will be generated.
This defines the setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.
used by this run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This defines the
Default Initial Temperature Specify the initial temperature.
Rigid Element Type There are three ways to define a rigid element. They are 1) Linear, 2)
Lagrangian, or 3) Lgelim.
Max p-Adaptive Cycles Specify the maximum number of p-Adaptive cycles.
Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the
 Dynamic Reduction
dynamic reduction controls.
Rigid Element Type There are three ways to define a rigid element. They are 1) Linear, 2)
Lagrangian, or 3) Lgelim.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-7
Max p-Adaptive Cycles Specify the maximum number of p-Adaptive cycles.
Fatigue Parameters Parameters on this form are used to run an MSC Nastran Embedded
Fatigue analysis. See Fatigue Parameters Subform, 337.
Real Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal Modes,
Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also appears when the Real
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameter form. Use this form
to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-8
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This
parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos,
Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens,
Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse
Power, or Inverse Power. If this selection is set to Lanczos, an
EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines
the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Frequency Range of Interest Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be
examined. These are the F1 and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data
entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Estimated Number of Roots= Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located.
This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on
the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is
the ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value
between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction
Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL
Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This
parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point.
This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the EIGR Bulk
Data entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be
selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter
cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is
the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization
Point to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method
is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction
Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data
entry.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Dynamic Reduction Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal Modes,
Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. Use this form
to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry.
Table 3-9
Perform Dynamic Reduction A flag that indicates whether or not any dynamic reduction is desired.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-9
Highest Frequency of Indicates the maximum frequency to be considered when performing
Interest= dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform
Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This is the FMAX field.
Method Indicates which method is to be used in selecting coordinates. This
parameter can be set to either Automatic or Manual. This parameter
can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON. This
determines if the program will automatically select the number of
generalized coordinates.
Number of Generalized Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the
Coordinates= dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform
Dynamic Reduction is set to ON, and Method of Coordinate Selection
is set to Manual. This is the NQDES field.
Number of Needed Scalar Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this
Points= dynamic reduction. This parameter can only be selected if Perform
Dynamic Reduction is set to ON and Method of Coordinate Selection
is set to Manual. The Application Preference will automatically create
this many SPOINTs, and place them in the a-set and the q-set.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Buckling
This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when
Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file, depending on the setting of
the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL type
for each.

On Off 105
On On 77
Off Off 5
This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parameters that were not shown on the
previous page.
Table 3-10
Database Run Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 105) is to be
used or a Rigid Format or unstructured Solution Sequence (SOL 5 or
77). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will
be selected.
Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part.
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC Nastran
will automatically constrain model singularities.
Eigenvalue Extraction See Real Eigenvalue Extraction, 286.
be set to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS
will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to -1.
Control command. This parameter can have one of three settings:
Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-10
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures.
This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the
 Eigenvalue Extraction
eigenvalue extraction controls.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Buckling Solution
Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data entries, depending on the selected
extraction method.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction.
Table 3-11
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues.
This parameter can be set to any one of the following:
Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If
Lanczos is selected, an EIGRL entry will be created. If Inverse
Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and EIGB
entry will be created with the METHOD field set to either INV
or SINV specified, respectively.
Eigenvalue Range of Interest Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of eigenvalues
to be examined. These are the L1 and L2 fields on the EIGB
entry or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL entry.
Estimated Number of Roots= Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be
located. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction
Method is set to Inverse Power. This is the NEP field on the
EIGB entry.
Number of Desired Roots= Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed.
This value can only be selected if Extraction Methods set to
Lanczos. This is the NP field on the EIGRL entry.
Number of Desired Positive Roots Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenvalues to be
computed. This value can only be selected if Extraction
Method is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power.
This is the NDP field on the EIGB entry.
Number of Desired Negative Roots Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenvalues to be
computed. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method
is set to Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the
NDN field on the EIGB entry.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-11
Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer
value in the range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be
specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the
MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done.
This parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or
Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction
Method is set to Lanczos. This is the NORM field on the EIGB
entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can
only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This
parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the
Normalization Point to be used. This, too, can only be selected
if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot
be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the
C field on the EIGB entry.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue
Complex Eigenvalue is selected. When you specify the Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the
Solution Type form), Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type for
each. If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 or 110) will be selected. If you
deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) will be selected.
Database Run Formulation SOL

On Direct 107
On Modal 110
Off Direct 28
Off Modal 29
This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters.
Table 3-12
will constrain model singularities.
nonlinear analysis.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-12
Default Load Temperature Specify load temperature.
Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the
G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).
Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the
 Complex Eigenvalue
complex eigenvalue extraction controls.
Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the real
 Real Eigenvalue
eigenvalue extraction controls.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue Extraction

This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue
Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction.
Table 3-13
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the complex eigenvalues. This
parameter can be set to any one of the following: Complex Lanczos,
Upper Hessenberg, Inverse Power, or Determinate. This defines the
setting of the METHOD field.
Alpha of Point A = Defines the real component of the beginning of lines in the complex
plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to
Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the ALPHAAJ
fields.
Omega of Point A = Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the
complex plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method
is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the
OMEGAAJ fields.
Alpha of Point B = Defines the real component of the end of lines in the complex plane.
These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to
Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values.
They are the ALPHABJ fields.
Omega of Point B = Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the complex
plane. These values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to
Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values.
They are the OMEGABJ fields.
Width of Region = Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This value
cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or
Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the LJ fields.
Estimated Number of Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located within
Roots = the specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction
Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list
of integer values. They are the NEJ fields.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-13
Number of Desired Roots = Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed within the
specified region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is
set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer
values. They are the NDJ fields.
parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This is the
NORM field on the EIGC entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is the G field on
the EIGC Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point
to be used. This can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to
Inverse Power or Determinate. This is the C field on the EIGC Bulk
Data entry.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Frequency Response
Frequency Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you specify
the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and Cyclic Symmetry parameters, and
the altered SOL type for each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 108, 111, 118)
Main Index
Solution Parameters
will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 26 or 30) will be selected.
Database Run Formulation Cyclic Symmetry SOL

On Direct Off 108
On Direct On 118
On Modal -- 111
Off Direct -- 26
Off Modal -- 30
This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solution Parameters.
Table 3-14
Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part, and
the appropriate flags will be set. This can only be set if Database Run
is selected and Formulation is set to Direct (SOL 118).
nonlinear analysis.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-14
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G
parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value).
Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the
 Eigenvalue Extraction eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified
if Formulation is set to Modal.
Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic reduction
 Dynamic Reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set
to Modal.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Transient Response
Transient Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify
Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).
Main Index
Solution Parameters
The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type for
each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 109, 112) will be selected. If
Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected.
Database Run Formulation SOL

On Direct 109
On Modal 112
Off Direct 27
Off Modal 31
This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Parameters.
Table 3-15
SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis.
SOL 700 Run Select this to perform a SOL 700 analysis. To do this is necessary to
use the Direct method.
Shell Normal Indicates that MSC Nastran will define grid point normals for a
Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears
Tolerance Angle on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within MSC Nastran. This
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-15
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G
parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.)
W3, Damping Factor Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping
characteristics of the model.
W4, Damping Factor1
Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the
 Eigenvalue Extraction eigenvalue extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified
if Formulation is set to Modal.
Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to define
 Dynamic Reduction the dynamic reduction controls. These parameters can only be
specified if Formulation is set to Modal.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Nonlinear Transient
Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a SOL 129 input file, depending
on the version of MSC Nastran indicated on the translation parameter form except as indicated below.
Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 129.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters.
Table 3-16
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MSC Nastran will
constrain model singularities.
Solution Sequence The default solution sequence for Nonlinear Transient is 129, but can be
changed to any one of the following if desired: 400, 600, 700. Only
features of 129 are used in any case. For specific features particular to 600
or 700, please use the Implicit Nonlinear type or set the Analysis Type to
Explicit Nonlinear, respectively.
Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in theMSC
Unsorted, or None.
nonlinear analysis.
Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the
G parameter (e.g., PARAM, G, value.)
W3, Damping Factor Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping
characteristics of the model.
W4, Damping Factor
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Implicit Nonlinear
This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type form
when Implicit Nonlinear is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 400 or 600 input file.
Table 3-17
Solver / Options... See Solver Options Subform (SOL 600), 313.
Contact Parameters... See Contact Parameters Subform, 315.
Direct Text Input... This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File Management,
Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data sections of the MSC
Nastran input file. See Direct Text Input, 274.
Restart Parameters... See Restart Parameters Subform, 326.
Advanced Job Control... See Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600), 329.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-17
Domain Decomposition... See Domain Decomposition, 331.
Assumed Strain For SOL 600, if ON, (default is ON), places the MARCASUM
parameter into the input file. This forces all elements that can deal with
assumed strain to use this formulation. This improves the bending
behavior of Marc elements 3, 7, and 11. For SOL 400, the NLMOPTS
entry is written with the ASSUM option. Again, this is a global setting
and forces all elements that can use this formulation to adopt it.
Constant Dilatation If ON, (default is OFF), places the MARCDILT parameter into the
input file. This will force all elements that can deal with constant
dilatation (for nearly incompressible analysis) to use this formulation.
This affects Marc element types 7, 10, 11, 19, and 20 only and
recommended for elastic-plastic and creep analysis. (SOL 600 only)
Plane Stress Replaces plane strain elements with plane stress elements. (SOL 600 only)
Reduced Integration Specifies that a lower number of element integration points be used to
integrate exactly. (SOL 600 only)
Creep For SOL 400, writes the NLMOPTS entry with the CREEP option
defaults for creep analysis.
Shell Shear Correction For SOL 400 (only), forces all shell elements using nonlinear
formulations to use the shear correction. This writes the NLMOPTS
entry with the TSHEAR option.
SOL 400 Run Use this to select a SOL 400 simulation, instead of a SOL 600
simulation.The default solution sequence for Implicit Nonlinear is 600.
By toggling the “SOL 400 Run” ON, Patran will write a SOL 400 input
file. Not all features of SOL 600 are accessible using SOL 400, so use with
caution and check your input file and results carefully.
Default Initial or Load For SOL 400 allows for specification of a general initial temperature and
Temperature a general loading temperature. TEMPD entries are written for both with
Case Control TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and
TEMPERATURE(LOAD) entries calling out the corresponding
TEMPD entries in the bulk data.
User Defined Services... It allows defining the user defined services for SOL 400 analysis. To
enable this functionary the SOL 400 check box must be selected and
Nastran version must be 2013 or higher. See User Defined Services, 334.
Results Output Format... On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Solver Options Subform (SOL 600)

Specifies the solver to be used in numerically inverting the system matrix of linear equilibrium equations.
Table 3-18
Inconsistent MPCs There are three choices for dealing with problem MPCs, 1) Reorder
(reorder the DOFs that are used to define the problem MPCs), 2)
Continue (continue the analysis with no changes to the MPCs DOFs), or
3) Stop (stop the analysis).
Solver Type Can be set to Direct Profile, Iterative Sparse, Direct Sparse, Hardware
Sparse, Multifrontal Sparse (default) or External Sparse. For MSC
Nastran 2010 or higher, Pardizo Direct Sparse and MUMPS Parallel
Direct solvers are also supported.
Non-Symmetric Specifies non-symmetric solution for Solver Types: Direct Profile,
Multifrontal Sparse,or Pardizo Direct Sparse.
Bandwidth Optimization Turns on the optimize option for the Direct Profile or Multifrontal Sparse
solvers and uses the Sloan algorithm. Other solvers have their own
optimizer and use it by default.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-18
Non-Positive Definite Turn this menu to ON to specify non-positive definite option. Valid for
all solver types. Non Positive Definite is ON by default fo SOL 600. It
is recommended to leave this menu set to Nastran Default. You may
deselect this option by setting to OFF.
Memory Defines the amount of work space in words. This can be left blank and
the translator will automatically determine this based on model size.
Out-of-Core Threshold For Hardware and Multifrontal Sparse solvers only. Default is 100.
Represents the number of real*4 words in millions of words. Only for SGI
computers running the IRIX operating system.
Number of Processes Multiple treads can be specified for Pardiso(11) and Multifrontal (8)
sparse solvers. The subsequent MSC Nastran job is submitted with the
MRTHREAD parameter set accordingly. Multiple processors can be
specified for MUMPS(12) solver. The subsequent MSC Nastran job is
submitted with the MUMPSOLV parameter set accordingly. For DDM,
by default the number of processes is set to the number of domains
automatically. It can be manually changed if necessary.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Contact Parameters Subform

Defines options for detecting and handling contact.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-19
Contact Method Node-to-Segment is the default contact method for Nastran. In Nastran
2010 Segment-to-Segment method was introduced. If set to Segment-to-
Segment, the Friction and Augmentation forms are unique to this
method. Various unsupported items under Contact Detection and
Contact Separation are disabled.
Deformable-Deformable In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair, nodes of both
Method bodies will be checked for contact. In Single-Sided method, for each
contact body pair, only nodes of the lower-numbered body will be
checked for contact. Results are dependent upon the order in which
contact bodies are defined.
Optimize Constraint Use this to decrease the bandwidth of the model.
Equations
Contact Detection... See Contact Detection Subform, 317.
Separation... See Separation Subform, 319.
Friction Parameters... See Friction Parameters Subform, 320.
Augmentation Parameters... See Augmention Parameters, 323..
Enable Initial Contact Click on checkbox to activate the capability for control of initial contact.
The initial contact is for creating an MSC Nastran entry BCTABLE with
ID = 0 to be used for increment 0. For SOL 600, this causes rigid contact
bodies to be moved so they just touch adjacent flexible contact bodies. For
SOL 101 and 400, a BCTABLE is used with ID = 0, which causes rigid
contact bodies to be moved, as for SOL 600, and/or adjusting the
coordinates of all active nodes on the surface of all deformable BCBODYs
to remove any prestressed condition.
Initial Contact... See Initial Contact Subform, 325.
Use Contact Table Toggle button to enable or disable the use of Contact Table. This option
gets activated only when the Enable Initial Contact check box is selected.
Penetration Check This controls contact penetration checking, sometimes referred to as the
increment splitting option. Available options are: At End of Increment,
Per Iteration (default), Suppressed (Fixed), Suppressed (Adaptive). At
End of Increment means penetration is checked at the end of a load
increment. Per Iteration means that penetration is checked at the end of
every iteration within an increment. If penetration is detected,
increments are split. Suppress is to suppress this feature for Fixed and
Adaptive load stepping types.
Reduce Printout of This controls reduction of printout of surface definition.
Surface Definition
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Contact Detection Subform

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Contact Detection... This form controls general contact
parameters (BCPARA) for contact detection.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-20
Distance Tolerance (ERROR) Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (error). Leave
the box blank to have Marc calculate the tolerance as the smaller of 1/20
element edge length or 1/4 shell thickness.
Bias on Tolerance (BIAS) Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within the range of
zero to one. Models with shell elements seem to be sensitive to this
parameter. You may need to experiment with this value if you have shell
element models that will not converge. The SOL 600 default is 0.9.
Suppress Bounding Box Turn ON this button if you want to suppress bounding box checking.
Check (ICHECK) This might eliminate penetration, but slows down the solution.
Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements (ISHELL), this option
menu chooses the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and
Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness
combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data
block.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore
Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the
2nd data block.
Activate Quadratic Contact Use this to detect the contact of the edges of quadratic elements (midside
(LINQUAD) nodes).
Activate 3D Beam-Beam Turn this button ON to activate 3D beam-beam contact. Activate 3D
Contact (BEAMB) Beam-Beam Contact enters a one(1) in the 13th field of the 2nd data
block. This creates the MSC Nastran Bulk Data entry BCPARA, and uses
the entry BEAMP.
Permanent Gluing Turn this toggle ON to activate Permanent Gluing. This creates the MSC
(NLGLUE) Nastran Bulk Data entry: BCPARA 0 NLGLUE 0. If this toggle is OFF,
Patran writes out the MSC Nastran Bulk Data entry: BCPARA 0,
NLGLUE 1.
Note that for Segment-to-Segment contact, not all parameters are available. Those not available are disabled.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Separation Subform
On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form controls general contact
parameters for contact separation.
Table 3-21
Maximum Separations Maximum number of separations allowed in each increment. Maximum
Separations is entered in the 6th field of the 2nd data block. Default is
9999.
Retain Value on NCYCLE Turn ON this button if you do not want to reset NCYCLE to zero when
separation occurs. This speeds up the solution, but might result in
instabilities. You can not set this and Suppress Bounding Box
simultaneously. Retain Value of NCYCLE enters a three(3) in field 8 of
the 2nd data block.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-21
Increment Specifies whether chattering is allowed or not. Increment and Chattering
enters the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.
Chattering Specifies the separation criterion (forces or stresses) and the critical value
at which the separation will take place. Increment and Chattering enters
the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.
Separation Criterion Specifies in which increment (current or next) the separation is allowed
to occur. Separation Criterion enters a one(1) in the 12th field of the 2nd
data block if separation is based on stresses.
Force Value Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd data block.
Stress Value
Note that for Segment-to-Segment contact, not all parameters are available. Those not available are disabled.
Friction Parameters Subform

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Note that different forms appear depending on whether Node-to-Segment or Segment-to-Segment contact
is selected on the Contact Parameters form.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-22
Friction Type Available options for friction Type are: None (default), Shear (for metal
forming), Coulomb (for normal contact), Shear for Rolling, Coulomb for
Rolling, Stick-Slip, Bilinear Shear, and Bilinear Coulomb. The MSC
Nastran entry BCPARA is written to the .bdf file, with FTYPE used. Type
and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block
depending on fiction type, and places a 0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd
data block for friction based on nodal forces or nodal stresses, respectively
for Coulomb fiction. Stick-Slip is a Coulomb type friction.
Segment to Segment contact only supports Coulomb and Shear Bilinear

(Displacement) methods currently.
Method For Coulomb type of friction models (options 2, 4, and 5 above), there
are 2 methods for computing friction: Nodal Stress, Nodal Force
(default). Type and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th field of
the 2nd data block depending on fiction type, and places a 0 or 1 in the
5th field of the 2rd data block for friction based on nodal forces or nodal
stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction.
Segment to Segment contact only supports Coulomb and Shear Bilinear

(Displacement) methods currently.
Relative Sliding Velocity Critical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces will be simulated
as sticking. Relative Sliding Velocity is placed in the 1st field of the 3rd
data block for all friction models except Stick-Slip.
Transition Region Slip-to-Stick transition region. Transition Region is placed in the 1st field
of the 3rd data block for Stick-Slip model.
Multiplier to Friction Friction coefficient multiplier. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and
Coefficient Friction Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data
block respectively for the Stick-Slip friction model.
Friction Force Tolerance Friction Force Tolerance. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and
Friction Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data
block respectively for the Stick-Slip friction model.
Non-Symmetric Matrix For Segment-to-Segment contact this value is written to the BCPARA
option. Note that you must select a solver that supports non-symmetric
matrices for this to work, such as Pardiso or MUMPS. This is done on
the Solvers/Options, 437 form.
Heat Generation Conversion A factor related to how much heat is generated by the friction process.
Factor Not available in Nastran currently.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Augmention Parameters
The user also has a choice of the augmentation procedure used to impose the contact constraint when using
the Segment-to-Segment (STS) contact method. The default of no augmentation is generally recommended.
This leads to a cost effective solution, but may show a minimal amount of penetration inherent in the penalty
method. If the penetration is not acceptable, the augmentation procedure can be activated, which can be
based on a constant or bilinear penetration field per contact segment. The augmentation procedure based on
a bilinear field is not recommended for lower-order elements. Note that the augmentation procedure only
affects contact between deformable bodies. If there is contact between a deformable and a rigid body, the
augmentation procedure is always applied. When the STS procedure is used, separation is based upon
absolute stress based separation.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-23
Augmentation (Normal) If Segment-to-Segment contact method is specified on the Contact
Parameters form, the Augmentation parameters are set here. The Normal
Penalty Factor Augmentation method may be set to None, Automatic, Constant or
Penetration Distance
Bilinear. Automatic is a combination of Constant and Bilinear where
augmentation is based on constant penetration for linear elements and on
a bilinear penetration for quadratic elements. If no penalty factor or
penetration distances are specified, Nastran will automatically determine
them. The appropriate BCPARA entries are written.
Augmentation (Tangential) Not supported by Nastran at this time.
Penalty Factor
Slip Distance
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Initial Contact Subform

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Initial Contact...
This form works exactly as the Contact Table form for a standard Subcase, except that a unique BCTABLE
with ID 0 (zero) is written. If not specified, then the BCTABLE specified in the first subcase is also written
as BCTABLE with ID zero. See Contact Table, 428 for the operation of the Contact Table form.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Restart Parameters Subform

Includes a Restart option in the MSC Nastran input file. Restarts are only supported for SOL 600 in the
Main Index
Solution Parameters
current release.
Table 3-24
Restart Type You can Write restart data, Read restart data and Read and Write restart
data. The default is None for no restart data.
Create Continuous Results If when restarting a job, you wish the results form the previous run to be
File copied into the new POST file, then turn this ON. This will place the
RESTART or RESTART LAST options before the POST option in
the input file. Otherwise they are placed after the POST option which
flags Marc not to copy the results to the new POST file. If you turn this
ON, you must have a restarname.t16 and/or restartname.t19
file in your local directory or the Marc analysis will fail.
Last Converged Increment Writes a RESTART LAST instead of a RESTART option. ON by
default.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-24
Reauto OFF by default. This places a REAUTO option in the input file. Any
additional data needed for the REAUTO option are extracted from the
first Load Step information for the restart job. Only if the Restart Type is
set to Read or Read and Write is the REAUTO written or the toggle
visible to the user.
Restart from Increment Defines the increment to be read from the file specified in the Select
Restart File form. This is entered in the 3rd data field on the 2nd card of
the RESTART option. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to
Read or Read and Write. The last increment on the restart file is used for
the RESTART LAST option when Last Converged Increment is ON.
Increments Between Writing Defines the number of increments between writing data to the restart file.
Data This is entered in the 2nd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART
option. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Write or Read and
Write. When Last Converted Increment is ON, this is the 4th field of the
2nd data block of the RESTART LAST option.
Select Restart File... This brings up a file browser to select the restart file when the Restart
Type is set to Read or Read and Write. This file is specified on the
command line for invoking the Marc solver using the -r option.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600)
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats for the results file, for SOL 600 jobs.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-25
Marc Version Specifies the version of MSC.Marc to run the analysis.
Marc Results File Format Specifies the file format for the output from the analysis.
Marc Results File Type Defines the binary output and/or text format of output from the analysis.
Binary is recommended since .t16 files are linarily compatible across
platforms and take up less space.
Marc scratch files w/
Nastran’s
Use Environment Variables Use to enable the use of environment variables.
Suppress Non-SOLMARC Suppress errors that are not SOL 600 errors.
Errors
Submit Marc Job Submit SOL 600 jobs to Marc.
Use Marc License Use this to search for, then use Marc licenses.
Copy Marc Files Make copies of Marc files; for example copy .t16 file.
Filter Marc Text
Delete Marc Files Delete Marc files after the corresponding Patran files are created.
Gradually Release
Constraints
Analysis Control Defaults Creates the Nastran Bulk Data entry PARAM, MARCDEF. Its three
values are Nastran Development (recommended by Nastran
development; Marc SHELL_SECT parameter is set to 11), Marc-Mentat
(current Marc standard), Marc Development (recommended by both
Marc and Nastran development).
Marc Submit Command Locates the submit command to run the MSC.Marc analysis (optional).
For Specify Full Command its list box will be un-ghosted.
Domain Decomposition
Domain Decomposition is used to partition the model into seperate parts (domains) for parallel
processing. The Method used to do this is named Domain Decomposition Method (DDM). This form
designates that domain decomposition be done manually, semi-automatically, or automatically, for either
SOL 400 or SOL 600 jobs.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-26
Decomposition Method Set this to Automatic if you wish MSC Nastran to automatically create
the domains during analysis run time. Set to Semi-Automatic if you
wish to have Patran automatically break the model into domains which
can be visualized before submittal. Set to Manual to have full control
over the domains. This requires the creation of the groups before they
can be selected here in this form and associated to a domain.
Number of Domains This determines how many domains are to be created. When you
change this number and press the Enter or Return key, the spread sheet
updates with this number of rows. The default is 1. This corresponds
to the number of CPUs desired to run the job. For the Automatic
method, this is the only input that is required and the spreadsheet is not
visible.
Model or Current Group This is for choosing a part of the model to decompose for parallel
processing: Model -- decompose all of the model, Current Group --
decompose just the current group. This choice must be consistent with
what part of the model is specified for analysis (Analysis: Analyze /
Entire Model or Selected Group). This is only active if Decomposition
Method is set to Automatic or Semi-Automatic.
Metis Method There are three Methods that can be used to partition the Model or
Current Group into Domains. They are, 1) Nodal Position, 2) Element
Topology, or 3) Best (a procedure that accounts for the best of the
nodal, element, or vector type algorithms). This method can only be
used if Decomposition Method is set to Automatic.
Domain Island Removal Using this option causes some parts of disjoint domains (domain
islands) to be combined with adjacent domains. This can only be used
if Decomposition Method is set to Automatic.
Coarse Graph Using this option sometimes produces domain islands (disjoint
domains). This option (the default) is recommended to reduce the time
to decompose the initial global domain. Use this only if there is a
definite need for a better decomposition. This can only be used if
Decomposition Method is set to Automatic.
Single POST File If more than one CPU processor is used to solve the problem, the
seperate/multiple results files can be compiled into a single file for
postprocessing using Single POST File.
Create Click Create to create Domain Information spreadsheet rows. After
doing this the number of rows will equal the value of Number of
Domains in the form. If Decomposition Method is set to Manual, the
previously created group names will be selectable in Select a Group
window at the bottom.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-26
Visualize This is used to display groups. Select a group name for the heading
Domain Information under Group. Click Visualize to display just that
group. This can be done for some or all of the groups.
Reset Graphics Click Reset Graphics to reset the viewport graphics.
Validate This is for validating (checking) that the domains are not disjoint. For
two adjacent domains, the nodes at the interface of the domains must
be in both domains.
Domain Information The window with the definition of each Domain. For a given Domain
there is a corresponding unique Group name.
User Defined Services

This form defines the options for Patran pre-processing (GUI) support for the MSC Nastran User Defined
Services (UDS) specific to the SOL 400 analysis.
Figure 3-1 UDS Form Simple
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Figure 3-2 UDS Form Advanced
Table 3-27
UDS Type Provides you with an option to select between the Simple or Advanced
UDS forms.
Nastran UDS Environment This frame contains the following UDS environment variables.
Variables
MSC_SDK_PATH MSC_SDK_PATH and User Source File fields appear on the simple
User Source File form and show the current settings of the variables, whether they are
defined or not. If the variables are defined then the textboxes show the
<path> (the actual settings of the variables). If variables are not
defined then the textboxes show UNDEFINED.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-27
SCA_RESOURCE_DIR SCA_RESOURCE_DIR and SCA_LIBRARY_PATH fields appear on
SCA_LIBRARY_PATH the Advanced form and show the current settings of the variables,
whether they are defined or not. If the variables are defined then the
textboxes show the <path> (the actual settings of the variables) and a
"View…" button. If variables are not defined then the textboxes show
UNDEFINED and a "Browse…" button.
Number of UDS Map Displays the number of UDS in the current job.
Update Rows Clicking Update Rows adds the number of rows defined in the Number
of UDS Map text box in the UDS Map spreadsheet section.
UDS Map This spreadsheet contains the mapping of the Patran entity to the UDS
service name that will be used. The number of rows of this spreadsheet
is set by the value in the Number of UDS data box.
Service Name Nastran UDS service name.
Service Identifier Unique service identifier made of 8 characters.
Object Patran UDS entity name (Material UDS Property, Element UDS
property, Contact Body and Runtime Info).
Optional Input Optional input data (integer, real, characters) required for a user
subroutine. Clicking on the cell will open a spreadsheet where you can
enter the data.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Fatigue Parameters Subform

Defines options for defining an MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis. All the parameters defined on this
subform are written to the FTGPARM bulk data entry.
In order to run a successful MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis, an S-N or ε-N constitutive model (or
both) must be defined for the elements of interest (shells and solid elements only - see Stress-Life (SN) and Strain
Life (eN), Spot Weld (Top and Bottom Sheet), Seam Weld (Stiff and Flexible), 91). An output request for fatigue life must
be made (see Output Requests, 449). An S-N or ε-N analysis must be turned on when setting up the analysis for
Linear Static, Normal Modes, or Transient Response as defined on this form. And a cyclic loading sequence
must be defined (see Subcase Select, 486) above the subcase level. Optionally, various fatigue parameters can
be defined as element properties such as surface finish (see 2D Element Properties, 141) for shell and solid
elements only.
Only a brief explanation is given here of each parameters. For more detail on how to set up and perform an
MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis using Patran, please see the MSC Nastran Fatigue Analysis User’s
Guidefor time domain SOLutions 101/103/112. See the MSC Nastran Embedded Vibration Fatigue User’s
Guide for frequency domain solutions SOLs 108 and 111. For details on the FTGPARM entry, please see
the FTGPARM (p. 1977) in the .
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Brief descriptions of each option on this fatigue parameter form are given here for time domain SOLutions
101/103/112. See the next table for frequency domain SOLutions 108 and 111.
Table 3-28
General Parameters Generic parameters are global to most any fatigue analysis whether it be
S-N or ε-N:
Stress Units:  The Stress Units must be specified for proper conversion during the
fatigue analysis. A DTI,UNITS bulk data entry is written defining
the units of stress.
Stress Combination:  Stresses or strains are resolved to the specified scalar values via the
Stress Combination. The stress/strain tensor (time history) data is
transformed to this scalar stress/strain parameter before cycle
counting. It is NOT recommended to use unsigned values (Max
Principal, von Mises, or Max Shear) unless you are confident in your
analysis skills as this can lead to incorrect or misleading stress ranges
being calculated. For Critical Plane, the in-plane principal stresses are
determined at 10 degree intervals. Note that using Critical Plane
increases the analysis time by 18 times. The worst angle is reported in
the analysis.
Results Location:  Fatigue results can be requested at the nodes (Nodal Averaged),
element nodes (Element Nodal) or the element centroids (Element
Center). Stresses are averaged at the nodes for the default Nodal
Averaged method using Nastran’s grid point stress generator;
otherwise elemental stresses at the nodes or element centroid are used
in the fatigue calculation. Element Nodal results in fatigue lives at
each node of each element. Thus postprocessing averages fatigue lives
at the nodes. Using Nodal Averaged does not average fatigue lives at
the nodes as there is only one results per node. See Nodal Averaging
mode of this form below.
Recovery:  Stress and strains are recovered from the analysis based on Nastran’s
recovery method, which can be set here. See the STRESS or STRAIN
case control description of these values. Default is at the Corners for
Nodal Averaged and Element Nodal, or at the Center for Element
Center.
Layer:  For shell elements, fatigue lives are reported in Nastran’s output file
(f06 file) for the Top, Bottom, or Worst case (default) layer. This is an
printed output request only. Fatigue lives at both top and bottom are
calculated during the analysis and available for Patran to post process,
thus allowing you to plot worst case layer or specifically top or
bottom.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-28
Interpolation:  Interpolation limits can be set when using multiple digitized (tabular)
S-N curves. Use Max Curve uses the maximum defined S-N data if
the look-up stress goes beyond that defined by the digitized curves.
Or you can request that it Extrapolate.
Level of Message:  Messaging level written to a log file. Use this for debugging purposes
only. Setting this value greater than three (3) can results in
performance degradation. Results are output to the jobname.dtout
and jobname.config files.
Number of Threads:  The number of processing treads can be specified for parallel
processing large models to speed up calculations on machines with
multiple CPUs. Set to zero (0) for automatic usage of available CPUs.
Certainty of Survival:  A certainty of survival can be defined to take into consideration the
statistical scatter of the stress or strain-life material data.
Overall Scale Factor:  An overall scale factor can be applied to the resultant cyclic stresses or
strains.
Top Stress %:  A filter can be applied to report results for only a top percentage of
the highest stressed entities. See also the next entry.
Top Damage %:  A filter can also be applied to report results for only a top percentage
of the highest damaged entities. When used in conjunction with the
top percentage stressed elements, this is called a 3-pass analysis where
the 1st pass reduces the number of entities based on the top stressed
elements, the 2nd pass uses compressed time histories to quickly
determine and filter only the highest damaged elements, and then the
3rd pass uses the fully populated time histories on only the remaining
entities to get the actual damage.
SN Parameters This toggle must be ON in order for a general Stress-Life (S-N) fatigue
analysis to be performed. Mean stress corrections can be set to Goodman,
Gerber, or no mean stress correction. The stresses used in the fatigue
analysis for each subcase can be output to the MSC Nastran F06 file
(Print) and/or data block (Print or Plot) for postprocessing.
eN Parameters This toggle must be ON in order for an Strain-Life (ε-N) fatigue analysis
to be performed. Mean stress corrections can be set to Smith-Topper-
Watson, Morrow, or no mean stress correction. Stress or strain can be
specified as the supplied finite element (FE) results (SN must use stresses)
and a plasticity correction method. The stresses or strains used in the
fatigue analysis for each subcase can be output to the MSC Nastran F06
file (Print) and/or data block (Print or Plot) for postprocessing.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-28
Factor of Safety A factor of safety analysis can be requested where a target life is specified
and the analysis returns a scale factor that if applied to the cyclic stresses
or strains, would result in the target life being achieved.
Time History Compression To speed up analyses of jobs consisting or extremely long, complex cyclic
loading, time history compression routines can be applied to remove less
damaging and inconsequential cycles from the cyclic loading.
Static Damage Check Turn this on if you wish to check for static failure. By default the program
will simply warn you if static failure occurs by checking against the
ultimate tensile strength (UTS). Optionally you can stop the analysis
immediately. If this is ON, the DAMAGE keyword and parameters are
written to the FTGPARM entry. Any entity experiencing static failure is
automatically assigned the damage value set in the Static Failure Damage
data box. The Maximum Damage databox sets an upper limit on the
amount of damage that can be predicted for any given cycle. Setting this
to >1.0 shows how much unacceptable damage has accumulated. The
Damage Floor data box sets a lower limit. If a cycle has less than this
predicted damage, the damage is set to zero.
Biaxial/Multiaxial Turn this ON to run a multiaxial assessment. The method can be set to
Assessment None, Simple, Standard, or Auto. Simple does a simple biaxiality analysis
only. Standard calculates the non-proportionality and Auto may
recalculate the fatigue damage based on the results of the assessment. This
functionality is available for standard S-N, e-N and Seam Weld analysis
only and has limitations if a factor of safety (FOS) analysis has also been
requested (only Simple is valid in this case). If Auto is selected, the
stress/strain combination method is ignored and the program determines
whether to use critical plane or absolute maximum principal stress. Auto
is also not compatible with fatigue analysis os seam welds. For Auto, the
Zero Stress defines the stress range below which no damage is assumed;
the Gate is the stress below which the biaxiality ratio is set to zero to
prevent small stresses from adversely affecting the biaxiality calculations.
It is recommended that the other limits be left at their defaults.
If your model contains solid elements and you wish to do a

biaxial/multiaxial assessment, you need to turn ON the Surface Resolved
Stresses/Strains toggle. This causes MSC Nastran to
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-28
Surface Resolved If your model contains solid elements and you wish to do a
Stresses/Strains biaxial/multiaxial assessment, you need to turn this toggle ON. This
causes MSC Nastran to internally generate very thin shell elements on the
free surfaces of the solid elements. The stresses/strains in these elements
are then used in the fatigue analysis and biaxial/multiaxial assessment. No
fatigue analysis is done using the stresses from the actual solid elements in
this case. If the toggle is OFF, then fatigue analysis of solid elements
proceeds as normal, but biaxial/multiaxial assessment is only done on
shell elements, if there are any. The solid elements do not participate in
the assessment since a 2D stress state is required. With the toggle ON,
you can specify a starting element ID for the internally generated element
if desired. By default the next highest element ID in the model is used (set
the value to “#”).
Spot Weld Fatigue Analysis Turn this ON to do fatigue analysis of spot welds. It is assumed that
proper elements have been defined as the spot welds (either stiff bars,
actual spot weld connectors, or single HEX elements attached to the top
and bottom sheet by RBE3 elements. If an S-N analysis is turned on, then
a standard fatigue analysis is also performed. Elements defined as spot
weld elements take precedence over a standard fatigue analysis in the case
where the same elements are defined for both. Fatigue results are
calculated at the top, middle, and bottom of the spot weld at various
Calculation Angles (18 by default) around the circumference of the weld.
If Calculate Torsion is turned ON, then an additional fatigue calculation
is done for torsional stresses (note that this is not generally recommended
as it really requires different material properties - so separate analyses are
likely necessary). Three (3) sheet spot welds are also possible and the
middle sheet result is ignored unless the Process Middle Sheet toggle is
turned ON. Only one type of Mean Stress Correction is possible using
the FKM (Simple) method where M1=M2=M3=M4=-MSS defined in
the material constitutive model.
Seam Weld Fatigue Analysis Turn this ON to do fatigue analysis of seam welds. It is assumed that
proper elements location identification (grouping) has been done to
define the toe, root, and/or throat elements of the seam welds. If an S-N
analysis is turned on, then a standard fatigue analysis is also performed.
Elements defined as seam weld elements take precedence over a standard
fatigue analysis in case the same elements are defined for both. You must
identify the Stress Combination parameter to be used and only one Mean
Stress Correction method is available (FKM) where M1-M4 are defined
on the material constitutive model. A Thickness Correction can be
applied also and the thicknesses are automatically extracted from the shell
properties by Nastran to apply the correction.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-28
Nodal Averaging If you have set the Results Location on the General Parameters mode of
this form to Nodal Averaging, then you can control how Nastran
computes the grid point stresses. By default the Method is Topological,
the Output System is Basic (Patran global system), and Radius is used as
the Positive Fiber Direction. Use Geometric if you have large
discontinuities in your model. The settings on this form for grid point
stress/strain extraction are identical to that for the GPSTRESS case
control output request from Nastran and you are referred to that
documentation.
Brief descriptions of each option on this fatigue parameter form are given here for frequency domain
SOLutions 108/111. See the previous table for time domain SOLutions 101/103/111.
Table 3-29
General Parameters Generic parameters are global to most any fatigue analysis whether it be
S-N or ε-N:
Stress Units:  The Stress Units must be specified for proper conversion during the
fatigue analysis. A DTI,UNITS bulk data entry is written defining
the units of stress. These are the same as the time domain settings.
Stress Combination:  Stresses or strains are resolved to the specified scalar values via the
Stress Combination. The stress/strain tensor (time history) data is
transformed to this scalar stress/strain parameter before cycle
counting. Absolute Maximum Principal is the default. Fast Max.
Principal speeds up the analysis significantly but is not as accurate.
Signed vonMises is typically the most common and generally
accepted stress parameter for frequency domain fatigue analysis.
Individual component stresses are also available.
Results Location:  Fatigue results can be requested at the nodes (Nodal Averaged),
element nodes (Element Nodal) or the element centroids (Element
Center). The stress transfer functions are averaged at the nodes for the
default Nodal Averaged method. When using this method, please
ensure the stress contribution from each element at the nodes is in a
consistent coordinate system. Using Element Nodal results in fatigue
lives at each node of each element. Thus postprocessing averages
fatigue lives at the nodes. Using Nodal Averaged does not average
fatigue lives at the nodes as there is only one results per node.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-29
Recovery:  Stress and strains are recovered from the analysis based on Nastran’s
recovery method, which can be set here. See the STRESS or STRAIN
case control description of these values. Default is at the Corners for
Nodal Averaged and Element Nodal, or at the Center for Element
Center.
Layer:  For shell elements, fatigue lives are reported in Nastran’s output file
(f06 file) for the Top, Bottom, or Worst case (default) layer. This is an
printed output request only. Fatigue lives at both top and bottom are
calculated during the analysis and available for Patran to post process,
thus allowing you to plot worst case layer or specifically top or
bottom.
Level of Message:  Messaging level written to external files. Setting this to anything other
than Standard (default) can results in performance degradation and
large output. If set to +Response PSDs, input and output PSDs are
written for every requested entity. If set to +Rainflow Damage, both
PSD and PDF rainflow data is written for every requested entity. A
limited set of entities should be used when setting this option. The
files written are CSV type files that can be opened directly in MS
Excel and plotted or use a special Patran utility found under the Tools
| Results | NEF Random Vibration... pull down menu.
Top RMS % Filter:  A filter can be applied to report results for only a top percentage of
the highest stressed entities based on RMS stress level. This is set as a
percentage meaning that only the set percentage of entities with the
highest RMS are retained.
Stress/Strain Life (S-N/eN) This mode of the form allows for various settings of the fatigue analysis.
Run Fatigue Analysis This toggle must be ON in order for a general Stress-Life (S-N) or Strain-
Life (ε-N) fatigue analysis to be performed. If this toggle is OFF, no
fatigue damage is calculated. If this toggle is turned OFF, the Random
Analysis Only toggle is turned ON and vice-versa. Please note that a
fatigue analysis or the random only analysis is only successful if fatigue
material properties exist, fatigue output has been requested, and a proper
fatigue loading sequence has been defined.
Random Analysis Only Turn this toggle ON if wish for the analysis to proceed with only the
random vibration portion and skip the subsequent fatigue analysis to be
performed. If this toggle is ON, no fatigue damage is calculated. If this
toggle is turned OFF, the Run Fatigue Analysis toggle is turned ON and
vice-versa. Please note that a fatigue analysis or the random only analysis
is only successful if fatigue material properties exist, fatigue output has
been requested, and a proper fatigue loading sequence has been defined.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-29
Option An S-N or an ε-N analysis is performed based on the material properties.
Thus the default Automatic should suffice for most situations. If however
you have both S-N and ε-N material constitutive models defined and you
wish to force the S-N or the ε-N analysis, set this to one or the other.
Mean Stress Correction Mean stress corrections can be set to one of the options on this pull down
menu. Note that you must have some stress offset defined in order for this
to be effective.
Plasticity Correction Used if performing a strain-life (ε-N) analysis. Only Neuber method of
notch correction is currently available.
Output Fully Populated Turn this toggle ON if you wish MSC Nastran to output a CSV type file
Material Curves containing the fully derived material curves used in the analysis. These are
x-y type files and can be plotted using Patran’s standard XY Plot
application or read directly into MS Excel for viewing and plotting.
Analysis Settings These settings are specific to frequency domain vibration fatigue analysis.
Generally these setting defaults are fine. For pure sine wave (deterministic
loading) set the Rainflow Method to Sines. For random or harmonic
loading, Dirlik is the preferred method. You are referred to MSC
Nastran’s documentation for explanations of these settings.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
DDAM
DDAM is an acronym for Dynamic Design Analysis Method, or DDAM is a methodology for analyzing
ship-mounted equipment that the US Navy uses in the event of a near-miss underwater. Most FEA products
follow the DDAM methodology, as does any hand calculation. MSC has made several improvements to its
products that make DDAM easier to use.
To accommodate the special spectrum and summing conventions MSC made several modifications to MSC
Nastran. A DMAP alter in MSC Nastran puts out data important for a DDAM analysis. A stand-alone
Fortran program reads the MSC Nastran data, calculates the spectral data, formats DDAM run information,
and sends data back to MSC Nastran for further postprocessing.
MSC’s DDAM has the following capabilities.
 Calculates all three shock directions simultaneously.
 Automatically calculates the appropriate spectra from input of the coefficients.
 Performs the NRL sum.
 Contains modal selection following 3010 Rev 1 convention.
 Provides manual mode selection if needed.
 Provides mode-by-mode output if desired.
 Uses all available MSC Nastran elements.
 Provides NRL summed output in MSC Nastran OP2 format for use with most postprocessors.
 Offers an alternate coefficient input method is available that avoids using the Fortran program, but
the classified coefficients must be entered directly in the data file.
 Has unlimited model size.
 Uses MSC’s Lanczos Eigenvalue solver for fast solutions.
DDAM has the following limitations.
 All base input points must be rigidly connected to a single grid flagged on a SUPORT entry.
 There is no easy method to handle closely spaced modes as defined by 3010.
 MSC Nastran printed output (.f06 file) is not labeled well, and must be used carefully in order to
avoid mistakes. This is especially true of the mode-by-mode output.
 A DDAM data file will not read into Patran/MSC.FEA completely.
 .XDB output not available for NRL summed quantities
 MSC Nastran requires additional input switch to be toggled in Patran in order to plot NRL
summed von Mises and combined beam stresses.
 MSC Nastran does not calculate beam and bar shear stresses. They are not included in the von Mises
and combined stresses reported by MSC Nastran DDAM.
DDAM in Patran
DDAM in MSC Nastran is a process that involves three main parts, and a number of smaller parts. The entire
procedure is accessed from a simple interface in Patran that integrates the process.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
 Part 1, Modal Analysis - A modal analysis is run in MSC Nastran. This supplies the frequencies,
mode shapes and modal participation for the model.
 Part 2, Spectrum Generation – Using the output from Part 1, you can use a Fortran program to
calculate the shock spectrum. This is based on the DDS-072 or NRL 1396 documents, or you can
manually enter your own spectrum.
 Part 3, Spectrum Application and Data Recovery – The calculated spectrum from Part 2 is applied
to the mode shapes calculated in Part 1, and the results are calculated on a mode-by-mode basis. The
results from this are then summed using an NRL sum to produce results, one set for each shock
direction.
The Patran interface presents you with a selection of options to calculate the spectrum and sum the results.
The options are stored, and when the MSC Nastran modal analysis completes, the Fortran program
automatically starts, using the stored options to drive it. MSC Nastran automatically resumes after the
completion of the Fortran program and finishes the analysis.
During is process, a number of files will be created that are inputs and outputs from this process, all named
jobname.xxx using the jobname chosen in Patran. The most important files are:
jobname.ddd – the DDAM potions file that drives the Fortran program
jobname.f11 – the modal information needed to calculate the spectrum
jobname.f13 – the calculated spectra information for input back into MSC Nastran
jobname.ver – modal verification file
jobname.opw – Nastran OP2 file with the mode shapes
jobname.opx – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for x-shock
jobname.opy – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for y-shock
jobname.opz – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for z-shock
Once the run is complete, you can look over both the results and the modal verification file. If the results are
not as expected or desired, there are a number of more advanced capabilities of this DDAM procedure for
more control over the process. These include some that are on the Patran forms (changes in 80% criterion,
minimum G value) and ones that can be accessed using the Patran Direct Text capability (mode-by-mode
output, specific mode selection).
DDAM Model Preparation

In order to run DDAM, all of the fixed base points (excitation inputs) in the model must be rigidly connected
to a single point. The MSC Nastran RBE2 element is used for this, connecting the independent node (the
SUPORT point) to all of the other fixed base/excitation points (dependent grids) in all 6 degrees of freedom.
This point is flagged for the SUPORT entry in the DDAM setup. It is not necessary that this point is
separated (spatially) from the other input points, you can select one of the base points to be the SUPORT
point, as long as all the excitation points are then connected to it. It is not advisable to have any other
translational constraints in the model, as they will remove modal mass from the model and the 80% criterion
will not necessarily be correct, and the model will have base points that will not be excited. You may have
rotational constraints to hold shafting and to remove plate and bar singularities, as the rotational components
are not used in the DDAM excitation.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
No loads or other boundary conditions are needed for the analysis. As per 3010, you need to add operating
loads to the shock loads at the conclusion of the analysis. Set up the model like any other modal analysis, with
the exception of the SUPORT point. Mass and material density are required to obtain correct mode shapes.
The modal analysis parameters are set up on the Subcase Options form, where you can select the number of
desired modes, the lower frequency bound, and an upper frequency bound. The analysis uses a Lanczos
extraction routine with mass normalization, and uses the default Lanczos debugging information level. You
will not have control over these parameters in DDAM.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
DDAM Solution Parameters

Main Index
Solution Parameters
when DDAM is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 187 input file.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-30
Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MSC Nastran will
automatically constrain model singularities.
Shell Normal Tol. Angle Indicates that MSC Nastran will define grid point normals for a
Faceted Shell Surface based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears
on a PARAM, SNORM entry.
Mass Calculation
 Lumped Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MSC Nastran. This
 Coupled controls the setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can
Data Deck Echo
 None Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MSC
 Sorted Nastran print file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case
 Unsorted Sorted, Unsorted, or None.
Plate Rz Stiffness factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements.
Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures.
This defines the setting of the WTMASS parameter.
Node id for Wt. Gener Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight
Default Initial Temperature Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase
entry TEMP(INITIAL)
Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the
subcase entry TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry.
SUPPORT Node Selects the point you have chosen for your base input. Note that this is
a required choice with no default, and that you can only pick one node.
If multiple nodes are entered in the data box, only the first one is used.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Explicit Nonlinear
when Explicit Nonlinear is selected under Preferences: Analysis... . Use this form to generate a SOL 700 input
file.
Table 3-31
Large Displacements Use this to cause the large displacement formulation to be used.
Follower Forces Use this to cause the forces to move (translate and rotate) with the model.
Prestress Option Use this to cause the pre-stresses to be calculated.
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Table 3-31
SOL 700 Default Settings Either Dytran or Ls-Dyna default settings can be used.
Displays the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form that is used for
 Sol700 specifing parameter values for such things as execution control, dynamic
Parameters... relaxation (entry DAMPGBL), general parameters, contact, and Eulerian
parameters. See Sol700 Parameters Subform, 352
Use this to specify the types of files that are to be written for the SOL 700
 Resultts Output
analysis. For example, XDB (jobname.xdb) and Print (jobname.f06).See
Format...
Results Output Format, 373
Sol700 Parameters Subform

This subordinate form appears when Sol700 Parameters button is selected on the Solution Parameters form
of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:
 SOL700,101 - Linear Static

 SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static
 SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response
 SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Main Index
Solution Parameters
The supported parameters are shown in the following table:

Execution Control DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE, DYMINSTEP,
Parameters... DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS, DYTSTEPDT2MS
Dynamic Relaxation... This is for specifying the entries for the DAMPGBL Bulk Data entry. This is for
defining parameter values for static analysis using dynamic relaxation for SOL
700 only.
General Parameters... DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ,
DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK,
DYSHNIP
Contact Parameters... DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT,
DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE,
DYCONSKIPTWG
Binary Output DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH, DYSTRFLG,
Database File DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG, DYCMPFLG,
Parameters... DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ, DYN3THDT
Time History Output This is for specifying the type of output file (Binary, ASCII, Both), and the
Request... Output Time Interval.
Hourglass Setting... See Hourglass Setting Subform, 354
Merge Rigid Mat... See Merge Rigid Material Subform, 356
Dynamic Relaxation See Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform, 358
for Restart...
Damping Per See Damping Per Property Subform, 360
Property...
Rigid Body Switch See Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform, 361
and Merge...
Eulerian Parameters... See Eulerian Parameters Subform, 367
SPH Control See SPH Control Parameters Subform, 370
Parameters...
Hourglass Setting Subform

This subordinate form appears when Hourglass Setting button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra
Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Existing Hourglass List of previously created hourglass settings.
Setting
Hourglass Name Specify the name.
Property Type Specify either a Shell (2D) or Solid (3D) element type.
Control Type Choose one of several types of controlling the hourglass effects. The choices are:
1) Standard LSDyna Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 2) Flanagan-
Belytschko Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 3) Flan-Bely. Visc. + Vol.
Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements) (Property Type = Solid), 4)
Flanagan-Belytschko Stiffness (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 5) Flan-Bely. Stiff.
+ Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements) (Property Type = Solid),
6) Flanagan-Bindeman Stiffness (Property Type = Solid), 7) Fully Integrated Shell
(Property Type = Shell). These entries are defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data
entry in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Hourglass Coefficient This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MSC Nastran
Quick Reference Guide.
Warping Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MSC Nastran
Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.
Bending Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MSC Nastran
Linear Bulk Visc. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MSC Nastran
Quadr. Bulk Visc. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MSC Nastran
Select Property Set Select a previously created element property. For example, Properties > Create >
2D > Shell > Options: Explicit PSHELL1 > Input Properties... > Shell
Formulations > HUGHES.
Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Hourglass Setting form to create
an Existing Hourglass Setting.
Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Hourglass Setting form to
update an Existing Hourglass Setting. You must first select the particular Existing
Hourglass Setting.
Merge Rigid Material Subform

This subordinate form appears when Merge Rigid Mat button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra
Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters

.
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Existing Merged List of previously merged MATRIG materials. MATRIG is an MSC Nastran
Materials Bulk Data entry for defining rigid body properties.
Merged Material Specify the name of merged material to be created.
Name
Select Material to be Specify the name of an MATRIG material to merge other MATRIG materials
Merged into into.
Select Materials to be Specify the names of MATRIG materials that are to be merged into the merged
Merged material whos name is specified under Merged Material Name.
Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Rigid Materials form to create an
Existing Merged Materials.
Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Rigid Materials form to update
an Existing Merged Materials. You must first select the particular Existing Merged
Materials.
Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform

This subordinate form appears when Dynamic Relaxation for Restart button is selected on the Sol700
Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700
is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters

Relaxation Use this to not use (None Active) or use (Activated Relaxation) relaxation in
performing the simulation.
[Termination Time] The time to stop the simulation. This is optional ([ ]).
Convergence Specify convergence tolerance.
Tolerance
Number of Iterations Specify the maximum number of iterations.
Papadrakakis Auto Click the checkbox to specify that convergence control is to be automatic
Control using the Papadrakakis method.
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Papadrakakis To use this it is necessary to not select Papadrakakis Auto Control.
Convergence
Tolerance
Relaxation Factor Specify the value of the Relaxation Factor.
Time step scale Factor Specify the value of the Time step scale Factor.
Damping Per Property Subform

This subordinate form appears when Damping Per Property button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and
Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such
as:

 SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient.
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Damping Type Select either Property (use property) or Stiffness (use Rayleigh damping).
System Damping Select a time dependent field under Time Dependent Field. This field will be
Constant Table multiplied by the Scalar Factor for Load Curve entry. The (X,Y,Z) Trans.
Damping Forces and (X,Y,Z) Rot. Damping Moments entries (all of these form a
6 component load vector) are multiplied by the scaled time dependent field.
Time Dependent Field Select a Field, with it being entered into the System Damping Constant Table list
box. For example, select the field named damping_vs_time under Time
Dependent Field. For System Damping Constant Table f:damping_vs_time
appears.
Scale Factor for Load Specify the scale factor that will multiply the Time Dependent Field specified
Curve under System Damping Constant Table.
X Trans. Damping Scale factor for X translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system
Forces directions.
Y Trans. Damping Scale factor for Y translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system
Forces directions.
Z Trans. Damping Scale factor for Z translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system
Forces directions.
X Rot. Damping Scale factor for X rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system
Moments directions.
Y Rot. Damping Scale factor for Y rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system
Moments directions.
Z Rot. Damping Scale factor for Z rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system
Moments directions.
Rayleigh Damping Specify the scalar coefficient (β) that the global stiffness matrix is multiplied by to
Coeff. obtain the Rayleigh damping matrix.
Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform

This subordinate form appears when Rigid Body Switch and Merge button is selected on the Sol700
Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where
Sol700 is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters

Option Only option is At Start (D2R0000).
Existing Merged List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged.
Properties
Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created.
Deformable Select an entry under Deformable Property
Property
Master Rigid Select an entry under Master Rigid Property
Property
Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties.
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and
Master Rigid Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first
select the particular Existing Merged Properties.
Define Set of Parts See Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform, 364
to be Switched
Define Inertial See Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform, 366
Properties of Rigid
Body
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform

This subordinate form appears when Define Set of Parts to be Switched button is selected on the Rigid or
Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700
is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters

Option Only option is At Stage (D2RAUTO).
Existing Merged List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged.
Properties
Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created.
Deformable Property Select an entry under Deformable Property.
Master Rigid Property Select an entry under Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element
Property created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material.
Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties.
Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and
Master Rigid Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first
select the particular Existing Merged Properties.
Starting Switch Time Specify the time to switch the deformable and rigid properties.
Ending Switch Time Specify the time to terminate the switching of the deformable and rigid
properties.
Delay Period Specify the time delay (τ) for switching.
Rigid Wall/Contact Specify the surface numbers for rigid walls/surfaces that are to contact.
Surf Number
Related Switch Set
Max. Permited Time Specify the maximum time step.
Step Size
Number of Specify the number of deformable parts that will be switched to rigid parts.
Deformable Parts to
Rigid
Number of Rigid Parts Specify the number of rigid parts that will be switched to deformable parts.
to Deformable
Activation Code Select one of the five flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2, 4) EQ.3, or 5) EQ.4.
Switch
Pair of Related Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.-1.
Switches
Nodal Rigid Body Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.
Activation Flag
Nodal Constraint Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.
Activation Flag
Rigid Wall Activation Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.
Flag
Main Index
Solution Parameters
Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform

This subordinate form appears when Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body button is selected on the Rigid
or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where
Sol700 is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters

Option Only option is New Rigid Props. (D2RINNER).
Master Rigid Property Select a Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Property created
using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material.
X Coord of Center of X coordinate of center of mass.
Mass
Y Coord of Center of Y coordinate of center of mass.
Mass
Z Coord of Center of Z coordinate of center of mass.
Mass
Translational Mass Scalar mass value for translation, not rotation.
XX Comp. of Inertia XX (1,1) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IXX)
XY Comp. of Inertia XY (1,2) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IXY)
XZComp. of Inertia XZ (1,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IXZ)
YY Comp. of Inertia YY (2,2) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IYY)
YZ Comp. of Inertia YZ (2,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IYZ)
ZZ Comp. of Inertia ZZ (3,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.
Tensor (IZZ)
Eulerian Parameters Subform

This subordinate form appears when Eulerian Parameters button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and
Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such
as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Euler Boundary There are three choices, 1) Default, 2) Extrapolate (extrapolate structural mesh
Treatment pressure to Euler elements at solid/fluid boundary), or 3) Element (solid/fluid
boundary Euler element pressure equals the structural element pressure at the
solid/fluid boundary).
Multi-Mat. Trans. There are three choices, 1) Default (Impulse), 2) Average (face (surface) velocity
Scheme is averaged simply), or 3) Impulse (face (surface) velocity is impulse weighted).
Material Failure There are three choices, 1) Default (No Fail), 2) Fail (activates transport of fail
Option fraction and thereby keeps track of material that has failed), or 3) No Fail (failed
Euler material can support shear stress again as soon as new material enters the
Euler element).
Multi-Material Array The multi-material Eulerian elements use an overflow array to store their
Size material data. This array can hold “Multi-Material Array Size” times the number
of Eulerian elements. If more the 10% of the Eulerian elements have more than
one material, the value of “Multi-Material Array Size” must be increased.
Initial Condition A parameter value used to specify the accuracy of the initial conditions in
Accuracy Eulerian elements, when using the geometric shape definition. The parameter
value is specified in the input file using PARAM, MICRO, value.
Mimimum Velocity A parameter value used to specify the minimum velocity. If a calculated velocity
is less than this, it is set to zero (0). It is mainly used to eliminate harmless small
values. The parameter value is specified in the input file using PARAM,
VELCUT, value.
Maximum Velocity Specify the maximum velocity for Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes. Although it
is not usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are
occasions in regions of near-vacuous flow where using this can be an advantage.
The same thing applies to Lagrangian meshes, where there is contact. The
parameter value is specified in the input file using PARAM, VELMAX, value,
YES/NO. Default is 1.0e10, YES. See the next row for information on what
YES/NO means.
Small Mass Removal Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian elements with very small
mass, the mass in these elements may need to be removed for the analysis to be
stable. The above parameter (PARAM, VELMAX) is used to specify whether or
not to eliminate small masses. YES = eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements
for which the velocity is > the value of VELMAX. NO = do not eliminate the
mass for Eulerian elements for which the velocity is > the value of VELMAX.
Default = YES.
Universal Gas Specify the value of the universal gas constant. The parameter value is specified
Constant in the input file using PARAM, UGASC, value.
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Single Material Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements. For arbitrary
Elements Lagrange-Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength
cannot be used.
Single Mats. with Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements with strength.
Strength For arbitrary Lagrange-Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements
with strength cannot be used.
Multi-Material Specify the minimum density of multi-material Eulerian elements.
Elements
Roe Solver Scheme Specify whether or not to use the Roe solver. The Roe solver accounts for
momentum exchange between Lagrange (structure) and Eulerian material.
Spatial Accuracy There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order (left and right
state variables are taken as the values the state variables have at the left- and the
right-element center), or 2) 2nd Order (left- and right-state variable values at a
face by including the left-left and the right-right element).
Time Integration There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order, or 2) 2nd Order
Scheme (three-stage time integration scheme).
SPH Control Parameters Subform

This subordinate form appears when SPH Control Parameters (SPH refers to smooth “particle
hydrodynamics”) button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit
Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

Main Index
Solution Parameters
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Number of Cycles Specify the number of cycles between particle sorting.
Death Time Specify the time when SPH calculations are to be stopped.
Initial Number of Specify the initial number of neighbors per particle. This parameter is for
Neighbors specifying how much memory is to be allocated for arrays during initialization.
If the value is positive, the memory will be dynamically allocated. If the value is
negative, the memory allocation will be static (constant). During the calculation
only the closest SPH elements will be considered as neighbors. Using this option
can avoid memory allocation problems.
Particle Approx. There are six theories to choose from, 1) Renormalization (approximation), 2)
Theory Symmetric (formulation), 3) Sym. Renormalization (symmetric renormalization
approximation), 4) Tensor (tensor formulation), 5) Fluid Particle (fluid particle
approximation), 6) Fluid Particle Renorm (fluid particle with renormalization
approximation).
Start Time Specify the time to begin particle approximation.
Maximum Velocity Maximum velocity for the SPH particles. Particles whos velocity > this value are
deactivated.
Computation of Select one of the following for two different SPH parts, 1) Particle
Approx. Approximation (approximation is calculated), or 2) No Particle Approximation
(approximation is not calculated; two different SPH materials cannot interact
with each other, and penetration is allowed).
Intergration Type Select 1) 0 ( d ( h ( t ) ) = 1--- h ( t )div ( v ) ), or 2) 1
dt d
( d ( h ( t ) ) = 1--- h ( t ) ( div ( v ) ) 1 ⁄ 3 ), for time integrating to obtain the

dt d
smoothing length.
Smoothing Length Select 1) Bucket (sort based on algorithm; very fast), or 2) Global (computation
Comput. for all the model particles ). This is done during initialization.
Box Type Select either 1) Fixed (the box remains fixed in space), or 2) Moving (the user
specifies two corners of the box and a the time dependent Field to describe the
motion of the two corners). As long as a given SPH particle is in a box, the SPH
calculation for the particle is performed for the box. If the particle leaves the box
it was inside, it is deactivated.
Select Box Select the name of a box under Select Box. A box must have been previously
created under Loads/BCs: Create / Box Definition / Nodal.
Tail Vector Specify a vector, <X1 Y1 Z1>, that defines the minimum coordinates of the box
(coordinates of the corner of the box at the minimum location).
Main Index
Solution Parameters

Head Vector Specify a vector, <X2 Y2 Z2>, that defines the maximum coordinates of the box
(coordinates of the corner of the box at the maximum location).
Motion Vs Time Data Specify the time dependent Field that defines the motion of the two corners of
the box.
Vel./Disp. Flag Specify whether the time dependent Field is a Velocity or Displacement field.
Coord. System Specify the coordinate system that the Tail and Head Vectors are defined in.
Results Output Format

With the results output format form you can choose which output formats you want to use with each solution
sequence. The appropriate defaults are set for each solution type. These defaults can be changed or set in the
settings.pcl file.
A new variable has been added to the settings.pcl file for results output format defaults per SOL

 OP2 Specifies output of data to a MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 file (*.op2). This places
a PARAM,POST,-1 in the input file if MSC Nastran version is 2012 or less. For
MSC Nastran 2013 or higher, a PARAM,POST,1 is written. The PARAM,
POST integer value can be overridden by setting the environment variable
PARAM_POST_OP2 to any integer number or using the settings.pcl file
setting:
pref_env_set_integer( “PARAM_POST_OP2”,<integer>). Note that
this only works with the OP2 toggle ON.
 XDB Specifies output of data to a MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This will place a
PARAM,POST,0 in the input file.
 Print Specifies output of data to a MSC Nastran print file (*.f06).
 Punch Specifies output of data to a MSC Nastran punch file (*.pch).
Main Index
Solution Parameters

 MASTER Only When ON, only a .master file is written.
 MASTER/DBALL When ON, both a .master file and a .dball file are written.
 HDF5 When ON, requests an HDF5 results database file be written. This is done by
(Compressed) including a MDLPRM,HDF5,0 (or 1 if Compressed is ON) to the input deck.
(No Rot.DOFs) If no rotational degree-of-freedom results are to be written to the HDF5 file,
turn the No Rot.DOFs toggle ON. Otherwise both translational and rotational
DOF results are written to the HDF5 database. This sets the
MDLPRM,H5NORDOF,1 entry.
 XDB Buffer Size For the XDB results file, defines the buffer size used for accessing results.
OUTPUT2 Requests Specifies type of OUTPUT2 commands.
 P3 Built In - signals the use of MSC Nastran internal OUTPUT2

commands geared toward Patran. These commands are also appropriate for
PATRAN 2. The “P3 Built In” option is appropriate only for Database Runs,
see Solution Parameters, 276. If Database Run has been deselected, this option
will be set internally to “Alter File”.
 Alter File - specifies the use of an external alter file found on the Patran file
path and following the “msc_v#_sol#.alt” naming convention. See Files,
614 for more details.
 CADA-X Alter - specifies the use of an LMS CADA-X specific alter file that
is identical to the “Alter File” but with an additional “.lms” extension, for
example, “msc_v67_sol103.alt.lms”.
 P2 Built In - specifies use of MSC Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands
geared toward PATRAN 2.
OUTPUT2 Format Specifies format of the MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 (*.op2) files. Use “Text”
format when the resulting OUTPUT2 file must be transported between
heterogeneous computer platforms.
sequence:
NASTRAN_nnn_DATA_OUTPUT OP2+PUNCH
Where nnn is the solution sequence 101, 400 etc... and OP2+XDB+PRINT+PUNCH+MASTER +DBALL
are the options. This variable is only read from the settings.pcl file when opening a new database, creating a
new job or changing the solution sequence of an existing job. Otherwise the results output settings are
retrieved from the database for an existing job. Note that these variables must be added to the settings.pcl file
by the user and if they do not exist, a standard default is used. Also note that OP2 and XDB are mutually
exclusive and both cannot be specified at the same time. The same is true for MASTER Only and
MASTER/DBALL. The settings.pcl file may have one of these variables for each SOL sequence defined in
Patran (>100).
Main Index
Solution Parameters
ADAMS Preparation
This form is used when you want to prepare a database for an Adams job.
Main Index
Select Superelements

ADAMS Output  MNF Only
 Full Run + MNF
Units  Mass - Your options are: Kilogram, Pound-Mass, Slug, Gram, Ounce-Mass,
Kilo-Pound-Mass, Megagram
 Force - Newton, Pounds-Force, Ounce-Force, Dyne, Kilo-Newton, Kilo-
Pound-Force
 Length - Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Kilometer, Inch, Foot, Mile
 Time - Millisecond, Second, Minute, Hour
Craig-Bampton  Lower Bound
Modes Bounds
 Upper Bound
Num. Shapes to
Adams
ADAMS Debug Print
Strip Face
Create .out(OP2 file)
for MSC Fatigue
Mass Options  Partial
 Constant File
 Full
 None
Output Requests
Transfer Groups to
ADAMS
The superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The superelements for a
subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button unselects all the superelements.
If Write PART Superelements toggle is ON in the Translation Parameters, 263 form, then BEGIN BULK
SUPER=id sections are written to the input file to define the superelements, otherwise if this is OFF, SESET
entries are used.
In addition to selecting the superelement, you can specify the superelement tree definition. This tell the
analysis which superelement are upstream of others and thus, not directly connected to the residual structure
Main Index
or superelement zero (SE0). To define an upstream SE relative to its downstream SE, use the form shown
below to fill out the spreadsheet. Put focus in the Downstream databox, select a superelement from the list,
then select the upstream from the list and press Add. This adds a row to the spreadsheet. Repeat this for every
Main Index
upstream element you need to define. Clicking on a row in the spreadsheet and clicking Remove will remove
the defintion. Downstream SEs can only appear in the speadsheet once. This writes the SETREE entry.
SE5 SE6
SE4
SE3 SE1 SE2
In this example, SE1, SE2, & SE3 are upstream of the residual. This
SE0 is not necessary to define in the SE tree. However SE4 is upstream
of SE3 and SE5 & SE6 are upstream of SE4. These should be
defined in the tree.
Main Index
Subcases
Subcases
This form appears when the Subcases... button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the MSC
Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and various other
parameters to be used during part of a complete run.
The Patran MSC Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output requests with each
Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case. You can access the Subcase
Parameters... and Output Requests... forms to view or modify these defaults.
Main Index
Subcases

Action Options are Create, Delete, and Global Data.
Available Subcases Displays all the available subcases associated with the current Solution Sequence.
Subcase Name The subcase name that is being created or modified is displayed in this databox.
It can be typed in or picked from the Available Subcases listbox.
Available Load Cases Displays all the available loadcases in the current database. Only one loadcase can
be selected per subcase. For Normal Modes and Complex Eigenvalue solution
types, free-free runs can be generated by using an empty load case.
Deleting Subcases
To delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Delete.

Select Subcases Select the subcase(s) to delete.
Apply Apply to delete the selected subcases.
Main Index
Subcases
Editing Subcases
To edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Global Data.
The following form appears.

Select Subcases Select Subcase(s) to edit associated data.
Output Requests... Use Output Requests... to edit the output requests associated with the selected
subcases. The Edit Output Request form appears. See Edit Output Requests Form,
462.
Apply & Cancel Apply changes the output requests for all selected subcases. Cancel closes the
form without changes.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Subcase Parameters
The subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC Nastran Case Control that take effect within a subcase
and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the following solution sequences have subcase
parameters associated with them.
Solution Sequences Other Conditions Description

Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 382 Model has p-elements and Selects the subcase to participate in the
utilizes Version 68 error analysis calculations in an adaptive
SOL 101 analysis. By default the subcase
participates in the error analysis.
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 383 None Selects nonlinear static iteration
parameters.
SOL 106, 66
Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, 387 None Selects nonlinear transient iteration
parameters.
SOL 129, 99
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 389 Version 68 Selects real eigenvalue extraction
parameters.
SOL 103
Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 406
DDAM Subcase Parameters, 440
Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 442
Linear Static Subcase Parameters

This form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that contain
p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. This toggle sets the ADACT Case
Control command.

Perform Error This toggle allows for inclusion of subcases in the error analysis and sets the
Analysis ADACT Case Control command.
Default Load Creates a TEMPD entry for the specified Subcase and is called out using
Temperature TEMP case control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not
have specific temperature LBCs defined.
Enable Rotor Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the linear static Subcase. If enabled, the
Dynamics Rotor Speed Form becomes accessible to specify rotor speed, as shown
below.
Use Contact Table Toggle button to enable or disable the use of Contact Table.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters

Load Increment For SOL 101 jobs involving contact, the fixed number of increments can be
Params… specified on this form. Only fixed load incrementation is allows for static
SOL 101 jobs with contact. Please see Load Increment Parameters, Load
Increment Parameters, 415 for more information. The number of increments is
written to the NLSTEP entry for jobs with contact.
Iteration Parameters For SOL 101 jobs involving contact, certain iteration parameters can be
specified or changed to help with convergence. In general, the default values
should be used. Please see Iteration Parameters, Iteration Parameters, 423 for
more information. Parameters set on this form are written to the NLSTEP
entry.
Contact Table This subordinate form allows for the ability to specify which contact bodies
are allowed to come into contact which other bodies or themselves (self
contact), including glued contact. See Contact Table, 428 for more information.
Solver/Options This subordinate form allows for the ability to specify the Nastran solver to
be used for the Subcase being set up. See Solvers/options Contact Table, 428 for
more information.
Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form when
the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of the parameters that control the
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is part of the NLPARM Bulk Data entry. If
Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the NLPCI Bulk Data entry is generated.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterations.
Table 3-32
Number of Load Increments Defines the number of increments to be used to apply the full load. This is the NINC
field.
Matrix Update Method Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. Matrix updates as the load is
incrementally applied. This parameter can have one of three settings: Automatic, Semi-
Automatic, or Controlled Iter. This defines the setting of the KMETHOD field.
Number of Iterations per Defines the number of iterations to be used after each matrix update. This is the KSTEP
Update field.
llowable Iterations per Defines the number of iterations to be used after each matrix update. This is the KSTEP
Increment field.
Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If Displacement
Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines
Displacement Tolerance the tolerance on displacements. The displacement tolerance must be met between
iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered in the
CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.
Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is selected,
the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on load
Load Tolerance equilibrium. The load equilibrium tolerance must be met between iterations to define
convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance
is the EPSP field.
Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is selected,
the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance on work error.
Work Tolerance The work tolerance must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work
Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW field.
Arc-Length Method... Opens a subordinate form to activate the Arc-Length Method which is turned OFF by
default. The Arc-Length Method is used to explore post-buckling paths.
Normal Modes Activates a normal mode analysis of the prestressed system at the end of the subcase.
Buckling Activates a buckling analysis at the end of the subcase.
Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case control.
This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific temperature
LBCs defined
Solvers/Options... See Solvers/Options, 437 for more information.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Arc-Length Method Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on the Subcase Parameters
form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length Method. All of the data is
part of the NLPCI Bulk Data entry.
Table 3-33
Constraint type Defines the type of Arc-Length Method:
CRIS = Crisfield method (default)
RIKS = Riks method
MRIKS = modified Riks method

Min. Adjust. ratio (MINALR) Minimum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for
the adaptive arc-length method 0.0≤MINALR≤1.0.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-33
Max. Adjust. ratio (MAXALR) Maximum allowable arc-length adjustment ratio between increments for
the adaptive arc-length method MAXALR≥1.0.
Scale Factor (W) Scale factor w for arc-length criteria:
w=0, displacement control
w>0, combined load and displacements control
w»1, load control
Convergence Iterations Desired number of iterations for convergence to be used for the adaptive
arc-length adjustments. This is the DESITER field
Max. Controlled Incremenr Maximum number of controlled increment steps allowed within the
Steps subcase. This is the MXINC field.
Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters

the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iterations.
Table 3-34
Ending Time Defines the Ending Time for the subcase.
Number of Time Steps Defines the Number of Time Steps for the subcase.
Matrix Update Method Defines what method to use to control the stiffness. The Mass matrix
updates as the load is incrementally applied. This parameter can have
one of three settings: Adaptive, Automatic, or Time Step. This is the
METHOD field.
Number of Time Steps per Defines the number of time steps to be used in each matrix update. This
Update can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to Time Step. This is the
NDT field.
Number of Bisections per Defines the maximum number of time step bisections to be used in each
Update matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update Method is set to
Adaptive. This is the MAXBIS field.
Allowable Iterations per Time Defines the limit for the number of iterations that can be done in any
Steps given increment. This is the MAXITER field.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Normal Modes Subcase Parameters

The Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran Version
70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction.
Table 3-35
Extraction Method Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This
parameter can be set to any one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic
Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified
Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse
Power. If this is set to Lanczos, this indicates that an EIGRL Bulk Data
entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the
METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Frequency Range of Interest Defines the lower and upper limits to the range of frequencies to be
examined. These are the F1 and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry
or the V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.
Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the
ND field on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.
Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value
between 0 and 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction
Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk
Data entry.
parameter can take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point.
This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM field on the EIGR Bulk
Data entry.
Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be
selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot
be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field
on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point
to be used. This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to
Point. This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to
Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.
Number of Modes in Error Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis when
Analysis the model contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT Case
Control command.
Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using
TEMP case control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that
do not have specific temperature LBCs defined
See Contact Table, 428 for more information.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the
solution type is Complex Eigenvalue.
Table 3-36
Enable Rotor Dynamics Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the complex eigenvalue subcase.
Rotor dynamics is disabled by default.
Specify Spinning Properties If enabled, the “Specify Spin Properties” button will be enabled, and can
be selected to display the Spinning Properties Form.
Contact Table See Contact Table, 428 for more information.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-37
Options Synchronous (default) or
Asynchronous
Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MSC Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data
entry.
Reference Rotor The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives the RGYRO Case
Control and Bulk Data (REFROTR field) in the MSC Nastran Bulk
Data file.
Speed Unit Relative speeds to the reference rotor. These values define the
SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and SPDLOW fields of the MSC Nastran
RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank.
Speed High / Speed Low For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed databox is presented,
defining SPEED field, while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Transient Response Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the
solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step interval and duration for a transient
response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data entry.
Direct Transient and Modal Transient Solutions

This is the subcase parameters form for the Direct Transient and Modal Transient solution.
Table 3-38
DEFINE TIME STEPS Use this button to define your TSTEP entry.
Modal Damping Modal Damping is only shown if you select Modal Damping
formulation from the Solution Type form.
DEFINE MODAL Use this button to define your TABDMP1 entry. You must enter at least
DAMPING... one value of frequency and damping on the spreadsheet for damping to
occur.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Define Time Step

Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Time Increment) must be positive.
See MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide TSTEP for more information.
Table 3-39
No. of Time Steps / Delta-T No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in time.
The skip factor defines which of the solution points you wish to
perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1 indicates every time
step, 2 indicates every other solution step, etc. Total solution time
accumulates in order of entry.
For the example shown, MSC Nastran will calculate output at 100 time
steps ranging between 1. and 100.
Skip Factor The "Skip Factor" column is optional. If the column is empty, MSC
Nastran assumes the Skip Factor is 1.
Add Row "Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the
beginning of the table, select click on the row label and select "Add
Row".
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Define Damping
Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities (same
value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last entries in
the table. See MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more information.
Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entries in the modal damping
data. This will cause an error in MSC Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such
scenario.
If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even
if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies (two highest
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for those frequencies are
the same.
Table 3-40
beginning of the table, click on the row label and select "Add Row".
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Frequency Response Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the
solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencies for a frequency response
analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Frequency Solution
This is the Frequency Subcase Parameter Form.
Table 3-41
Define Frequencies Use this button to define FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4
entries.
Enable Rotor Dynamics / Used to turn rotor dynamics on for the complex eigenvalue subcase. If
Specify Spinning Properties enabled, the “Specify Spin Properties” button will be enabled, and can
be selected to display the Spinning Properties Form, below.Rotor
dynamics is disabled by default.
Solver / Options See Solvers/Options, 437 for more information.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Use this form to create FREQi entries.
Table 3-42
The driving column on this form is the Increment type.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Direct Frequency
Table 3-43
When the
Increment type is... Patran...
Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple
Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq. and No.
Incr. columns are not used.
Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the
End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between.
Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic
progression.
Modal Frequency
Table 3-44
When the
Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple
Discrete rows will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq, No. Incr.
and Cluster/Spread columns are not used.
Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the
End Freq. and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between.
The Cluster/Spread column is not used.
Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic
progression.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-44
When the
Lin. Cluster Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear
distribution of solution frequencies between each successive pair of natural
modes in the specified frequency interval. The Cluster value, which has a
default of 1.0 is used to bias the linear distribution of solution frequencies.
A smaller cluster value has a closer spacing towards the center, CLUSTER
greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the ends of the frequency range.
Log. Cluster Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used between
the start and end frequencies.
Lin. Spread Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a
fractional amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No.
Incr. of 21, there will be 21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN and
1.3*FN, where FN a natural frequency, for all natural frequencies between
the specified “Start Freq” and “End Freq” values.
Fractional Spread Creates a FREQ5 entry. Enter the Start Frequency and End Frequency.
These are the lower and upper bound for the excitation (solution)
frequency domain, respectively. It is desired to obtain a set of excitation
frequencies around and at each natural frequency, obtained previously from
the corresponding modal analysis for this simulation. This is done by
providing a list of fractions; for example {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}. The list is
“multiplied” by each natural frequency to provide a list of excitation
frequencies for each natural frequency; for example fn_j * {fr_1, fr_2, ...,
fr_n}, where fn_j is the jth natural frequency. The fractions cannot be
inserted on a single row of the Define Frequencies form, but multiple rows
must be created, with just one fraction per row.
Define Damping
Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities
(same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last
entries in the table. See MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more information.
Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entry in the modal damping
data. This will cause an error in MSC Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create such
scenario.
If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even
if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies (two highest
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for those frequencies are
the same.
Table 3-45
Create a Field To create a Field for the damping data, click in the Create a Field
checkbox.
Load Dara From Field To bring in damping data from an existing Field, click on the Load Data
From Field button, then select the Field.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Spinning Properties, Frequency Response
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Presented when Rotor Dynamics is ON and the Specify Spinning Properties button is selected.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-46
Option Synchronous (default) or
Asynchronous
Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MSC Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data
entry.
Reference Rotor The reference rotor for the subcase. This drives the RGYRO Case
Dontrol and Bulk Data (REFROTR field) in the MSC Nastran Bulk
Data file.
Speed Unit Relative speeds to the reference rotor. These values define the
SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and SPDLOW fields of the MSC Nastran
RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank.
Speed High / Speed Low For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed databox is presented,
defining SPEED field, while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.
For Synchronous analyses with Frequency Dependent Looping OFF, no

speed databoxes are presented, and SPDHIGH, SPDLOW, SPEED are
all left blank. Rather, a “param, gyroavg,-1” entry is generated.
Frequency Dependent Looping is ON by default.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters

The type of nonlinear analysis can be changed in each SOL 600 or SOL 400 subcase. To specify this change,
the Subcases form includes an Analysis Type pull-down menu with options for static, normal modes,
buckling, transient dynamic, creep, and body approach analyses. For SOL 400 there is an additional Analysis
Type, complex eigenvalue. In turn, specifying the subcase parameters is dependent on the Analysis Type
selected for the subcase. The following sections define the subcase parameters for each analysis type.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 or 600 static analysis subcase.
Table 3-47
Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.
Nonlinear Solution Parameters
 Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included in
the subcase.
 Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-47
Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each
iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be
determined.
Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the
equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the
analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase.
Break Squeal Parameters For defining parameter values for modeling break squeal for the subcase.
(SOL 400 only).
Implicit Nonlinear Normal Modes Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a normal modes analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See Normal
Modes Subcase Parameters, 389 for more information.
Implicit Nonlinear Buckling Subcase Parameters

For buckling nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue extraction techniques and the
range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction. This subform defines the parameters for a buckling analysis
subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 389 for more information.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Implicit Nonlinear Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a transient dynamic analysis subcase for SOL 600 and SOL 400.
Table 3-48
Linearity Prescribes the nonlinear effects for the subcase.
Nonlinear Solution Parameters
the subcase.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-48
determined.
analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase (SOL
600 only).
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Implicit Nonlinear Creep Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 and SOL 400 Creep analysis subcase.
Table 3-49
Creep Solution Parameters
 Procedure Defines either Explicit creep formulation or Implicit creep formulation.
the subcase.
Increment Type Defines a fixed or adaptive increment method.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-49
 Adaptive Increment For adaptive methods, sets boundaries for incrementation.
Parameters...
determined.
analysis.
Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase (SOL
600 only).
Break Squeal Parameters
Implicit Nonlinear Body Approach Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 body approach analysis subcase
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-50
Body Approach Parameters
 Total Time Places a time step option in the Load Step.
 Synchronized If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes into contact, the
rest stop moving.
analysis. See Contact Table, 428
Implicit Nonlinear Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 (only) complex eigenvalue analysis subcase
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Table 3-51
Formulation Select either Direct or Modal.
Enable Rotor Dynamics Click in checkbox to activate rotor dynamics.
Specify Spinning Properties... Click to access the form for specifying the rotor speed. See Spinning
Properties, Frequency Response, 403
Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the
analysis. See Contact Table, 428
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Load Increment Parameters

Load and time step incrementation parameters for Statics and Transient Dynamics appear on this
subordinate form. For other analysis types, this information appears directly on the Solution Parameters
form.
The Load Increment Parameters form differs depending on your designation of a Fixed or Adaptive
Increment Type and whether an arclength method is to be used if you select an Adaptive Incrementation
scheme.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Adaptive Load Incrementation without Arclength
Static Transient Dynamic
For SOL 400 in versions of MSC Nastran less than 2010, these parameters in this form are written to the
NLADAPT and NLPARM entries. For MSC Nastran 2010 or later, these parameters are written to the
NLSTEP entry. For SOL 600, the NLAUTO entry is written for all versions of MSC Nastran.
Increment Type Adaptive

Arclength Method None
Trial Time Step Size Defines the initial time step size. Default is 1% of Total Time if left blank.
Time Step Scale Factor Indicates load will be allowed to be scaled up by 20% each increment if possible. Default
is 1.2.
Minimum Time Step Indicates the smallest time step that can be used. Default is Trial Time Step / 1000 if
left blank.
Maximum Time Step Indicates the largest time step that can be used. Default is Total Time / 2 if left blank.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Maximum # of Steps Defines the maximum number of time steps. It can be left blank which will default to
the Initial Step Size divided by the Total Time.
Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one (1) if left
blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total time is the length of
time between distinct time points if left blank. Otherwise the actual value is used (not
recommended because it can’t be variable).
# of Steps of Output Indicates that this many increments evenly spaced in time will be place in the output
file. Default is 0 if left blank. Which means all converged increments will be output
(SOL 600 only).
Quasi-static Inertial ON by default.
Damping
Criteria Multiple adaptive load stepping criteria is available. By default, none of this is necessary.
These criteria are described below in Adaptive Load Incrementation Criteria, 419.
Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic
analysis.
Minimum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the
Increment Iteration Parameters, 423 form.
Maximum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the
Increment Iteration Parameters, 423 form.
Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD field on
the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs.
Load Increment Parameters for SOL 600 and SOL 400, Creep analysis. The MSC Nastran entries used for
this are NLADAPT, NLPARM, and TSTEPNL.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Creep
Increment Type There are three choices, 1) Fixed, 2) Adaptive, and 3) Adaptive Creep.
Suggested Time Increment The approximate time step.
Total Time The total time for the creep analysis.
Max # of Increment Allowed This is for NSMAX.
Creep Tests This is for RAC.
Relative Strain Tolerance This is for TCSTRN.
Relative Stress Tolerance This is for TCSTRS.
Low Stress Cut-off Tolerance This is for TCOFF.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Adaptive Load Incrementation Criteria
Parameters on this form are written to the MSC Nastran NLAUTO entry for SOL 600, when defining
automatic adaptive load incrementation and to the TABSCTL entry for SOL 400, which are referenced from
the NLSTEP entry.
Adaptive Criteria Description

Treat Criteria as: If Limits, sets 3rd field to zero (0) in 3rd data block (default). If Targets, sets field to
one (1). This is for LIMITAR.
Use Automatic Criteria Uses automatic physical criteria if top toggle is ON. Bottom toggle defines what
Continue if not Satisfied happens if the criteria is not met. Both OFF by default. This is for IPHYS.
Ratio Between Steps: Defines the [Smallest] and [Largest] ratios acceptable between load increments. For
Smallest, default = 0.1, For Largest, default=10.0. This is for RSMALL and RBIG.
[Number of Cutbacks] Blank by default. default value is 10 if left blank or zero. This is for NCUT.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Adaptive Criteria Description

Increment Criteria Selects the type of criteria to be used.The
labels “XXX Range” and “XXX Increment
Allowed” will change based on the
Increment Criteria selected. This is for
CRITERIA.
Loading Table Instances Determines how loading tables (Use Tables must be ON in the Job Parameters form)
are treated. By default loads are increased or decreased such that they always Reach
Peaks-Valleys Only. If you wish you can Reach All Points in Tables or Ignore all Points
in Tables.
Write Instances to Post File Writes Loading Table Instances to the Post file if toggle is ON. Note that if toggle is
ON, then only those instances are written to the POST file and not all the increments
of the analysis. This is for IDMPFLG.
Nodal Temp. Check There are three choices, 1) Omit Check, 2) Below Finish Temperature (to complete
time period when all node temperatures are < FTEMP), and 3) Above Finish
Temperature (to complete time period when all node temperatures are > FTEMP).
This is for IFINISH.
Finish Temperature The terminal temperature. This is for FTEMP.
Use Criterion For a criteria to be used, this toggle must be turned ON.
“Criterion” Range The first and last fields are zero and 1e20 respectively and cannot change. The second
and third must be the same as well as the 4th/5th and 6th/7th which define the ranges.
The “Criterion” title changes according to the Increment Criterion chosen.
“Criterion” Increment Allowed The “Criterion” title changes according to the Increment Criteria chosen.
Select a Group (Optional) You can optionally select a group of elements to which this criterion is to be applied.
No group is selected by default.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Adaptive Load Incrementation with Arclength (SOL 600 only)
Static
Adaptive Increment Parameter Description

Arclength Method Selects the arclength root procedure: Crisfield, Riks/Ramm, Modified
Riks/Ramm, or Crisfield-Modified Riks/Ramm. The default is Modified
Riks/Ram. If None is selected the form updates as shown (p. 415). For
Transient Dynamics, this is the only option available for adaptive load
incrementation.
Automatic Cutback This feature is ON by default. If an increment does not converge, a restart from
the last increment cuts the increment size in half.
Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how
many times a cutback is allowed.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Adaptive Increment Parameter Description

Initial Fraction of Load This is the fraction of the total load that should be applied in the first iteration
Applied to 1st Increment of the first increment.
Max. Fraction of Load Applied This is the maximum fraction of the load that can be applied in any increment.
in Any Increment
Max/Min Ratio Arc Length Used to define the minimal arclength. The default is 0.01.
/ Initial Arc Length
Max. # of Increments Defines the maximum number of increments. Program will end if this value is
exceeded.
Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one (1)
if left blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total time
is the length of time between distinct time points if left blank. Otherwise the
actual value is used (not recommended because it can’t be variable).
Fixed Load Incrementation
Static Transient Dynamic
Fixed Increment
Parameter Description
Automatic Cutback Applies to Nonlinear Statics only. It is ON by default. If an increment does not
converge, it allows for a restart from the last increment cuts the increment size
in half.
Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how
many times a cutback is allowed.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Fixed Increment
Parameter Description
Number of Increments For Statics and Creep this is the number of increments specified in the
or NLAUTO option. Or for Transient Dynamics defines the number of steps to
Number of Steps use throughout the analysis for Fixed time step type. Default is 10.
Total Time For Statics, this enters the NLAUTO option which is the total time as defined
in this widget. For Transient Dynamics this is the total time.
For Creep, the total time is either placed in the 2nd data block of a CREEP
INCREMENT option or the total time is divided by the Number of
Increments, if this value is present, and the incremental time is written to the
2nd data block of the CREEP option.
Gamma / Beta For Transient Dynamics only. Default is 0.5.
Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, the Houbolt and Central Difference cannot be
selected. Indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic
analysis.Single Step Houbolt is the default.
Minimum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on
the Iteration Parameters, 423 form.
Maximum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on
the Iteration Parameters, 423 form.
Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD
field on the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs.
Iteration Parameters
This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters... / Iteration Parameters... button is selected for
Analysis Type: Static, Transient Dynamics, Creep, ... Subcases form. Unless otherwise specified all parameter
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
references apply to the NLSTRAT (SOL600) entry for the form on the left, and NLPARM (SOL 400) entry
for the form on the right .
SOL 600 Iteration Parameter Description

Proceed if not Converged Forces the analysis to proceed even if the increment did not converge.
Initial Stress Stiffness There are five choices, 1) Full, 2) None, 3) Tensile, 4) Deviatoric, and 5) Begin
Increment.
Non-positive Definite This forces the non-positive definite flag (IKNONPOS param) ON in the
NLSTRAT option. A new NLSTRAT option is written for each step if a
change in this flag has been detected from Subcase to Subcase.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters

Iteration Method Indicates the iteration method (IKMETH param) to be used. This is can be
set to Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson
with Strain Correction, or Secant Method. Full Newton-Raphson is default.
Max # of Iterations Defines the maximum number of iterations (MAXREC param) allowed for
per Increment convergence in any increment. This number is negative if Proceed if not
Converged is ON from the Solution Parameter form.
Minimum # of Iterations This specifies the minimum number of iterations per Increment (MINREC
param) option. It can be an integer number zero or greater. If this is set greater
per Increment than zero, every increment will perform at least this many iterations.
Desired # of Iterations Defines the number of desired iterations in an increment (ATRECYC param)
per Increment which is placed on the NLSTRAT option. If the actual number of iterations
is less than this value, this will be used to figure out how much to increase the
load step for the next increment. In a similar manner if the actual number of
iterations is greater than this number (but less than the Max # of Iterations per
Increment, this will be used to decrease the load step in the next increment.
Obviously if Adaptive incrementation is not specified, this data will not be
used.
Matrix Update Method There are six choices for updating the stiffness matrix, 1) Automatic (MSC
Nastran automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on convergence
rates), 2) Controlled Iters.(MSC Nastran updates the matrix at every KSTEP
interations and at convergence if KSTEP <= MAXITER), 3) Adaptive, 4)
Semi-Automatic (MSC Nastran for each load increment (i) performs a single
iteration based upon the new/next load, (ii) updates the stiffness matrix, and
(iii) resumes the normal Automatic option), 5) Full Newton (MSC Nastran
updates the stiffness matrix every iteration), and 6) Pure Full Newton (the
same as the Full Newton method, except EPSU = -0.01, EPSW = -0.01, and
MAXLS = 0.0).
Tolerance Method Defines the tolerance method to be used (CONVTYP param). This can be set
to Residual, Incremental Displacement, or Incremental Strain Energy.
Residuals/Displacements If you want the Tolerance Method to use both Residuals and Displacements
to determine convergence set this to And. If you want either one or the other
And to determine convergence, set this to OR. If Tolerance Method is set to
Or
Residual or Displacement, then these two toggles are enabled. Both are OFF
by default. If one is ON, the other is OFF. These toggles work in combination
with Tolerance Method. If both are OFF, then Tolerance Method determines
what is written.
Error Type Indicates the type of error to use (IRELABS param). This can be set to Relative
or Absolute or Both.
Automatic Switching This controls automatic switching (the AUTOSW param on the NLSTRAT
option) between Residuals and Displacement tolerances if one or the other
fails to converge.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters

Residual Tolerances Values and labels in this frame depend on the Tolerance Method and Error
Type setting and are discussed below.
Relative Residual Force The value of this widget (default is 0.1 on force) is written to the RCKI param.
Relative Displacement
Relative Energy
Relative Residual Moment
Relative Rotation
Minimum Reaction Force The value of these widgets (default is blank) is written to the appropriate
Minimum Displacement MAXxx or MINxx param.
Minimum Reaction Moment
Minimum Rotation
Maximum Residual Force
Maximum Displacement
Maximum Residual Moment
Maximum Rotation

Min # of Iterations per Increment Specify the fewest number of iterations per load increment.
Max # of Iterations per Increment Specify the largest number of iterations per load increment.
Number of Iterations per Update Specify the allowable number of iterations per stiffness matrix update,
(KSTEP).
Matrix Update Method There are six choices for updating the stiffness matrix, 1) Automatic (MSC
Nastran automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on
convergence rates), 2) Controlled Iters.(MSC Nastran updates the matrix at
every KSTEP interations and at convergence if KSTEP <= MAXITER), 3)
Adaptive, 4) Semi-Automatic (MSC Nastran for each load increment (i)
performs a single iteration based upon the new/next load, (ii) updates the
stiffness matrix, and (iii) resumes the normal Automatic option), 5) Full
Newton (MSC Nastran updates the stiffness matrix every iteration), and 6)
Pure Full Newton (the same as the Full Newton method, except EPSU = -
0.01, EPSW = -0.01, and MAXLS = 0.0).
Automatic Switching If selected, automatically switch to an appropriate convergence checking flag
if an unappropriated flag is selected.
Displacement Error If any of these toggles are ON, then the appropriate CONV=U, P, W, V, or
Load Error N is written to the NLPARM entry to activate the repective convergence
Work Error criteria.
Vector Componet Method
Length Method
Main Index
Subcase Parameters

Displacement Tolerance Specifies the tolerance value if the above corresponding toggles are activated.
Load Tolerance This is written in the EPSU, EPSP, and EPSW fields of the NLPARM entry.
Work Tolerance Leave blank for default values.
Maximum # of Divergence Conditions Specifies the MAXDIV, MAXQN, MAXLS, FSTRESS, LSTOL, MAXBLS,
and RTOLB fields of the NLPARM entry. It is recommended to use the
Maximum # of Correction Vectors default values. Please consult the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for
Maximum # of Line Searches more information.
Fraction of Effective Stress
Line Search Tolerance
Maximum # of Bisections
Maximum Incremental Rotations
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Contact Table
A contact table is used to control the behavior of and to activate or deactivate, or in some cases, remove
contact bodies from the analysis. This is used for both linear and nonlinear contact.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Input Description
Global Contact Detection  Changing this setting should be done with caution as it will over-write any contact
detection changes made to individual contact pairs in the cells. This option sets the
contact detection method in all cells in the contact table.
 Default (by body #) -This is the default where contact is checked in the order the
bodies are written to the input file which is the order in which they are created. In this
scenario, the most finely meshed bodies should be listed first. There will be contact
checks first for nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and then for
nodes of the second body with respect to the first body. If Single Sided contact is
activated on the Contact Parameters subform, then only the first check is done.
 Automatic -Unlike the default, the contact detection is automatically determined and
is not dependent on the order they are listed but determined by the solver ordering
the bodies starting with those having the smallest edge length. Then there will be only
a check on contact for nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and not
the other way around.
 First ->Second - Blanks the lower triangular section of the table matrix such that no
input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the upper portion are written,
which forces the contact check of the first body (the one higher in the contact table)
with respect to the second body.
 Second-> First - Blanks the upper triangular section of the table matrix such that no
input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the lower portion are written.
Contact detection is done opposite of First->Second.
 Double-Sided -Writes both upper and lower portions of the table matrix. This
overrules the Single Sided contact parameter set on the Contact Parameters subform.
Touch All Places a T to indicate touching status for all deformable-deformable or rigid-deformable
bodies.
Glue All Places a G to indicate glued status for all deformable-deformable or rigid-deformable
bodies.
Deactivate All Blanks the spreadsheet cells.
Import/Export Import or Export a file with contact matrix definition data. The format must be CSV.
Select Existing Select an existing Contact Table from a set of tables.
Contact Matrix A matrix defining what and how contact bodies contact.
Body Type Lists the body type for each body; either Deformable or Rigid.
Release This cell can be toggled for each body to Y or N (Yes or No). If Y, this indicates that the
particular contact body is to be removed from this Subcase. The forces associated with this
body can be removed immediately in the first increment or gradually over the time of the
entire Subcase with the Force Removal switch described below.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Input Description
The Contact Matrix entries The rows correspond to Touching Body. The columns correspond to Touched Body. An
entry of the matrix, for example (Row i,Column j), will have the entry of T, G, or “blank”.
T = touching, G = glue, “blank” = no contact. To change a matrix cell entry, select the cell
(click once) to select it, then click on the cell once to change to the next selection. For
example, T -> G.
Touching Body These are informational or convenience list boxes to allow you to see which bodies an
Touched Body active cell references and to see what settings are active for Distance Tolerance and other
related parameters below. You must click on the touched/touching bodies to see what
values, if any, have been set for the pair combination.
Distance Tolerance Set the Distance Tolerance for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter or
Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be referenced that
will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies with time, temperature, or
some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Distance
Tolerance.
Bias Factor Bias the domain defined by the distance tolerance.
Analysis Properties Select Structural.
Separation Threshold Specify a threshold (force or stress) such that if the contact load (force or stress) is < this
threshold value, the contacting body remains in contact with the contacted body.
Separation Force Set the Separation Force for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter or
some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Separation Force.
Friction Coefficient Set the Friction Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter or
some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Friction
Coefficient.
Interference Closure Set the Interference Closure for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter or
some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Interference
Closure.
Friction Stress Limit This is a bound on the maximum friction stress. This is the friction stress limit for the
bilinear model, σ t limit . If the shear stress reaches the limit value, the applied friction force
is reduced so that the maximum shear stress is given by min ( μσ n, σ limit t ).
Slide Off Distance Specify the distance a node must slide off a surface, at an edge, before the node travels on
the surface, at the edge, that is at an angle to the surface that is being slid off of.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Input Description
Heat Transfer Coefficient Set the Heat Transfer Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter
or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be referenced that
some other independent variable. This overrides any other settings for Heat Transfer
Coefficient. This is only used in Coupled analysis (Heat transfer and Coupled analysis not
supported in MSC.Nastran 2004.
Force Removal Select 1) Immediate, or 2) Gradual. This is activated when a body is set to Release. For
example, 1-seal can be set to Release by clicking once on the corresponding Release cell,
then clicking once again to change from N to Y. The MSC Nastran entry BCMOVE is
written to the .bdf file.
On the Contact Table form, there is a column for body Release that writes a BCMOVE
entry. The new Body Pair enhancement does not address this in the current design and
the BCMOVE entry does not get written in .bdf file while using Contact Body Pairs.
Contact Detection Select 1) Automatic, 2) Double Sided, 3) 1st->2nd, or 4) 2nd->1st.
Retain Gaps/Overlaps This is only applicable for the Glued option. Any initial gap or overlap between the node
and the contacted body will not be removed (otherwise the node is projected onto the
body which is the default). For deformable-deformable contact only.
Stress-free Initial Contact This is only applicable for initial contact in increment zero, where coordinates of nodes
in contact can be adapted such that they cause stress-free initial contact. This is important
if, due to inaccuracies during mesh generation, there is a small gap/overlap between a
node and the contacted element edge/face. For deformable-deformable contact only.
Delayed Slide Off By default, at sharp corners, a node will slide off a contacted segment as soon as it passes
the corner by a distance greater than the contact error tolerance. This extends this
tangential tolerance. For deformable-deformable contact only.
Allow Separation
Advanced Parameters... See Advanced Parameters Subform, 431
Contact Boundary... See Contact Boundary Subform, 434
Advanced Parameters Subform

Un-gluing (breaking) a glued contact can be done by specifying the Breaking Glue Parameter values in the
following form. Also augmentation parameters for Segment-to-Segment contact can be specified per contact
pair as well. Note that you MUST press the OK button to save the settings on this form for a given contact
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
pair. You must open and repeat this operation for each pair you for which you wish to defined these
properties.
Breaking Glue - This toggle and its parameters can only be used when there is glued contact (there is G in
the Contact Table matrix cells) and is only valid for Nastran 2010 or higher.
Input Description
Max Normal Stress The maximum normal stress that will cause the glued contact to become un-glued.
Max Tangential Stress The maximum tangential stress that will cause the glued contact to become un-glued.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Input Description
First Exponent The exponent of the tangential stress term (BGM) in the following equation:
BGN BGM
 sigman
--------------------
sigmat
+  ------------------ > 1.0
 BGSN   BGST 
Second Exponent The exponent of the normal stress term (BGN) in the following equation:
BGN sigmat BGM
 sigman
-------------------- +  ------------------ > 1.0
 BGSN   BGST 
Segment-to-Segment Contact - This toggle and its parameters are used when segment-to-segment contact is
specified. These parameters are only valid for Nastran 2010 or higher and currently only the normal values
are supported. They are written to the BCTABLE entry under the “SEGS” line in the PENALT and
AUGDIST field. Segment-to-segment contact must be turned on the Contact Options form, otherwise these
parameters are ignored. (See Contact Parameters Subform, 315.)
Input Description
Normal Penalty Factor The augmented lagrange penalty factor used by the segment-to-segment contact algorithm.
Penetration Distance The penetration distance beyond which the augmentation will be applied as used by the
segment-to-segment contact algorithm.
Tangential Penalty Not supported by Nastran yet.
Factor
Slip Distnace Not supported by Nastran yet.
Anisotropic Friction - Not supported by Nastran yet.

Wear Scale Factor - Not supported by Nastran yet.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Contact Boundary Subform

:
All of the flags on this form are written to the BCTABLE entry under the “FBSH” line in the COPTS1 and
COPTM1 fields.
Input Description
Include Outside (Solid When detecting contact of solid elements (for example, CHEXA elements) use this
Element) to include contact of the outside of the elements.For details refer to the BCTABLE
entry (defines contact table) of the MSC Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for
the BCTABLE entry are COPTM and COPTS. These flags indicate how master and
slave surfaces may contact.
Include Outside of Rigid When detecting contact of rigid surfaces use this to include contact of the outside of
Surface the rigid surfaces. For details refer to the BCTABLE entry (defines contact table) of
the MSC Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCTABLE entry are
COPTM and COPTS. These flags indicate how master and slave surfaces may
contact.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Input Description
Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses the layers
to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom Only.
Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the
10th field of the 2nd data block.
Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness
combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.
Include Edges Use this to detect contact of edges. There are three options, Beam/Bar, Free and Hard
Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCTABLE entry (defines contact table) of the
MSC Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCTABLE entry are COPTM
and COPTS. These flags indicate how master and slave surfaces may contact.
Active/Deactive Elements
Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Active/Deactive Group Description

Group of Element to Deactivate Lists all groups. Elements in the selected group will be deactivated.
Group of Elements to Activate Lists all groups. Elements in the selected group will be activated.
Break Squeal Parameters

Defines parameter values for modeling break squeal. (SOL 400 only).

Enable Break Squeal The form is activated when this checkbox is selected.
Load Factor Defines the load factor for which the break squeal analysis is to be performed.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters

Average Stiffness Approximate average stiffness per unit area between the break pads and disk.
This parameter is used as a penalty contact stiffness for break squeal. It needs to
be a large value, but not so large that numerical instabilities result. If this
parameter is large enough, increasing it by a few orders of magnitude will not
appreciably affect the squeal modes.
Break Squeal Only This is used to specify whether or not the nonlinear analysis will be continued
after the break squeal event. If this is selected, the nonlinear iterations will cease
immediately after the event, otherwise the nonlinear iterations will be
continued.
Axis of Rotation Vector This is a vector of direction cosines, <X-dir cosine, Y-dir cosine, Z-dir cosine>,
where this is for the axis of rotation, and the directions are in the basic
coordinate system.
Point on Axis of Rotation These are the coordinates of a point on the axis of rotation, [X,Y,Z]. The
coordinates are in the basic coordinate system.
Solvers/Options
In general, this form is used to select the Nastran solver and other possible options. An SMETHOD case
control entry is written specifying the solver type to use and possibly an ITER bulk data entry for additional
options. Only certain solutions allow the use of the SMETHOD case control as controlled by the user
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
interface. If a solution does not support a solver option, that option is not presented in the form or menus.
Solver Type Description

Nastran Default No SMETHOD or ITER entries are written. Nastran uses whatever solver is the default for
the solution being used.
Iterative Element-Based An SMETHOD case control with the entry ELEMENT is used which invokes the iterative
(CASI) CASI (element-based) solver using all defaults. This is only available for SOL 101 and 400
and is generally used with large solid models. Certain restrictions apply and you should
consult the Nastran Quick Reference Guide regarding the usage of this solver.
Iterative Matrix-Based An SMETHOD case control with the entry MATRIX is used to invoke the matrix-based
iterative solver using all defaults.
Iterative (Customized) An SMETHOD case control referencing the ID of an ITER bulk data entry is written to the
input deck. The ITER entry invokes the solver options. Those options are described in the
table below.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Iterative Option Description

Preconditioner Five preconditioners are available: Jacobi, Cholesky, Jacobi/Cholesky, and CASI. The CASI
is the element-based iterative solver. See the table above. All other preconditioners are the
matrix-based iterative solver. Various options are allowed for each as controlled by the user
interface. See the entries below. To use a default preconditioner based on the solution type,
set this to Analysis Default. Consult the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details as
to which defaults are used for each solution type.
Maximum Number of Leave this blank to accept the default. Otherwise specify the maximum number of iterations
Iterations allowed.
Diagonal Scaling The Jacobi and Cholesky preconditioners allow diagonal scaling.
Reduced Turn this toggle on to invoke the reduced incomplete Cholesky preconditioner as opposed to
just the incomplete Cholesky. This can be combined with or without diagonal scaling.
Block Turn this toggle on to invoke the block incomplete Cholesky preconditioner. You must
specify real or complex also.
Real / Complex This is only used for the block incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.
p-version For p-element analysis, you can turn this toggle on to invoke the Jacobi, Cholesky or
combined Cholesky/Jacobi preconditioner. This cannot be combined with any other
options.
Padding Specify the padding value for reduced incomplete Cholesky with any of its options. Leave
this blank to specify the defaults. Each option has its own default, therefore it is
recommended that you leave this blank.
Extraction Specify the extraction level for reduced or block incomplete Cholesky preconditioner. The
default is zero.
Geometric Progression Turn this toggle on if you wish to use geometric progression convergence criterion.
Epsilon This is a user-given convergence parameter. Default is 1e-6. If present, the solver will use
additional external convergence criterion. See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more
details. Blank this field out if only the internal convergence criterion is required.
Print Messages for each Off by default. Turn ON if you want more diagnostics for each iteration. Otherwise only
Iteration minimal messaging is given.
Terminate Early Turn this toggle ON if you want the run to terminate with only a resource estimation.
(Resource Estimate
Only)
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
DDAM Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 187 DDAM analysis subcase
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Spectrum Source Select File for a user-defined spectrum, or Coef for a DDAM style coefficient
equation. If you select File, a button appears to the right to let you select the file where
the spectrum is defined. If you select Coef, two other buttons appear:
Coef Source Select File for a user-written coefficient file, or Default to use the coefficients built
into the Fortran program. Note that the built-in coefficients we deliver in the program
are NOT the DDS-072 coefficients. If you use this option for a real DDAM analysis,
the Fortran file must be edited and recompiled. If you select File, a button appears to
the right to let you choose the file where the coefficient data is stored.
F(x) Type Choices are NRL 1396 and DDS 072. This option toggles between the old NRL
1396 style equations, and the current DDS-072 style equations used for DDAM.
Coefficient Options
 Ship Type Select Surface or Submerged
 Mount Location Choice of Deck, Hull, or Shell.
 Elastic/Plastic Select Elastic or Plastic. Choosing Plastic uses the Elastic/Plastic coefficients; Elastic
uses the elastic coefficients.
Weight Cutoff Default uses the default value compiled into the PCL code, which is 80%. If you
choose Enter Value the text box becomes available and you can enter a percentage
manually. The number entered is the percentage, not the fraction, so 100% of the
modal mass is entered as 100.
Minimum G Level If you select N/A, no minimum G value is used. If you enter a value, all modal
accelerations below the minimum are set to the minimum.
Fore/Aft Axis It is necessary to have the model oriented orthogonal to a global cartesian axis system,
although not necessarily in one particular orientation. This toggle identifies which
global axis is to be interpreted as Fore/Aft.
Vertical Axis This identifies the axis that is in the vertical direction.
Modal Analysis
 Number of Desired Roots These are the limits that control the eigenvalue analysis and are the values from the
 Lower Nastran EIGRL entry. ND is the number of desired roots, V1 is the lower frequency
limit, V2 is the upper frequency limit. For the effects of using one of more of these,
 Upper see the EIGRL section of the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters

the solution type is Explicit Nonlinear. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Work Tolerance Defines BCTABLE. Similar to SOL 600 - Implicit Nonlinear

Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the
analysis.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Frequency Range of Interest Selects the highest and lowest natural frequency values to be extracted
Degree of Freedom to Determine the Selects which Degrees of Freedom are used to determine the peaks
Peaks
Output Interval Selects the output interval of accelerations, velocities, or displacements of
the eigenvalues
Type of Response The “Type of Response” menu specifies whether Acceleration, Velocity,
or Displacement response will be used to select the modes.
Degrees of Freedom Selects which Degrees of Freedom to be in the eigenvectors (3 for
translations only, 6 for translations and rotations
Method of Normalization The “Method of Normalization” menu specifies the method used to
normalize the eigenvectors
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Contact Table
A contact table is used to control the behavior of contact bodies and to activate or deactivate, or in some cases,
remove contact bodies from the analysis. This form defines the BCTABLE entry.
Additional Data... Additional Contact Data for Explicit Nonlinear.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Additional Contact Data

This subordinate form defines additional contact data for Explicit Nonlinear.
Main Index
Subcase Parameters
Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing

Support has been added for adaptive mesh post-processing for airbag analysis.
Below is an adapted mesh model as read in from the DBALL file and stored using offset ID’s in separate
groups. The user can then select one or more time increments from the Quick Plot Results menu for post-
processing. The Quick Plot algorithm pulls up the mesh associated with the increment(s) selected for post-
processing. Using this method a user can do a pseudo-animation to show the progression of the analysis. The
model is loaded by a cylindrical rigid pin with a 200 lb load at the center.
Additional Information
The following is also now supported for SOL 700 jobs:
 Additional Properties
• PBEAM71
• BPEAMD
• PBELTD
• PELAS1
• PLPLANE
• PLSOLID
• PSHELL1
• PSHELLD
• PSPRMA
 GUI for time domain NVH
Main Index
Output Requests
 Many additional materials
Output Requests
This allows the definition of what data is desired from the analysis code in the form of results. For most
solution sequences, the form consists of two formats: Basic and Advanced. The Basic form retains the
simplicity of being able to specify the output requests over the entire model and uses the default settings of
MSC Nastran Case Control commands. There is a special set defined in Patran called ALL FEM. This set
represents all nodes and elements associated with Object defined on the Analysis Form, 259. This default set is
used for all output requests in the Basic Output Requests, 450 form.
The Advanced version of this form allows the user to vary these default options. Since output requests have
to be appropriate to the type of analysis, the form changes depending on the solution sequence. The Advanced
Output Requests, 451 also adds the capability of being able to associate a given output request to a subset of the
model using Patran groups. This capability can be used effectively in significantly reducing the results that
are created for a model, optimizing the sizes and translation times of output files. The creation of Patran
groups are documented in Group>Create (p. 226) in the Patran Reference Manual.
The results types that will be brought into Patran due to any of these requests, are documented in Supported
OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 540. In that chapter, tables are presented that correlate the MSC Nastran
results block, and the Patran primary and secondary results labels with the various output requests.
Note: Many of the output requests that can be defined on the Output Request forms currently apply
only to the printed values in the MSC Nastran output file; these result quantities cannot be
imported and postprocessed in Patran. For guidance on specific quantities, review Supported
OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities, 540.
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that differ from those results
available with other solution sequences. A detailed discussion of the stress and strain measures for SOL 600
is given in Stress and Strain Measures for Nonlinear Analysis (Ch. 2) in the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL
600) User’s Guide.
Main Index
Output Requests
Basic Output Requests

This form is used to select output requests with their default options. The set is always All FEM, which means
results for all nodes or elements in the model. A default set of output requests is always preselected.
Main Index
Output Requests
Table 3-52
Solution Sequence The available output requests depend on the active Solution Sequence as
indicated by this value.
Form Type This option menu is used to switch between the advanced and basic
versions of this form.
Select Result Type This listbox displays the appropriate result types that may be selected for
the solution sequence indicated at the top of the form. The output
requests are selected one at a time by clicking.
Output Requests This listbox displays the selected output requests for the subcase shown at
the top of the form.
Delete The Delete button deletes the output request highlighted in the Output
Requests listbox.
TITLE, SUBTITLE and The TITLE, SUBTITLE and LABEL are written to the MSC Nastran
LABEL output file.
Note: The OK button accepts the output requests and closes the form. The Defaults button deletes all
output requests and replaces them with defaults. The Cancel button closes the form without saving the
output requests.
Advanced Output Requests

This form provides great flexibility in creating output requests. Output requests may be associated with
different groups (SET options in MSC Nastran) as well as different superelements1. The output requests
available depend on the chosen Solution Types, 269, Solution Parameters, 276, and Translation Parameters, 263 . The
Advanced Output Requests form is sensitive to the Result Type selected. The Form Type, Delete, OK,
Defaults, and Cancel buttons operate exactly like on the Basic Output Requests, 450 form.
1At the present time, superelement specifications are allowed only in the structured linear static solution
type (Solution Sequence 101).
Main Index
Output Requests
A description of the output requests and their associated options are listed in Table 3-54 and Table 3-55.
Main Index
Output Requests
Table 3-53
Select Result Type Use this listbox to select the result type to be created.
Output Requests Use this list box to select output requests that are to be modified or
deleted.
Select Group(s)/SET This listbox is used to select the group to which the output requests relate.
Tensor / Element Points / These are the options that are appropriate to the highlighted result type.
Plane Strain Curv They also indicate the options that were selected for a highlighted output
request. See Table 3-1.
Composite Plate Opt This databox appears for SOL 101 and 103 when the model contains p-
elements. Other options will be presented, such as Percent of Step Output
and Intermediate Output Options depending on conditions listed in
Table 3-2.
State Variables To fully support submittal of Nastran with UDS for SOL 400, the
specification of state variables is necessary. Use this section to specify the
state variables.
Table 3-54 Output Request Descriptions

Case Control Command or Bulk
Output Request Data Entry Description
Accelerations ACCELERATION Requests nodal accelerations.
Acoustic Intensity INTENSITY Requests acoustic intensity for external acoustics
analysis (frequency response).
Acoustic Power ACPOWER Requests acoustic power radiated from surface for
external acoustics analysis (frequency response).
Acoustic Field Point Mesh ACFPMRESULT Requests acoustic field point mesh results for
external acoustics analysis (frequency response).
You are given a list of all acoustic field point
meshes defined and groups with nodes. Each one
selected is translated into its own BEGIN AFPM
section in the bulk data.
Acoustic Velocities VELOCITY Requests nodal velocities. This is for acoustic
velocities at the node points of Field Point Mesh.
Applied Loads OLOAD Requests equivalent nodal applied loads.
Constraint Forces SPCFORCES Requests forces of single- point constraints.
Main Index
Output Requests
Table 3-54 Output Request Descriptions (continued)

Case Control Command or Bulk
Output Request Data Entry Description
Contact Results BOUTPUT Requests contact regions for output.
Displacements DISPLACEMENT Requests nodal displacements.
Eigenvectors VECTOR Requests nodal eigenvectors.
Element Forces FORCE Requests elemental forces.
Element Strain Energies ESE Requests elemental strain energies and energy
densities. No options are allowed with this
output request.
Element Strains STRAIN Requests elemental strains.
Element Stress Discontinuity ELSDCON Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on
element stresses.
Element Stresses STRESS Requests elemental stresses.
Fatigue Life* FATIGUE Requests fatigue damage and life output
Grid Point Force Balance GPFORCE Requests grid point force balance at nodes.
Sorting and format options are not allowed with
this request.
Grid Point Stress GPSDCON Requests mesh stress discontinuities based on
Discontinuities grid point stresses.
Grid Point Stresses GPSTRESS Requests stresses at grid points.
MultiPoint Constraint Forces MPCFORCES Requests forces of multipoint constraints (for
versions 68 or higher).
Nonlinear Applied Loads NLLOAD Requests equivalent nonlinear applied loads.
Sorting and format options are not allowed with
this request.
Nonlinear Stress NLSTRESS Requests the form and type of nonlinear
element stress output.
Velocities VELOCITY Requests nodal velocities.
* In order to run a successful MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis, an S-N or ε-N constitutive model (or both)
must be defined for the elements of interest (see Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN), Spot Weld (Top and Bottom Sheet), Seam Weld
(Stiff and Flexible), 91). An output request for fatigue life must be made as described here. An fatigue analysis must be turned
ON when setting up the analysis (see Solution Parameters, 276 for Linear Static, Normal Modes, Transient Response, or
Frequency Response). And cyclic loading must be defined (see Subcase Select, 486). For more detail on how to set up and
perform a fatigue, please see the MSC Nastran Fatigue Analysis User’s Guidefor time domain SOLutions 101/103/112 or MSC
Nastran Embedded Vibration Fatigue User’s Guide for frequency domain solutions SOLs 108 and 111. For details on the
FATIGUE case control, please see the FATIGUE (Case) (p. 348) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Main Index
Output Requests
Table 3-55 Output Request Form Options

Multiple
Case Control or Select
Options Label Bulk Data Options Groups Allowed Descriptions
Sorting By Node/ SORT1 Elements No Output is presented as tabular
listing of nodes/elements for each
Element load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time.
By Frequency/ SORT2 Elements No Output is presented as tabular
listing of frequency or time for each
Time node or element.
Format Rectangular REAL Elements No Requests real and imaginary format
for complex output.
Polar PHASE Elements No Requests magnitude and phase
format for complex output.
Tensor Von Mises VONMISES Elements No Requests von Mises stresses or
strains.
Maximum MAXS Elements No Requests Maximum shear or
Shear Octahedral stresses or strains.
Element Cubic CUBIC Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains
Points at the corner grid points as well as
the center using the strain gage
approach with cubic bending
correction.
Corner CORNER Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains
at the corner grid points as well as
the center.
Center CENTER Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains
at the center only.
Strain Gage SGAGE Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains
the center using the strain gage
approach.
Bilinear BILIN Elements No Requests QUAD4 stresses or strains
the center using bilinear
extrapolation.
Main Index
Output Requests
Table 3-55 Output Request Form Options (continued)

Multiple
Composite Element NOCOMPS= -1, Elements: No Composite element ply stresses and
Plate Stresses LSTRN = 0 in Surfaces failure indices are suppressed.
Options Bulk Data Element stresses for the equivalent
homogeneous element are output.
Ply Stresses NOCOMPS=1,LS Elements: No Composite element ply stresses and
TRN = 0 in Bulk Surfaces failure indices are output. Model
Data should contain PCOMP entry
defining composites.
Composite Ply Strains NOCOMPS=1,LS Elements: No Composite element ply strains and
Plate TRN = 1 in Bulk Surfaces failure indices are output. Model
Options Data should contain PCOMP entry
defining composites.
Ply Element NOCOMPS=0,LS Elements: No Composite element ply stresses and
Stresses TRN=0 in Bulk Surfaces failure indices as well as Element
Data stresses for the equivalent
Model should contain PCOMP
entry defining composites.
Element and NOCOMPS=0,LS Elements: No Composite element ply strains and
Ply Strains TRN=1 in Bulk Surfaces failure indices as well as Element
Data stresses for the equivalent
Model should contain PCOMP
entry defining composites.
Plate Strain Plane Curv. STRCUR Elements: No This option is available for Element
Options Surfaces Strains output requests only. Strains
and curvatures are output at the
reference plane for plate elements.
Fiber FIBER Elements: No This option is available for Element
Surfaces Strains output requests only. Strains
at locations Z1 and Z2 (specified
under element properties) are
output at the reference plane for
plate elements.
Main Index
Output Requests

Multiple
Sorting By Node SORT1 Nodes No Output is presented as tabular
/Element Elements listing of nodes/elements for each
load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time.
By Frequency/ SORT2 Nodes No Output is presented as tabular
Time Elements listing of frequency or time for each
node or element.
By Event SORT2 Elements No For fatigue analysis only - lists
results or each load event for each
element in output file (F06),
otherwise (SORT1) the list is for all
elements of each event.
Format Rectangular REAL Nodes No Requests real and imaginary format
for complex output.
Polar PHASE Nodes No Requests magnitude and phase
format for complex output.
Output Coord COORD CID Elements: Yes Selects the output coordinate frame
Coordinate for grid point stress output. Coord 0
Surfaces, is the basic coordinate frame.
Volumes
Volume Both Blank Elements:V Yes Requests direct stress, principal
Output olumes stresses, direction cosines, mean
pressure stress and von Mises
equivalent stresses to be output.
Principal PRINCIPAL Elements:V Yes Requests principal stresses, direction
olumes cosines, mean pressure stress and
von Mises equivalent stresses to be
output.
Direct DIRECT Elements:V Yes Requests direct stress, mean pressure
olumes stress and von Mises equivalent
stresses to be output.
Fiber All FIBER, ALL Elements: Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will
Surfaces be output at all fibre locations, that
is at Z1, Z2 and the reference plane.
Z1 and Z2 distances are specified as
element properties (default Z1=-
thickness/2, Z2= +thickness/2).
Main Index
Output Requests

Multiple
Fiber Mid FIBER, MID Elements: Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will
Surfaces be output at the reference plane.
Z1 FIBER, Z1 Elements: Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will
Surfaces be output at distance Z1 from the
reference plane (default Z1=-
thickness/2).
Z2 FIBER, Z2 Elements: Yes Specifies that grid point stresses will
Surfaces be output at distance Z2 from the
reference plane (default
Z2=+thickness/2).
Normal X1 NORMAL X1 Elements: Yes Specifies the x-axis of the output
Surfaces, coordinate frame to be the reference
direction for the positive fiber and
shear stress output.
X2 NORMAL X2 Elements: Yes Specifies the y-axis of the output
Surfaces coordinate frame to be the reference
X3 NORMAL X3 Elements: Yes Specifies the z-axis of the output
Surfaces coordinate frame to be the reference
Method Topological TOPOLOGI-CAL Elements: Yes Specifies the topological method for
Surfaces calculating average grid point
stresses. This is the default.
Geometric GEOMETRIC Elements: Yes Specifies the geometric
Surfaces interpolation method for
calculating average grid point
stresses. This method should be
used when there are large differences
in slope between adjacent elements.
X-axis of X1 AXIS, X1 Elements: Yes Specifies that the x-axis of the
Basic Coord Surfaces output coordinate frame should be
used as the x-output axis and the
local x-axis when geometric
interpolation method is used.
Main Index
Output Requests

Multiple
X-axis of X2 AXIS, X2 Elements: Yes Specifies that the y-axis of the
Basic Coord Surfaces output coordinate frame should be
X3 AXIS, X3 Elements: Yes Specifies that the z-axis of the
Surfaces output coordinate frame should be
Branch Break BREAK Elements: Yes Treats multiple element
Surfaces intersections as stress discontinuities
in the geometric interpolation
method.
No Break NOBREAK Elements: Yes Does not treat multiple element
Surfaces intersections as stress discontinuities
in the geometric interpolation
method.
Tolerance 0.0 TOL=0.0 Elements: Yes Defines the tolerance to be used for
Surfaces interelement slope differences.
Slopes beyond this tolerance will
signify discontinuous stresses.
Percent of 100 NOi Field of All Once per An integer ‘n’ that specifies the
Step Output TSTEP and subcase percentage of intermediate outputs
TSTEPNL entry to be presented for transient and
nonlinear transient analyses.
Adaptive 0 BY = n on p-elements Once per An integer ‘n’ that requests
Cycle OUTPUT Bulk subcase intermediate outputs for each nth
Output Data entry adaptive cycle. For n=0, only the last
Interval adaptive cycle results are output.
This is available for SOLs 101 and
103 for versions 68 and higher.
Main Index
Output Requests

Multiple
Intermediate Yes INTOUT field of All Once per Intermediate outputs are requested
Output NLPARM Bulk subcase for every computed load increment.
Options Data entry Applicable for nonlinear static
solution type only.
No INTOUT field of All Once per Intermediate outputs are requested
NLPARM Bulk subcase for the last load of the subcase.
Data entry Applicable for nonlinear static
solution type only.
All INTOUT field of All Once per Intermediate outputs are requested
NLPARM Bulk subcase for every computed and user-
Data entry specified load increment. Applicable
for nonlinear static solution type
only.
Suppress N/A Specifies PLOT All Yes Print to the .f06 file is suppressed for
Print for option instead of the result type when this is selected.
Result Type PRINT on the
Case Control
Output request
entry.
Output Print Specifies PRINT All Yes The printer will be the output
Device on a Case Control medium for the .f06 file.
Options request entry, e.g.
DISPL.
Punch Specifies PUNCH All Yes The punch file will be the output
on a Case Control medium.
request entry, e.g.
DISPL.
Both Specifies both All Yes The printer and punch file will be
PRINT and the output medium.
PUNCH.
Main Index
Output Requests

Multiple
State To fully support submittal of
Variables Nastran with UDS for SOL 400,
the specification of state variables is
necessary. Use this section to specify
the state variables.
Number of State Variables Text box to enter the number of
state variables.
State Variable Name Text box to enter the name of the
selected state variable.
Data Spreadsheet displaying the state
variables and their names.
Type of These four are used for FATIGUE output requests only.
include data
Property Sets: The first list box allows you to select property sets that have stress-life or strain-life
Select
material constitutive models associated with them for inclusion in a fatigue analysis. These will be
Property
written to a standard Nastran SET4 entry.
Set(s)
Select Groups: The first list box allows you to groups containing elements for inclusion in a fatigue analysis.
Elements to These will be written to a standard Nastran SET1 entry.
Exclude
The second list box allows you to select individual elements to exclude from a fatigue analysis as defined
Additional
in a Patran group. These are written to a SET1 entry. Both the SET4 and SET1 are then referenced on
Output FIle
a FTGDEF bulk data entry that is called out by the FATIGUE case control output request.
Formats
Additional output file types besides the standard MSC Nastran MASTER/DBALL files can be requested
such as CSV file, a Patran results file (FEF) or an MSC Fatigue FER file. This is done directly on the
FATIGUE case control.
Main Index
Output Requests
Edit Output Requests Form

Use this form to edit the outputs request associated with selected subcases. To access this form, select the
Output Requests button on the Subcases form with the Action set to Global Data.
Select Group(s)/SET Inactive (greyed out) until a subcase label (column 1) is selected. When
this button is selected, the top half of the form will become inactive, and
the default output request function (named
user_change_default_out_req) will be called. This will load user defined
defaults or the system defined defaults if user ones do not exist.
Options Selecting the Default button when a single cell is selected resets the
selected output request to its default setting.
Main Index
Output Requests
Row Labels The row labels for the spreadsheet are the selected subcases from the
parent form. The Output Requests for each subcase are stored in cells of
the spreadsheet.
Clear Cell(s) Clears the selected cells. You can select individual cells, multiple cells in
a column, entire columns, or entire rows.
Cancel Closes the form and saves the selected changes. To apply the new output
requests, you must select Apply on the parent Subcases/Global Data
form.
Table 3-56
Select Group(s)/SET Inactive (greyed out) until a subcase label (column 1) is selected. When
this button is selected, the top half of the form will become inactive, and
the default output request function (named
user_change_default_out_req) will be called. This will load user defined
defaults or the system defined defaults if user ones do not exist.
Options Selecting the Default button when a single cell is selected resets the
selected output request to its default setting.
Row Labels The row labels for the spreadsheet are the selected subcases from the
parent form. The Output Requests for each subcase are stored in cells of
the spreadsheet.
Clear Cell(s) Clears the selected cells. You can select individual cells, multiple cells in a
column, entire columns, or entire rows.
Cancel Closes the form and saves the selected changes. To apply the new output
requests, you must select Apply on the parent Subcases/Global Data form.
Notes:
 The Edit Output Requests form opens with focus in the first result type of the first subcase.
 The top half of the Edit Output Requests form is similar to the Advanced Output Request form.
 The spreadsheet column labels are the result types for the current solution type.
 Putting focus in a cell causes the top half of the form to reflect the current setting, just like the
current advanced output request form. This means that the databox RESULT TYPE: gets updated
with the result type of the currently selected cell. The OUTPUT REQUESTS: databox is also
updated to show the actual content of the cell.
 If a cell is initially empty, selecting it will cause the top half of the form to display the appropriate
default setting for the selected result type (i.e., column).
Main Index
Output Requests
 Selecting a column header will allow you to change all subcase output requests of a particular type.
The top half of the Edit Output Requests form will set to the default request of the particular result
type.
 When you select a set of contiguous column cells, the top half of the form will configure to the
upper most selected cell.
 You cannot select multiple columns.
Default Output Request Information

In order to make use of this feature you need to create a PCL file that contains the function
user_change_default_out_req which overwrites the existing default file in Patran. This new PCL file
needs to be compiled and then the resulting library (.plb) needs to be loaded into Patran. This can be done
using the p3midilog.pcl or the p3epilog.pcl file.
The user_change_default_out_req function makes use of the mscn_user_add_out_req and the
mscn_user_del_out_req functions to add and delete default Output Request types. These two functions
are defined as follows:
mscn_user_add_out_req (or_num, or_value)
Description:
This function adds either a specified version or a default version of an Output Request type to the list of
default Output Requests.
Input:
INTEGER or_num The OR number of the output request type to add (See Table 3-3).
STRING or_value The value of the selected output request type. Blank implies the
default value.
mscn_user_del_out_req (or_num)
Description:
This function deletes the specified Output Request type from the list of default Output Requests.
Input:
INTEGER or_num The OR number of the Output Request type to delete (See Table 3-3).
Code Sample
FUNTION user_change_default_out_req(sol_seq)
INTEGER sol_seq
IF (sol_seq == 101 || sol_seq == 106) THEN
/* This will add this version of the Output Request type to the list
of default */
/* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */
mscn_user_add_out_req (4,”MPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=ALL FEM”)
Main Index
Output Requests
/* This will add the default version of these Output Request types
from the list */
/* of default Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */
mscn_user_add_out_req (10,“ ”)
mscn_user_add_out_req (6,“ ”)
/* This will delete these Output Request types from the list of
default */
/* Output Requests for solution 101 and 106. */
mscn_user_del_out_req (1)
END IF
END FUNCTION
The following is a table that shows the current predefined default Output Requests (those marked with an
X) and the allowed options (those marked with an O) for the various solution sequences.
SOL Result ID (or Number)

Seq. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
101 x x x o o o o o o o o o o o o x o
103 o o x o o o o o o o x o
105 x o x o o o o o o o o x
106 x x x o o o o o x
107 o o x o o o x
108 x o x o o o o o o o
109 x o x o o o o o o o o o
110 o o x o o o x
112 x o x o o o o o o o o o o
114 x x x o o o o o o o x o o
115 o o x o o o o o o o
153 o o o o o o x x o o
159 o o o o o o x x o o o o
400 x x
600 x
700 x o x o o o o o o o x
1 = Displacement, 2 = stress, 3 = spcforces, 4 = mpcforces, 5 = forces, 6 = oload, 7 = nlload, 8 = ese, 9 =

strain, 10 = gpstress, 11 = velocity, 12 = acceleration, 13 = gpforce, 14 = gpsdcon, 15 = elsdcon, 16 = vector,
Main Index
Output Requests
17 = thermal, 18 = flux, 19 = ht_oload, 20 = ht_spcforces, 21 =enthalpy, 22 = hdot, 23=nlstress,

24=bccontact, 25=fatigue
OR # Default Value
1 DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
2 STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=All FEM;PARAM,NOCOMPS,-1
3 SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
4 MPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
5 FORCE(SORT1,REAL,BILIN)=All FEM
6 OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
7 NLLOAD=All FEM
8 ESE=All FEM
9 STRAIN(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,STRCUR,BILIN)=All FEM
10 GPSTRESS=All FEM; VOLUME # SET,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET #,FIBRE
ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL,BRANCH BREAK
11 VELOCITY(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
12 ACCELERATION(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
13 GPFORCE=All FEM
14 GPSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET
#,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK
15 ELSDCON=All FEM; VOLUME # SET #,PRINCIPAL,SYSTEM Coord 0; SURFACE # SET
#,FIBRE ALL,SYSTEM Coord 0, AXIS X1,NORMAL R, TOPOLOGICAL 0.,BRANCH BREAK
16 VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=All FEM
17 THERMAL=(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
18 FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
19 OLOAD(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
20 SPCFORCES(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
21 ENTHALPY(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
22 HDOT(SORT1,PRINT)=All FEM
23 NLSTRESS
24 BCCONTACT
25 FATIGUE
Main Index
Output Requests
Note: In SOL 109, 112 & 159 will have SORT2 as the default in some versions of Patran.
Subcases Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries into the Case Control section for the defined subcase.

FMS Write To Input Deck Directly entered entries may potentially conflict with those created by the
interface. Writing these entries to the file can be controlled with this toggle.
OK Saves the current setting and data for the four sections and closes the form.
Clear Clears the current form.
Reset Resets the form back to the data values it had at the last OK.
Cancel Resets all four forms back to its previous value and closes the form.
Main Index
Output Requests
SOL 600 Output Requests

This subform defines the output data for a SOL 600 analysis subcase

Echo Marc Input File Produces an echo of the input file.
Results in Marc Print File Writes results to a print file.
Results (POST) File Options
 Increments between Writing Results Defines the number of increments between writing results to the MSC
Nastran results file after the first increment of the analysis. The default is one
(1) for every increment.
Note: You can select a fixed number of increments of output on the subcase
parameters-load increments parameters form.
 Select Nodal Results... Brings up a subform for selecting nodal results
 Select Element Results... Brings up a subform for selecting elemental results.
Output requests for all subcases.
Main Index
Output Requests
Select Nodal Results

This subform controls which nodal result quantities are returned from the analysis.

Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers in
parentheses are the MSC.Marc POST code numbers, that will be specified
on the MARCOUT entry
Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned in the
analysis.
Main Index
Output Requests
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural nonlinear analysis.
Nodal Result Postcode Default(?)

DISPLACEMENT 1 YES
ROTATION 2 no
EXTERNAL FORCE 3 no
EXTERNAL MOMENT 4 no
REACTION FORCE 5 YES
REACTION MOMENT 6 no
PORE PRESSURE 23 no
VELOCITY 28 no
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY 29 no
ACCELERATION 30 no
ROTATIONAL ACCELERATION 31 no
MODAL MASS 32 no
ROTATION MODAL MASS 33 no
CONTACT NORMAL STRESS 34 no
CONTACT NORMAL FORCE 35 no
FRICTION STRESS 36 no
FRICTION FORCE 37 no
CONTACT STATUS 38 no
CONTACT TOUCHED BODY 39 no
HERRMANN VARIABLE 40 no
POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 no
POST CODE, No. -22 -21 thru -23 no
POST CODE, No. -31 -31 no
Main Index
Output Requests
Note: The POST CODE (<0) are for user-defined quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO.
Element Output Requests

This subform controls which element result quantities are returned from the MSC.Marc analysis.
Main Index
Output Requests

Available Result Types Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers in
parentheses are the MSC.Marc POST code numbers.
Selected Result Types Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned in the
analysis.
Element X-section Results Defines the number of layer points to use through the cross section of
homogeneous shells, plates and beams. This number must be odd if not a
composite.
Note: If no changes are made to the default output requests, no MARCOUT entry will be written and MSC
Nastran will determine the appropriate output. The following table shows
the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural nonlinear analysis.
Elemental Result Postcode Solutions Default(?)

STRAIN, TOTAL COMPONENTS 301 nonlinear only YES
STRAIN, TOTAL COMPONENTS 461 nonlinear only no
(defined system)
STRAIN, ELASTIC COMPONENTS 401 any no
STRAIN, ELASTIC COMPONENTS 421 any no
(global system)
STRAIN, ELASTIC EQUIVALENT 127 any no
STRAIN, PLASTIC COMPONENTS 321 nonlinear only no
STRAIN, PLASTIC COMPONENTS 431 nonlinear only no
(global system)
STRAIN, PLASTIC EQUIVALENT 27 nonlinear only no
STRAIN, PLASTIC EQUIVALENT 7 nonlinear only no
(from rate)
STRAIN, CRACKING COMPONENTS 381 nonlinear only no
STRAIN, CREEP COMPONENTS 331 creep only no
STRAIN, CREEP COMPONENTS 441 creep only YES
(global system)
STRAIN, CREEP EQUIVALENT 37 creep only no
STRAIN, CREEP EQUIVALENT 8 creep only no
(from rate)
STRAIN, THERMAL 371 any no
STRAIN, THICKNESS 49 any no
STRAIN, VELOCITY 451 nonlinear only no
Main Index
Output Requests

STRESS, COMPONENTS 311 any no
STRESS, COMPONENTS 391 an no
(defined system)
STRESS, COMPONENTS 411 any YES
(global system)
STRESS, EQUIVALENT YIELD 59 nonlinear only no
STRESS, EQUIVALENT MISES 17 any no
STRESS, MEAN NORMAL 18 any no
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR SHEAR No. 108 any no
1
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR SHEAR No. 109 any no
2
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR 501,511 any no
COMPONENTS
STRESS, CAUCHY COMPONENTS 341 nonlinear only no
STRESS, CAUCHY EQUIVALENT 47 nonlinear only no
STRESS, HARMONIC COMPONENTS 351 (real) harmonic only no
361(imag)
STRESS, REBAR UNDEFORMED 471 any no
STRESS, REBAR DEFORMED 481 any no
FORCES, ELEMENT 264-269 any no
BIMOMENT 270 any no
STRAIN RATE, PLASTIC 28 nonlinear only no
STRAIN RATE, EQUIVALENT 175 any no
VISCOPLASTIC
STATE VARIABLE, SECOND 29 any no
STATE VARIABLE, THIRD 39 any no
TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT TOTAL 9 any no
TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT 10 any no
INCREMENTAL
STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, TOTAL 48 nonlinear only no
STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, ELASTIC 58 any no
STRAIN ENERGY DENSITY, PLASTIC 68 nonlinear only no
THICKNESS, ELEMENT 20 any no
VOLUME, ELEMENT 78 any no
VOLUME, VOID FRACTION 177 any no
Main Index
Output Requests

GRAIN SIZE 79 any no
FAILURE, INDEX No. 1-7 91-103 any no
DENSITY, RELATIVE 179 any no
POST CODE, No. 19 19 any no
POST CODE, No. 38 38 any no
POST CODE, No. -11 -11 thru -16 any no
POST CODE, No. -21 -21 thru -23 any no
POST CODE, No. -31 -31 any no
DDAM Output Requests

The output requests form has been altered for the DDAM solution. Because the program performs an NRL
sum and has no explicit constraints, only a few result quantities are available:
Nodal Results:
Displacement
Velocity
Accelerations
Element Results:
Stress
Force
The results reported in the .f06 file are printed sequentially, first x-shock results, then y, then z, but all are
labeled as TIME = 0.000000E+00. To differentiate these in the file, there is a small header printer
prior to the results for each shock direction that looks something like this:
^^^
^^^ ***************************************
^^^
^^^ SUMMED MODAL RESPONSES IN X-DIRECTION
^^^
^^^ ***************************************
^^^
If you need to find the start of the X-shock results, search for X-DIRECTION to find this header and proceed
from there.
It is necessary to specify that Patran calculate the combined stresses on a mode-by-mode basis, and NRL sum
the combined results. See Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187) (Ch. 4).
Main Index
Output Requests
Mode by Mode Output

You can use the Direct Text Input section of Patran Analysis forms to obtain more data. Using the parameters
XBYMODE, YBYMODE and ZBYMODE you can get mode by mode data for the selected direction. To
get this data, enter the following lines into the Bulk Data direct text area:
PARAM,XBYMODE,YES
PARAM,YBYMODE,YES
PARAM,ZBYMODE,YES
You can select one or more of these parameters. Keep in mind that this generates a lot of data for an analysis
with a lot of modes, and that you must have an output request for the corresponding data – e.g., if you want
mode-by-mode displacements, you must have a DISPLACEMENT request as chosen above.
Each of these parameters outputs the data to the .f06 file if you have the (PRINT) option on, or an .op2 file
if the (PLOT) option is on. Both are on by default when you specify something like:
DISPLACEMENT = ALL
Alternately,
DISPLACEMENT(PLOT) = ALL
DISPLACEMENT(PRINT) = ALL
plots or prints the results. If unassigned, the mode-by-mode results outputs to generic Fortran files (like
fort.42), so it is necessary to add an ASSIGN statement to the file if you wish to have these files named
appropriately. To do this, use the FMS section in the Direct Text Input form, and add lines like:
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’jobname_mbmx.op2’, UNIT=41, DELETE
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’jobname_mbmy.op2’, UNIT=42, DELETE
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=’jobname_mbmz.op2’, UNIT=43, DELETE
In the .f06 file, the mode-by-mode results are labeled with their own header prior to the section:
^^^
^^^ **************************************************
^^^
^^^ INDIVIDUAL SCALED MODAL RESPONSES IN Y-DIRECTION
^^^
^^^ **************************************************
^^^
Since the mode-by-mode velocities and accelerations are calculated by multiplying the displacements by the
frequency (omega and omega2), MSC Nastran labels them as Eigenvectors. If you ask for displacement,
velocity, and acceleration for three modes, you will find nine Eigenvectors in the .f06 file with repeating
frequencies – the first three (1-3) are displacements, the next three (4-6) velocities, and the last three (7-9)
the accelerations. The .op2 files are similar, reporting the three as Eigenvectors with repeating frequencies.
The magnitude of the values should be a clue as to what you are looking at for all but the lowest frequencies.
The Fortran Driver File (jobname.ddd)
Main Index
Output Requests
Some of the options you choose on the Subcase Parameters form are written to an external file that is read by
the Fortran file when it calculates the spectrum. While you do not have the ability to edit this file when using
MSC.FEA, the file is a hardcopy ASCII record of what options were used when running the DDAM analysis.
The file is small and has just a few lines that comprise the answers to questions that the ddam.exe program
asks if it is run interactively. File Format (varies depending on chosen options on the first record)
Record 1
(user spectrum file) (user coef file) (DDS-072 format)
user spectrum file= T (use a user defined spectrum)
= F (use coefficients)
user coef file = T (use an external coefficient file)
= F (use the coefficients compiled into the Fortran)
DDS-072 format = T (use DDS-072 style equations)
= F (use NRL 1396 style equations)
Record 1a (if either file option on record 1 was true)

filename
filename = name of either the spectrum file or coefficient file
Record 2 (if using coefficients)

nsurf nstruc nplast
ship type = 1 (surface ship equations)
= 2 (submarine equations)
mount location = 1 (file mounted equipment)
= 2 (hull mounted equipment)
elastic/plastic = 1 (use elastic factors)
= 2 (use elastic/plastic factors)
Record 3
pref
pref = 0.0 (use default cutoff in program)
= nnn.nn
Record 4
Ming
Ming = 0.0 (no minimum G)
= n.n (use this minimum G value)
Record 5
(F/A axis) (Vert axis)
Main Index
Output Requests
F/A axis = X (F/A is along the X axis)

= Y (F/A is along the Y axis)
= Z (F/A is along the Z axis)
Vert axis = X (Vertical is along the X axis)
= Y (Vertical is along the Y axis)
= Z (Vertical is along the Z axis)
Record 6
.f11 filename
.f11 filename = name of the .f11 file
Record 7
.f13 filename
.f13 filename = name of the .f13 file
Record 8
.ver filename
.ver filename = name of the modal verification file
Depending on the chosen options, the file will look like one of the following:
No special user options – coefficients from default source:
F F T
nsurf nstruc nplast
pref
ming
f/a_axis vert_axis
.f11 filename
.f13 filename
.ver filename
User coefficient option:
F T T
coef.dat filename
nsurf nstruc nplast
pref
ming
f/a_axis vert_axis
.f11 filename
Main Index
Select Explicit MPCs...
.f13 filename
.ver filename
User spectrum Option:
T F T
spec.dat filename
pref
ming
f/a_axis vert_axis
.f11 filename
.f13 filename
.ver filename
Note: Note that capitalization is required. The file is read free-format, so spacing is not important. A
sample file for a conventional analysis might look like:
F F T
1 1 1
100.
1.
X Z
d1.f11
d2.f11
d1.ver
Select Explicit MPCs...

The Explicit MPCs created in the Element menu can be selected for a given subcase. The highlight of selected
Explicit MPCs is supported when this form is displayed. The All MPCs toggle indicates that all the Explicit
MPCs already created or created later will be used for the subcase being created. The All MPCs toggle should
be turned OFF in order to select MPCs. ‘MPXADD SID’ is the ID used for identifying the selected MPCs
for the subcase.
Main Index
Non-Structural Mass Properties

MSC Nastran non-structural mass (NSM and NSML) are now supported in Patran.
Main Index
Note: NSM and NSML are used to define masses that affect the behavior of specific element types but are
not directly part of the structure of the model. NSM and NSML support: NSM and
Line Element Types Surface Element Types Property Types

CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CCONEAX, CQUAD4, CONROD, PBAR, PBARL,
CONROD, CROD, CTUBE CQUAD8, CQUADR, PBCOMP, PBEAM,
CRAC2D, CSHEAR, PBEAML, PBEND, PCOMP,
CTRIA3, CTRIA6, PCONEAX. PRAC2D, PROD,
CTRIAR PSHEAR, PSHELL, PTUBE
NSML forms are available through the Tools menu.
Selecting NSM Properties displays the NSM Properties form. NSM Properties forms are MSC Nastran
preference specific.
Main Index
NSM mass can be applied as Lumped or Distributed.

Distributed NSM For a distributed NSM, the mass is spread evenly over all of the elements in
the application region.
Lumped NSM For a lumped NSM, the applied mass is applied directly to each element in
the application region.
Main Index
Non-structural mass can be applied to elements or property sets.
Main Index
A Select form has been added to allow for the selection of NSM properties. Multiple sets of NSMs can be
defined in the model. Only the selected sets will be used in the analysis.
Main Index
Select NSM Properties...
The following examples display results of applying lumped and distributed NSMs.
A lumped mass value of 20 is applied to 10 A distributed mass value of 20 is applied to 10

elements elements.

This Subcases dependant form allows you to select the defined Nonstructural Mass sets. The Defined NSM
Sets box lists all defined Nonstructural Mass property sets. Since it is possible to have up to four property sets
with the same set name, the Distributed vs Lumped and Element vs Property attributes of the sets are listed
in columns to the left of the property set name.
Individual groupings of Nonstructural Mass property sets can be selected in the form and then applied with
the Apply button. By default, all of the listed Nonstructural Mass property sets are selected by the case control
code even if they are not shown as selected in the Defined NSM Sets box.
Groups of Nonstructual Mass properties can be excluded from an analysis by not including that specific
subcase in the analysis job. Individual Nonstructural Mass properties can be excluded from an analysis by
setting the applied mass for that property set to zero (0).
Main Index
This subform appears when the Select NSM Properties... button is selected from the Subcases form.
Main Index
Subcase Select
Subcase Select
This form appears when the Subcase Select button is selected on the Analysis form. This form is used to select
a sequence of subcases associated with an analysis job.
Main Index
Subcase Select

Subcases Displays all the available subcases for the current solution sequence. The
current solution sequence is displayed at the top of the form. For example,
SOL 101 subcases lc1, lc2, and lc3.
Subcases Selected: Displays all subcases that have been associated with the current job name.
For example, subcases lc1 and lc3 have been selected; for SOL 101 the Bulk
Data will contain two Case Control section SUBCASEs, SUBCASE 1 and
SUBCASE 2. For SOL 600 a single run will be performed with it having two
steps, lc1 and lc3. For optimization jobs, the solution type will be appended
at the beginning of the subcase name.
Define Fatigue Load Sequences... Allows you to define complex loading by combining subcases for MSC
Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis. See Define Fatigue Load Sequences, 490.
Main Index
Subcase Select

Select Steps for New Subcases For SOL 400, the Subcase Select form looks the same, except for the Select
Steps for New Subcase button is un-greyed (it is pickable). See Select Steps
for New Subcases (Step Creation), 504.
Note: First subcase for Contact Pair must be the same subcase that you have selected as the Initial
Contact Pair Loadcase.
Select Steps for New Subcases (Step Creation)

When the Select Steps for New Subcase button is used the following form appears.
For SOL 400, the user can select subcases just as in any other solution case, except there is one be difference.
SOL 400 differentiates between Load Steps and Subcases. A number of Load Steps make up a Subcase. The
list of Load Steps in the Selected Load Steps listbox shows you which Patran Subcases are designated as Load
Steps for the analysis. A subordinate form shows you which of those selected Load Steps are designated as the
first Load Steps in the Subcases to be run in the analysis. This is somewhat confusing terminology as it
conflicts with Patran's terminology of a Subcase. To help the user visualize the setup of Subcases versus Load
Steps, a tree widget is used to show the Subcases and which Load Stesp are selected for each Subcase. You can
interact with either the tree widget or the list boxes. On the tree widget, to add and delete Subcases or Load
Main Index
Subcase Select
Steps or to otherwise manipulate them, use the right mouse button after selecting a tree item.

Load Steps Selected: Notice that the selected steps (lc1, lc2, lc3, lc4, and lc5) match the selected
subcases of the parent form. This indicates that some or all of these steps can
be used in defining the new subcases. By selecting the steps lc1 and lc3,
under Steps Selected, the names are entered under New Subcase Starting
with Steps. This indicates that two subcases will be defined, “subcase_lc1”
and “subcase_lc3”.
New Subcase Starting with Steps: Displays the steps names that are to be used at the begining of the (new)
subcases to be created. The subcases that are defined are “subcase_lc1” with
steps lc1 and lc2, and “subcase_lc3” with steps lc3, lc4 and lc5:
 Subcase, “subcase_lc1”
• Steps: lc1, lc2
 Subcase, “subcase_lc3”
• Steps: lc3, lc4, lc5
Main Index
Subcase Select
Define Fatigue Load Sequences

This form is used for defining cyclic loading definitions and assembling them into load sequences, sometimes
called duty cycles, for an MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis.
In order to run a successful MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis, an S-N or ε-N constitutive material
model (or both) must be defined for the elements of interest (see Stress-Life (SN) and Strain Life (eN), Spot Weld
(Top and Bottom Sheet), Seam Weld (Stiff and Flexible), 91). An output request for fatigue life must be made (see
Output Requests, 449). An S-N or ε-N analysis must be turned on when setting up the analysis (see Solution
Parameters, 276 for Linear Static, Normal Modes, Frequency Response, or Transient Response). And a cyclic
loading sequence must be defined above the subcase level as described here.
All output from this form is defined on the FTGSEQ, FTGEVNT, and FTGLOAD bulk data entries. In
addition TABLFTG, TABRND1/RANDPS and/or UDNAME bulk data entries may also be defined. Only
a brief explanation is given here in the way of an example. For more detail on how to set up and perform an
MSC Nastran Embedded Fatigue analysis using Patran, please see the MSC Nastran Fatigue Analysis User’s
Guidefor time domain SOLutions 101/103/112. See the MSC Nastran Embedded Vibration Fatigue User’s
Guide for frequency domain solutions SOLs 108 and 111. For details on the above bulk data, please see the
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Time Domain SOLutions 101, 103, and 112
Main Index
Subcase Select
Frequency Domain SOLutions 108, and 111
All fatigue analyses must have some definition of the cyclic nature of the loading. This cyclic loading is
defined differently for each type of solution sequence, but the concept is the same. In general, the form is
used in this manner:
1. The type of load is selected using the switch.
2. The spreadsheet is filled out by activating a cell and then selecting the necessary information from the
widgets below to fill in the spread sheet cell. Once the selection is made the focus automatically goes
to the next cell.
3. Each layer of the spreadsheet represents a single loading event. Fill out the spreadsheets for each layer
as necessary. A spreadsheet with the first column left blank indicates the end of the defined events.
4. For time domain events, only one type of loading can be selected. For frequency domain events, each
event can be made up of multiple types of loading so make sure the spreadsheet for each load type for
a given event is filled in properly. Use the arrow buttons to advance to the required event (speadsheet
layer).
5. The left hand side of the form is used to define the load sequence(s), which is(are) a grouping or load
events. Use the Right Mouse Button (RMB) when selecting an item in the tree widget on the left hand
side of the form to create load sequences and add/remove/move events.
Main Index
Subcase Select
• Start by RMBclicking the top level (Load Sequences) and add a load sequence. This adds a child
to the parent tree widget.
• Then RMB click the newly created load sequence and add events. Events are added by selecting
them from the popup menu or from a subordinate form that appears to the right.
• You can edit attributes of the load sequences or load events using the RMB and selecting the edit
functionality. The attributes are changed from the ensuing form that appears.
Fatigue Load Sequences for time domain SOLs 101, 103, & 111
There are three (3) types of loading definitions possible and generally should not be mixed and in some cases
cannot be mixed:
Table 3-57 Time Domain Loading Types

Load Type Description
Time History Cyclic loading is defined in either a field definition or an
externally defined DAC formatted file. One field or file must be
designated as the cyclic load definition for each load input. For
example if a car has four (4) simultaneous input loads at each
wheel, a separate field or file describing the load must be
provided. Only applicable for SOL 101 (statics) and SOL 103
(normal modes).
Remote Paramater Control (RPC) This is identical to Time History method above for externally
provided DAC formatted files, except that only one RPC
formatted file (per load event) is provided that contains all the
loads (channels). The channel number must be provided to
designate which is the proper load to associate. Only applicable
for SOL 101 (statics) and SOL 103 (normal modes).
Constant Amplitued Simple constant amplitude loading is given by providing only the
(Block Loading) maximum and minimum values for each load. This method
cannot be mixed with the other two above. Only applicable for
SOL 101 (statics).
Fatigue Load Sequences for SOL 101 (statics)

For SOL 101, fatigue analysis is performed using a pseudo-static method where a load sequence is defined
consisting of various load events. Each load event is made up of a number of simultaneously acting loads. On
the form above, each load event is represented and defined on a layer of the spreadsheet above. Each event is
defined by associating a static subcase (from those selected on the Subcase Select form) with its time or cyclic
variation. The cyclic variation can be defined as a non-spatial field of time versus load. These fields are written
to the input deck as TABLFTG entries. Alternatively a DAC or RPC formatted file can also be specified
(these are the same files used by MSC Fatigue to define individual load variations). These are referenced on
a UDNAM bulk data entry. Each line of the spread sheet associates a static subcase to its cyclic variation
defined by a non-spatial field or an external DAC file or RPC file and channel number. Scale factors and
offsets can also be applied or max/min block loading can be specified. Clicking on a cell allows you to change
Main Index
Subcase Select
its contents by selecting from the appropriate widget when that cell is active. In the case of data, you will have
to press the enter key to get the data to be accepted in the spreadsheet.
Each layer of the spreadsheet can have its own load associations. Each layer represents a specific load event
made up of simultaneously acting loads. The arrow buttons move you up and down from layer to layer, each
representing one load event.
The left hand side of the form allows you to define the load sequence, which is the order in which the load
events occur. Use the right mouse button to perform actions such as creating, editing, deleting the load
sequences. For each load sequence defined and active, a separate fatigue analysis is performed. The right
mouse button commands allow you to add events to each sequence as required. An existing sequence can also
be considered as an individual event and added as an event to a sequence as long as the sequence does not call
itself. A sequence that is deactivated will not be written to the input deck. However if a deactivated sequence
is referenced in another active sequence, then it will be treated as an event and written to the input deck.
When editing a load sequence or adding events to a load sequence, a subordinate form appear to allow the
operation. The events themselves can be named directly on the spreadsheet widget. The load sequences can
be named via the edit command from the right hand mouse button click. When editing a load sequence you
can activate/deactivate it, change its name, and define the fatigue equivalent units. When adding events, the
number of repeats of the selected event can also be defined.
A Time History Manager is available if a proper MSC Nastran or MSC Fatigue installation are accessible by
Patran to allow you to view the DAC files. For non-spatial field definitions of the cyclic loading, use the Fields
application to create and view those.
As an example in the above form, that is visible, two (2) load sequences are created. The first load sequence
has three events in it called Speed Bumps, Cornering, and Cobblestones, representing some automobile
testing track called Track 1. Each event is repeated only one time. The first event (Speed Bumps) is visible in
the form above and consists of three loading defined by three static subcases called LC1, LC2, and LC3 that
are associated to cyclic variations called SAETRN, SAESUS, and SAEBRAKT, respectively. These happen to
be external DAC file, but could easily be defined by fields also. The second sequence is made up of the first
sequence (repeated only one time) plus 30 repeats of the Cornering event and one instance of a fourth event
called Braking, which defines a second test called Track 2. Note that one repeat of Track 1 load sequence only
represents 0.25 laps around the track. Whereas sequence two defines a single repeat of the load sequence as
10 Trips. These fatigue unit definitions are arbitrary and up to the user to define so that they make sense.
Fatigue life will be reported back in these defined units. For example the fatigue life of load sequence 1 (Track
1) will be reported back as fatigue life in Laps. Load sequence two (Track 2) will have fatigue life reported as
the number of Trips to failure.
Fatigue Load Sequences for SOL 112 (modal transient)

The concept for SOL 112 is the same with regards to loading sequences as it is for SOL 101. The difference
is that a single subcase for a SOL 112 analysis defines an entire load event. All the cyclic loading and any other
static offsets, pre-loads, etc., are defined as part of the SOL 112 analysis directly. So the spreadsheet only
allows you to specify a single subcase per event, which defines a load event. Multiple events are allowed and
those events can be assembled to for a load sequence in the identical manner as for SOL 101.
Main Index
Subcase Select
Fatigue Load Sequences for SOL 103 (modal transient)

The concept for SOL 103 is the same with regards to loading sequences as it is for SOL 101 and SOL 112.
The difference with SOL 103 is that the modal stresses are used and combined with modal responses obtained
either from either a previous SOL 112 analysis or from an external source such as a ADAMS or some other
motion product. The modal responses must be stored in external DAC or RPC files or as non-spatial fields.
In this respect the process is identical to SOL 101. Except each subcase is replaced by a single mode and each
cyclic load variation (DAC/RPC file or field) represents the modal cyclic response instead of the physical load
variation. The principle of linear superposition is used to combine the modal stresses and the modal responses
(sometimes called modal participation factors) to produce the full cyclic transient stress responses the same
as SOL 101 subcase are combined with their cyclic variations.
So the spreadsheet for each load event requires you to associate each mode (or the modes that you wish to
retain in the analysis) with its corresponding modal participation (modal response). Each layer of the
spreadsheet represents a single load event. The events can then be associated to load sequences in the same
manner as SOL 101 and 112 descriptions above.
Fatigue Load Sequences for SOLs 108 & 111(frequency response)

There are five (5) types of loading definitions possible. Some can be mixed and in some cases, some cannot
be mixed:
Table 3-58 Frequency Domain Loading Types

Time->PSD Used for directly using time domain time histories in the form of
a channel input file (CSV - MS Excel type or RPC - Remote
Parameter Control). The time histories are automatically
converted to PSD, which are necessary for a frequency domain
random vibration fatigue analysis. This method can only be
mixed with a Static Offset load.
Main Index
Subcase Select
Table 3-58 Frequency Domain Loading Types

PSD Input Used for directly specifying the input PSDs. This method can be
mixed with any other loads (except Time->PSD) for single input
loading. For multiple input loading, only a Static Offset can be
additionally applied.
Static Offset Used for offsetting the PSD or other loads due to a static stress.
This can be combined with any other loading.
Deterministic Used for applying a deterministic loading such as a single sine
wave or narrow band. A single frequency (deterministic load)
defined in each event is a poor-man’s method (or manual
method) of doing a sine sweep or a narrow band sweep. Multiple
frequencies defined in a single event is considered a harmonic
loading condition. This loading can be combined with any other
type of loading as long as PSD loading is single input only.
Sine Sweep Used for automatically specifying sine sweep loading. It can be
combined with any other type of loading as long as PSD loading
is single input only.
Please note the following:

1. Although multiple Load Sequences can be set up, only one Load Sequence can be active at any one
time. So when a Load Sequence is
• Created: it will be set as the currently active Load Sequence and any other existing Load Sequences
will be deactivated
• Edited/Activate: all other Load Sequences will be deactivated
2. Time->PSD: if time based events are specified, this invokes the TIM2PSD conversion using FFT to
create PSDs and cross PSDs. If a time based event is specified, no events for that Load Sequence can
have Random (PSD) loading specified. Static offsets are allowed but deterministic and/or sine sweep
loading is not allowed. Generally this is used for multi-input loading. If PSD loading is also specified,
it will be ignored.
3. Random (PSD) Based Loading - the number of individual FRF subcases can be specified to allow that
many subcases/PSD combinations to be selected plus the number of cross terms can be specified if
correlated loading is necessary. If a Random load is specified, no Time based loads should be specified
in any of the events for the particular Load Sequence. If so, the TIM2PSD definition takes precedence
over PSD loading.
4. Static Load Offset - A static offset load cannot be present by itself in the event. Only one static load
is allowed in any event and it currently must reference an external OP2 file that is created by
PARAM,POST,-1 from a SOL 101 analysis of the same model. If the OP2 file is not specified and
the Subcase No is set to zero (0) then only a constant offset is applied to all entities.
Main Index
Subcase Select
5. Deterministic Loading - sine wave or narrow band - this currently cannot be applied in conjunction
with multiple input PSD loading (or multi load TIM2PSD loading). So it is ignored if a random
multi-load PSD is also present in the event and the user is warned.
6. Sine Sweep Loading - this currently cannot be applied in conjunction with multiple PSD loading, so
the same applies to Sine Sweep as to Deterministic loading.
7. A Load Sequence has certain attributes that can be set by Right Mouse Button (RMB) clicking on it
and selecting Edit Event. The attributes are:
• Total Duration in Time Units
• Time Units (Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Years)
• Event Output - yes or no
• Equivalent Units
• Sequence Name
8. An Event can also have attributes:
• The duration of an event in a Load Sequence is one attribute that can be set by RMB clicking the
Event once it is added to the Load Sequence.
• The Event name is set as part of the spreadsheet attributes.
9. A PSD Event must have its PSDs defined as Patran fields.
• Direct input PSD defined by one column non-spatial field of load2/hz vs frequency
• Cross input PSD with only real terms can be specified the same as a direct input PSD
• Cross input PSD with both real and imaginary (complex) terms must be specified with a two (2)
column (complex) non-spatial field of load2/hz for real and imaginary in columns 1 and 2,
respectively, vs frequency.
10. The Event attributes for TIM2PSD conversion include:
• Samples per second
• Window type (Hanning or None)
• Length of Window function
• Overlap or gap between windows
• Delete sections of the time history to delete before converting to PSD
• Number of header lines to skip for CSV files
• Use Means (yes / no) - currently determines the time history stress offset from zero mean but does
not use the results directly in the analysis
• Correlated Loads (ON or OFF) - ON creates cross PSD, OFF does not
11. Event attributes are allow necessary for Sine Sweep. They are:
• Sweep type (SWTYPE) - Decibel (DB), Octave (OCT), or Linear (HZ). Linear is default.
• Sweep number (SWNUM) - the number of sine waves to use in the sweep - default is 50
• Sweep rate (SWRATE) - the sweep rate per second in HZ, DB, or OCT - default is HZ
Main Index
Subcase Select
• Number of sweeps (NSWEEP) - the number of sweeps to be performed - default is 1

• Units of loading used to create FRF (FRFUNIT) - acceleration (default), velocity, displacement
or force
• Units of loading used to define sweep (LDUNIT) - acceleration (default), velocity, displacement
or force
PSD Input Spreadsheet Operation

Please note the following for this mode of the Load Sequence form:
1. User selects random PSD Input - this changes the mode of the form for PSD input. This is the default
mode of the form.
2. Current Directory, Select Standard Directory, and Select User Directory are not applicable to this mode
of the form - disabled.
3. User sets Max #: of FRF Subcases to the number of FRF Subcases to be active from the SOL 108 or
111 job. These correlate directly to the direct PSD input.
4. User sets the Max # of Matrix Cross Terms. This correlates to the number of cross PSD inputs desired.
If this is set to zero (0), then only uncorrelated loading is considered in the analysis. If this is set to
greater than zero (0), then some level of correlated loading is considered in the analysis.
5. The spreadsheet updates to include the number of rows necessary to define the direct PSD input,
which is the number of FRF subcases, and the number cross terms. So for example, if the user specifies
three (3) FRF Subcases and three (3) Cross Terms, then the spreadsheet shows six (6) rows. The first
three (3) rows are for direct PSD input. The last three (3) are for cross PSD input. The maximum
number of cross PSD input terms cannot be greater than
(#subcases2 + # subcases)/2.
6. The users activates the first cell of the spreadsheet. This displays or enables the list box that allows
selection of the first subcase. Since the first three (3) rows in our above example are direct PSDs, the
1st and 2nd cells both are loaded with the same selected subcase name. The next cell is automatically
advanced focus.
7. The Input PSD cell enables/displays the Input PSD list box. The user selects that appropriate one.
The cell focus goes to the next cell.
8. The Divisor, Scale Factor, and Offset cells are filled by inputting the desired value in the data box that
appears. By pressing return the cell is populated and focus advanced to the next cell in the row. Note
that for all rows, the value of these must be the same. So all rows are filled in the same when accepted.
9. When the active cell is one of the cross terms, then the subcases for the first two rows can be selected
separately and must be different subcase. There should never be duplicate pairs defined. For example
you should not define Subcase1 and Subcase2 in one row and Subcase2 and Subcase1 in another row
- they are the same pair of subcases. Error checking catches this on job submittal.
10. The Input PSD selected for the cross terms can be either a single or double column non-spatial field
of frequency where double column is defining both real and imaginary terms. For direct rows of the
spreadsheet only single column non-spatial fields are allowed.
Main Index
Subcase Select
11. On job submittal, if Time->PSD is also defined, a warning is issued to the user that random input
load has already been defined and that changing will cause the PSD loading to be ignored if time
based loading is present also.
12. If a zero-PSD (no random input) is required, then no spreadsheet data is necessary to input. This
would only be done if the same event contains deterministic and/or sine sweep loading. The other
way to do this is to define the selected non-spatial field for the direct PSDs to have zero values at all
frequencies. And of course this only works with a single load input, so # of FRF Subcases must be one
(1) in this case.
13. If another event is to be defined, the Event # can be changed and a new name given. The spread sheet
arrows do the same thing.
14. Clear Selected Row button restores the selected rows to default setting, which clears some cells and sets
others to the default or to the values of rows above/below if those columns must have the same values
for all rows.
15. Use the Duplicate Previous button if you wish to duplicate the event from the previously defined
event. This does not work for the first event, naturally.
TIME->PSD Input Spreadsheet Operation

1. User selects Time->PSD - this changes the mode of the form for time based input. A warning on job
submittal is issued if random PSD input is also defined and vice-versa or when the Event is selected
while creating a Load Sequence.
2. Current Directory, Select Standard Directory, and Select User Directory are used indicate where the RPC
or CSV file(s) containing the time event data is/are located. This is the same if static offset OP2 files
are selected for Static Offset loading.
3. User set Max #: of FRF Subases to the number of FRF Subcases to be active from the SOL 108 or 111
job. These correlate directly to the number of channels of data in the RPC or CSV files that are to be
used. Cross Terms is not used and is disabled as the cross terms will be automatically created in this
operation if correlated loads are requested, which is an attribute of the event.
4. The spreadsheet updates to include the number of rows necessary to correlate each subcase to a
channel of load data. So for example, the user specifies three (3) FRF subcases that correspond to
channels 1, 2, & 3 (columns) of the CSV file.
5. The users activates the first cell of the spreadsheet. This displays or enables the list box that allows
selection of the first subcase. The user picks the subcase and the next cell is automatically advanced
focus. Note that if the Fill Down toggle is ON, all rows are filled in with sequential data from the list
box (SUBCASE1, SUBCASE2, SUBCASE3) automatically to help fill in this data more easily and
quickly when there is a large amount of data to be set up.
6. The user specifies if the data is in a CSV or RPC formatted file. This widget is only displayed when
a Channel File cell is selected. The CSV or RPC File cell enables/displays the list box to select an
appropriate file from the selected directory. The cell focus goes to the next cell. The same file name
is automatically filled in for all rows. The same file must be used for all loads of any particular event.
Different events can use different files (of the same type - RPC or CSV).
Main Index
Subcase Select
7. Under Channel #, the user sets the channel number corresponding to the load for this FRF subcase.
If Fill Down is ON than sequential channel numbers are automatically filled in for all rows below the
selected row. Focus then moves to the next cell. Note that to avoid problem, the Channel # should
be in ascending order and in the order the subcases are written. In other words, the Channel #s should
be specified something like 2, 4, 6, and not 2, 6, 4.
8. The Channel #s in one event must be the same for all events. In other words, if you map channels 2,
4, 6 in one event, you must map 2, 4, 6, in any and all subsequent events. For all defined events, the
Subcases must also be the same. Only the Channel File name can vary from event to event (and the
Divisor/Scale Factor/Offset).
9. The Divisor, Scale Factor, and Offset cells behave as described before.
10. The Clear Selected Row and Duplicate Previous buttons behaves as described before.
11. And to define another event use the same operation as described before.
Static Offset Spreadsheet Operation

1. User selects Static Offset - this changes the mode of the form for static offset input. If the event only
has a static offset it should not be allowed in the selectable event list when adding an Event to a Load
Sequence. Only one static offset is allowed per event.
2. Current Directory, Select Standard Directory, and Select User Directory are used indicate where the OP2
file containing the static offset data is located. It must be in the same location as RPC/CSV files if
time-based loading is also defined.
3. The user does not have to specify an OP2 file in which case a constant offset is to be applied from the
Offset cell. Both may be applied. The subcase # should be set to zero (0) if no OP2 file is specified.
4. The spreadsheet is only ever a single row only since only one static load is allowed per event.
5. The users activates the first cell of the spreadsheet. This displays or enables the data box to put in a
physical # of the External Subcase ID in the external OP2 file. The next cell gains focus on entry of
this data. Enter 0 if only a constant static offset is required and do not select an OP2 file in the next
cell.
6. The OP2 File cell enables/displays the list box to select an appropriate file from the selected directory.
Leave blank for a constant offset. The cell focus goes to the next cell.
8. The Clear Selected Row and Duplicate Previous buttons behave as described before.
Deterministic Loading Spreadsheet Operation

1. User selects Deterministic loading - this changes the mode of the form for deterministic input. Only
one set of deterministic loading is allowed per event.
of the form and are disabled as is Cross Terms.
Main Index
Subcase Select
3. The user specifies the Max # Frequencies to set up for this deterministic load definition.
4. The spreadsheet updates to the number of rows necessary, one per frequency. Multiple frequencies
defined in the same event is considered harmonic loading. A single frequency per event is a manual
way of doing a sine sweep or narrow band sweep.
5. The users activates the first cell of the spreadsheet. This displays or enables the list box to select the
corresponding FRF subcase this event. All rows are filled with the same subcase. The next cell gains
focus on entry of this data.
6. The Frequency is input to fill the cell. If an End Frequency is also specified, then all rows are filled in
by determining the band and increment to fill in the frequencies appropriately from the selected cell
downward. This works like Fill Down, but the Fill Down button does not need to be ON. If the Fill
Down button is ON, and no End Frequency is specified, it fills all cells with the same frequency.
However duplicate frequencies will be filtered out and not written to the input deck. The next cell
gains focus.
7. The Amplitude of this frequency is input. The next cell gains focus.
8. If the load is to be a narrow band, enter the Band Width or leave as zero (0.0) for a sine wave only.
The next cell gains focus.
10. The Clear Selected Row and Duplicate Previous buttons behave as described before.
12. This loading cannot be used with multi-input PSD or TIM2PSD loading and will be ignored if
defined, with a warning message when adding the Event to a Load Sequence and/or upon job
submittal.
Sine Sweep Loading Spreadsheet Operation

1. User selects Sine Sweep loading - this changes the mode of the form for this type of input. Only one
set of sine sweep loading is allowed per event.
of the form as are Max # FRF Subcases and Cross Terms.
3. Sweeps are limited to only one definition. So only one row is ever present on this spreadsheet.
4. The users activates the first cell of the spreadsheet. This displays or enables the list box select the
corresponding FRF Subcase for this frequency. The next cell gains focus on entry of this data.
5. The Start Frequency is input. The next cell gains focus. The Start Amplitude of this frequency is input.
The next cell gains focus, etc. until all the required data is filled into the spreadsheet. The Start Band
Width is always zero, but is left as a place holder for a time when Narrow Band Sweeps are allowed.
7. The Clear Selected Row and Duplicate Previous buttons behaves as described before.
Main Index
Restart Parameters
9. This loading cannot be used with multi-input PSD or TIM2PSD loading and will be ignored if
defined, with a warning message.
Restart Parameters
This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Analyze and the Object is Restart.
Currently, restarts are only supported for the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes
(103) Solution Sequences. Linear and Nonlinear Static jobs can be restarted as Linear or Nonlinear Static.
Normal Modes jobs can be restarted as Frequency Response, or Transient Response. The DBALL and the
MASTER files for the initial job must be present in the current directory when the restart job is
submitted.The Restart Parameters button on the main analysis form allows the user to enter information
about where to resume the analysis.
Main Index
Restart Parameters
The Patran Analysis Manager User’s Manual contains more information on how to submit restart jobs with
Analysis Manager. Restart for SOL 600 jobs are described on (p. 326) and (p. 505).
Main Index
Restart Parameters

Code Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the
Preferences>Analysis (p. 388) in the Patran Reference Manual.
Type
Select an Initial Job List of names for existing analysis jobs. Select the jobname of the analysis to
restart from.
Available Restart Jobs List of names for existing restart jobs. Select the name of an existing restart
job or enter the name for a new restart job in the databox below.
Translation Parameters Name to use for the restart job. An existing restart job may be modified
and/or resubmitted by making a selection from the Available Restart Jobs
listbox.
Linear Static/Normal Modes

This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the
solution type of the initial job is Linear Static or Normal Modes.

Start from Version Number Defines the version number from which to restart. This is the VERSION
field on the RESTART file management statement.
Select an Initial Job Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results
in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.
Main Index
Restart Parameters
Nonlinear Static
This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Analysis form and the
solution type is Nonlinear Static.

Start from Version Number Defines the version number to restart the analysis from. This is the
VERSION field on the RESTART File Management statement.
Start from Increment Number Defines the increment number to start the analysis from. This is the value of
(LOOPID) the PARAM,LOOPID Bulk Data entry.
Start from Subcase Number (SUBID+1) Defines the subcase number to start from in the list of subcases for this job.
The value entered should be one greater than the SUBID from the initial
job’s print file (*.f06). This is the value of the PARAM,SUBID Bulk Data
entry.
Save Old Restart Data Requests that the restart data for the specified version be saved. This results
in a KEEP option on the RESTART File Management statement.
Main Index
Restart Parameters
SOL 600
This subordinate form appears when the Restart Parameters button is selected on the Solution Parameters
form.

Restart Type You can Write restart data, Read restart data and Read and Write restart
data. The default is None for no restart data.
Create Continuous Results File If, when restarting a job, you wish the results form the previous run to be
copied into the new .t16 file, then turn this ON. Otherwise Marc will not
copy the results to the new .t16 file. If you turn this ON, you must have a
restarname.marc .t16 and/or restartname.marc.t19 file in your
local directory or the Marc analysis will fail.
Last Converged Increment Writes a RESTART LAST instead of a RESTART option. ON by
default.
Reauto OFF by default. This places a REAUTO option in the MSC.Marc input file.
Any additional data needed for the REAUTO option are extracted from the
first Subcase information for the restart job. Only if the Restart Type is set
to Read or Read and Write is the REAUTO written or the toggle visible to
the user.
Main Index
Optimize

Restart from Increment Defines the increment to be read from the file specified in the Select Restart
File form. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Read or Read and
Write. The last increment on the restart file is used for the RESTART
LAST option when Last Converged Increment is ON.
Increments Between Writing Defines the number of increments between writing data to the restart file. It
is only requested when Restart Type is set to Write or Read and Write.
Select Restart File... This brings up a file browser to select the restart file when the Restart Type
is set to Read or Read and Write.
Optimize
When preparing for an optimization analysis run, select Optimize as the Action on the Analysis application
form. This allows setup and submission of SOL 200 jobs.
The functionality is similar and in many cases identical to running a normal analysis as described in
Review of the Analysis Form, 258 and other sections in this chapter. Each button and its subordinate form that
appears when the Action is set to Optimize is explained briefly below.
Use the Optimize action for sizing optimization and combined sizing and topology optimization. For pure
topology, topography and topometry optimization, use the Toptomize action explained in Toptomize, 507.
Button/Subordinate Form: Description:
Design Study Select... From this form, select the design study of interest. Design studies can
contain multiple design objectives, responses, constraints, and
variables. Any particular job can only have one design objective. The
specific objective and constraints to be used in an optimization job are
selected in the Global Objective / Constraint Select form or they are
associated to a solution specific subcase. Design Studies are setup under
the Design Study tool under the Tools pull down menu. A Default
design study is present if none are previously created, however a design
study without any design variable defined will not run through Nastran
properly.
Global Obj/Constr Select... Once a design study has been selected, you may select from this form
the specific global design objective and constraints to be active for this
job. You can only have one objective in an optimization job. A global
objective will override any other objective associated to a solution
specific subcase that may be associated to this job, therefore it is not
necessary to select a global objective or constraints when defined at the
subcase level.
Translation Parameters... These parameters are described in Translation Parameters, 263 and are not
specific to optimization.
Main Index
Toptomize

Optimization Parameters... This form is used to define optimization parameter for the job.
Parameters set in this form and its subordinate form define some of the
values on the DOPTPRM entry. These are explained in the MSC
Nastran Quick Reference Guide under this entry and the user is
referred there for details. Note that no DOPTPRM entry is written if
all values are default values. Valid values, such as which optimizer is
available, depends on the setting of the Nastran version in the
Translation Parameters form described above. Results file formats can
also be set in this form as described in Results Output Format, 373.
Direct Text Input... Use of this form is described in Direct Text Input, 274.
Select Superelements... Use of this form is described in Select Superelements, 376.
Subcases... Use of this form is described in Subcases, 379. There are two differences
that are significant to this form, however. For optimization, subcases
are created based on solution sequence, e.g. Statics 101, Normal Modes
103, etc. You must set the solution sequence on this form before
creating the subcase, otherwise the default 101 will be used. Secondly,
an additional subordinate form allows you to select existing constraint
sets and an objective for the particular subcase being created if
necessary. Objectives and constraints are created using the Design
Study tool under the Tools pull down menu. Note that not all subcase
parameters are identical between a normal analysis and an optmization
analysis. Also see the note on Contact below: page 507.
Subcase Select... Use of this form is described in Subcase Select, 486. One difference is
that for optimization you must set the solution type to see the subcases
defined for a particular solution sequence. Otherwise by default only
SOL 101 subcases are displayed. A selected subcase will display the
associated solution sequence number in front of its label.
Analysis Manager... This gives access to the Analysis Manager for submitting, monitoring,
aborting and generally managing a Nastran job. This button will not
appear if the Analysis Manager is not installed or licensed.
Note: Using Contact Bodies in Optmization Jobs: Linear contact is supported in optimization jobs (SOL 200). If contact
bodies are present in the model and included in the load cases associated to the the subcases created, then the contact
bodies will be written to the deck. The most common scenario is using linear contact in optimization jobs to glue non-
congruent meshes together. When this feature is used, you must “glue” the bodies together, which requires that you
set up the proper contact tables to define body pairs that are properly glued. Usage of the contact table is described in
Contact Table, 428. Toptomize
When preparing for a pure topology, topometry, or topography optimization analysis run, select Toptomize
as the Action on the Analysis application form. This allows setup and submission of SOL 200 jobs.
The functionality is similar and in many cases identical to running a normal analysis as described in
Review of the Analysis Form, 258 and other sections in this chapter. Each button and its subordinate form that
Main Index
Toptomize
appears when the Action is set to Toptomize is explained briefly below.

Use the Optimize action for sizing optimization and combined sizing and topology optimization as explained
in Optimize, 506.
Translation Parameters... These parameters are described in Translation Parameters, 263 and are not
specific to optimization.
Optimization Parameters... This form is used to define optimization parameter for the job. Parameters
set in this form and its subordinate form define some of the values on the
DOPTPRM entry. These are explained in the MSC Nastran Quick
Reference Guide under this entry and the user is referred there for details.
Note that no DOPTPRM entry is written if all values are default values.
Valid values, such as which optimizer is available, depends on the setting
of the Nastran version in the Translation Parameters form described above.
Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output
Format, 373.
Objectives & Constraints... This form allows you to define the objective and constraints for the
topology, topometry or topography optimization run. Please see Objectives
& Constraints, 510 below.
Optimization Controls... This form allows you to define various controls and settings necessary for
topology, topometry, or topography optimization jobs. Please see
Optimization Control, 511 below.
Design Domain... This form allows you to select the property sets that define the active
design domain. Manufacturing constraints are defined via this form also.
Please see Design Domain, 514 below.
Direct Text Input... Use of this form is described in Direct Text Input, 274.
Subcases... Use of this form is described in Subcases, 379. There are two differences
that are significant to this form, however. For optimization, subcases are
created based on solution sequence, e.g. Statics 101, Normal Modes 103,
etc. You must set the solution sequence before creating the subcase,
otherwise the default 101 will be used. Secondly, an additional
subordinate form allows you to select existing constraint sets and an
objective for the particular subcase being created if necessary. Objectives
and constraints are created using the Design Study tool under the Tools
pull down menu. Note that not all subcase parameters are identical
between a normal analysis and an optmization analysis. Also see the note
on Contact above: page 507.
Main Index
Toptomize

Subcase Select... Use of this form is described in Subcase Select, 486. One difference is that
for optimization you must set the solution type to see the subcases defined
for a particular solution sequence. Otherwise by default only SOL 101
subcases are displayed. A selected subcase will display the associated
solution sequence number in front of its label.
Analysis Manager... This gives access to the Analysis Manager for submitting, monitoring,
aborting and generally managing a Nastran job. This button will not
appear if the Analysis Manager is not installed or licensed.
Main Index
Toptomize
Objectives & Constraints

This form is used to define the optimization type and select the objective and constraints of the optimization
run. All widgets on this form are explained in the table below.
Widget Parameter: Description:
Type Select the optimization type for job to be set up, either Topology,
Topometry, or Topography. Topology is the default.
Objective Function(s): The objective of the optimization is set with the widgets in this frame. The
default is to Minimize Compliance. Multiple static subcases are allowed.
Minimize Compliance
Maximize Frequency
Track Modes Optionally you can also maximize frequency (or eigenvalue). You specify
the mode number in the provided databox. If the provided mode is not the
Mode Numbers first mode or you provide modes such as 1 5 and 6, you can turn on the
Track Modes toggle. This is recommended as modes can change with each
design cycle. The MODTRAK case and bulk data entries are written in this
case using the number of modes called out for extraction as set up in the
modal subcase. Multiple modal subcases are allowed.
A DESOBJ case control entry is written to the deck which calls out the
appropriate DRESP1 and/or DRESP2 entries with the COMP, FREQ, or
EIGN options. Multiple DRESP1 entries are written when the Constraint
Target is Mass Fraction with multiple property sets selected and
subsequently referenced or combined using an average function on the
DRESP2 entry.
Only one objective is allowed, however you can specify to Minimize

Compliance and Maximize Frequency in which case you need to also
specify a single Frequency Constraint Target. This target along with the
compliance minimization objective is combined onto a DRESP2 entry
using a DEQATN entry to formulate the objective relationship. In this case
a single modal subcase is required.
Note that when multiple static subcases are selected, a DRSPAN entry is
written to each subcase as necessary to ensure the objective function
properly spans all subcases.
Main Index
Toptomize
Widget Parameter: Description:

Frequency Constraint Specify the mode number(s) and corresponding frequencies to be
Targets constrained in the optimization run. At least one modal subcase is required.
This is typically used when the Objective Function is set to Maximize
Frequency. If the Objective Function is set to both Minimize Compliance
and Maximize Frequency, then a singe mode frequency target is required
and only one modal subcase is allowed.
A DESSUB case control is written to the deck which calls out the
appropriate DCONSTR and DRESP1 entries. This constraint because part
of the objective if both Minimize Compliance and Maximize Frequency
objective functions are specified and is incorporated via a DEQATN entry
referenced on a DRESP2 entry called out by a DESOBJ case control.
Constraint Target Specify the constraint target. For Topology, only Mass Fraction is allowed.
For Topography, only Weigh or Volume is allowed. For Topometry, either
of the three are allowed. You must specify the mass fraction, weight or
volume target. By default, the mass fraction is 0.4 (40% of the original
mass). However, volume and weight have no defaults. If the Objective
Function is set to only Maximize Frequency, then a Constraint Target is not
required (can be set to None) for Topometry and Topography only.
A DESGLB case control is written, which calls out the appropriate

DCONSTR and DRESP1 entries. For Weight and Volume, only a single
DCONSTR/DRESP1 entry combination is written as the entire design
domain can only have one weight or volume constraint. For Mass Fraction,
multiple combinations are written with the same DCONSTR ID.
Optimization Control
Use this form to set various controls used during the optimization run. They are briefly described here but
the user is referred to the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide for further information. Leaving a field blank
will trigger usage of the default in most cases. Some parameters must be provided or the analysis cannot
proceed. Setting the Maximum Design Cycles is the most common usage of this form to limit the analysis to
something reasonable. Each optimization type has different settings:
Topology Parameters: Description:
(all values written to the TOPVAR entry unless otherwise indicated)
Initial Design (XINIT) Optional. Initial value. It is recommended that this be left blank to let
Nastran decide the initial value.
Lower Bounds (XLB) Optional. Lower bound to prevent the singularity of the stiffness matrix.
Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.001. Real 0.0 < XLB <= 0.1
Main Index
Toptomize

Maximum Design Cycles This is the maximum number of design cycles after which the optimization
(DESMAX) run is forced to quit. This is written on the DOPTPRM entry. Default is
30. This option is not written if default is used. The entire DOPTPRM
entry is not written if all options are defaulted.
Penalty Factor (POWER) Optional. A penalty factor used in the relation between topology design
variables and element Young’s modulus. Leave blank to use Nastran default
of 3.0. Real 1.0 <= POWER <= 6.0
Move Limit (DELXV) Optional. Fractional change allowed for the design variable during
approximate optimization. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.2. Real
> 0.0 Note that if this is left blank and DELX is specified on the
DOPTPRM entry (Optimization Parameters form), Nastran will use that
value in place of this one.
Tolerance of Convergence Optional. Relative criterion to detect convergence. If the relative change in
(CONV1) objective between two optimization cycles is less then CONV1, then
optimization is terminated. Leave blank to use Nastran default of 0.0001.
Real > 0.0. This is written to the DOPTPRM entry.
Minimum Member Size Optional. Indicates the minimum member size. No default. No minimum
(TDMIN) is used if not specified. Recommendation is that it be set to three times a
representative element dimension. Real > 0.0. This is written to the
DOPTPRM entry and is for 2D and 3D elements only.
Checkboard-Free Method Optional. On by default. Turns on/off topology filtering (allows of
(TCHECK) minimizes checker boarding effects). This is written to the DOPTPRM.
Results Output Format Results file formats can also be set in this form as described in Results Output
Format, 373.
Topometry Parameters: Description:

(all values written to the TOMVAR entry unless otherwise indicated)
Initial Design (XINIT) Required. Initial design value of property to optimize. Optimization job
will not proceed without this value defined. Real > 0.0
Lower Bounds (XLB) Optional. Lower bound of the property to optimize. Leave blank to use
Nastran default of XLB=0.5*XINIT. Real > 0.0.
Upper Bounds (ULB) Optional. Upper bound of the property to optimize. Leave blank to use
Nastran default of XUB=1.5*XINIT. Real > 0.0.
Main Index
Toptomize

(all values written to the TOMVAR entry unless otherwise indicated)
Property to Optimize Required. The property to optimize. No Nastran default. This is
(PNAME) dependent on the model dimensionality is some cases. Default is set to
Thickness for 2d problems but is not appropriate for 1D models where
cross sectional Area would be the most common choice.
Format, 373.
Topography Parameters: Description:

(all values written to the BEADVAR entry unless otherwise indicated)
Lower Bounds (XLB) Optional. Lower bound on the bead height. Leave blank to use Nastran
default of 0.0. See the Upper Bounds (XUB) description.
Upper Bounds (XUB) Optional. Upper bound on the bead height. Leave blank to use Nastran
default of 1.0. To force grids to move only the positive bead vector
direction (one side of the surface), use XLB = 0.0. To force grids to move
only in the negative bead vector direction (the other side of the surface), use
XUB = 0.0. To allow grids to move in both positive and negative bead
vector directions, use XLB < 0.0 and XUB > 0.0.
Main Index
Toptomize

(all values written to the BEADVAR entry unless otherwise indicated)
Minimum Bead Width Required. Minimum bead width. There is no default. This controls the
(MW) width of beads and the recommended value is 1.5 to 2.5 times the average
element width. Real > 0.0
Maximum Bead Height Required. Maximum bead height. There is no default. This controls the
(MH) maximum height of beads when XUB = 1.0 (or left blank). Real > 0.0
Draw Angle (ANG) Required. Draw angle in degrees. This controls the angel of the sides of the
beads and the recommended values is between 60 and 75 degrees.
Buffer Zone (BF) Optional. Buffer zone. This parameter creates a buffer zone between
elements in the topography design region and elements outside the design
region when turned on, which is the default.
Exclude from Design (SKIP) Optional. Boundary skip. This indicates which element nodes are excluded
from the design region. Constraints indicates all constrained nodes and
Loads indicates all nodes referenced by forces, moments and enforced
displacements. Both are on by default.
Format, 373.
Design Domain
The property sets that define the intended design domain are set on this form as well as manufacturing
constraints. The form works by clicking on a valid property set (row) in the top spread sheet. This action adds
the selected row to the bottom spread sheet, which are the active domains during the optimization run. To
remove domains, click on the rows of interest in the bottom spread sheet and press the Remove Selected Rows
button.
From this form you can also define manufacturing constraints to impose on the topology optimization. Each
property set is written to a TOPVAR, TOMVAR, or BEADVAR entry in the input file depending on the
optimization Type set in the Objectives & Constraints form. The values of various parameters on these entries
can be different for each property set. It is recommended that you review the settings for each property set
defined in the design domain before submitting the job. When a property set is added to the selected design
domain properties spreadsheet, some of the values are set in the various columns from the settings on the
Optimization Control form. To change these settings for an individual property set, simply click on the cell
to be changed. A widget will appear above the spreadsheet allowing you to change the value. Use the Enter
key to accept the new value into the spreadsheet. The same can be done when opening the Manufacturing
Constraints form. The values set in the Manufacturing Constraint forms will correspond only to the property
sets that are selected from the Design Domain spreadsheet. If you do not select any rows in the Design
Domain spreadsheet, then any change made on the Manufacturing Constraints form will be applied to all
property sets in this spreadsheet. For this reason, care should be taken to verify all changes are what is
intended.
The tables below indicate the parameters that can be set for each property set of the design domain. Any
parameter set on this form overrides any global setting of that parameter that may be defined under the
Main Index
Toptomize
Objective & Constraints form or the Optimization Control form. For more information on each parameter,
the user is directed to the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Frac Mass Target (FRMASS) The fraction mass target for the specified property set. The initial
value is picked up from the setting on the Objectives & Constraints
form. If one of these cells is set, all rows must be set. You can remove
the values from all rows and the value from the Objectives &
Constraints form will be used. Otherwise these values override the
value from the Objectives and Constraints form. Values in these cells
are also written the corresponding DCONSTR/DRESP1 entries with
FRMASS option as well as the TOPVAR entry.
Initial Design (XINIT) Initial Value on the property value to optimize. This writes the XINIT
on the TOPVAR entry. It is recommended to leave this value blank
and let Nastran determine automatically the initial value. If you enter
a value, you must enter values for all rows of this column of the
spreadsheet. Or if you want one blank you have to leave all blank in
this column. If you enter an XINIT value from the Optimization
Control form, it will be used by default when adding new rows. If you
change values on the spreadsheet, this overrides the value on the
Optimization Control form as long as there are more that one row. If
only one row is present, then the Optimization Control form value is
used.
Main Index
Toptomize

Lower Bounds (XLB) Lower Bounds. The original value is picked up from the setting on the
Optimization Control form. Typically these cells are blank by default.
If one of these cells is set, all rows must be set. You can remove the
values from all rows and the value from the Optimization Control
form will be used. Otherwise these values override the value from the
Optimization Control form. If there is only one row, the
Optimization Control form value is used.
Manufacturing Constraints: These are accessed from the Manufacturing Constraints form.
Ref. Coordinate System Any direction, plane, or axis specified for the constraints will be in the
Reference Coordinate Frame specified.
Minimum Member Size
Symmetric Constraints By default all constraints are off. You may turn any on that are
applicable. Some combinations are not possible in Nastran and the
Extrusion Constraints interface should indicate if an incompatible combination is selected.
Casting Constraints Note that all of these values can differ for each selected design domain
from the Design Domain form (bottom spreadsheet). By selecting a
row from the spreadsheet, you can see the settings change on the
Manufacturing Constraints form if there are differences. If multiple
rows are selected, only the settings for the top row are displayed on the
Manufacturing Constraints from. If a change is made to a value with
multiple rows selected, the new value is associated to all the selected
property sets. If no property sets are selected, it is the same as if all are
selected. So care should be taken when changing values on this form
to ensure only the property sets of interest are being affected.

(all values written to the TOMVAR entry unless otherwise
indicated)
Property to Optimize (PNAME) The property to optimize. The original value is picked up from the
setting on the Optimization Control form. If one of these cells is set,
all rows must be set. You can clear the values from all rows and the
value from the Optimization Control form will be used. Otherwise
these values override the value from the Optimization Control form.
Initial Design (XINIT) Initial Value on the property value to optimize. Operates similar to
Property to Optimize above.
Lower Bounds (XLB) Lower Bounds on the property value to optimize. Operates similar to
Initial Value above
Main Index
Toptomize

(all values written to the TOMVAR entry unless otherwise
indicated)
Upper Bounds (ULB) Upper Bound on the property value to optimize. Operates similar to
Lower Bound above.
Manufacturing Constraints: Not supported for Topometry.

(all values written to the BEADVAR entry unless otherwise
indicated)
Minimum Bead Width (MW) Minimum bead width. The original value is picked up from the
setting on the Optimization Control form. If one of these cells is set,
all rows must be set. You can clear the values from all rows and the
value from the Optimization Control form will be used. Otherwise
these values override the value from the Optimization Control form.
Maximum Bead Height (MH) Maximum bead height. Operates similar to Minimum Bead Width.
Draw Angle (ANG) Draw angle in degrees. Operates similar to the above parameters.
Lower Bounds (XLB) Lower bound on the bead height. Operates similar to the above
parameters.
Upper Bounds (XUB) Upper bound on the bead height. Operates similar to the above
parameters.
Buffer Zone (BF) Buffer zone. Operates similar to the above parameters.
Main Index
Interactive Analysis

(all values written to the BEADVAR entry unless otherwise
indicated)
Exclude from Design (SKIP) Boundary skip. Operates similar to the above parameters.
Manufacturing Constraints: These are accessed from the Manufacturing Constraints form.
Ref. Coordinate Frame Any vector specified for the draws direction of the beads will be in the
Reference Coordinate Frame specified.
Extrusion Direction
Nodes to Exclude/Include By default the Extrusion Direction is Normal to the surface. If Vector
is specified, a user defined vector can be specified in any acceptable
manner with the select mechanism.
Optionally the user may select a group of nodes to include or exclude

from the design domain.
Note that all of these values can differ for each selected design domain
from the Design Domain form (bottom spreadsheet). By selecting a
row from the spreadsheet, you can see the settings change on the
Manufacturing Constraints form if there are differences. If multiple
rows are selected, only the settings for the top row are displayed on the
Manufacturing Constraints from. If a change is made to a value with
multiple rows selected, the new value is associated to all the selected
property sets. If no property sets are selected, it is the same as if all are
selected. So care should be taken when changing values on this form
to ensure only the property sets of interest are being affected.
Postprocessing
Postprocessing topology optimization results requires that you read element density values (the new mesh
from optimization) using the Nastran results .xdb file (e.g. jobname.xdb) or .des file (e.g. jobname.des)
through the Tools | Design Study | Postprocessing menu and use that application to view the results rather
than through the Patran Results application. See Tools>Design Studies>Post-Process (p. 619) in the Patran
Reference Manual.
The Patran Preference for MSC Nastran has a new capability that enables the user to perform visual
interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a good modal analysis solution
with MSC Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response solution is then directed from a special set of
Patran menus (wizard). The wizard assists the user in applying the desired loads, specifying damping,
selecting result entities, and defining solution criteria for an automated fast restart in Nastran effected from
the modal database selected. Patran running as the client spawns a fast restart job to Nastran functioning as
a server. Solution results are automatically returned to the client for visualization. This procedure suggests
that there might be several benefits to using this product. The wizard provides a guide for problem definition,
Main Index
minimizing confusion associated with general-purpose menu structures. The fast restart, as the name
suggests, is fast, and is executed automatically, as are the client-server connections and the data transmission.
The reduced solution space of the fast restart minimizes the amount of result data that is calculated, stored,
transmitted, and displayed. The net result is the ability to quickly apply discrete loads to the structure and
immediately visualize the response at select grids or elements of the model. The real time solution paradigm
of the interactive scheme does not provide fringe or contour plots of the global structural response.
Note: Running MSC Nastran interactive analysis of versions prior to 2018 require and write
an INCLUDE 'SSSALTERDIR:fstrsta.alt' in the MSC Nastran input file. Versions
2018 or higher no longer need this alter and use a RESTART statement instead. Ensure
that the correct version is specified in Analysis/Translation Parameters form.
Assumptions
Interactive modal frequency response requires that a normal modes analysis of the structure has been
completed using Nastran, and that a .DBALL/MASTER database exists containing the model data and the
normal modes solution. Currently, the interactive paradigm presumes the Nastran executable, the modal
database, and the Patran executable are all located in the same directory. To maintain optimal performance,
licensing and security should be local also. Given these initial conditions, the following scenarios exist for
performing interactive frequency response.
Scenario 1
If the initial normal modes analysis was modeled in Patran, then that Patran database should be selected under
File/Open when starting Patran. This provides the user with the model from which to exercise the interactive
frequency response wizard, provided the correct flag was set to precondition the Nastran normal modes
database for this purpose. This is done in Patran by going to Analysis/Solution Type/Interactive Modal
Analysis, and activating the check box.
Scenario 2
The normal modes model may have been built and run without using Patran. If the user intends to use the
MSC integrated product to proceed with interactive frequency response, then special care must be taken
when preparing the NASTRAN input file for the normal modes analysis. Specifically, the Nastran normal
modes input file must contain the following statement just before the CEND delimiter:
include `SSSALTERDIR:run0.V2001`
Note that both “ticks” are right handed and that SSSALTERDIR must be capitalized. Nastran then creates
an environment variable called SSSALTERDIR which points to where the sssalters are located when
performing a standard installation.
If the user does not have a standard Nastran installation, then he will be required to specify the full directory
path. For example, if the file run0.V2001 is located in the directory /scr2/mike/tmp, then he must include
the following statement just prior to the CEND delimiter:
include `/scr2/mike/tmp/run0.V2001`
Main Index
This include statement provides the DMAP alter required to precondition the large modal database. This
conditioning enables efficient data manipulation during the interactive frequency response solution phase.
Under this scenario, the model data will need to be imported by starting Patran and requesting “Read Input
File” from the Analysis Menu. This procedure is described in greater detail in Chapter 5 of this user’s guide,
and constitutes reading a NASTRAN Input File for the model data. Once the model data is placed in the
Patran database, interactive frequency response can proceed.
The Process
Scenario 1 or 2 above can be followed to provide a Patran database with a data model suitable for performing
interactive frequency response. The Analysis menu shown below controls the interactive analysis process.
Submenus for Select NASTRAN .DBALL, Create Loading, Output Requests, Create a Field, and Define
Frequencies are discussed.
Solution Type--Is currently fixed to Frequency Response (Modal Frequency Response) as the only solution
available in interactive analysis format. Subsequent versions of Nastran and Patran may expand this capability
to other solution types.
Loading Menu--The loading menu provides a spreadsheet to guide the user through load and boundary
condition application.
Miscellaneous
The Interactive Modal Frequency response solution process is staged, in the sense that a normal mode
solution is performed first to create what we refer to as the large database (so named for obvious reasons), and
then a fast restart procedure is used to develop the frequency response. The normal modes solution is where
the user specifies any weight to mass conversion quantities (see PARAM, WTMASS) as well as a specification
of the mass matrix formulation desired (see PARAM, COUPMASS). The mass units and desired mass matrix
formulation then, are automatically accounted for in the subsequent determination of the frequency response
quantities calculated.
Main Index
Analysis Form
Main Index

Interactive Jobs Every interactive solution will have a user assigned job name associated with
it. This provides a record of applied loads, enforced motion boundary
conditions, solution frequencies requested, structural damping definition,
and output request entities. In a Nastran sense, each job represents a
“loading condition” which reflects application of a number of loads and load
types distributed on the structure. Maintaining a record of the interactive
run provides a starting point for subsequent analyses whether they are done
in the current session, or a subsequent session. Specifically, if a user wanted
to change only a frequency dependent load function or damping function,
the interactive job storage capacity makes this a simple procedure.
Job Name Each Interactive Analysis will have its solution specifications stored with a
job name (Interactive Name). This allows recovery of all specifications
required for performing that particular analysis : loading, damping, solution
frequencies, and output entities. If an existing Interactive Job is selected,
those input requirements automatically populate the interactive menus. If
we want to rerun that analysis, all that is required is to hit APPLY on the
Analysis Menu. When the calculations are finished in Nastran, the
interactive system automatically positions the user in the Interactive Results
section where XY plot requests can be made. Plot requests are not saved in
the jobs data.
Create Loading Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or
Acceleration.
Select Modal Results .DBALL

The following form appears when you select Select Nastran .DBALL from the Analysis form. This form
provides the pointer to the Nastran database which contains the preconditioned normal modes solution.
Some additional data is retrieved from this database for use in Patran. Specifically, the Nastran modal
constraint data is provided to Patran to guarantee that the allowable degrees of freedom available for enforced
Main Index
motion are exposed in the Loading Menu. (Application of enforced motion in modal frequency response
requires that the effected degrees of freedom were constrained in the normal modes analysis.)
Main Index
Loading Form
This form allows you to create loading sets. The following is the default form.

Load Type Load types include: Acoustic (Pressure), Force, Displacement, Velocity, or
Acceleration.
The following shows the Loading Form filled out with a few different load conditions.
If Load Type = Acoustic, Load Entity can only reference elements and the default direction for the load
application is relative to the element normal regardless of the Coord Frame selection. The Basic coordinate
system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the element was defined in a local coordinate system, in
which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame column. If the user changes the Direction from
NORMAL to a specific direction vector, then the applied pressure direction is relative to the Coord Frame
referenced.
If Load Type = Force, Load Entity can only reference nodes (grid points), and a direction vector is input to
define application direction relative to the coordinate frame reference. If no coordinate reference frame is
specified, the default becomes the Basic Coordinate system (Coord 0).
If Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, Load Entity can only be selected from nodes that will
appear in the Load Entities list box. These nodes represent the set of all possible nodes to which enforced
motion can be applied, and is limited to nodes that were constrained during the normal modes analysis. The
Main Index
Basic coordinate system is the default reference (COORD 0), unless, the node was defined in a local
coordinate frame, in which case that Coord ID will appear in the Coord Frame column.
When Load Type = Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration, and a specific node has been selected in Load
Entities, the Direction specification will indicate which directions are available X, Y, and / or Z in the
reference coordinate frame. When an enforced motion is defined for a selected degree of freedom, it is
eliminated from the available enforced motion set. Only one enforced motion boundary condition per degree
of freedom can be applied to a given node. (Enforced motion cannot be applied to rotational degrees of
freedom for interactive analysis).
Main Index
Create a Field Form

This form appears when you select the Create New Field/Table... button from the Loading Form.
Main Index
Output Selection Form

This form will allow the user to select nodes and elements for output, and allow him to select the frequencies
which interest him in the analysis. The frequency selection form is the same form that is used in standard
analysis for sol 111 subcase parameters.

Define Frequencies Define Frequencies prompts a spreadsheet for defining the desired
solution frequencies for which output will be available. Output Selection
also provides for selecting Nodes / Grids and Elements for which output
response is desired. Selection can be made to create output response for
complex quantities in either Real / Imaginary or Magnitude / Phase
formats. For Interactive Analysis, the output quantities are preset. Close
the Output Selection menu.
Main Index
Define Frequencies Form

This form allows the user to define the frequencies of interest in the most complete way. This form allows the
users access to FREQ, FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4, FREQ5.
Main Index
Chapter 4: Read Results
Preference Guide
4 Read Results

Accessing Results 530

Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities 540
 Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities 548

Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities 553

Supported 3dplot Results Quantities 580
 Supported HDF5 Result Quantities 581
Main Index
Accessing Results
Accessing Results
This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu and the Action is set to Access
Results. The Object you select defines the type of results file to be read or accessed from the analysis. The
following file types are available: HDF5, XDB, Output2, MASTER, T16/T19 and 3dplot (for SOL 700).
The Method choices are: Result Entities, Model Data, or Both.
Main Index
Chapter 4: Read Results 531
Accessing Results
Table 4-1
Object When the Object selected is Result Entities, the model data must already
exist in the database. No results can be read into Patran if the associated
Method node or element does not already exist. Model Data only reads the model
data that exists in the results file. Both will first read the model data, then
the result entities. If Model Data or Both are selected, it is up to the user to
ensure that there will not be any ID conflicts with existing model entities.
Job Name Defines the job name to be used for this job. The same job name used for
the Analysis menu should be used for the Read Results menu. This will
allow Patran to load the results directly into the load cases that were used
for the analysis.
Select Results File Defines the results file to be read. The form that is called up lists all files
recognized as being analysis code results files.
If you are attaching a T16/T19 file that has the same jobname as your
current database, you do not have to select the file. Patran automatically
attaches the T16/T19 file that matches the database jobname.
Translation Parameters Defines any parameters used to control the results or model translation from
the analysis code results file.
Results File Formats

HDF5 Formats
This is a MSC Nastran HDF5 Result (.h5) file containing results from SOL 101, 103, 105, 107-112, 200
runs. The h5 file is created by including the MDLPRM,HDF5,1 entry in the bulk data section of the input
deck. Include this in Direct Text Input, 274 when creating/running a job. As an alternative way, the system cell
702 can be given in command line as the following: nastran example.dat sys702=1
Import of Model data also supported only for nodes and elements from h5 file thus it is recommended to
import the corresponding input deck to get the complete model data before importing the h5 file for result
entities.
Output2 Formats
The Patran MSC Nastran interface supports several different OUTPUT2 file formats. The interface, running
on any platform can read a binary format OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC .Nastran running on any of
these same platforms. For example, a binary OUTPUT2 file produced by MSC Nastran running on an IBM
Main Index
Accessing Results
RS/6000 can be read by Patran running on DEC Alpha. Patran may be able to read binary format
OUTPUT2 files from other platforms if they contain 32 bit, IEEE format entities (either Big or Little
Indian).
For platforms that do not produce OUTPUT2 files in these formats, Patran MSC Nastran can read
OUTPUT2 files created with the FORM=FORMATTED option in MSC Nastran. This option can be
selected from the Analysis/Translation Parameters form in Patran and directs MSC Nastran to produce an
ASCII format OUTPUT2 file that can be moved between any platforms. The Patran MSC Nastran interface
detects this format when the OUTPUT2 file is opened, automatically converts it to the binary format, and
then reads the model and/or results into the Patran database.
An OUTPUT2 file is created by MSC Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the bulk data portion of
the input file. The formatted or unformatted OUTPUT2 file is specified in the FMS section using an
ASSIGN OUTPUT2 = filename, UNIT=#, FORM=FORMATTED (or UNFORMATTED). See
Translation Parameters, 263.
XDB Formats
The same basic issues exist for MSC.Access databases as for OUTPUT2 files. For example, the MSC.Access
database (xdb file) may be exchanged between computer Systems that have binary compatibility. That is, an
XDB file generated on a SUN Machine may be used on an IBM or SGI computers.
However, in order to exchange the XDB file on binary incompatible machines, one needs to use the TRANS
and RECEIVE utilities delivered with every installation of MSC Nastran.
TRANS converts an XDB file generated by MSC Nastran to an “equivalent” character, i.e. ASCII, file which
can be transported to another computer across the network via ftp or rcp. RECEIVE converts the character
file back into the XDB format for postprocessing.
For more information on TRANS and RECEIVE utilities, please consult the “Configuration and Operations
Guide” for V70 of MSC.Nastran.
A MSC.Access XDB database is created by MSC Nastran by placing a PARAM,POST,0 in the bulk data
portion of the input file. See Translation Parameters, 263.
In this release of the product, it is assumed that the Geometry, loads and results output all reside in the same
physical XDB file. That is, "split" XDB databases are not supported.
MASTER Formats
Using the MASTER format, you can attach to the MSC Nastran database directly saving the extra step of
creating alternate form of MSC Nastran model and results data, i.e. OP2 and/or XDB. Because the model
and results data in the MSC Nastran database tends be sequential in nature, an index provides fast “direct”
access to the data. The indexing is accomplished by two indexing modules in MSC Nastran named: ifpindx
and ofpindx.
The DRA/DBALL capability uses the MSC Nastran toolkit, i.e. MNT, capability. The MNT interfaces with
the MSC Nastran executable in a client-server. This means that in order to use the DRA/DBALL feature one
needs to have access to MSC Nastran installation. If you do not have access to a MSC Nastran installation
you will need to use the MSC Nastran mini server that is delivered with Patran to import DRA/DBALL files.
Main Index
Accessing Results
To point to a MSC Nastran installation, the location of the MSC Nastran executable is set in the following
files: p3_trans.ini(NT), .site_setup(LINUX). On Windows, the “ACommand20xx” must be set to the MSC
Nastran executable. On Linux, on the other hand, “MSP_NASTRAN_CMD20xx” needs to be set to the
MSC Nastran executable.
Note that you are required to point to a V2004 or later version of MSC Nastran. If you specify an
MSC.Nastran executable earlier than V2004 you will be presented with a modal form preventing you from
using this capability. However, you may bypass this restriction by setting the
“DRA_NAST_NOVEDRCHK” environment variable.
The DRA/MASTER functionality only supports static analysis (SOL101). This includes the support of
Superelements, grid point forces and other result types available in the OP2 or XDB translators.
This capability supports importing the model data into Patran database. Moreover, since this capability reuses
the import/bdf functionality all of the model information available in the database shall be imported
including Nodes, Elements, Coordinate systems, material properties, physical properties, loads and boundary
conditions, load cases, parameters and etc...
The “indexing” modules are tied to a system cell. That is, an MSC Nastran database is indexed and saved by
MSC Nastran by setting system cell “316” to a value “7”. This system cell tells MSC Nastran executable to
create index files for IFP and OFP datablocks and move the indexed datablocks to the “MASTER” file. This
means that one can even delete the “DBALL” file after the MSC Nastran run completes. For example, if you
would like to get an Indexed MASTER data file for the job some_job.bdf, the following must be executed:
< ...>/nastran some_job.bdf sys316=7 scr=no sdir=/tmp
This example generates a “some_job.MASTER and some_job.DBALL database files. You can delete the
*.DBALL file because it does not contain any results or model data of importance. However, if you would
like to perform a restart from the run then the DBALL file must be kept for future use but the “Master” file
may be moved to other directories at will.
The MSC Nastran toolkit environment is derived from the MSC Nastran installation via the use of the “rc”
files which is documented in the MSC.Nastran (p. 1) in the MSC.Nastran 2004 Installation and Operations
Guide. For example, you can set the amount of memory used by the MSC Nastran to 20 mega-words by
setting the “memory=20MW” in one of the “rc” files, i.e. nastran.rcf file in the current working directory on
the NT platform. This setting can be double checked using the MSC Nastran “whence” command as follows:
< ...>/nastran some_job.bdf whence=mem
The same basic issues exist for attaching to an Indexed MSC Nastran database as attaching an XDB database.
That is, the MSC Nastran database (MASTER file) may be exchanged among computer Systems that have
binary compatibility. That is, a MASTER file generated on a SUN Machine can not be used on an IBM or
SGI computers.
However, at this time it is not possible to exchange the MASTER file on binary incompatible machines.
T16/T19 Formats
The T16 file is the Marc binary results file and the T19 file is the Marc ASCII results (POST) file that are
created by a SOL 600 analysis, the contents of which can be imported or attached for postprocessing. When
domain decomposition is used, multiple files are produced where # is the domain number. This file format
Main Index
Accessing Results
is recommended for post-processing SOL 600 runs since it has more information, such as contact info and
additional nonlinear analysis information, then the xdbor OP2 formats.
These results file types are used for accessing SOL 600 results.
3dplot Formats
The 3dplot ptf file is the LS-Dyna binary results file that are created by a SOL 700 analysis, the contents of
which can be attached for postprocessing.
This option is available only for Explicit Nonlinear.
OUTPUT2
This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Read Output2 is the
selected Object. When reading results there are three Method options that may be selected: Result Entities,
Model Data or Both. This form affects import of all these objects as noted below
Main Index
Accessing Results

Tolerances
 Division Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used
 Numerical to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when
comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only
these tolerances are available.
MSC.Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC .Nastran that created the OUTPUT2 file to be
read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and
version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be
translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified.
Additional Results to be Imported
 Rotational Nodal Results Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during translation.
 Stress/Strain Invariants Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain
Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected
 Principal Directions will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational
Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor
Principal Directions are ignored during translation.
 P-element P-order Field Creates a field that describes the polynomial orders in all p-elements in the
model at the end of an adaptive cycle.
Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter will
indicate which results are to be included in the translation.
Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187)

Patran calculates combined stresses (like bar stresses, principal stresses and von Mises stresses by default,
rather than reading these values from the OP2 files. If Patran does this, the combined stresses will be
incorrectly calculated from summed results. It is necessary to calculate the combined stresses on a mode-by-
mode basis, and NRL sum the combined results.
To obtain correct results, it is necessary to explicitly tell Patran to read the combined values. Select the
Translation Parameters button on the Analysis form when reading results in. On the form, you can select the
box labeled Stress/Strain Invariants. This produces a number of additional results for each result case. These
additional results are the correct von Mises and Principal stresses. The ones that Patran displays when you
choose Stress Tensor are the incorrect values.
Main Index
Accessing Results
XDB and HDF5

This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters button is selected and Result Entities is the
selected Object.
Tolerances
 Division Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is used to
 Numerical prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used when comparing
real values for equality. When the Object is set to Model Data, only these
tolerances are available.
MSC.Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC. Nastran that created the OUTPUT2 file to be
read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than 67 and
version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results may be
translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified.
Main Index
Accessing Results
 Rotational Nodal Results Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during translation.
 Stress/Strain Invariants Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain
Principal Direction Results can be skipped during translation. Items selected
 Principal Directions will be translated. Items not selected will be skipped. By default, Rotational
Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor
Principal Directions are ignored during translation.
Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter will
indicate which results are to be included in the translation.
MASTER
This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters... button is selected and MASTER is the
selected Object.
Tolerances
Main Index
Accessing Results
 Division Defines the tolerances used during translation. The division tolerance is
 Numerical used to prevent division by zero errors. The numerical tolerance is used
when comparing real values for equality. When the Object is set to
Model Data, only these tolerances are available.
MSC.Nastran Version Specifies the version of MSC .Nastran that created the OUTPUT2 file
to be read. Solid Element orientation differs between versions less than
67 and version 67 and above. Elementally oriented Solid element results
may be translated incorrectly if the wrong version is specified.
 Rotational Nodal Results Indicates which results categories are to be filtered out during
 Stress/Strain Invariants translation. Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain Invariants, and
Stress and Strain Principal Direction Results can be skipped during
 Principal Directions translation. Items selected will be translated. Items not selected will be
skipped. By default, Rotational Nodal Results, Stress and Strain
Invariants, and Stress and Strain Tensor Principal Directions are ignored
during translation.
 P-element P-order Field Creates a field that describes the polynomial orders in all p-elements in
the model at the end of an adaptive cycle.
Element Results Positions If an element has results at both the centroid and at the nodes, this filter
will indicate which results are to be included in the translation.
Main Index
Accessing Results
T16/T19
This subordinate form appears when the Translation Parameters... button is selected and T16/T19 is the
selected Object.
Model Import Options

 Create Groups by PIDs Creates groups for each element type encountered in the model.
 Geometry Import Imports any NURB based rigid geometry found in the POST file into the database.
Select Mesh Pertains to importing results and model data from adaptive meshing analyses. In order
for this toggle to be active, a results file must have been selected first in which case it is
scanned to show the available meshes and to which load increments they are associated.
You can select which meshes/increments are imported in the provided list box. Adaptive
meshing is not supported in MSC.Nastran 2004.
Available Increments Defines the increments available for import from the results file.
Main Index
Supported OUTPUT2 Result and Model Quantities

The following table indicates all the possible results quantities that can be loaded into the Patran database
during results translation from MSC Nastran. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the
postprocessing menus. The Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor, and determines
which postprocessing techniques are available to view the results quantity. Data Block indicates which MSC
Nastran OUTPUT2 data block the data comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the
results quantity, such as if it is only for certain element types, and what Output Request selection will generate
this data block. For design optimization, all of the listed results can be loaded as a function of design cycle.
Results
Primary Label Secondary Label Type DataBlocks Description

Acoustic Intensity Scalar OAIG1 Acoustic intensity on surface in
contact with fluid.
Acoustic Radiated Power Scalar OARPWR1 Acoustic power radiated from
surface in contact with fluid.
Acoustic Field Point Mesh Vector OUGFP1 Acoustic results for Field Point
Mesh.
Acoustic Velocity @ FPM Grids Vector OVGFP1 Acoustic velocities at the node
points of Field Point Mesh.
Bar Forces Rotational Vector OEF1 Bar moments
Translational Vector OEF1 Bar forces
Warping Torque Scalar OEF1 Warping torque
Bar Strains Axial Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Axial safety margin
Compression Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in compression
Maximum Axial Scalar OSTR1 Maximum axial strain
Minimum Axial Scalar OSTR1 Minimum axial strain
Tension Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in tension
Torsional Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Safety margin in torsion
Bar Stresses Axial Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Axial safety margin
Compression Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in compression
Maximum Axial Scalar OES1 Maximum axial stress
Minimum Axial Scalar OES1 Minimum axial stress
Tension Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in tension
Torsional Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Safety margin in torsion
Main Index

Grid Point Stress Tensor Tensor OGS1 Stress tensor
Stresses Zero Shear Angle Scalar OGS1 Zero shear angle
Major Principal Scalar OGS1 Major principal
Minor Principal Scalar OGS1 Minor principal
Maximum Shear Scalar OGS1 Maximum shear
von Mises Scalar OGS1 von mises
Gap Results Displacement Vector OEF1 or OES1 Gap element displacement
Force Vector OEF1 or OES1 Gap element force
Slip Vector OEF1 or OES1 Gap element slip
Nonlinear Strains Creep Strain Scalar OESNL1 Creep strain
Plastic Strain Scalar OESNL1 Plastic strain
Strain Tensor Tensor OESNL1 Strain tensor
Nonlinear Equivalent Stress Scalar OESNL1 Equivalent stress
Stresses Stress Tensor Tensor OESNL1 Stress tensor
Principal Strain 1st Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal x cosine
Direction 1st Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal y cosine
1st Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 1st Principal z cosine
2nd Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal x cosine
2nd Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal y cosine
2nd Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 2nd Principal z cosine
3rd Principal x cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal x cosine
3rd Principal y cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal y cosine
3rd Principal z cosine Scalar OSTR1 3rd Principal z cosine
Zero Shear Angle Scalar OSTR1 Zero shear angle
Main Index

Principal Stress 1st Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal x cosine
Direction 1st Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal y cosine
1st Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 1st Principal z cosine
2nd Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal x cosine
2nd Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal y cosine
2nd Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 2nd Principal z cosine
3rd Principal x cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal x cosine
3rd Principal y cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal y cosine
3rd Principal z cosine Scalar OES1 3rd Principal z cosine
Zero Shear Angle Scalar OES1 Zero shear angle
Shear Panel Force12 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 1 to 2
Forces Force14 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 1 to 4
Force21 Scalar OEF1 Shear force from nodes 2 to 1
Kick Scalar OEF1 Kick forces
Rotational Vector OEF1 Moments at nodes
Shear Scalar OEF1 Shear force in panel
Translational Vector OEF1 Forces at nodes
Shear Panel Average Shear Scalar OSTR1 Average shear strain in panel
Strains Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Maximum shear strain in panel
Safety Margin Scalar OSTR1 Shear safety margin of panel
Shear Panel Average Shear Scalar OES1 Average shear stress in panel
Stresses Maximum Shear Scalar OES1 Maximum shear stress in panel
Safety Margin Scalar OES1 Shear safety margin of panel
Shell Forces Force Resultant Tensor OEF1 Force resultants and moment
resultants
Moment Resultant Tensor OEF1 Moment stress resultants
Main Index

Strain Curvatures Strain Tensor Tensor OSTR1 Strain curvatures of a plate
1st Principal Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of strain 1st principal
2nd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of strain 2nd principal
Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of maximum shear
strain
von Mises Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of von Mises strain
Zero Shear Angle Scalar OSTR1 Curvature of zero shear angle
Strain Energy Energy Scalar ONRGY1 Element’s total strain energy
Energy Density Scalar ONRGY1 Element’s strain energy density
Percent of Total Scalar ONRGY1 Element’s percentage of total strain
density
Strain Invariants 1st Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 1st principal
2nd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 2nd principal
3rd Principal Scalar OSTR1 Strain 3rd principal
Maximum Shear Scalar OSTR1 Maximum shear strain
Mean Pressure Scalar OSTR1 Mean strain pressure
Octahedral Shear Scalar OSTR1 Octahedral shear strain
von Mises Scalar OSTR1 von Mises equivalent strain
Strain Tensor NONE Tensor OSTR1 Strain tensor
Stress Invariants 1st Principal Scalar OES1 Stress 1st Principal
2nd Principal Scalar OES1 Stress 2nd Principal
3rd Principal Scalar OES1 Strain 3rd Principal
Maximum Shear Scalar OES1 Maximum shear stress
Mean Pressure Scalar OES1 Mean stress principal
Octahedral Shear Scalar OES1 Octahedral shear stress
von Mises Scalar OES1 von Mises equivalent stress
Stress Tensor NONE Tensor OES1 Stress tensor
Accelerations Rotational Vector OUGV1 Nodal angular accelerations
Translational Vector OUGV1 Nodal translational accelerations
Applied Loads Rotational Vector OPG1 Nodal equivalent applied
moments
Translational Vector OPG1 Nodal equivalent applied forces
Main Index

Constraint Forces Rotational Vector OQG1 Nodal moments of single-point
constraints
Translational Vector OQG1 Nodal forces of single-point
constraint
Displacements Rotational Vector OUGV1 Nodal rotational displacements
Translational Vector OUGV1 Nodal translational displacements
Eigenvectors Rotational Vector OPHIG Nodal rotational eigenvectors
Translational Vector OPHIG Nodal translational eigenvectors
Nonlinear Rotational Vector OPNL1 Nodal nonlinear applied moments
Applied Loads
Main Index

Translational Vector OPNL1 Nodal nonlinear applied forces
Velocities Rotational Vector OUGV1 Nodal angular velocity
Translational Vector OUGV1 Nodal translational velocity
Error Estimate Scalar ERROR Elemental error in adaptive
analysis
Grid Point Forces Elements Vector OGPFB1* Internal nodal force contribution
by element
Applied Loads Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent applied forces
Constraint Forces Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent constraint forces
Total Vector OGPFB1* Total nodal equivalent forces due
to internal loads, applied loads and
constraint forces.
Grid Point Elements Vector OGPFB1* Internal nodal moment
Moments contribution by element
Applied Loads Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent applied
moments
Constraint Forces Vector OGPFB1* Nodal equivalent constraint
moments
Total Vector OGPFB1* Total nodal equivalent moments
due to internal loads, applied loads
and constraint forces.
Shape Change None Vector GEOMIN In a shape optimization run, this
is the new shape displayed as a
deformation of the original shape.
Active Element Stress Scalar R1TABRG Element stress
Constraints Element Strain Scalar R1TABRG Element strain
Element Force Scalar R1TABRG Element force
Element Ply Failure Scalar R1TABRG Element ply failure
Translational Displacement Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational displacement
Rotational Displacement Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational displacement
Translational Velocity Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational velocity
Rotational Velocity Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational velocity
Translational Acceleration Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational acceleration
Rotational Acceleration Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational acceleration
Translational SPC Vector R1TABRG Nodal translational SPC force
Rotational SPC Vector R1TABRG Nodal rotational SPC force
Main Index
Global Variables
In addition to standard results quantities, a number of Global Variables can be created. This table outlines
Global Variables that may be created. Global Variables are results quantities where one value is representative
of the entire model.
Labels Type DataBlocks Description

Critical Load Factor S Oxxx Value of buckling load for the given buckling mode.
Time S Oxxx Time value of the time step.
Frequency S Oxxx Frequency value of the frequency step or for the normal mode.
Damping Ratio S Oxxx Damping ratio value of a complex eigenvalue analysis.
Eigenvalue S Oxxx Eigenvalue for normal modes or complex eigenvalue analysis.
Percent of Load S Oxxx Percent of load value for a nonlinear static analysis.
Adaptive Cycle S Oxxx Cycle number in p-adaptive analysis.
Design Cycle S Oxxx Cycle number in an optimization run (SOL 200).
Design Variable S DESTAB Design Variable for optimization (Label from DESTAB, value
HISADD from HISADD).
Maximum Constraint Value S HISADD Maximum constraint value for optimization.
Objective Function S HISADD Objective function for optimization.
Coordinate Systems
In some cases, the elemental stresses and strains are transformed from one coordinate frame to another when
imported into the Patran database. The following describes the coordinate systems for these element results
after they are imported into the Patran database. The coordinate system names referred to are described in
the Patran or the MSC Nastran documentation.
CTRIA3 Results are in the MSC Nastran system which coincides with the Patran IJK system. At the user’s request
during postprocessing, these results can be transformed by Patran to alternate coordinate systems. If the
user selects a component of a stress or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application
transforms the tensor to a projected global system (Projected Global System).
CQUAD4 Results are in the MSC Nastran “bisector” coordinate system but may be transformed by Patran to
alternate coordinate systems (e.g., global) during postprocessing. If the user selects a component of a stress
or strain tensor to be displayed, by default, the Results application transforms the tensor to a projected
global system (Projected Global System). Import of results when this element is used in a hyperelastic
analysis is not currently supported.
Main Index
CHEXA, The user can request that MSC Nastran compute element results in either a local element or alternate
CPENTA, coordinate system via the PSOLID entry. If the element results are in the local element system, these are
CTETRA converted to the Patran IJK system on import. If the results are in a system other than local element, they
are imported in this system. These results may be transformed to alternate systems during postprocessing.
CQUAD8, The elemental coordinate system, used by MSC Nastran for results, is described in the MSC Nastran
CTRI6 documentation. These results are imported into the Patran database “as-is”. These results can be
postprocessed in Patran using the “As Is” options, but they cannot be transformed to alternate coordinate
systems.
Projected Global System

The projected system is defined as follows. First, the normal to the shell surface is calculated. This varies for
curved elements and is constant for flat elements. If the angle between the normal and the global x-axis is
greater than .01 radians, the global x-axis is projected onto the shell surface as the local x-axis. If the angle is
less than .01 radians, either the global y-axis or the z-axis (whichever makes the largest angle with the normal)
is defined to be the local x-axis. The local y-axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by the normal and the
local x-axis.
XY Plots
For results from MSC Nastran design optimization solution 200 runs, three XY Plots are generated, but not
posted, when the Read OUTPUT2 option is selected:
1. Objective Function vs. Design Cycle.
1. Maximum Constraint Value vs. Design Cycle.
1. Design Variable vs. Design Cycle.
These plots can be viewed under the XY Plot option in (p. 1) in the Patran User’s Guide. When they are initially
posted, you will have to expand their windows to view them properly.
Main Index
Supported T16/T19 Results Quantities
Model Data
The following table outlines all the data that will be created in the Patran database when reading model data
from an MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 file and the location in the OUTPUT2 file from where it is derived. This
is the only data extracted from the OUTPUT2 file. This data should be sufficient for evaluating results values.
Item Block Description

Nodes GEOM1 Node ID
Nodal Coordinates
Reference Coordinate Frame
Analysis Coordinate Frame

Coordinate Frames GEOM1 Coordinate Frame ID
Transformation Matrix
Origin
Can be Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical

Elements GEOM2 Element ID
Topology (e.g., Quad/4 or Hex20)
Nodal Connectivity

The following table indicates all the possible result quantities which can be loaded into the Patran database
from the t16 file. The Primary and Secondary Labels are items selected from the postprocessing menus. The
Type indicates whether the results are Scalar, Vector, or Tensor. These types will determine which
postprocessing techniques will be available in order to view the results quantity. Postcodes indicates which
Marc element postcodes (selected automatically or by MSC Nastran Bulk Data entry MARCOUT) the data
comes from. The Description gives a brief discussion about the results quantity. The Output Request forms use
the actual primary and secondary labels which will appear in the results. For example, if “Strain, Elastic” is
selected on the Element Output Requests form, the “Strain, Elastic” is created for postprocessing.
Primary Label Secondary Label Type Postcodes Description

Displacement Translation Vector 1 (nodal) Translational displacements at nodes from a
structural analysis.
Displacement Rotation Vector 2 (nodal) Rotational displacements at nodes from a
Velocity Translation Vector 28 (nodal) Translational velocities at nodes from a
dynamic analysis.
Main Index

Velocity Rotation Vector 29 (nodal) Rotational velocities at nodes.
Acceleration Translation Vector 30 (nodal) Translational accelerations at nodes from a
dynamic analysis.
Acceleration Rotation Vector 31 (nodal) Rotational accelerations at nodes from a
dynamic analysis.
Force Nodal External Vector 3 (nodal) Forces applied to the model in a structural
Applied analysis.
Force Nodal Reaction Vector 5 (nodal) Reaction forces at boundary conditions from
a structural analysis.
Moment Nodal External Vector 4 (nodal) Moments applied to the model in a structural
Applied analysis.
Moment Nodal Reaction Vector 6 (nodal) Reaction moments at boundary conditions
from a structural analysis.
Modal Mass Translation Vector 32 (nodal) Translational modal masses from modal
extractions.
Modal Mass Rotation Vector 33 (nodal) Rotational modal masses from modal
extractions.
Temperature Nodal Scalar 14 (nodal) Temperature at nodes from a thermal analysis.
Velocity Fluid Vector 7 (nodal) Fluid Velocity
Main Index

Flux Nodal Scalar 15 (nodal) Heat Flux applied to the model in a thermal
analysis.
Pressure Fluid Scalar 8 (nodal) Fluid Pressure
Force External Fluid Vector 9 (nodal) External Fluid Force
Force Reaction Fluid Vector 10 (nodal) Reaction Fluid Force
Pressure Sound Scalar 11 (nodal) Sound Pressure
Source External Sound Scalar 12 (nodal) External Sound Source
Source Reaction Sound Scalar 13 (nodal) Reaction Sound Source
Flux Nodal Reaction Scalar 16 (nodal) Nodal Reaction Flux
Potential Electric Scalar 17 (nodal) Electric Potential
Charge External Electric Scalar 18 (nodal) External Electric Charge
Charge Reaction Electric Scalar 19 (nodal) Reaction Electric Charge
Potential Magnetic Scalar 20 (nodal) Magnetic Potential
Current External Electric Scalar 21 (nodal) External Electric Current
Current Reaction Electric Scalar 22 (nodal) Reaction Electric Current
Pressure Pore Scalar 23 (nodal) Pore Pressure
Flux External Mass Scalar 24 (nodal) External Mass Flux
Flux Reaction Mass Scalar 25 (nodal) Reaction Mass Flux
Pressure Bearing Scalar 26 (nodal) Bearing Pressure
Force Bearing Scalar 27 (nodal) Bearing Force
Stress Contact Normal Vector 34 (nodal) Contact Normal Stress
Force Contact Normal Vector 35 (nodal) Contact Normal Force
Stress Friction Vector 36 (nodal) Friction Stress
Force Friction Vector 37 (nodal) Friction Force
Contact Status Scalar 38 (nodal) Contact Status
Contact Touched Body Scalar 39 (nodal) Touched Body Contact
Variable Herrmann Scalar 40 (nodal) Herrmann Variable
Post Code No. -11 through -16 Tensor -11 thru -16, User defined nodal quantities via user
(nodal) subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -21 through -23 Vector -21 thru -23, User defined nodal quantities via user
(nodal) subroutine UPSTNO.
Post Code No. -31 Scalar -31, (nodal) User defined nodal quantities via user
subroutine UPSTNO.
Main Index

subroutine UPSTNO.
subroutine UPSTNO.
Strain Cracking Tensor 81-86 or 381 Cracking strain from a nonlinear structural
analysis.
Strain Creep Tensor 31-36 or 331 Creep strain from a nonlinear structural
analysis.
Strain Creep Equivalent Scalar 37 Equivalent creep strain from a nonlinear
Strain Creep Equivalent Scalar 8 Equivalent creep strain determined from rate
(from rate) from a nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Elastic Tensor 121-126 or Elastic strain from a structural analysis.
401
Strain Elastic Equivalent Scalar 127 Equivalent elastic strain from a structural
analysis.
Strain Plastic Tensor 21-26 or 321 Plastic strain from a nonlinear structural
analysis.
Strain Plastic Equivalent Scalar 27 Equivalent plastic strain from a nonlinear
Strain Plastic Equivalent Scalar 7 Equivalent plastic strain determined from rate
(from rate) from a nonlinear structural analysis.
Strain Plastic Equivalent Scalar 28 Equivalent plastic strain rate from a nonlinear
Rate structural analysis.
Strain Thermal Tensor 71-76 or 371 Thermal strain from a structural analysis.
Strain Thickness Scalar 49 Thickness strain from a structural analysis.
Strain Total Tensor 1-6 or 301 Total strain from a structural analysis.
Temperature Element Scalar 9 Element temperature from a thermal or
Temperature Element Gradient Vector 181-183 Element temperature gradient from a thermal
analysis.
Temperature Element Incremental Scalar 10 Incremental element temperature from a
thermal or structural analysis.
Stress Tensor 11-16 or 311 Stress from a structural analysis.
Stress Cauchy Tensor 41-46 or 341 Cauchy stress from a nonlinear structural
analysis.
Main Index

Stress Cauchy Equivalent Scalar 47 Equivalent Cauchy stress from a nonlinear
Mises structural analysis.
Stress Equivalent Mises Scalar 17 Equivalent (von mises) stress from a structural
analysis.
Stress Hydrostatic Scalar 18 Hydrostatic stress from a structural analysis.
Stress Interlaminar Shear Scalar 108 Interlaminar shear in one direction from a
No. 1 structural analysis.
Stress Interlaminar Shear Scalar 109 Interlaminar shear in two direction from a
No. 2 structural analysis.
Energy Density Elastic Scalar 48 Elastic strain energy density from a structural
analysis.
Energy Density Plastic Scalar 58 Plastic strain energy density from a nonlinear
Energy Density Total Scalar 68 Total strain energy density from a structural
analysis.
Flux Element Vector 184-186 Element heat flux from a thermal analysis.
State Variable Second Scalar 29 Second state variable from a nonlinear
thermal or structural analysis.
State Variable Third Scalar 39 Third state variable from a nonlinear thermal
or structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 1 Scalar 91 Failure index one from a structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 2 Scalar 92 Failure index two from a structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 3 Scalar 93 Failure index three from a structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 4 Scalar 94 Failure index four from a structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 5 Scalar 95 Failure index five from a structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 6 Scalar 96 Failure index six from a structural analysis.
Failure Index No. 7 Scalar 97 Failure index seven from a structural analysis.
Thickness Scalar 20 Element thickness from a thermal or
Volume Scalar 78 Element Volume from a thermal or structural
analysis.
Main Index
Supported MSC.Access Result Quantities
In addition to these standard results quantities, several Global Variable results can be created. Global
Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of the entire model. The following table
defines the Global Variables which may be created.
Global Variable Label Type Description

Increment Scalar Increment of the analysis.
Time Scalar Time of the analysis.
Buckling Mode Scalar Buckling mode number.
Critical Load Factor Scalar Critical load factor for buckling analysis.
Dynamic Mode Scalar Dynamic mode number from modal extraction.
Frequency (radians/time) Scalar Frequency in radians per unit time for modal extraction.

The following tables list the currently supported quantities from the MSC.Access database (xdb file).To get
further information on the MSC.Access, i.e. XDB, objects supported in Patran, please use the ddlprt and
ddlqry utilities delivered with every installation of MSC Nastran.
ddlprt is MSC.Access' on-line documentation.
ddlqry is MSC.Access’ Data Definition Language (DDL) browser.
See “Configuration and Operations Guide” for MSC.Nastran V70.
Nodal Results
Primary Label Secondary Label Type Objects

Displacements Translational VECTOR DISPR
Rotational VECTOR DISPR
Translational VECTOR DISPRI
Rotational VECTOR DISPRI
Translational VECTOR DISPMP
Rotational VECTOR DISPMP
Main Index

Eigenvectors Translational VECTOR DISPR
Rotational VECTOR DISPR
Translational VECTOR DISPRI
Rotational VECTOR DISPRI
Translational VECTOR DISPMP
Rotational VECTOR DISPMP
Velocities Translational VECTOR VELOR
Rotational VECTOR VELOR
Translational VECTOR VELORI
Rotational VECTOR VELORI
Translational VECTOR VELOMP
Rotational VECTOR VELOMP
Accelerations Translational VECTOR ACCER
Rotational VECTOR ACCER
Translational VECTOR ACCERI
Rotational VECTOR ACCERI
Translational VECTOR ACCEMP
Rotational VECTOR ACCEMP
Constraint Forces Translational VECTOR SPCFR
Rotational VECTOR SPCFR
Translational VECTOR SPCFRI
Rotational VECTOR SPCFRI
Translational VECTOR SPCFMP
Rotational VECTOR SPCFMP
Applied Loads Translational VECTOR LOADR
Rotational VECTOR LOADR
Translational VECTOR LOADRI
Rotational VECTOR LOADRI
Translational VECTOR LOADMP
Rotational VECTOR LOADMP
Main Index

Grid Point Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR SGSVR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SGSVR
Major Principal SCALAR SGSVR
Minor Principal SCALAR SGSVR
Maximum Shear SCALAR SGSVR
Von Mises SCALAR SGSVR
Grid Point Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR SGVVR
Mean Pressure SCALAR SGVVR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR SGVVR
Major Principal SCALAR SGVVR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR SGVVR
Minor Principal SCALAR SGSVR
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SGSVR
Grid Point Strains Strain Tensor TENSOR EGSVR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EGSVR
Major Principal SCALAR EGSVR
Minor Principal SCALAR EGSVR
Maximum Shear SCALAR EGSVR
Von Mises SCALAR EGSVR
Main Index

Grid Point Strains Strain Tensor TENSOR EGVVR
Mean Pressure SCALAR EGVVR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR EGVVR
Major Principal SCALAR EGVVR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR EGVVR
Minor Principal SCALAR EGSVR
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EGSVR
GPS discontinunities Stress Tensor TENSOR SGSDTR
Major Principal SCALAR SGSDTR
Minor Principal SCALAR SGSDTR
Maximum Shear SCALAR SGSDTR
Von Mises SCALAR SGSDTR
Error Estimate SCALAR SGSDTR
Stress Tensor TENSOR SGVDTR
Mean Pressure SCALAR SGVDTR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR SGVDTR
Major Principal SCALAR SGVDTR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR SGVDTR
Minor Principal SCALAR SGVDTR
Error Estimate Direct SCALAR SGVDTR
Error Estimate Principal SCALAR SGVDTR
Main Index

Elem Stress discontinunities Stress Tensor TENSOR DQD4VR, DQD8VR,
DQDRVR, DTR6VR,
DTRRVR
Major Principal SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR,
DQDRVR, DTR6VR,
DTRRVR
Minor Principal SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR,
DQDRVR, DTR6VR,
DTRRVR
Maximum Shear SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR,
DQDRVR, DTR6VR,
DTRRVR
Von Mises SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR,
DQDRVR, DTR6VR,
DTRRVR
Error Estimate SCALAR DQD4VR, DQD8VR,
DQDRVR, DTR6VR,
DTRRVR
Stresss Tensor TENSOR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Mean Pressure SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Major Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Minor Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Error Estimate Direct SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
Error Estimate Principal SCALAR DHEXVR, DPENVR,
DTETVR
MPC Constraint Forces Translational VECTOR MPCFR, MPCFRI,
MPCFMP
Rotational VECTOR MPCFR, MPCFRI,
MPCFMP
Main Index

Grid Point Forces Applied Loads VECTOR GPFV
Constraint Forces VECTOR GPFV
MPC Forces VECTOR GPFV
Elements VECTOR GPFV
Total VECTOR GPFV
Grid Point Moments Applied Loads VECTOR GPFV
Constraint Forces VECTOR GPFV
MPC Forces VECTOR GPFV
Elements VECTOR GPFV
Total VECTOR GPFV
Bushing Forces Translational, VECTOR FBSHR, FBSHRI,
Rotational FBSHMP
Bushing Stresses Translational, VECTOR SBSHR, SBSHRI,
Rotational SBSHMP
Bushing Strains Translational, VECTOR EBSHR, EBSHRI,
Rotational EBSHMP
Bushing 1-D Results Axial Stress, Axial Strain, SCALAR SBS1R, SBS1RI, SBS1MP
Axial Force,
Axial Displacement
Nonlinear Bushing Force Axial Stress, Axial Strain, SCALAR NBS1R, NBS1RI,
Axial Force, NBS1MP
Axial Displacement
Temperature SCALAR THERR
Enthalpies SCALAR ENTHR
Rates of Enthalpy Change SCALAR ENRCR
Constraint Heats SCALAR HTFFR
Applied Loads SCALAR HTFLR
Main Index

Boundary Heat Flux Applied Loads SCALAR QHBDY
Free Convection SCALAR QHBDY
Forced Convection SCALAR QHBDY
Radiation SCALAR QHBDY
Total SCALAR QHBDY
Heat Fluxes VECTOR QBARR,
QBEMR,QCONR,
QHEXR,QPENR,
QQD4R, QQD8R,
QRODR, QTETR,
QTUBR, QTX6R
Temperature Gradients VECTOR QBARR, QBEMR,
QCONR,
QHEXR,QPENR,
QQD4R, QQD8R,
QRODR, QTETR,
QTUBR, QTX6R
Main Index
Elemental Results

Bar Forces Translational VECTOR FBEMR
Rotational VECTOR FBEMR
Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMR
Translational VECTOR FBEMRI
Rotational VECTOR FBEMRI
Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMRI
Translational VECTOR FBEMMP
Rotational VECTOR FBEMMP
Warping Torque SCALAR FBEMMP
Translational VECTOR FTUBR
Rotational VECTOR FTUBR
Translational VECTOR FTUBRI
Rotational VECTOR FTUBRI
Translational VECTOR FTUBMP
Rotational VECTOR FTUBMP
Translational VECTOR FCONR
Rotational VECTOR FCONR
Translational VECTOR FCONRI
Rotational VECTOR FCONRI
Translational VECTOR FCONMP
Rotational VECTOR FCONMP
Translational VECTORs FELSR
FELSRI
FELSMP
FDMPR
FDMPRI
FDMPMP
Rotational VECTOR FBARR
Translational VECTOR FBARR
Rotational VECTOR FBARRI
Translational VECTOR FBARRI
Main Index

Bar Forces (continued Rotational VECTOR FBARMP
Translational VECTOR FBARMP
Translational VECTOR FBRXR
Rotational VECTOR FBRXR
Shear Panel Forces Force41 SCALAR FSHRR
Force21 SCALAR FSHRR
Kick SCALAR FSHRR
Shear SCALAR FSHRR
Force41 SCALAR FSHRRI
Kick SCALAR FSHRRI
Shear SCALAR FSHRRI
Force41 SCALAR FSHRMP
Main Index

Shear Panel Forces Kick SCALAR FSHRMP
(continued) Shear SCALAR FSHRMP
Shell Forces Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4R
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4R
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4RI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4RI
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4MP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4MP
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8R
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8R
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8RI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8RI
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD8MP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD8MP
Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRR
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRR
Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRRI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRRI
Force Resultant TENSOR FTRRMP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTRRMP
Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3R
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3R
Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3RI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3RI
Force Resultant TENSOR FTR3MP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR3MP
Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6R
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6R
Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6RI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6RI
Force Resultant TENSOR FTR6MP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FTR6MP
Main Index

Shell Forces (continued) Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRR
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRR
Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRRI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRRI
Force Resultant TENSOR FQDRMP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQDRMP
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XR
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XR
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XRI
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XRI
Force Resultant TENSOR FQD4XMP
Moment Resultant TENSOR FQD4XMP
Gap Results Force VECTOR FGAPR
Displacement VECTOR FGAPR
Slip VECTOR FGAPR
Force VECTOR NGAPR
Displacement VECTOR NGAPR
Slip VECTOR NGAPR
Stress Tensor NONE TENSOR SRODR
TENSOR SRODRI
TENSOR SRODMP
TENSOR SBEMR
NONE TENSOR SBEMRI
TENSOR SBEMMP
NONE TENSOR STUBR
TENSOR STUBRI
TENSOR STUBMP
NONE TENSOR SCONR
TENSOR SCONRI
TENSOR SCONMP
Main Index

Stress Tensor (continued) NONE TENSOR SELSR
TENSOR SELSRI
TENSOR SELSMP
NONE TENSOR SQD4R
TENSOR SQD4RI
TENSOR SQD4MP
NONE TENSOR SBARR
TENSOR SBARRI
TENSOR SBARMP
NONE TENSOR STETR
TENSOR STETRI
TENSOR STETMP
NONE TENSOR STX6R
NONE TENSOR SQD8R
TENSOR SQD8RI
TENSOR SQD8MP
NONE TENSOR SHEXR
TENSOR SHEXRI
TENSOR SHEXMP
NONE TENSOR SPENR
TENSOR SPENRI
TENSOR SPENMP
NONE TENSOR STRRR
TENSOR STRRRI
TENSOR STRRMP
NONE TENSOR STR6R
TENSOR STR6RI
TENSOR STR6MP
NONE TENSOR STR3R
TENSOR STR3RI
TENSOR STR3MP
Main Index

Stress Tensor (continued) NONE TENSOR SQDRR
TENSOR SQDRRI
TENSOR SQDRMP
NONE TENSOR TQD4R
NONE TENSOR TQD8R
NONE TENSOR TTR3R
NONE TENSOR TTR6R
NONE TENSOR SBRXR
NONE TENSOR SQD4XR
TENSOR SQD4XRI
TENSOR SQD4XMP
NONE TENSOR SBRXR
Bar Stresses Maximum Axial SCALAR SBEMR
Minimum Axial SCALAR SBEMR
Maximum Axial SCALAR SBARR
Minimum Axial SCALAR SBARR
Tension Safety Margin SCALAR SBARR
Maximum Axial SCALAR SBRXR
Minimum Axial SCALAR SBRXR
Maximum Axial SCALAR SBRXR
Minimum Axial SCALAR SBRXR
Bar Strains Maximum Axial SCALAR EBEMR
Minimum Axial SCALAR EBEMR
Maximum Axial SCALAR EBARR
Minimum Axial SCALAR EBARR
Tension Safety Margin SCALAR EBARR
Compressive Safety Margin SCALAR EBARR
Maximum Axial SCALAR EBRXR
Minimum Axial SCALAR EBRXR
Maximum Axial SCALAR EBRXR
Minimum Axial SCALAR EBRXR
Main Index

Strain Tensor NONE ENG_TENSOR ERODR
ENG_TENSOR ERODRI
ENG_TENSOR ERODMP
ENG_TENSOR EBEMR
ENG_TENSOR EBEMRI
ENG_TENSOR EBEMMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR ETUBR
ENG_TENSOR ETUBRI
ENG_TENSOR ETUBMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR ECONR
ENG_TENSOR ECONRI
ENG_TENSOR ECONMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR EELSR
ENG_TENSOR EELSRI
ENG_TENSOR EELSMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR EQD4R
ENG_TENSOR EQD4RI
ENG_TENSOR EQD4MP
NONE ENG_TENSOR EBARRI
ENG_TENSOR EBARR
ENG_TENSOR EBARMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR ETETR
ENG_TENSOR ETETRI
ENG_TENSOR ETETMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR EQD8R
ENG_TENSOR EQD8RI
ENG_TENSOR EQD8MP
Main Index

Strain Tensor (continued) NONE ENG_TENSOR EQDRR
ENG_TENSOR EQDRRI
ENG_TENSOR EQDRMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR GQD4R
NONE ENG_TENSOR GQD8R
NONE ENG_TENSOR GTR3R
NONE ENG_TENSOR GTR6R
NONE ENG_TENSOR EBRXR
NONE ENG_TENSOR EQD4XR
ENG_TENSOR EQD4XRI
ENG_TENSOR EQD4XMP
NONE ENG_TENSOR EBRXR
Shear Panel Stresses Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRR
Average Shear SCALAR SSHRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRRI
Average Shear SCALAR SSHRRI
Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRMP
Average Shear SCALAR SSHRMP
Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRR
Average Shear SCALAR SSHRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRRI
Average Shear SCALAR SSHRRI
Maximum Shear SCALAR SSHRMP
Average Shear SCALAR SSHRMP
Shear Panel Strains Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRR
Average Shear SCALAR ESHRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRRI
Average Shear SCALAR ESHRRI
Maximum Shear SCALAR ESHRMP
Average Shear SCALAR ESHRMP
Main Index

Principal Stress Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD4R
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR STETR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR STETR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR STETR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD8R
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SHEXR
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR SPENR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR SPENR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR SPENR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STRRR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STR6R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR STR3R
Main Index

Principal Stress Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQDRR
(continued) Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TQD4R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TQD8R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TTR3R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR TTR6R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR SQD4XR
Stress Invariants Major Principal SCALAR SQD4R
Minor Principal SCALAR SQD4R
Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD4R
Major Principal SCALAR STETR
Mean Pressure SCALAR STETR
Minor Principal SCALAR STETR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR STETR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR STETR
Von Mises SCALAR STETR
Major Principal SCALAR STX6R
Maximum Shear SCALAR STX6R
Octahedral Shear SCALAR STX6R
Von Mises SCALAR STX6R
Major Principal SCALAR SQD8R
Minor Principal SCALAR SQD8R
Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD8R
Von Mises SCALAR SQD8R
Major Principal SCALAR SHEXR
Mean Pressure SCALAR SHEXR
Minor Principal SCALAR SHEXR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR SHEXR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR SHEXR
Von Mises SCALAR SHEXR
Major Principal SCALAR SPENR
Mean Pressure SCALAR SPENR
Minor Principal SCALAR SPENR
Main Index

Stress Invariants Intermediate Principal SCALAR SPENR
(continued) Octahedral Shear SCALAR SPENR
Von Mises SCALAR SPENR
Major Principal SCALAR STRRR
Minor Principal SCALAR STRRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR STRRR
Von Mises SCALAR STRRR
Major Principal SCALAR STR6R
Minor Principal SCALAR STR6R
Maximum Shear SCALAR STR6R
Von Mises SCALAR STR6R
Major Principal SCALAR STR3R
Minor Principal SCALAR STR3R
Maximum Shear SCALAR STR3R
Von Mises SCALAR STR3R
Major Principal SCALAR SQDRR
Minor Principal SCALAR SQDRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR SQDRR
Von Mises SCALAR SQDRR
Major Principal SCALAR TQD4R
Minor Principal SCALAR TQD4R
Maximum Shear SCALAR TQD4R
Major Principal SCALAR TQD8R
Minor Principal SCALAR TQD8R
Maximum Shear SCALAR TQD8R
Major Principal SCALAR TTR3R
Minor Principal SCALAR TTR3R
Maximum Shear SCALAR TTR3R
Major Principal SCALAR TTR6R
Minor Principal SCALAR TTR6R
Maximum Shear SCALAR TTR6R
Major Principal SCALAR SQD4XR
Main Index

Stress Invariants Minor Principal SCALAR SQD4XR
(continued) Maximum Shear SCALAR SQD4XR
Von Mises SCALAR SQD4XR
Principal Strain Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD4R
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR ETETR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR ETETR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR ETETR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD8R
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EHEXR
Major Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR
Minor Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR
Intermed Prin x cosine SCALAR EPENR
Major Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR
Minor Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR
Intermed Prin y cosine SCALAR EPENR
Major Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR
Minor Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR
Intermed Prin z cosine SCALAR EPENR
Main Index

Principal Strain Direction Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETRRR
(continued) Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETR6R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR ETR3R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQDRR
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GQD4R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GQD8R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GTR3R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR GTR6R
Zero Shear Angle SCALAR EQD4XR
Strain Invariants Major Principal SCALAR EQD4R
Minor Principal SCALAR EQD4R
Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD4R
Major Principal SCALAR ETETR
Mean Pressure SCALAR ETETR
Minor Principal SCALAR ETETR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR ETETR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR ETETR
Von Mises SCALAR ETETR
Major Principal SCALAR EQD8R
Minor Principal SCALAR EQD8R
Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD8R
Von Mises SCALAR EQD8R
Major Principal SCALAR EHEXR
Mean Pressure SCALAR EHEXR
Minor Principal SCALAR EHEXR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR EHEXR
Octahedral Shear SCALAR EHEXR
Von Mises SCALAR EHEXR
Major Principal SCALAR EPENR
Mean Pressure SCALAR EPENR
Minor Principal SCALAR EPENR
Intermediate Principal SCALAR EPENR
Main Index

Strain Invariants Octahedral Shear SCALAR EPENR
(continued) Von Mises SCALAR EPENR
Major Principal SCALAR ETRRR
Minor Principal SCALAR ETRRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR ETRRR
Von Mises SCALAR ETRRR
Major Principal SCALAR ETR6R
Minor Principal SCALAR ETR6R
Maximum Shear SCALAR ETR6R
Von Mises SCALAR ETR6R
Major Principal SCALAR ETR3R
Minor Principal SCALAR ETR3R
Maximum Shear SCALAR ETR3R
Von Mises SCALAR ETR3R
Major Principal SCALAR EQDRR
Minor Principal SCALAR EQDRR
Maximum Shear SCALAR EQDRR
Von Mises SCALAR EQDRR
Major Principal SCALAR GQD4R
Minor Principal SCALAR GQD4R
Maximum Shear SCALAR GQD4R
Major Principal SCALAR GQD8R
Minor Principal SCALAR GQD8R
Maximum Shear SCALAR GQD8R
Major Principal SCALAR GTR3R
Minor Principal SCALAR GTR3R
Maximum Shear SCALAR GTR3R
Major Principal SCALAR GTR6R
Minor Principal SCALAR GTR6R
Maximum Shear SCALAR GTR6R
Major Principal SCALAR EQD4XR
Minor Principal SCALAR EQD4XR
Main Index

Strain Invariants Maximum Shear SCALAR EQD4XR
(continued) Von Mises SCALAR EQD4XR
Nonlinear Stresses Stress Tensor TENSOR NTETR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTETR
Stress Tensor TENSOR NTUBR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTUBR
Stress Tensor TENSOR NTR3R
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NTR3R
Stress Tensor TENSOR NRODR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NRODR
Stress Tensor TENSOR NQD4R
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NQD4R
Stress Tensor TENSOR NPENR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NPENR
Stress Tensor TENSOR NCONR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NCONR
Stress Tensor TENSOR NHEXR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NHEXR
Stress Tensor TENSOR NBEMR
Equivalent Stress SCALAR NBEMR
Nonlinear Strains Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTETR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NTETR
Creep Strain SCALAR NTETR
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTUBR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NTUBR
Creep Strain SCALAR NTUBR
Main Index

Nonlinear Strains Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NTR3R
(continued) Plastic Strain SCALAR NTR3R
Creep Strain SCALAR NTR3R
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NRODR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NRODR
Creep Strain SCALAR NRODR
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NQD4R
Plastic Strain SCALAR NQD4R
Creep Strain SCALAR NQD4R
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NPENR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NPENR
Creep Strain SCALAR NPENR
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NCONR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NCONR
Creep Strain SCALAR NCONR
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NHEXR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NHEXR
Creep Strain SCALAR NHEXR
Strain Tensor ENG_TENSOR NBEMR
Plastic Strain SCALAR NBEMR
Creep Strain SCALAR NBEMR
Main Index

Strain Energy Energy SCALAR URODR
Percent of Total SCALAR URODR
Energy Density SCALAR URODR
Energy SCALAR UBEMR
Percent of Total SCALAR UBEMR
Energy Density SCALAR UBEMR
Energy SCALAR UTUBR
Percent of Total SCALAR UTUBR
Energy Density SCALAR UTUBR
Energy SCALAR USHRR
Percent of Total SCALAR USHRR
Energy Density SCALAR USHRR
Energy SCALAR UCONR
Percent of Total SCALAR UCONR
Energy Density SCALAR UCONR
Energy SCALAR UELSR
Percent of Total SCALAR UELSR
Energy Density SCALAR UELSR
Energy SCALAR UDMPR
Percent of Total SCALAR UDMPR
Energy Density SCALAR UDMPR
Energy SCALAR UQD4R
Percent of Total SCALAR UQD4R
Energy Density SCALAR UQD4R
Energy SCALAR UBARR
Percent of Total SCALAR UBARR
Energy Density SCALAR UBARR
Energy SCALAR UGAPR
Percent of Total SCALAR UGAPR
Energy Density SCALAR UGAPR
Energy SCALAR UTETR
Percent of Total SCALAR UTETR
Main Index

Strain Energy Energy Density SCALAR UTETR
(continued) Energy SCALAR UTX6R
Percent of Total SCALAR UTX6R
Energy Density SCALAR UTX6R
Energy SCALAR UQD8R
Percent of Total SCALAR UQD8R
Energy Density SCALAR UQD8R
Energy SCALAR UHEXR
Percent of Total SCALAR UHEXR
Energy Density SCALAR UHEXR
Energy SCALAR UPENR
Percent of Total SCALAR UPENR
Energy Density SCALAR UPENR
Energy SCALAR UTRRR
Percent of Total SCALAR UTRRR
Energy Density SCALAR UTRRR
Energy SCALAR UTR3R
Percent of Total SCALAR UTR3R
Energy Density SCALAR UTR3R
Energy SCALAR UTR6R
Percent of Total SCALAR UTR6R
Energy Density SCALAR UTR6R
Energy SCALAR UQDRR
Percent of Total SCALAR UQDRR
Energy Density SCALAR UQDRR
Main Index

Cauchy Stresses TENSOR HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Logarithmic Strains TENSOR HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Main Index

Pressure TENSOR HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Volumetric Strains TENSOR HHEXR,
HPENR,
HQD4R,
HQDXR.
HQUDR,
HTETR,
HTR3R,
HTR6R,
HTRXR
Topology Optimization Element Density SCALAR DVHIST
Main Index
Supported 3dplot Results Quantities
Supported 3dplot Results Quantities

The following table indicates all the possible result quantities which can be loaded into the Patran database
from the LS-Dyna’s ptf file.

Displacement Nodal x, y, z displacements of nodes, in global coordinate frame.
Velocity Nodal x, y, z velocity of nodes, in global coordinate frame.
Acceleration Nodal x, y, z acceleration of nodes, in global coordinate frame.
Temperature Nodal Nodal temperature.
Forces Nodal Resultant beam forces and moments, in local beam coordinate.
Stress Element 6 components of stress tensor, at element centre and gaussian points -
top, middle, and bottom for shells.
Stress Resultants Element Stress Resultants at elements.
Strain Element 6 components of strain tensor, at element centre and gaussian points -
top, middle, and bottom for shells.
Eff. Plastic Strain Element Effective plastic strain, at element centre and gaussian points - top,
middle, and bottom for shells.
Element Volume, Euler Partition/ Element of constant volume.
Element
Mass, Euler Partition/ Mass of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Density, Euler Partition/ Density of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Specific Internal Energy, Euler Partition/ Specific internal energy of fluid in a partition (element of constant
Element volume).
Total Energy, Euler Partition/ Total energy of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Material Fraction, Euler Partition/ Material fraction of fluid * the volume uncovered fraction in a partition
Element (element of constant volume).
Speed of Sound, Euler Partition/ Speed of sound of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Momentum, Euler Partition/ Momentum of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Volume Uncovered Fraction, Partition/ Volume uncovered fraction of fluid in a partition (element of constant
Euler Element volume).
Mass Flow Rate, Euler Partition/ Mass flow rate of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Main Index
Supported HDF5 Result Quantities

Total Mass Flow, Euler Partition/ Total mass flow over a given time of fluid in a partition (element of
Element constant volume).
Heat Transfer Rate, Euler Partition/ Heat transfer rate for fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element
Total Heat Transfer, Euler Partition/ Total heat transfer over a given time of fluid in a partition (element of
Element constant volume).
Velocity, Euler Partition/ Velocity of fluid in a partition (element of constant volume).
Element

All the result quantities supported through XDB, new OUTPUT2 and MASTER are supported in HDF5
and the new support through HDF5 includes:
 Acoustic Pressure
 Acoustic Intensity
 Acoustics/Velocity
 Acoustic Accelerations
 Complex Forces in Bars both translation and rotation
 Complex CFAST Forces both translation and rotation
 CWELD Moments
 Strain Energy
 CBAR axial and bending strain and stress
 CBAR complex axial and bending strain and stress
 CBEND axial and bending strain and stress
 CBEND complex axial and bending strain and stress
 CHEX 20 – Nonlinear strains and stresses
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 5: Read Input File
Preference Guide
5 Read Input File

Review of Read Input File Form 584

Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File 594
 Conflict Resolution 606
Main Index
Review of Read Input File Form

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran main menu, is chosen.
Read Input File as the selected Action on the Analysis form allows much of the model data from a MSC
Nastran input file to be translated into the Patran database. A subordinate File Selection form allows the user
to specify the MSC Nastran input file to translate. This form is described on the following pages.
Main Index
Chapter 5: Read Input File 585
Read Input File Form

This form appears when the Analysis toggle is selected on the main menu. Read Input File, as the selected
Action, specifies that model data is to be translated from the specified MSC Nastran input file into the Patran
database.
Main Index
Table 5-1
Analysis Code Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the
Analysis Type
Available Jobs List of already existing jobs.
Job Name Name assigned to current translation job. This job name will be used as the
base file name for the message file.
Entity Selection... Activates a subordinate Entity Selection form which allows the user to
specify the specific entry types to be read. Also defines ID offset values to
be used during import.
Select Input File... Activates a subordinate File Select form which allows the user to specify the
NASTRAN input file to be translated.
Main Index
Entity Selection Form

This subordinate form appears when the Entity Selection button is selected on the Analysis form and Read
Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MSC Nastran entity types to import.
Main Index
Table 5-2
Entity Packets Highlighted entity types will be imported.
Define Offset... Activates the form to define ID offsets.
Create Prop. & Matl. Groups Select this button to create groups based on property sets and materials.
Retrieve Names From Selecting this toggle will tell Patran to attempt to retrieve the names of
Comments properties and materials from the comments in the input file. This only
applies to material and element properties names.
The following table shows the relation between the entity types listed above and the actual MSC Nastran
entry types effected. If an entity type is filtered out, it is treated as if those entries did not exist in the original
input file.
Entity Type MSC Nastran Cards

Nodes GRID, GRDSET, SPOINT
Elements BAROR, BEAMOR, CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND, CDAMP1, CDAMP2, CDAMP3,
CDAMP4, CELAS1, CELAS2, CELAS3, CELAS4, CGAP, CHEXA, CMASS1, CMASS2,
CMASS3, CMASS4, CONM1, CONM2, CONROD, CPENTA, CQUAD4, CQUAD8,
CQUADR, CROD, CSHEAR, CTETRA, CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CTRIAR, CTRIAX6,
CTUBE, CVISC, PLOTEL
Material Properties MAT1, MAT2, MAT3, MAT8, MAT9
Element Properties PBAR, PBCOMP, PBEAM, PBEND, PCOMP, PDAMP, PELAS, PGAP, PMASS, PROD,
PSHEAR, PSHELL, PSOLID, PTUBE, PVISC
Coordinate Frames CORD1C, CORD1R, CORD1S, CORD2C, CORD2R, CORD2S
Load Sets FORCE, GRAV,MOMENT, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, PLOADX1, RFORCE,
TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB, SPC, SPC1, SPCD
Main Index
Entity Type MSC Nastran Cards

Subcases LOAD, SPCADD, Case Control Section
MPC Data MPC, RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RROD, RSPLINE, RTRPLT
Comment Lines All items starting with a "$" are added to the imported Job as Direct Text Input. Also
unrecognized entries are also imported. Turning this selection OFF will not import any
entries begining with a "$", however unrecognized entries will still be imported. To disable
import of both the comment lines and the unrecognized entries, use the Define Offsets Form
and set the Comment Lines Offset/Maximum to a negative number. Be default only 1000
comment lines and 1000 unrecognized entiries will be imported. The system environment
variable PATRAN_DTI_LINE_LIMIT, or a settings.pcl entry
pref_env_set_integer("patran_dti_line_limit", <line limit>) can be set, or the value can be
changed on the Define Offsets Form. Setting it to zero (0) or AUTO will cause all comments
and unrecognized items to be imported. Use caution when doing this as many input decks
have thousands of comment lines and this could cause unnecessary bloating of the database
and poor performance access to Direct Text Input form.
It should be noted that since the GRID entry is controlled with the Nodes filter, the grid.ps load set with the
permanent single point constraint data will also be controlled by the Nodes filter.
Main Index
Define Offsets Form

This subordinate form appears when the Define Offsets button is selected on the Entity Selection form. It
allows the user to specify the ID offsets used when reading a MSC Nastran input file.
Main Index
Table 5-3
Automatic Offset If selected, the value in the Maximum column will be used as the offset for
the selected rows.
Minimum and Maximum Minimum and Maximum IDs currently found in the Patran database.
IDs
All offset data boxes can be selected at once by selecting this column header.
New ID ID offset value to be used during import. The new ID value will be the ID
found in the NASTRAN input file plus this offset value.
All references made in the input file will also be offset. If a node references a particular CID as its analysis
frame, then the reference will be offset as well. If the coordinate frame is defined in the same input file, the
proper references should be maintained. The preference will be properly maintained. If the coordinate frame
existed in the file prior to the import, then it needs to be the offset CID. If a coordinate frame with that CID
is not found in the database, an error message will be issued.
To determine which offset effects a particular MSC Nastran entry type, refer to the table in the previous
section.
For Patran entities identified by integer IDs (nodes, elements, coordinate frames, and MPCs), the offset value
is simply added to the MSC Nastran ID to generate the Patran ID.
For Patran entities identified by text names (materials, element properties, load sets, and load cases), the offset
value is first added to the MSC ⁄Nastran ID. The new integer value is then used to generate the Patran name
per the naming conventions described in later sections.
Main Index
Selection of Input File

This subordinate form appears when the Select Input File button is selected on the Analysis form and Read
Input File is the selected Action. It allows the user to specify which MSC Nastran input file to translate.
Summary Data Form

This form appears after the import of the NASTRAN input file has completed. It displays the number of
entities imported correctly, imported with warnings, or not imported due to errors. These figures reflect the
number of Patran entities created. In some cases, there is not a one-to-one relation between the original MSC
Nastran entities and the generated Patran entities. For example, when material orientations on several
CQUAD4s are defined using references to varying MCIDs while still referencing the same PID, Patran needs
to create a unique property set for each different MCID reference.
When the OK button is selected, the newly imported data will be committed to the Patran database, and can
not be undone. If there is any question as to whether or not this import was desired, review the graphics data
Main Index
prior to selecting OK on this form. If the import was not correct, select the undo button on the main menu
bar before selecting OK on this form.
Main Index
Data Translated from the NASTRAN Input File
Reject Card Form

During import of the NASTRAN input file, some entries types might not be understood by Patran. Those
entries are brought into Patran in the direct text input data boxes. Selecting the Reject Cards button on the
Summary Data form will bring up this Reject Card Form. You can review these entries here.
Only entry types not supported by Patran are sent to the reject entry blocks. (This includes comments.) Cards
which are otherwise recognized, but can not be imported due to syntax or invalid data errors are not sent to
the reject blocks. The rejected entries will have no characters in front of the command name. Commands
preceded by the character $> are used by the MSC/AMS product to allow processing of comment lines.
Note: Rejected cards are placed in the Direct Text Input (DTI) text boxes. If you turn ON the ability
to write DTI into the various portions of the MSC Nastran input deck, the rejected cards will be
placed back into the input deck when it is written out again.

The following sections describe which specific MSC Nastran entry types can currently be read into Patran.
The MSC Nastran entries described in this document are the only entries read when importing a NASTRAN
input file into Patran. All non-supported entries will be sent to the appropriate Direct Text Input data box
for this job. When errors occur during the import of a supported entry type, the entry being processed may
or may not be imported, depending on the severity of the problem encountered. An error message will be
presented regardless of whether or not the offending entry is actually imported.
Main Index
Any references from supported entries to entries that were not imported (either due to not being a supported
entry type or due to serious import errors) will still be attempted. If this reference is required in Patran for
the entry currently being processed, it too will fail to import. For example, if there is a serious error on a
GRID entry which causes it to not imported, then all elements attached to that GRID will also fail to import.
Partial Decks
This Patran function can read incomplete MSC Nastran files (except where explicitly noted). However, if the
BEGIN BULK command is missing, the program can get confused when trying to determine if a particular
entry belongs to the case control or bulk data. If you experience any difficulties importing a file that does not
have a BEGIN BULK command, add one to the top of the file. This should avoid any such confusion.
Unrecognized Data
Data in the MSC Nastran input deck that is not recognized by Patran, including comments are placed in the
reject file. These rejected cards are also placed into the Direct Text Input (DTI) text boxes. If you turn ON
the ability to write DTI into the various portions of the MSC Nastran input deck, the rejected cards will be
placed back into the input deck when it is written out again. Note that decks with large amounts of rejected
cards and comments may place an unacceptable amount of data in these text boxes. If this is the case, you
can limit the amount of data by setting the environment variable:
Coordinate Systems
The following coordinate system definitions can be read into Patran.
Command Comments
CORD1C References to the GRIDs on these entries are lost. The locations of the referenced
GRIDs are extracted, and those locations are used to create the Patran definition.
CORD1R
CORD1S
CORD2C References to RIDs are lost. The specified locations are converted to global cartesian
for use in the Patran definitions.
CORD2R
The original B and C points are not retained. Their values are recomputed when a new
CORD2S
NASTRAN input file is created. The definition will be equivalent, but not identical.
Referential Integrity
Coordinate systems and GRIDs which are referenced as part of a CORD definition must be in the same input
file. If these are not found in the input file, the definition will be rejected.
References to coordinate frames other than for new coordinate frame definitions can be resolved with
coordinate frames previously found in the Patran database.
Main Index
Chaining
Due to limitations in the Patran definitions of coordinate systems, chained definitions (definitions based on
other coordinate systems or grids) are modified during import. The resulting definitions are equivalent in
global space, but are based on global cartesian coordinates rather than GRID references or coordinate
locations in other systems. This change is carried through when a new NASTRAN input file is created. All
coordinate systems will be created using CORD2 type definitions, and they will all reference global cartesian
coordinates. These definitions will be different from, but equivalent to, the original definitions.
Grids and SPOINTs

The MSC Nastran GRID entry is read fully, except the SEID field. The CD and CP references are both
maintained. The PS data is used to create a constraint set. The details of the created load set are defined in
the load set import section.
GRDSET data is merged into the GRID data during import. The data will be retained, but will appear
directly on the GRID entry when a new NASTRAN input file is generated.
SPOINTs
SPOINTs are treated as GRIDs at the global origin. They are assumed to have their GRID CD and CP fields
set to the basic system, and their PS field is set to permanently constrain degrees-of-freedom 2 through 6.
Coordinate frames referenced in the CP field must exist in the same input file. Coordinate frames referenced
on the CD field can exist in either the same input file, or the Patran database prior to the import.
Elements and Element Properties

The following MSC Nastran elements and element properties can be read into Patran.
Element Property Property Set Name Comments

CBAR PBAR pbar.<pid> Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian
during import.
(See BAROR comments below.)
PBARL pbarl.<pid>
CBARAO New property sets are created for each occurrence of a CBAR
entry referenced by a CBARAO entry
Main Index

CBEAM Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian
during import.
(See BEAMOR comments below.)

PBEAM pbeam.<pid>
PBEAML pbeaml.<pid>
PBCOMP pbcomp.<pid> The MSC Nastran documentation describes how the section data
is used to create a complete set of lumped areas. The data
imported into Patran is fully expanded, and therefore, is different
from the data in the original input file. This definition is, however,
fully equivalent to the original.
The SO field is not currently supported. A YES is provided

automatically when a new NASTRAN input file is created.
Only the lumped areas definition is understood, If a uniform cross

section is defined here, it will be converted to a lumped area
definition, but no lumped areas will be defined.
CBEND Patran only understands the GEOM = 1 orientation data. If other
definitions are found, a vector will be computed to convert the
definition to the GEOM = 1 format. If a GRID was referenced for
GEOM other than 1, that reference will be lost. For the same
reasons, the THETAB and RB data will also be lost since that data
is not used for GEOM = 1 definitions.
Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian

during import.
PBEND pbend_g.<pid> If standard cross section properties are found on the PBEND
entry
pbend_p.<pid> If the alternate format of the PBEND is used to define a pipe cross
section.
CBUSH PBUSH pbush.<pid>
pbush_g.<pid> The grounded form of the PBUSH
PBUSHT pbusht_1D.<pid>
CDAMP1 PDAMP pdamp.<pid> For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs.
pdamp_g.<pid> For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.
CDAMP2 cdamp2 For dampers connecting 2 GRIDs.
cdamp2_g For grounded dampers attached to a single GRID.
Main Index

CDAMP3 PDAMP Treated identical to the CDAMP1 and CDAMP2 elements with
CDAMP4 the degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX).
CELAS1 PELAS pelas.<pid> For springs connecting 2 GRIDs.

pelas_g.<pid> For grounded springs attached to a single GRID.
CELAS2 celas2 For springs connecting 2 GRIDs.
celas2_g For grounded springs attached to a single GRID.
CELAS3 PELAS Treated identical to the CELAS1 and CELAS2 elements with the
CELAS4 degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX).
CGAP Orientation and offset vectors are re-defined in global cartesian

during import.
PGAP pgap.<pid> For non-adaptive definitions on the PGAP entry.
pgap_a.<pid> For adaptive definitions on the PGAP entry.
CHBDYG PHBDY Note: The BDYOR command that may contain default values for
CHBDY elements is not currently supported.
CHBDYP
CHEXA PSOLID psolid.<pid>
CMASS1 PMASS pmass.<pid> For masses connecting 2 GRIDs.
pmass_g.<pid> For masses attached to a single GRID.
CMASS2 cmass2 For masses connecting 2 GRIDs.
cmass2_g For masses attached to a single GRID.
CMASS3 PMASS Treated identical to the CMASS1 and CMASS2 elements with the
CMASS4 degree-of-freedom fields set to 1 (UX).
CONM1 conm1
CONM2 conm2
CONROD conrod
CPENTA PSOLID psolid.<pid>
CQUAD4 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)
PCOMP pcomp.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and
referenced.
The SB and FT fields are currently not read.

CQUAD8 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)
referenced.
Main Index

CQUADR PSHELL pshellr.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)
PCOMP pcompr.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and
referenced.

CROD PROD prod.<pid>
CSHEAR PSHEAR pshear.<pid>
CTETRA PSOLID psolid.<pid>
CTRIA3 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)
referenced.

CTRIA6 PSHELL pshell.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)
referenced.

CTRIAR PSHELL pshellr.<pid> (See PSHELL comments below.)
PCOMP pcompr.<pid> A new material named pcomp.<pid> will be created and
referenced.

CTRIAX6 ctriax6
CTUBE PTUBE ptube.<pid> Tapered tubes are converted to an equivalent constant section
definition.
CVISC PVISC pvisc.<pid>
PLOTEL Creates the connectivity only. These elements are not assigned to
any property set region.
PLOTEL entries will not be written when a new input file is

created.
MBOLTUS Defines a bolt in the form of an Overclosure MPC.
Higher order elements (CQUAD8, CTRIA6, CTRIAX6, CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) will generate
linear elements in Patran if none of the mid-edge nodes are specified.
Main Index
PSHELL Properties
PSHELL properties can be imported as any one of five Patran property types. The MID1, MID2, MID3,
12I/T3, and TS/T property fields are used to determine which one to choose. If MID2 is -1 and MID3 is 0,
then a Plane Strain property set is used. If MID2 and MID3 are both 0, then a Membrane property set is
chosen. If MID1 and MID3 are 0, then a Bending property set is used. If MID1, MID2, and MID3 are all
the same, and the MSC Nastran defaults are used for 12I/T3 and TS/T, then a Homogeneous property set is
used. If all else fails, then an Equivalent Section property set is chosen.
BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions

The BAROR and BEAMOR data is merged onto the CBAR and CBEAM entries using the proper MSC
Nastran conventions. The data is treated as if it had originally been defined on the CBAR and CBEAM
entries. When a new NASTRAN input file is created, the data will remain with the CBAR and CBEAM
entries. No BAROR or BEAMOR entries are generated.
Fields
If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the property set, with the name
of the specific property word appended to it. For example, if property set “pshell.101” has a varying thickness,
the field will be named “pshell.101.Thickness”.
Nodes and coordinate frames referenced on elements or element properties must exist, but they do not need
to be in the input file. They could also have been defined in the Patran database prior to the import.
If a material is referenced, but can not be found, a new material with no properties will be created. A message
will be issued indicating the creation of this material.
If an element property set is referenced, but can not be found, a new property set with no properties will be
created. A message will be issued indicating the creation of this property set.
Set Name Extensions

In some cases, the data found on the element can not be defined in Patran in a single property set. In those
cases, multiple property sets will be created to define the distinct definitions. The table below defines
extensions to the Property Set Names shown in the previous table. If the values on the specified field changes,
a new property set with the indicated extension will be created.
Main Index
If all elements which reference a single PID can be stored in a single property set, then no extension will be
added to the Property Set Name.
Element Field Extension Comments

CBAR PA .pa<PA>
PB .pb<PB>
CBEAM SA .sa<SA>
SB .sb<SB>
PA .pa<PA>
PB .pb<PB>
CDAMP1, CDAMP2, C1 .ca<C1>
CELAS1, CELAS2, C2 .cb<C2>

CMASS1, CMASS2
CDAMP3, CDAMP4, C1 .ca1 These are automatically treated as
component 1 (X translation).
CELAS3, CELAS4, C2 .cb1
CMASS3, CMASS4
CGAP, CONM1, CONM2 CID .c<CID>
CONROD, CTRIAX6 MID .m<MID>
CQUAD4, CQUAD8, MCID .c<MCID>
CQUADR, CTRIA3,
CTRIA6, CTRIAR
Materials
The following MSC Nastran material definitions can be read into Patran.
Material Type Material Name Comments

CREEP
MAT1 mat1.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported.
If the G field is blank in the input file, the MSC Nastran

default value will be filled in during import.
MATT1
MAT2 mat2.<mid> The MCSID field is not currently supported.
Main Index
Material Type Material Name Comments

MATT2
MAT3 mat3.<mid>
MATT3
MAT4
MATT4
MAT5
MATT5
MAT8 mat8.<mid>
MAT9 mat9.<mid>
MATT9
MATFTG Imported as fatigue Stress-Life (S-N) and/or Strain-Life
(ε-N) constitutive models
MPCs
The following MSC Nastran MPC and rigid element definitions can be read into Patran.
Card Type MPC Type Comments

MPC Explicit Unique MPC IDs will be assigned to these entities.
Since Patran uses a slightly different basis MPC equation, the equation
coefficients (Ai) will probably be scaled by a constant multiplier during
import. The resulting equation will be equivalent, but not necessarily
identical to the original definition in the NASTRAN input file.
RBAR RBAR
RBE1 RBE1
RBE2 RBE2
Fixed
RBE3 RBE3
RROD RROD
RSPLINE RSPLINE
RSSCON RSSCON
RTRPLT RTRPLT
MPCs in Patran are treated as elements and are not associated to load cases. As a result, all SUBCASE related
data is lost. The MPCs are simply imported into the model and are no longer associated to a specific load case.
Main Index
MPCs can reference SPOINTs instead of GRIDs. If this is detected, the corresponding component field will
be set to 1 (UX) to be consistent with the import of SPOINTs.
The MPCADD command is not read since the MPCs are simply imported and no associated to a load case.
The SID references on the MPC entry are also lost for the same reason. New MPC IDs are assigned to these
elements during import.
Load Sets
The following MSC Nastran Loads and Boundary Condition definitions can be read into Patran.
Card Type LBC Set Name Comments

FORCE force.<sid>
GRAV grav.<sid>
MOMENT moment.<sid>
PLOAD1 pload1.<sid> Only PLOAD1s applied to the entire length of an element can be read.
If a load is applied only to a portion of an element, the load will be
ignored, and a message will be presented indicating the problem.
PLOAD2 pload2.<sid>
PLOAD4 pload4.<sid> Only pressure loads normal to the surface can be imported. If a surface
traction is detected, it will be ignored, and a message will be presented
indicating the problem.
PLOADX1 ploadx1.<sid>
CONV conv.<pid>
PCONV
CONVM convm.<pid>
PCONVM
QBDYi qbdyi.<pid>
QVECT qvect.<pid>
QVOL qvol.<pid>
RADBC radbc.<pid>
RADCAV radcav.<pid> Note: ELEAMB field is not supported by Patran. The ambient element
is added to the application region.
RADM
RADMT
Main Index
Card Type LBC Set Name Comments

RFORCE rforce.<sid> If the G point is not at the origin of the referenced CID, a new CID will
be created and referenced.
The METHOD field is not read. It is automatically set to 1 when

writing a new file.
SLOAD sload.<pid>
TEMP temp.<sid>
TEMPP1 tempp1.<sid> Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient data fields
are used. The specified temperatures at the Z1 and Z2 locations are
ignored.
TEMPRB temprb.<sid> Only the average temperature and effective linear gradient data fields
are used. The specified temperatures at the stress recovery locations are
ignored.
grid# grid.ps
SPC spc.<sid>
SPCADD
SPC1 spc1.<sid>
SPCD spcd.<sid> The required SPC or SPC1 entries for the same Degree-of-Freedom are
removed from the load case when a SPCD is found. They will
automatically be re-generated when a new input file is created.
VIEW
VIEW3D
Fields
If a field is required to store varying data, the field will have the same name as the load set, with the name of
the specific data word appended to it. For example, if load set “force.101” has a varying force magnitude, the
field will be named “force.101.Force”.
Load cases are created in Patran from the SUBCASE definitions in the NASTRAN input file. Load sets not
referenced by a SUBCASE definition are created as load sets in Patran, but are not associated to a load case.
Load sets defined above the first SUBCASE command, plus any permanent single point constraint sets from
the GRID entries, are associated to all load cases created during this import. If there is no case control data,
then load sets will be created, but they will not be assigned to any load cases.
The SPCADD and LOAD entries are used in creating load cases in Patran, but the SID of these entries is
lost. The SIDs on the individual SPCx, FORCE, MOMENT, GRAV, PLOADx, RFORCE, and TEMPx
entries are used in creating the names of the load sets.
The name for the created load cases is derived from the subtitle of the SUBCASE. This is done for consistency
with the forward PAT3NAS translation.
A job is created during the import. The name of the created job is the basename of the file being read.
Main Index
MSC Nastran allows load sets to be referenced in multiple places with different scale factors. This is not
possible in Patran. Therefore, in some cases, multiple copies of the same load set need to be created with the
only difference being the scale factor. The name of these load sets are modified to include the subcase ID to
create unique names.
TABLES
The following table types are supported during import of a NASTRAN input file. Note that some forms of
the table commands are converted to an equivalent version supported by Patran.
Card Type Field Name Comments

TABLED1 Field.<tid> Imported as a frequency dependent non-spatial field. If from a time-
domain fatigue analysis, imported as a time dependent non-spatial
field.
TABLED2 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into Patran by
NIFIMP.
TABLED3 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLED1 when read into Patran by
NIFIMP.
TABLEM1 Field.<tid> Imported as temperature dependent material properties or if from a
fatigue analysis, as life dependent material properties.
TABLEM2 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into Patran by
NIFIMP.
TABLEM3 Field.<tid> Converted to an equivalent TABLEM1 when read into Patran by
NIFIMP.
TABRND1 Field.<tid> Imported as a frequency dependent non-spatial field. If imported from
a frequency domain random vibration fatigue analysis with defined
Field.<tid>r.<tid>i RANDPS entries, some fields may be imported as complex fields.
TABLFTG Field.<tid> Imported as a time dependent non-spatial field with y-only values. x-
values are 1, 2, 3, etc.
SOL 600 entries
Note: A Additional entries specific to SOL 600 can be read into Patran. For more details see MSC Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400/600), 15.
Main Index
Conflict Resolution
Fatigue Related Entries

The following fatigue analysis related definitions can be read into Patran.
Command Comments
FATIGUE FATIGUE case control sets the Output Request form under Subcases form and
FTGDEF FTGDEF defines the entities on which the fatigue analysis is performed.
DTI, UNITS Defines most of the fatigue parameters set on the Fatigue Parameters form, which is
FTGPARM found under the Solution Parameters form for Solution type, Static, Normal Modes,
Frequency Response, and Modal Transient Analysis.
MATFTG Defines the fatigue material properties set at constitutive models Stress-Life and/or
TABLEM1 Strain -Life.
FTGSEQ Defines the fatigue loading sequence consisting of load events and individual loads
FTGEVNT that make up each event. The table cards are imported as non-spatial fields, time
FTGLOAD dependent or frequency dependent depending on the type of fatigue analysis, time
TABLFTG
UNDAME domain or frequency domain.
RANDPS
TABRND1
Conflict Resolution
If an entity can not be imported into Patran because another entity already exists with that ID or name, then
the conflict resolution logic is used. There are 2 different approaches taken, depending on whether the entity
is identified by an ID or by a name.
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs

If a new definition conflicts with a definition already in the Patran database, you will be asked if you want
the ID of the new definition offset. If you select YES, a new ID will be chosen. If you select YES FOR ALL,
a new ID will be chosen for this definition, as well as for any others found to be in conflict. In this case, then
all references to the ID in the original Patran database will still reference the old ID, but references to the ID
from within the input file will be altered to reference the new ID.
If you do not want the CID to be offset, then you will be asked if you want the new definition to overwrite
the existing definition. If this is done, then all references to this ID from both the original Patran database
and the input file will be referencing the same ID. The definition for that ID will be either the old or the new
definition, depending on how this second question is answered.
Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names

The user is not asked what to do in cases where the conflicting entities are identified by names. The name for
the new entity will be modified by appending an extension to the name. The new name will be “<old
name>.r<n>”. The value of n is chosen to make the new name unique.
Main Index
Conflict Resolution
No merging of data or application regions is done. The old definition is left unchanged.
Main Index
Conflict Resolution
Main Index
Chapter 6: Delete
Preference Guide
6 Delete

Review of Delete Form 610

Deleting an MSC Nastran Job 611
Main Index
Review of Delete Form
Review of Delete Form

The Analysis form will appear when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran main form, is chosen and the
selected Action is Delete.The Delete option under Action allows the user to delete jobs that have been created
for the MSC Nastran preference.
.
Main Index
Chapter 6: Delete 611
Deleting an MSC Nastran Job

This format of the Analysis form appears when the Action is set to Delete. The user may delete job definitions
that were created for the MSC Nastran preference with this form.
Table 6-1
Analysis Code Indicates the selected Analysis Code and Analysis Type, as defined in the
Analysis Type
Existing Jobs List of already existing jobs. Select the jobs that are to be deleted.
Apply Deletes the jobs selected in the Existing Jobs listbox.
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 7: Files
Preference Guide
7 Files

Files 614
Main Index
Files
Files
The Patran MSC Nastran interface uses or creates several files.The following table outlines each file and its
uses. In the file name definition, jobname will be replaced with the jobname assigned by the user.
File Name Description
*.db This is the Patran database. During an analyze pass, model data is read from this database and,
during a Read Results pass, model and/or results data is written into it. This file typically resides
in the current directory.
jobname.jbr These are small files used to pass certain information between Patran and the independent
translation programs during translation. There should never be a need to directly alter these files.
These files typically reside in the current directory.
jobname.bdf This is the NASTRAN input file created by the interface. This file typically resides in the current
directory.
msc_v#_sol#.alt These are a series of MSC Nastran alters that are read during forward translation. These alters
instruct MSC Nastran to write information to the OUTPUT2 file that the results translation
will be looking for. The forward translator searches the Patran file path for these files, but they
typically reside in the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files do not meet specific
needs, edit them accordingly. However, the naming conversion of msc_v# <version
#>_sol#<solution #>.alt must be preserved. Either place the edited file back into the
<installation_directory>/alters directory or in any directory on the Patran file path, which takes
precedence over the <installation_directory>/alters directory. If these files are not used, remove
them from the Patran file path, rename them, or delete them altogether.
jobname.op2 This is the MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 file, which is read by the Read Results pass. This file
typically resides in the current directory and contains both model and results data. It is created
by placing a PARAM,POST,-1 in the input file.
jobname.xdb This is the MSC Nastran XDB file or MSC.Access database, which is attached by the Read
Results pass. This file typically resides in the current directory and contains results data. It is
created by placing a PARAM, POST,0 in the input file.
jobname.marc.t16 SOL 600 file recommended for use in postprocessing SOL 600 analyses.
jobname.flat This file may be generated during a Read Results pass. If the results translation cannot write data
directly into the specified Patran database it will create this jobname flat file. This file typically
resides in the current directory.
Main Index
Chapter 7: Files 615
Files
File Name Description

jobname.marc.xxx File generated by a SOL 600 analysis. See the “MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
User’s Guide” for a complete list.
jobname.msg.xx These message files contain any diagnostic output from the translation, either forward or
reverse. This file typically resides in the current directory.
MscNastranExecute This is a Linux script file, which is called on to submit MSC Nastran after translation is
complete. This file might need customizing with site specific data, such as, host machine name
and MSC Nastran executable commands. This file contains many comments and should be easy
to edit. Patran searches its file path to find this file, but it typically resides in the
<installation_directory> bin/exe directory. Either use the general copy in
<installation_directory>/bin/exe, or place a local copy in a directory on the file path, which takes
precedence over the <installation_directory>/bin/exe directory.
Main Index
Files
Main Index
Chapter 8: Errors/Warnings
Preference Guide
8 Errors/Warnings

Errors/Warnings 618
Main Index
Errors/Warnings
Errors/Warnings
There are many error or warning messages that may be generated by the Patran MSC Nastran Interface. The
following table outlines some of these.
Message Description
Unable to open a new message file " ". Translation If the translation tries to open a message file and cannot, it will
messages will be written to standard output. write messages to Standard Output. On most systems, the
translator automatically writes messages to standard output
and never tries to create a separate message file.
Unable to open the specified OUTPUT2 file " ". The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the OUTPUT2
file specification in the translation control file.
The specified OUTPUT2 file " " is not in standard The OUTPUT2 file is not in standard binary format. Check
binary format and cannot be translated. the OUTPUT2 file specification in the translation control file.
Group " " does not exist in the database. Model data The name of a nonexistent group was specified in the
will not be translated. translator control file. No model data will be translated from
the OUTPUT2 file.
Needed file specification missing! The full name of the The translation control file must be specified as the first on-
job file must be specified as the first command-line line argument to the translator.
argument to this program.
Unable to open the specified database " ". Writing the If the translator cannot communicate directly to the specified
OUTPUT2 information to the PCL command file database. It will write the results and/or model data to a PCL
" ". session file.
Unable to open either the specified database " ", or a The naspat3 translator is unable to open any output file.
PCL command file, " ". Check file specification and directory protection.
Unable to open the NASTRAN input file " ". The translator was unable to open a file to where the input file
information will be written.
Unable to open the specified database, " ". The forward Patran MSC Nastran translator was unable to
open the specified Patran database.
Alter file of the name " " could not be found. No The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of analysis,
OUPUT2 alter will be written to the NASTRAN input could not be found. Correct the search path to include the
file. necessary directory if you want the alter files to be written to
the input file.
No property regions are defined in the database. No Elements referenced by an element property region in the
elements or element properties can be translated. Patran database will not get translated by the forward Patran
MSC Nastran translator. If no element regions are defined, no
elements will be translated.
Main Index
Ap. A: Preference Configuration and Implementation
Preference Guide
Preference Configuration and

A Implementation

Software Components in Patran MSC Nastran 620

Patran MSC Nastran Preference Components 620
 Configuring the Patran MSC Nastran Execute File 623
Main Index
Software Components in Patran MSC Nastran
Software Components in Patran MSC Nastran

The Patran MSC Nastran product includes the following items:
 A PCL function contained in p3patran.plb that will add MSC Nastran specific definitions to
any Patran database (not already containing such definitions) at any time.
 A PCL library called mscnastran.plb and contained in the <installation_directory> directory.
This library is used by the analysis forms to produce forms for analysis code specific translation
parameter, solution parameter, etc.
 A script file called MscNastranExecute, contained in the <installation_directory>/bin/exe
directory. This script controls the operation of the interface and the submission of MSC Nastran
analyses. This script can be run independent of Patran but typically run from within Patran,
transparent to the user.
 Several MSC Nastran alter files are included. These files are used when creating the NASTRAN
input file. They ask MSC Nastran to produce the results file required by the NASPAT3 results
translator. These files can be found in the <installation_directory>/alter directory. They must follow
the naming convention msc_v<version_number>_sol<solution_number>.alt. For
example, msc_v67_sol3.alt. If these files do not meet the user’s needs, they should be modified.
Alter files specific to LMS CADA-X are also included. These files are identical to the standard alter
files except for an additional “.lms” extension, e.g., msc_v67_sol3.alt.lms. These files are
usually needed only when the user requires support for older solution sequences.
 This Patran MSC Nastran Interface Manual is included as part of the product. An on-line version is
also provided to allow the direct access to this information from within Patran.
Patran MSC Nastran Preference Components

The diagrams shown below indicate how the functions, scripts, programs, and files that constitute the Patran
MSC Nastran interface affect the Patran environment. Site customization, in some cases, is indicated.
Figure 1-1 shows the process of running an analysis. The mscnastran.plb library defines the Translation
Parameter, Solution Type, Solution Parameter, and Output Request forms called by the Analysis form. When
the Apply button is pushed on the Analyze form, the interface process is initiated. The interface reads data
from the database and creates the NASTRAN input file. Status messages from the interface are recorded in
the Patran session file. A series of MSC Nastran alter files is provided. They may be used during the creation
of the input file depending upon the selected solution type and solution parameters. These alter files are
Main Index
Ap. A: Preference Configuration and Implementation 621
mostly used in support of older solution sequences. If the interface successfully produces a NASTRAN input
file, and the user requests it, the MscNastranExecute script will then start MSC Nastran.
Patran p3patran.plb
Analysis
mscnastran.plb Analyze
MscNastranExecute
Patran
Database
Alter Library
jobname.bdf MSC Nastran
Figure 1-1 Forward Translation
Figure 1-2 shows the process of reading information from an MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 file. When the Apply
button is selected on the Read Output2 form, a <jobname>.jbr file is created and the results translation is
Main Index
started. The results interface process reads the data from the MSC Nastran OUTPUT2 file and stores the
results in the Patran database. Status messages from the interface are recorded in the Patran session file.
p3patran.plb
Patran
Analysis mscnastran.plb
Read
Output2
jobname.jbr
Patran
database
MSC Nastran jobname.OP2
Figure 1-2 OUTPUT2 File Translation
Figure 1-3 shows the process of translating information from a NASTRAN input file into a Patran database.
The behavior of the main Analysis/Read Input File form and the subordinate file select form is dictated by
Main Index
Ap. A: Preference Configuration and Implementation 623
Configuring the Patran MSC Nastran Execute File
the mscnastran.plb PCL library. The Apply button on the main form activates the input file reader
program, which reads the specified NASTRAN input file.
Patran
p3patran.plb
Analysis
Read
Input File mscnastran.plb
Patran MSC Nastran Input

database File Reader
NASTRAN
Input File
input_file_name.error.*
Figure 1-3 NASTRAN Input File Translation

During the installation of the Patran MSC Nastran analysis preference, the mscsetup utility creates a default
site_setup file in the installation directory. This file sets environment variables relating to Patran. To
custom configure this site_setup file consult Environment Variables (p. 42) in the Patran Installation and
Operations Guide.
Main Index
Main Index
MSC.Fatigue Quick Start Guide
Index
Patran Interface to MSC Nastran Preference Guide
Numerics BCONTACT, 15
1D- Grounded Bush/Bush (CBUSH2D/PBUSH2D), 136 BCPARA, 15
3D - Body Pair- Geometric, 197 BCPATCH, 15
Index 3D - Body Pair- Physical, 199 BCPROP, 15
3rd Order Invariant, 80 BCRGSRF, 15
BCRIGID, 15
BCTABL1, 15
A BCTABLE, 15
ACFPMRESULT, 453
BCTRIM, 15
ACPOWER, 453
BEADVAR, 513, 517
ADAPT, 115, 123, 145, 156, 164, 169, 185, 191
BEGIN AFPM, 161, 453
Adaptive Meshing, 448
BEGIN BULK SUPER, 265, 376
adaptive meshing, 539
Body Pair, 104
alternate reduction, 278
BSURF, 15
ALTERS, 620
buckling, 291
Alters, 263
bulk data, 9
ALTRED, 278
bulk data file, 584
analysis coordinate frames, 24
analysis form, 259
analysis job definition, 262 C
analysis job submittal, 262 CACINF3, 182
analysis preferences, 6 CACINF4, 182
analyze, 258 case control, 8
Arruda-Boyce model, 82 CBAR, 110, 116
augmentation, 323 CBARAO, 110, 116
CBEAM, 115, 120, 121, 123, 124, 126, 127
CBEND, 117, 118
B CBUSH, 108, 134
BCBDPRP, 15
CDAMP1, 107, 131
BCBMRAD, 114
CDAMP1D, 131
BCBODY, 15
CELAS1, 107
BCBODY1, 15
CELAS1D, 130
BCBOX, 15
CFAST, 138
BCHANGE, 15
CGAP, 132
BCMATL, 15
CGI, 241
BCMOVE, 15
CHEXA, 189, 190, 191, 193, 195
BCNURB2, 15
CID Distributed Load, 214
BCNURBS, 15
CIFCDX, 93
BCONECT, 15
CIFHEX, 93, 196
BCONPRG, 15
CIFPENT, 93, 196
BCONPRP, 15
Main Index
CIFQDX, 181 CYJOIN, 51

CIFQUAD, 93, 172, 175 CYSYM, 51
CMASS1, 105, 133
complex Eigenvalue, 297 D
CONM1, 105 DCONSTR, 511
CONM2, 106 degrees-of-freedom, 32
contact, 214 DEQATN, 510
penetration, 316 DESGLB, 511
contact bodies DESOBJ, 510
deformable surfaces DESSUB, 511
defining in MSC.Patran, 231, 232, 233 DISPLACEMENT, 454
rigid surface displacements, 220
defining in MSC.Patran, 233 distributed load, 214
slideline DOPTPRM, 507, 508, 512, 513
defining in MSC.Patran, 230 DPHASE, 220, 222
coordinate frames, 23, 548 DRESP1, 510
analysis, 24 DRESP2, 510
reference, 24 DRSPAN, 510
coordinates, 264 DTI,UNITS, 338, 342
COUPMASS, 284 dynamic reduction, 289
CPENTA, 189, 191, 193 DYNRED, 289
CQUAD, 170
CQUAD4, 141, 143, 145, 147, 149, 150, 152, 154,
156, 158, 160, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 169, E
171, 173, 174, 183, 184, 185 EIGB, 294
CQUAD8, 141, 149, 152, 162, 166, 167, 170, 171, EIGC, 300
174, 183 Eigenvalue extraction, 284, 292
CQUADR, 163, 168 buckling, 294
CQUADX, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180 complex, 300
crack (VCCT), 214, 238 real, 286
CREEP, 88 EIGR, 287
Creep, 70 EIGRL, 294
CROD, 127, 128 element properties, 97
CSHEAR, 187
CTETRA, 189, 190, 191, 193, 194
CTRIA3, 141, 145, 147, 149, 152, 156, 161, 162,
164, 166, 169, 170, 171, 183, 185
CTRIA6, 141, 149, 152, 162, 166, 170, 173, 183
CTRIAR, 143, 150, 154, 163, 168, 184
CTRIAX, 176, 178, 180, 181
CTRIAX6, 176
CTUBE, 129
CVISC, 131
CWELD, 138
CYAX, 51
cyclic symmetry, 32, 51, 278, 291, 303
Main Index
INDEX 627
elements, 548 standard plane strain solid, 166

2d solid, 166, 168 tapered beam, 121
acoustic field point mesh, 161 viscous damper, 131
axisymmetric solid, 176, 180 ELSDCON, 454
coupled point mass, 105 Environment Variables
curved general section, 117 ACommand20xx, 533
curved pipe, 118 DRA_NAST_NOVEDRCHK, 533
gap, 131 MSP_NASTRAN_CMD20xx, 533
general beam, 124 errors, 618
general section beam, 110 ESE, 454
general section rod, 127, 128 executive control, 8
grounded scalar damper, 107
grounded scalar mass, 105 F
grounded scalar spring, 107 failure
infinite exterior acoustic, 182 criteria, 86
linear cubic closed section beam, 116 FATIGUE, 454, 461
linear shear beam, 116 FEEDGE, 20
lumped area beam, 120 FEFACE, 21
lumped point mass, 106 files, 614
p-formulation, 19, 191 finite elements, 23, 25
P-Formulation bending panel, 164 FMS, 8
P-Formulation Equivalent Section plate, 156 Foam model, 81
P-Formulation general section beam, 115 follower forces, 281
P-Formulation homogeneous plate, 145 FORCE, 222, 454
P-Formulation Membrane, 185 force, 213, 222
P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid, 169 frequency response, 303
pipe section, 129 FTGDEF, 461
plane stress solid, 173 FTGEVNT, 490
plotel, 134 FTGLOAD, 490
revised bending panel, 163 FTGPARM, 337
revised equivalent section plate, 154 FTGSEQ, 490
revised homogeneous plate, 143
revised laminate plate, 150
revised membrane, 184 G
revised plane strain solid, 168 GC, 242
scalar damping, 130 Gent model, 82, 94, 95
scalar mass, 133 GEOM1, 548
scalar spring, 130 GEOM2, 548
shear panel, 187 Geometric, 104
solid, 189 GMBC, 21
standard bending panel, 161 GMNURB, 15
standard equivalent section plate, 152 GPFORCE, 454
standard homogeneous plate, 141 GRAV, 226
standard laminate plate, 148 GRDPNT, 285
standard membrane, 183
Main Index
H MAT1, 77, 86
H5NORDOF, 374 MAT10, 182
HDF5, 374 MAT2, 86
Hypoelastic, 70 MAT3, 77
MAT8, 77, 78, 86
MATEP, 16, 17, 83
I materials, 61
IGROW, 241
2D anisotropic, 73, 77, 79
INCM, 241
2D orthotropic, 71, 77
inertia relief, 278
3D anisotropic, 73, 77, 79
inertial load, 226
3D orthotropic, 72, 77
initial conditions, 213, 227
Cohesive, 73
initial load, 213
composite, 73, 95
initial velocity, 213
Fluid, 73
input file, 584
isotropic, 67, 74, 78, 79
INREL, 278
MATF, 16, 17, 86
INTENSITY, 453
MATFTG, 91
IPSTRAIN, 15
MATG, 16
ISTRESS, 16
MATHE, 16, 17, 79
iteration parameters, 423
MATORT, 16, 17, 78
iterations
MATS1, 79, 83
static nonlinear, 383
MATTEP, 16, 17
ITYPE, 241
MATTF, 86
MATTG, 16
J MATTHE, 16, 17
Jamus-Green-Simpson model, 80 MATTi, 78
MATTORT, 16
K MATTVE, 16, 90
keywords MATVE, 16, 90
POST, 327 MATVP, 16, 89
REAUTO, 328, 505 MCOHE, 93
VCCT, 238 MDLPRM, 374
METHOD, 241
model data, 534
L MODTRAK, 510
large displacements, 281
MOMENT, 222
LGDISP, 282
Mooney-Rivlin model, 80
linear surf-vol, 30
MPC, 30, 33, 53
linear transient, 306
MSC.Nastran enhancements
load cases, 242
Non-structural mass properties, 479
loads and boundary conditions, 210
MSC.Nastran version, 264, 265, 535, 536, 538
MSTACK, 195
M multi-point constraints, 28
MARCIN, 16
MARCOUT, 16
Mass properties, non-structural (MSC.Nastran), 479
N
Neo-Hookean, 80
Main Index
INDEX 629
NLAUTO, 16 PBEAM, 115, 121, 123, 124, 126, 127

NLDAMP, 16 PBEAML, 115, 121, 123, 124, 126, 127
NLLOAD, 454 PBEMN1, 126, 127
NLPARM, 384 PBEND, 117, 118
NLSTRAT, 16 PBUSH, 108, 134
nodes, 24, 264, 548 PBUSHT, 134
nonlinear elastic, 79 PCOHE, 93, 172, 175, 181, 196
nonlinear statics, 279 PCOMP, 86, 95, 149, 150, 195
nonlinear transient, 309 PCOMPG, 149, 150
Non-Structural mass properties (MSC.Nastran), 479 PCOMPLS, 195
normal nodes, 283 PDAMP, 107, 131
NSM and NSML forms (MSC.Nastran), 479 PELAS, 107, 130
NTHICK, 16 penetration, 316
numbering options, 267 PFAST, 138
PFTG, 143
O PGAP, 132
OEF1, 540, 541 Physical, 104
OESNL1, 541 PLCOMP, 171, 179
Ogden model, 81 PLOAD4, 222
OLOAD, 453 PLOADX1, 222
ONRGY1, 543 PLPLANE, 167, 170, 171, 173, 174, 176, 177,
OPG1, 543 178, 180, 181
OPHIG, 544 PLSOLID, 193
OPNL1, 544 PMASS, 105, 133
optimize, 506 POINT, 20
optimization parameters, 507, 508 Postprocessing, 448
subcase create, 507, 508 preferences, 6
subcase select optimize, 507, 509 pressure, 213, 222
topography optimization, 507 PROD, 127
topology optimization, 507 properties, 97
topometry optimization, 507 PSHEAR, 187
OSTR1, 540, 541 PSHEARN, 187
OUGV1, 543 PSHELL, 141, 143, 145, 152, 154, 162, 163, 166,
output requests, 449 168, 169, 183, 184, 185
OUTPUT2, 263 PSHLN1, 147, 158, 160, 183
OUTRCV, 22 PSHLN2, 167, 171, 173, 174, 176, 177, 180, 181
PSLDN1, 189, 190, 193, 194
PSOLID, 189, 190, 191, 193, 194
P PTUBE, 129
PACINF, 182 PVAL, 115, 123, 145, 156, 164, 169, 185, 191
PARAM, SNORM, 278, 284, 298, 304, 307, 350 PVISC, 131
PARAMARC, 16 PWELD, 138
PBAR, 110, 116
PBARL, 110, 116
PBARN1, 110, 116 R
PBCOMP, 120 RANDPS, 490
Main Index
RBAR, 30, 36 solution sequences

rbar1, 55 SOL 1, 271, 278
RBE1, 30, 40 SOL 101, 271, 278
RBE2, 31, 36, 42 SOL 103, 271
RBE3, 31, 43 SOL 105, 271
read input file, 584 SOL 106, 271, 279
reference coordinate frames, 24 SOL 107, 297
RESTART, 16 SOL 108, 271, 303
restart SOL 109, 271
file, 328, 506 SOL 110, 271, 297
results, 530 SOL 111, 271, 303
element, 471 SOL 112, 271
nodal, 469 SOL 114, 271, 278
supported entities, 540, 553 SOL 115, 271
types, 548 SOL 118, 271, 303, 304
results output format, 373 SOL 129, 271, 309
RFORCE, 226 SOL 147, 271
rjoint, 57 SOL 26, 271, 303
RLOAD1, 221 SOL 27, 271
RROD, 31, 46 SOL 28, 271, 297
RSPLINE, 31, 47 SOL 29, 271, 297
RSSCON, 30 SOL 3, 271
RTRPLT, 31, 50 SOL 30, 271, 303
rtrplt1, 56 SOL 37, 271
SOL 47, 271, 278
S SOL 48, 271
SESET, 376 SOL 5, 271
SET1, 461 SOL 600, 271, 272, 311, 349, 351
SET4, 461 SOL 66, 271, 279
SETREE, 378 SOL 77, 271
sliding surface, 32, 53 SOL 99, 271, 309
solution parameters, 276 solution types, 269
SOL 109, 306 SPC1, 220
SOL 112, 306 SPCD, 220
SOL 27, 306 SPCFORCES, 453, 454
SOL 31, 306 SPCR, 222
SPOINT, 124
static data, 214
STRAIN, 454
Strain Life, 71
STRESS, 453, 454
Stress Life, 71
structural damping, 299, 308, 310
superelements, 265, 376
supported entities, 8
Main Index
INDEX 631
T
t16 file, 548, 580
TABCGI, 242
TABGC, 242
TABLEDi, 221, 222
TABLEMi, 78
TABLES1, 79
TABLFTG, 490
TABRND1, 490
TEMP, 224
temperature, 213, 224
TEMPP1, 225
TEMPRB, 225
TIC, 227
TIM2PSD, 495
time dependent, 217
tolerances, 263, 535, 536, 538
TOMVAR, 512, 516
TOPVAR, 511, 514, 515
Total Load, 237
translation parameters, 263, 534, 536
TSTEPNL, 387, 442
U
UDNAME, 490
Use Contact Table, 316, 382, 390, 408, 409, 412,
414
User Defined, 71
User Defined Services, 334
User Sub. (UCOHESIVE), 73
User Sub. UFAIL, 70
User Sub.(CRPLAW), 70
V
VECTOR, 454
Viscoelastic, 71
VU mesh, 21
W
warnings, 618
WTMASS, 285
Main Index
Main Index

Nastran Pastran

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Nastran Pastran

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili



Interface To MSC Nastran

Stiffened Cylinder Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Subcase Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

5 Read Input File

A Preference Configuration and Implementation

MSC Nastran Product Information

Introduction to Building a Model

Currently Supported MSC Nastran Input Options

Table 2-2 Supported File Management Commands

Table 2-3 Supported Executive Control Commands

Table 2-4 Supported Case Control Commands

Table 2-4 Supported Case Control Commands

Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

Table 2-5 Supported Bulk Data Entries

MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 400/600)

BCBODY Defines a flexible rigid contact body in 2D or 3D.

IPSTRAIN* Defines initial plastic strain values.

ISTRESS* Defines initial stress values.

MATEP Elasto-plastic material properties.

Note: * Not supported in initial release of Patran (2004). Solution Control

NLAUTO Parameters for automatic load/time stepping.

MSC Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)

MATD001 Isotropic Elastic material for beam, shell and solid.

Loads and Boundary Conditions

TIC3 Defines initial rotational field.

Elements and Properties

CDAMP1D Scalar damper connection for SOL 700

DAMPGBL Dynamic relaxation control.

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the MSC Nastran

Element and p-Formulation Properties

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Results Import and Postprocessing

Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models

the Mesh object

MPC Type Analysis Type Description

MPC Type Analysis Type Description

MPC Type Analysis Type Description

Degree of freedom Analysis Type

Cyclic Symmetry MPCs

requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric.

NOTE: MPC option will automatically overwrite the analysis coordinate

Sliding Surface MPCs

on the Create/ Superelement form.

Select Boundary Nodes

Materials Application Form

options to create the various Nastran materials.

Material Input Properties Form

Material Constitutive Models

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

 Mohr-Coulomb  Combined  Cowper-

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

Object Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5